Q-Checker for V5

Release 5.5

Criteria Manual
Erstellt am 2019-03-14
 Conventions in this Manual
Markings

CAUTION marks an advice that performing an action may lead to unwanted conse-
quences such as loss of data.

 NOTE marks important information, such as dependencies or requirements of a func-

tion.

INFO marks supplementary information, e.g. with respect to a wider context.

TIP marks information for the practical use of the software.

This symbol marks step-by-step instructions.

Syntax notation for command line input and configuration files

Bold Boldface marks text to be typed as shown.

Italic Italics mark text to be replaced by the required parameter value.
[ ] Square brackets mark an optional parameter.
Include this parameter, if required.
{ | } Braces mark a list of parameters, which are separated by vertical bars |.
Include one of the given parameters.
… The parameter before the ellipsis may be included more than once.

Copyright Dassault Systèmes 2000–2019

Q-Checker is a trademark or registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes or its subsid-
iaries, in the US and/or other countries.
Contents
Conventions in this Manual .................................................................................................. 2

1 General information about criterion definitions ........................................................................... 16

1.1 Editing a criterion definition ......................................................................................................... 16
1.2 Context help for check parameters ............................................................................................... 18
1.3 Criterion definition dialog reference ............................................................................................. 18

2 Criteria Description ........................................................................................................................ 25

2.1 Batch criteria .................................................................................................................................. 25
2.1.1 CATDUAV5 – Priority 1 ........................................................................................................ 26
2.1.2 CATDUAV5 – Priority 2 ........................................................................................................ 27
2.1.3 CATDUAV5 – Priority 3 ........................................................................................................ 28
2.1.4 DataLifeCycle CATDUA ........................................................................................................ 29
2.2 Preprocessing ................................................................................................................................ 31
2.2.1 Fit All In ................................................................................................................................ 31
2.2.2 Perform CATDUAV5 Clean .................................................................................................. 33
2.2.3 Recompute the Tool Path for Machining Operations ........................................................ 36
2.2.4 Resetting Graphic Properties ............................................................................................... 39
2.2.5 Perform Product/Part Update ............................................................................................. 42
2.2.6 Perform Solid Update .......................................................................................................... 44
2.2.7 Set 3D Window ..................................................................................................................... 45
2.3 Norms and Standards ................................................................................................................... 48
2.3.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 48
2.3.1.1 CATDUA V5 .......................................................................................................................... 48
2.3.2 Saved Model State .................................................................................................................... 51
2.3.2.1 Non-Allowed CATIA Version and Release ........................................................................... 51
2.3.2.2 Non-Allowed Educational Licence ....................................................................................... 54
2.3.2.3 Maximum Document File Size ............................................................................................ 55
2.3.2.4 Product/Part Update ............................................................................................................ 57
2.3.2.5 Current Work Object ............................................................................................................ 60
2.3.2.6 Current Window View .......................................................................................................... 64
2.3.3 Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 68
2.3.3.1 Display in Specification Tree ............................................................................................... 68
2.3.3.2 Magnitude Length ................................................................................................................ 70
2.3.3.3 Geometry Scale .................................................................................................................... 73

Dassault Systèmes 3 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.3.3.4 Display Performance ............................................................................................................ 75
2.3.3.5 Machining Settings .............................................................................................................. 78
2.3.3.6 View Mode ............................................................................................................................ 80
2.3.4 Texts ........................................................................................................................................... 85
2.3.4.1 Feature without Annotation Note ....................................................................................... 85
2.3.4.2 Permitted Text Fonts ............................................................................................................ 88
2.3.4.3 Selected Text/Dimension Attributes ................................................................................... 93
2.3.4.4 Existence and Text Content of Parameters ......................................................................... 98
2.3.4.5 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Product ..................................................... 105
2.3.4.6 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Part ............................................................ 112
2.3.4.7 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Drawing .................................................... 119
2.3.4.8 Existence and Content of Texts ........................................................................................ 127
2.3.4.9 Existence and Content of Applicative Feature Attribute ................................................... 139
2.3.4.10 Non-Allowed Formula Value .............................................................................................. 143
2.3.4.11 Text not linked to Parameter ............................................................................................. 147
2.3.4.12 2D-Component Text Must Match Sheet Property ............................................................ 151
2.3.4.13 Parameter Not Linked to Text ............................................................................................ 157
2.3.4.14 Parameter Must Exist and Content Must Match Root-Feature Name ............................. 161
2.3.4.15 Formula Must Exist ............................................................................................................ 163
2.3.4.16 Text Content Must Match Sheet Format ........................................................................... 166
2.3.4.17 Content of Feature Attribute .............................................................................................. 168
2.3.5 Descriptions/Names ............................................................................................................... 170
2.3.5.1 Model Description ............................................................................................................. 170
2.3.5.2 Model Name ...................................................................................................................... 179
2.3.5.3 CATProduct Name ............................................................................................................. 186
2.3.5.4 CATPart Name ................................................................................................................... 192
2.3.5.5 CATDrawing Name ............................................................................................................ 198
2.3.5.6 Non-Standard Feature Name [O-EL-EN] ........................................................................... 204
2.3.5.7 Element Name ................................................................................................................... 208
2.3.5.8 Result Element Name Must Match Body Name .............................................................. 216
2.3.5.9 Solid Names Must Match Part Name ............................................................................... 220
2.3.5.10 Sheet Name ........................................................................................................................ 225
2.3.5.11 Detail-Sheet Name ............................................................................................................. 233
2.3.5.12 View Name ......................................................................................................................... 239
2.3.5.13 Detail-View Name .............................................................................................................. 246
2.3.5.14 View Name Must Match Sheet Name ............................................................................... 252
2.3.5.15 Product Component Name ............................................................................................... 255

Dassault Systèmes 4 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.3.5.16 Coherence between Product Component Name and associated File Name .................. 262
2.3.5.17 Instance Name Must Match Part Number ....................................................................... 265
2.3.5.18 Root-Product Name ........................................................................................................... 270
2.3.5.19 Root-Part Name (Part Number) ........................................................................................ 277
2.3.5.20 Root-Product Name Must Match CATProduct Name ...................................................... 285
2.3.5.21 Root Part Name (Part Number) Must Match CATPart Name ......................................... 288
2.3.5.22 Model Revision ................................................................................................................... 291
2.3.5.23 Model Definition ................................................................................................................ 297
2.3.5.24 Model Source ..................................................................................................................... 304
2.3.5.25 Model Nomenclature ......................................................................................................... 305
2.3.5.26 Published Element Name .................................................................................................. 312
2.3.5.27 Publication Name Must Match Published Element Name .............................................. 320
2.3.5.28 Layer Name ........................................................................................................................ 322
2.3.5.29 Filter Name ........................................................................................................................ 328
2.3.6 Sheets/Views ........................................................................................................................... 334
2.3.6.1 Nested 2D Component ...................................................................................................... 334
2.3.6.2 Unused Details ................................................................................................................... 337
2.3.6.3 Active Sheet ........................................................................................................................ 339
2.3.6.4 View Outside of Sheet ........................................................................................................ 341
2.3.6.5 Sheet Format ...................................................................................................................... 345
2.3.6.6 Sheet Frame ....................................................................................................................... 347
2.3.6.7 Non-Allowed Sheet Size ..................................................................................................... 349
2.3.6.8 Drafting Standard Name ................................................................................................... 351
2.3.6.9 Drafting Standard Corresponds to Reference Document Standard ................................ 353
2.3.6.10 Empty Sheets ...................................................................................................................... 357
2.3.6.11 Empty Detail Sheets ........................................................................................................... 360
2.3.6.12 Non-Exposed/Exploded 2D-Component ........................................................................... 363
2.3.6.13 Sheet Projection Method ................................................................................................... 366
2.3.6.14 Only one Sheet per Drawing .............................................................................................. 368
2.3.6.15 Sheet must exist ................................................................................................................. 369
2.3.6.16 Only one View in each Sheet ............................................................................................. 371
2.3.6.17 Sheet/View Must Exist ....................................................................................................... 372
2.3.6.18 Empty View must exist ....................................................................................................... 373
2.3.6.19 Empty Views ....................................................................................................................... 376
2.3.6.20 Empty Detail Views ............................................................................................................ 378
2.3.6.21 View Frames [D-OR-VF] ..................................................................................................... 380
2.3.6.22 Drawing Frame/Header as 2D Component ...................................................................... 382

Dassault Systèmes 5 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.3.6.23 View Scaling ....................................................................................................................... 385
2.3.6.24 View Angle .......................................................................................................................... 387
2.3.6.25 Generative View Dress-up Properties ................................................................................ 389
2.3.6.26 View Name is the Same in Specification Tree and in the View ........................................ 393
2.3.6.27 Locked Views ...................................................................................................................... 395
2.3.6.28 No active View in Sheet ..................................................................................................... 397
2.3.6.29 No active Detail View in Detail Sheet ................................................................................ 399
2.3.6.30 View Frame Visibility .......................................................................................................... 401
2.3.6.31 View Generation Mode Options ........................................................................................ 403
2.3.6.32 CATPart/CATProduct Name linked to View Must Match CATDrawing Name ................ 406
2.3.6.33 View linked to 3D ............................................................................................................... 409
2.3.6.34 View with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct ................................................................ 412
2.3.6.35 View Update ....................................................................................................................... 414
2.3.6.36 Permitted Generative View Style ....................................................................................... 416
2.3.6.37 Scale of External 2D Component ....................................................................................... 418
2.3.6.38 No active Background View ............................................................................................... 422
2.3.6.39 No active Background Detail View .................................................................................... 424
2.3.6.40 Non-Allowed View Generation Mode ................................................................................ 426
2.3.6.41 Sheet Scaling ...................................................................................................................... 428
2.3.7 Elements .................................................................................................................................. 430
2.3.7.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 430
2.3.7.1.1 Maximum Number of Elements ........................................................................................ 430
2.3.7.1.2 Conditional Feature Properties .......................................................................................... 432
2.3.7.1.3 Permitted Element Types in Model ................................................................................... 442
2.3.7.1.4 Permitted Element Types in SHOW ................................................................................. 445
2.3.7.1.5 Permitted Element Types in NOSHOW ............................................................................ 448
2.3.7.1.6 Permitted Elements Types in PICK .................................................................................... 451
2.3.7.1.7 Permitted Element Types in NOPICK ............................................................................... 454
2.3.7.1.8 The Same Feature Registered in More Than One Body [O-GL-IG] .................................. 457
2.3.7.1.9 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area [O-CM-OB] .................................................. 459
2.3.7.1.10 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area in Product ................................................... 462
2.3.7.1.11 Permitted Surface Feature Types in Specific Bodies ........................................................ 465
2.3.7.1.12 Elements in Specific Bodies Must Be Published .............................................................. 468
2.3.7.1.13 Empty Body ........................................................................................................................ 471
2.3.7.1.14 Empty body must exist ....................................................................................................... 473
2.3.7.1.15 Deactivated Feature ........................................................................................................... 475
2.3.7.1.16 Activated Feature ............................................................................................................... 478
2.3.7.1.17 Unresolved Feature ............................................................................................................ 481
2.3.7.1.18 Parameter Properties ......................................................................................................... 485
2.3.7.1.19 User-Defined Feature [O-EL-UD] ....................................................................................... 486

Dassault Systèmes 6 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.3.7.1.20 Non-Allowed Associative Feature ...................................................................................... 487
2.3.7.1.21 Visualization State of Published Entities .......................................................................... 489
2.3.7.1.22 Non-Allowed Assembly Constraints .................................................................................. 491
2.3.7.1.23 Low Intensity ...................................................................................................................... 495
2.3.7.1.24 Allowed Unit ....................................................................................................................... 498
2.3.7.2 Drawing .............................................................................................................................. 500
2.3.7.2.1 Non Associative Drawing Entities (on 3D) ....................................................................... 500
2.3.7.2.2 Non Associative Dimensions ............................................................................................ 502
2.3.7.2.3 Fake Dimensions ............................................................................................................... 505
2.3.7.2.4 Non up-to-date Dimensions .............................................................................................. 509
2.3.7.2.5 Non-Standard Display Accuracy of Dimension [D-OR-DI] ............................................... 511
2.3.7.2.6 Identical 2D Components .................................................................................................. 513
2.3.7.2.7 Drawing Picture Properties ................................................................................................ 514
2.3.7.2.8 Scale Text Must Match View Scale Value .......................................................................... 518
2.3.7.2.9 Non-Allowed Element Type in 2D Component ................................................................. 520
2.3.7.2.10 Non-Allowed Overlapping Feature .................................................................................... 523
2.3.7.2.11 Open Sketch ....................................................................................................................... 526
2.3.7.3 Sketches .............................................................................................................................. 528
2.3.7.3.1 Non-Allowed Sketch Constraint Types .............................................................................. 528
2.3.7.3.2 Non allowed sketch positioning type ................................................................................ 530
2.3.7.3.3 Empty Sketch ...................................................................................................................... 533
2.3.7.3.4 Non-Allowed Types in Sketch ............................................................................................ 534
2.3.7.3.5 Non-allowed Deactivated Elements in Sketch .................................................................. 537
2.3.7.3.6 Non-Allowed Sketch Element Linked to Origin ................................................................ 540
2.3.7.4 Axis Systems ....................................................................................................................... 543
2.3.7.4.1 Current Axis System ........................................................................................................... 543
2.3.7.4.2 Allowed Axis-System Position ............................................................................................ 545
2.3.7.4.3 Axis System Name [O-CS-CN] ........................................................................................... 548
2.3.7.4.4 Non-Standard Axis System [O-CS-NO] ............................................................................. 555
2.3.7.4.5 Non-Reference Axis System Active [O-CS-NR] .................................................................. 557
2.3.8 Solids ....................................................................................................................................... 559
2.3.8.1 Solid Feature with Child Elements .................................................................................... 559
2.3.8.2 Allowed Solid Features ...................................................................................................... 561
2.3.8.3 Maximum Number of Solid Features per Body ................................................................ 563
2.3.8.4 Only one Profile per Solid Feature .................................................................................... 567
2.3.8.5 Multi-solid part [G-MO-MU] .............................................................................................. 569
2.3.8.6 One Solid, at least, in Part ................................................................................................. 571
2.3.8.7 Solid Updates ..................................................................................................................... 572
2.3.8.8 Missing construction history for this solid [O-SO-MH] ................................................... 574
2.3.8.9 Unused Solid Construction Geometry .............................................................................. 576
2.3.8.10 Negative Bodies / Sub-Bodies ........................................................................................... 579

Dassault Systèmes 7 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.3.8.11 Number of Visible Faces .................................................................................................... 581
2.3.9 Material .................................................................................................................................... 584
2.3.9.1 Material Assignment is Allowed for Element Type ........................................................... 584
2.3.9.2 Material Assignment Must Exist for Element Type .......................................................... 586
2.3.9.3 Material Corresponds to Material Reference Catalog ...................................................... 588
2.3.9.4 Linked/Unlinked Material .................................................................................................. 592
2.3.9.5 User-Defined Property Value Must Match Material in Catalog ........................................ 595
2.3.10 Layer and Filter ........................................................................................................................ 598
2.3.10.1 Permitted Element Types on Layer .................................................................................... 598
2.3.10.2 Elements in SHOW on Layers ........................................................................................... 604
2.3.10.3 Elements in NOSHOW on Layers ..................................................................................... 607
2.3.10.4 Current Filter for Layer Group [O-GL-LA] .......................................................................... 610
2.3.10.5 Filter and Layer Definition ................................................................................................. 613
2.3.10.6 Unused Filter [O-GL-GL] .................................................................................................... 615
2.3.11 Graphic .................................................................................................................................... 617
2.3.11.1 Non-Allowed B-Rep/Feature Color .................................................................................... 617
2.3.11.2 Non-Allowed B-Rep/Feature Transparency ....................................................................... 620
2.3.11.3 Edge Fillet BRep Color Determined by Radius .................................................................. 623
2.4 Methodology ................................................................................................................................ 625
2.4.1 FT/A ......................................................................................................................................... 625
2.4.1.1 Non-Allowed Activation Status of Annotation Set ............................................................ 625
2.4.1.2 FT/A Tolerancing Standard ............................................................................................... 628
2.4.1.3 FT/A Reference System Must Exist ................................................................................... 629
2.4.1.4 FT/A Fake Dimensions ...................................................................................................... 633
2.4.1.5 Geometry Linked to FT/A .................................................................................................. 637
2.4.1.6 Not allowed link of FT/A elements .................................................................................... 640
2.4.1.7 Active Capture .................................................................................................................... 644
2.4.1.8 Permitted FT/A Types in Specific Capture ........................................................................ 647
2.4.1.9 FT/A Types Must Be Assigned to Specific Captures ........................................................ 650
2.4.1.10 Non-Allowed Semantic/Non-Semantic FT/A Elements ................................................... 655
2.4.1.11 Capture Definition .............................................................................................................. 658
2.4.1.12 View Name Must Match Capture Name ........................................................................... 661
2.4.1.13 Camera Name Must Match Capture Name ...................................................................... 664
2.4.1.14 Occurrences of FT/A Types in Captures ........................................................................... 666
2.4.1.15 Permitted NOA Attributes ................................................................................................. 668
2.4.1.16 Non-Allowed Basic Dimension Reference ........................................................................ 670
2.4.1.17 View Orientation Corresponds to Camera Orientation .................................................... 672

Dassault Systèmes 8 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.4.1.18 Capture Name Must Match View Name ........................................................................... 674
2.4.1.19 Unused FT/A Datums ........................................................................................................ 677
2.4.1.20 Annotation Content Does Not Correspond to Root Feature Properties ......................... 680
2.4.1.21 FT/A Reference Frame Must Exist ..................................................................................... 684
2.4.1.22 Non-Allowed Empty FT/A Views ....................................................................................... 687
2.4.1.23 Non-Allowed FT/A Elements Without Text Content ......................................................... 689
2.4.1.24 Only one FT/A Link per BRep Element of Geometry ........................................................ 691
2.4.1.25 Separator for Geometrical Tolerance ................................................................................ 693
2.4.1.26 FT/A View Definition .......................................................................................................... 696
2.4.1.27 Capture Display .................................................................................................................. 698
2.4.2 Process .................................................................................................................................... 700
2.4.2.1 NC Machining Fixture ........................................................................................................ 701
2.4.2.2 NC Machining Rough Stock .............................................................................................. 703
2.4.2.3 NC Machining Safety Plane ............................................................................................... 705
2.4.2.4 Machining Operation Feeds and Speeds Properties ........................................................ 707
2.4.2.5 Non-Allowed NC Machine ................................................................................................. 709
2.4.2.6 Non-Allowed NC Machine PPWords Table ....................................................................... 711
2.4.2.7 Non-Allowed PPWords ...................................................................................................... 713
2.4.2.8 Non-Allowed Machining Operation Tool Name/Tool Number ....................................... 715
2.4.2.9 Consistent Settings for Machining Operations ................................................................ 717
2.4.2.10 Machining Operation Strategy Properties ........................................................................ 720
2.4.2.11 NC Machine Numerical Control Properties ...................................................................... 722
2.4.2.12 NC Machining Simulation Stock Accuracy ....................................................................... 724
2.4.2.13 Activated NC Macro Must Exist ........................................................................................ 726
2.4.3 Part ........................................................................................................................................... 729
2.4.3.1 Structure of Part Specification Tree ................................................................................... 729
2.4.3.2 Open Body in Body ............................................................................................................ 736
2.4.3.3 Non-Allowed Solid Feature Mixed With Boolean Feature ................................................ 738
2.4.3.4 Center of Gravity ................................................................................................................ 742
2.4.3.5 Sketch Not Fully Constrained ............................................................................................ 744
2.4.3.6 Only one Curve in Sketch ................................................................................................... 749
2.4.3.7 Constraints Referencing the H or V Axis ........................................................................... 751
2.4.3.8 Material Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation ............................................... 754
2.4.3.9 Material Thickness Vector Corresponds to Thick Surface Orientation ............................ 759
2.4.3.10 Inverted Surface Orientation Corresponds to Thick Surface Orientation ....................... 762
2.4.3.11 Thin Part Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation .............................................. 764
2.4.3.12 Surface Must Exist in Specific Bodies ............................................................................... 766

Dassault Systèmes 9 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.4.3.13 Features with External Links (Multi-Model-Link) in Part .................................................. 768
2.4.3.14 MML (Multi-Model-Link) Reference Not Published ......................................................... 770
2.4.3.15 MML (Multi-Model-Link) Reference Not Published (by Name Evaluation) .................... 772
2.4.3.16 Permitted Body for non-associative Datum Features ....................................................... 774
2.4.3.17 Only One Surface Allowed in Specific Bodies ................................................................... 776
2.4.3.18 Associative Elements (Parent/Children) in Specific Bodies ............................................. 779
2.4.3.19 Elements without Child Elements in Specific Bodies ...................................................... 782
2.4.3.20 Surface Must Have Thin Part Attribute in Specific Bodies ............................................... 785
2.4.3.21 Offset Capability (Thick Surface) of Thin Parts ................................................................. 788
2.4.3.22 Area Ratio of Surfaces in Specific Bodies .......................................................................... 790
2.4.3.23 Thick Surface Definition ..................................................................................................... 793
2.4.3.24 Non-Allowed Parent/Child Relationship ........................................................................... 796
2.4.3.25 Saving as V4 Data .............................................................................................................. 800
2.4.3.26 Non-Allowed Path of Parent Feature ................................................................................. 803
2.4.3.27 Non-Allowed Component Formula in Part ....................................................................... 805
2.4.3.28 Join Definition .................................................................................................................... 808
2.4.3.29 Coordinates-Point Definition ............................................................................................. 810
2.4.3.30 Thread Definition ............................................................................................................... 812
2.4.3.31 Feature Must Exist in Specific Bodies ............................................................................... 814
2.4.3.32 Offset Capability of Surface ............................................................................................... 816
2.4.3.33 Construction Order of Solid Features in Bodies ............................................................... 819
2.4.3.34 Non-Allowed MML (Multi-Model-Link) ............................................................................ 822
2.4.3.35 Non-allowed Reference to Vertex/Edge/Face as Input for Feature .................................. 825
2.4.3.36 Edge/Variable-Radius/Chordal Fillets Definition .............................................................. 827
2.4.3.37 Shell Definition ................................................................................................................... 830
2.4.3.38 Healing Definition .............................................................................................................. 833
2.4.3.39 Non-Allowed Direction of Offset Surface Feature ............................................................ 835
2.4.3.40 Non-Allowed Isolated External References Set ................................................................. 837
2.4.3.41 NC Machining Operation Drill Points ............................................................................... 839
2.4.3.42 Draft Definition .................................................................................................................. 840
2.4.3.43 Sketch element used in multiple output profiles .............................................................. 842
2.4.4 Product .................................................................................................................................... 843
2.4.4.1 Structure of Product Specification Tree ............................................................................ 843
2.4.4.2 Product component with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct ....................................... 850
2.4.4.3 The Same Feature Registered in More Than One DMU-Group [O-GL-IG] ...................... 851
2.4.4.4 User Defined Properties Not Applied to Part Component ............................................... 853
2.4.4.5 At least one Constraint per Product .................................................................................. 856

Dassault Systèmes 10 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.4.4.6 Non-Allowed Path for Product Components .................................................................... 859
2.4.4.7 Non-Identity Positioning Matrix ........................................................................................ 862
2.4.4.8 Non-Isometric Positioning Matrix ..................................................................................... 865
2.4.4.9 Degree of Freedom of Product Components .................................................................... 867
2.4.4.10 Non-Allowed Shape Component Type .............................................................................. 870
2.4.4.11 Kinematics Degree of Freedom of Mechanism Equals Zero ............................................ 872
2.4.4.12 Flexible Product/Structure Component ............................................................................ 873
2.4.4.13 Product Clash Detection .................................................................................................... 875
2.4.4.14 Assembly Constraints Reference ....................................................................................... 878
2.4.4.15 Product Component with Non-Allowed MML (Multi-Model Link) .................................. 881
2.4.4.16 Non-allowed Link Target .................................................................................................... 884
2.4.4.17 Non-Allowed Positioning Matrix ....................................................................................... 888
2.4.4.18 Product Component Seal ................................................................................................... 890
2.4.4.19 Part component fixed in Product ....................................................................................... 894
2.4.5 Sheet Metal .............................................................................................................................. 895
2.4.5.1 Cylindrical Bend Definition ................................................................................................ 895
2.4.5.2 Conical Bend Definition ..................................................................................................... 897
2.4.5.3 Fold/Unfold — Sheet Metal Visualization ........................................................................ 899
2.4.5.4 Sheet Metal Parameters ..................................................................................................... 901
2.4.5.5 Surfacic Flange Definition ................................................................................................. 903
2.4.6 Composite ............................................................................................................................... 904
2.4.6.1 Composite Material Catalog Path ..................................................................................... 904
2.4.6.2 Ply Surface Must Match Ply Group Surface ...................................................................... 906
2.4.6.3 Ply and Core Definition ...................................................................................................... 907
2.4.6.4 Ply with Invalid or not up-to-date Contour ....................................................................... 911
2.4.6.5 Composite Material Parameter State ................................................................................ 913
2.4.7 Equipment ............................................................................................................................... 915
2.4.7.1 Electrical ............................................................................................................................. 915
2.4.7.1.1 Lost Electrical Properties of Curve .................................................................................... 915
2.4.7.1.2 Support Plane must be Parallel to Reference Plane ......................................................... 917
2.4.7.1.3 Consistency of Bundle Segments in Multi-Branchable .................................................... 919
2.4.7.1.4 Unused Electrical Elements in Part ................................................................................... 921
2.4.7.1.5 Electrical Topology ............................................................................................................. 923
2.4.7.1.6 Non-allowed Electrical Root/Components Type .............................................................. 929
2.4.7.1.7 Electrical Protective Coverings .......................................................................................... 932
2.4.7.1.8 Light Electrical Protective Coverings ................................................................................. 934
2.4.7.1.9 Empty Multi-Branchable/Bundle Segment Part ................................................................ 936
2.4.7.1.10 Electrical Reference Designator ......................................................................................... 938
2.4.7.1.11 Electrical Data Availability .................................................................................................. 945

Dassault Systèmes 11 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.4.7.1.12 Bundle-Segment Properties ............................................................................................... 947
2.4.7.1.13 Consistency of Branchables in Multi-Branchable ............................................................. 949
2.4.7.1.14 Multipart Bundle Segment ................................................................................................ 951
2.4.7.1.15 Unused Devices ................................................................................................................. 953
2.4.7.1.16 Segment Extremity Name .................................................................................................. 956
2.4.7.1.17 Segment name ................................................................................................................... 959
2.4.7.1.18 Open Electrical Segment End ............................................................................................ 960
2.4.7.1.19 Closed Electrical Conductor Loop ..................................................................................... 963
2.4.7.1.20 Electrical Segment Topology ............................................................................................. 966
2.4.7.1.21 Only One Electrical Network per Harness ........................................................................ 970
2.4.7.1.22 Electrical Support Points Must Lie on Electrical Support Planes ..................................... 973
2.4.7.1.23 Allowed Distance Between Segment and Support ........................................................... 974
2.4.7.1.24 Consistency of Segments in Branchable ........................................................................... 976
2.4.7.1.25 Bundle Segments Color ..................................................................................................... 978
2.4.7.2 General ............................................................................................................................... 981
2.4.7.2.1 Unlinked Supports in GBN ................................................................................................ 981
2.4.8 General .................................................................................................................................... 983
2.4.8.1 User-Defined Properties Not Applied to Root-Product/Part ............................................ 983
2.4.8.2 Non-Allowed User-Defined Properties of Root-Product/Part .......................................... 986
2.4.8.3 Deactivated Knowledgeware Relation ............................................................................... 989
2.4.8.4 Unresolved (Non-Synchronized) Knowledgeware Relation ............................................. 991
2.4.8.5 Non-Allowed Infinite Lines ................................................................................................ 993
2.4.8.6 Non-Allowed Geometry Scale ............................................................................................ 996
2.4.8.7 Non-Allowed Knowledgeware Relation Check Status ....................................................... 998
2.4.8.8 Non-Allowed Models/Catalogs/... in Session ................................................................. 1001
2.4.8.9 Non-Allowed Path for Linked Document ........................................................................ 1003
2.4.9 Analysis .................................................................................................................................. 1005
2.4.9.1 Non-Allowed OCTREE Tetrahedron Mesh Element Type .............................................. 1005
2.5 Geometry ................................................................................................................................... 1007
2.5.1 Curve Features ...................................................................................................................... 1007
Checking curves and wires .............................................................................................. 1007
Structure of wires ............................................................................................................. 1008
2.5.1.1 Curves ............................................................................................................................... 1009
2.5.1.1.1 Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG] ........................................... 1009
2.5.1.1.2 Non-Tangent Curve Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NT] ...................................... 1010
2.5.1.1.3 Non-Smooth Curve Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NS] ...................................... 1011
2.5.1.1.4 Tiny Curve [G-CU-TI] ........................................................................................................ 1013
2.5.1.1.5 Tiny Curve Segment [G-CU-TI] ........................................................................................ 1016
2.5.1.1.6 Fragmented Curve [G-CU-FG] ......................................................................................... 1019
2.5.1.1.7 Small Curve Radius of Curvature [G-CU-CR] ................................................................... 1020

Dassault Systèmes 12 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.5.1.1.8 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-CU-IK] ................................................................... 1023
2.5.1.1.9 Wavy Planar Curve [G-CU-WV] ........................................................................................ 1025
2.5.1.1.10 High-Degree Curve [G-CU-HD] ....................................................................................... 1028
2.5.1.1.11 Linear Curves with Polynomial Degree Greater than 1 [G-CU-ID] ................................. 1030
2.5.1.2 Wires ................................................................................................................................. 1033
2.5.1.2.1 Large Curve Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG] ........................................................... 1033
2.5.1.2.2 Non-Tangent Curves (G1 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NT] ...................................................... 1035
2.5.1.2.3 Non-Smooth Curves (G2 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NS] ...................................................... 1037
2.5.1.2.4 Tiny Wire [G-CU-TI] .......................................................................................................... 1039
2.5.1.2.5 Embedded Wires and Points [G-CU-EM] ........................................................................ 1042
2.5.1.2.6 Self-Intersecting Wire [G-CU-IS] ...................................................................................... 1045
2.5.1.3 General ............................................................................................................................. 1048
2.5.1.3.1 Multi-Domain Curve [G-CU-MU] ..................................................................................... 1048
2.5.2 Solid/Surface Features .......................................................................................................... 1050
2.5.2.1 Surfaces ............................................................................................................................ 1050
2.5.2.1.1 Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG] ............................................ 1050
2.5.2.1.2 Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NT] .................................... 1053
2.5.2.1.3 Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NS] .................................... 1056
2.5.2.1.4 Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI] ...................................................................................................... 1060
2.5.2.1.5 Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA], [G-SU-RN] ........................................................... 1063
2.5.2.1.6 Embedded Surfaces [G-SU-EM] ....................................................................................... 1067
2.5.2.1.7 Small Curvature Radius in Surface [G-SU-CR] ................................................................ 1070
2.5.2.1.8 Big Curvature Radius in Surface [G-SU-CR] .................................................................... 1073
2.5.2.1.9 Wavy Surface [G-SU-WV] ................................................................................................. 1076
2.5.2.1.10 Folded Surface [G-SU-FO] ............................................................................................... 1079
2.5.2.1.11 Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary [G-SU-DC] ....................................................... 1082
2.5.2.1.12 Degenerate Surface Segment Corner [G-SU-DP] ............................................................ 1085
2.5.2.1.13 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-SU-IK] ................................................................... 1087
2.5.2.1.14 High-Degree Curve [G-SU-HD] ........................................................................................ 1089
2.5.2.1.15 Fragmented Surface [G-SU-FG] ....................................................................................... 1091
2.5.2.1.16 Unused Surface Segment Rows [G-SU-UN] .................................................................... 1093
2.5.2.1.17 Undefined Surface Normal [G-SU-xx] .............................................................................. 1095
2.5.2.1.18 High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface [G-SU-xx] ....................................... 1098
2.5.2.1.19 Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree greater than 1 [G-SU-xx] ................................ 1101
2.5.2.1.20 Self-Intersecting Surface [G-SU-IS] .................................................................................. 1104
2.5.2.1.21 Small Curvature Radius in Thin-Part Surface ................................................................. 1106
2.5.2.1.22 Multi-Face Surface [G-SU-MU] ........................................................................................ 1109
2.5.2.1.23 Analytical/Procedural (Non-NURBS) Face Support Surface [G-FA-AN] ........................ 1111
2.5.2.2 Face Edges ........................................................................................................................ 1113
2.5.2.2.1 Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI] ................................................................................................. 1113
2.5.2.2.2 Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI] ................................................................................. 1117
2.5.2.2.3 Fragmented Face Edge [G-ED-FG] .................................................................................. 1120
2.5.2.2.4 Closed Face Edge [G-ED-CL] ............................................................................................ 1121

Dassault Systèmes 13 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.5.2.2.5 Analytical / Procedural (Non-NURBS) Face Edge [G-ED-AN] ........................................ 1123
2.5.2.3 Face Loops ....................................................................................................................... 1125
2.5.2.3.1 Large Face Edge Gap (G0 Discontinuity) [G-LO-LG] ...................................................... 1125
2.5.2.3.2 Sharp Face Edge Angle [G-LO-SA] ................................................................................... 1127
2.5.2.3.3 Self-Intersecting Face Loop [G-LO-IS], [G-FA-IS] ............................................................ 1129
2.5.2.3.4 Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop [G-LO-IT] .................................................. 1133
2.5.2.4 Faces ................................................................................................................................. 1135
2.5.2.4.1 Tiny Face [G-FA-TI] ........................................................................................................... 1135
2.5.2.4.2 Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN] ................................................................................ 1138
2.5.2.4.3 Tangent-continuous Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN] .............................................. 1142
2.5.2.4.4 Narrow Face Region [G-FA-RN] ....................................................................................... 1145
2.5.2.4.5 Relative Narrow Face ....................................................................................................... 1148
2.5.2.4.6 Embedded Faces [G-FA-EM] ............................................................................................ 1150
2.5.2.4.7 Large Face Edge to Surface Gap [G-FA-EG] .................................................................... 1152
2.5.2.4.8 Closed Face [G-FA-CL] ..................................................................................................... 1155
2.5.2.4.9 Inconsistent Face Orientation on Surface [G-FA-IT] ....................................................... 1157
2.5.2.5 Shells/Volumes ................................................................................................................ 1159
2.5.2.5.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx] ........................................................................ 1159
2.5.2.5.2 Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume [G-SH-FR] .............................................................. 1162
2.5.2.5.3 Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG] ............................................................. 1166
2.5.2.5.4 Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT] ........................................................ 1170
2.5.2.5.5 Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS] ........................................................ 1174
2.5.2.5.6 Sharp Face Angle [G-SH-SA] ............................................................................................ 1178
2.5.2.5.7 Inconsistent Surface Orientation in Shell/Volume [G-FA-IT], [G-SH-IT] ....................... 1181
2.5.2.5.8 Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS], [G-SO-IS] ...................................................... 1183
2.5.2.5.9 Over-Used Edge [G-SH-NM] ........................................................................................... 1185
2.5.2.5.10 Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU] .......................................................................................... 1187
2.5.2.5.11 Inconsistent Face Orientation in Shell/Volume [G-SH-IT] ............................................. 1189
2.5.2.5.12 Tangent continuous boundary of Shell ........................................................................... 1191
2.5.2.5.13 Step Edge on Boundary of Shell ...................................................................................... 1193
2.5.2.5.14 Intersection of Solids/Shells ............................................................................................ 1196
2.5.2.6 General ............................................................................................................................. 1198
2.5.2.6.1 Multi-Domain Surface (Shell) [G-SO-MU] ...................................................................... 1198
2.5.2.6.2 Multi-volume solid [G-SO-MU] ....................................................................................... 1200
2.5.2.6.3 Tiny Solid [G-SO-TI] ......................................................................................................... 1202
2.5.2.6.4 Embedded Surface Features (Shells) [G-SO-EM] ........................................................... 1205
2.5.2.6.5 Embedded Solids [G-SO-EM] .......................................................................................... 1208
2.5.2.6.6 Solid Void [G-SO-VO] ....................................................................................................... 1211
2.5.2.6.7 Non-Allowed Surfacic Fillet Radius ................................................................................. 1212
2.5.2.6.8 Non-Allowed Solid Fillet Radius ...................................................................................... 1215
2.5.2.6.9 Non-Allowed Chamfer Lengths ....................................................................................... 1218
2.5.2.6.10 Non-Allowed Chamfer Angle ........................................................................................... 1221
2.5.2.6.11 Solid Wall Thickness ........................................................................................................ 1223

Dassault Systèmes 14 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

2.5.2.6.12 Empty Domains ............................................................................................................... 1227
2.5.3 Model ..................................................................................................................................... 1229
2.5.3.1 Hybrid Model [G-MO-HY] ............................................................................................... 1229
2.5.4 Views ...................................................................................................................................... 1231
2.5.4.1 Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI] .................................................................................... 1231
2.5.4.2 Embedded Drawing Element [G-DW-EM] ....................................................................... 1234

Dassault Systèmes 15 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Editing a criterion definition

1 General information about criterion definitions

Criteria manual

1.1 Editing a criterion definition

When a criterion has been added to a profile from the criteria pool, the criterion uses a
default definition including the default settings for priority and element selection from
the check environment, if applicable. If the criterion has been copied from an existing
instance, the new instance uses the definition of the existing criterion.
To edit a criterion definition, follow these steps:
1 Double-click the criterion in the profile tree. The criterion definition is opened for
editing.
2 Choose a priority for the criterion. The priority specifies the severity of an error that
violates this criterion. The priority corresponds to the importance of a criterion.
If the required priority is not yet defined, go to the “Priority” dialog to define a new
weight. Then return to the profile.
3 Choose how Q-Checker will calculate the error sum for the criterion assessment:
• If “Sum up weight for entities” is not selected, the error weight is added once to the
error sum, regardless of the number of checked elements violating the criterion.
• If “Sum up weight for entities” is selected, the error weight of this criterion is added
several times to the error sum, once for every checked element violating the criterion.
• If “Sum up weights for subitems” is selected, the error weight of this criterion is
added several times to the total error sum, once for every checked subitem that
violates the criterion. This option is only available for certain geometry criteria where
the checked element may have several subitems, for example a solid with several
faces.
4 Q-Checker can evaluate the state of a criterion (in order, not called, violated, error) as
part of a check condition for other criteria that are applied later during the same check.
• To use a criterion only as a precondition, select the “Use only as precondition”
option. In this case, the criterion assessment will not be included in the model
assessment.
• To include the criterion assessment in the model assessment, deselect the “Use only
as precondition option”.
5 Q-Checker criteria provide standard messages that can be displayed for violated criteria
in the analysis window. For every criterion, you can specify a custom message to be
shown instead of or in addition to the standard message.
In the “Select message” list box, select which messages to display, and the order in
which they are displayed. Specify the custom message, if required.
6 To apply the criterion only if a certain condition is fulfilled, select a check condition.
Select the “Check condition” option and choose a check condition from the list box.

Dassault Systèmes 16 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Editing a criterion definition

To perform the criterion in any case, deselect the “Check condition” check box.
Criteria manual

If the required check condition is not yet defined, go to the “Check condition” dialog
and create the new condition. Then return to the “Profiles” dialog.
7 To apply the criterion only to a subset of elements in the model, apply an element
selection to the criterion.
If the required element selection is not yet defined, go to the “Element selection” dialog
and create the new element selection. Then return to the “Profiles” dialog.
8 Define the check settings for the respective criterion, if available.
 For a description of the parameters for every criterion, see the Criteria Manual.
9 If Q-Checker healing is available for the criterion: Define the healing settings for the
criterion.
 For a description of the healing methods for particular criteria, see the Criteria
Manual.
To allow users to apply individual healings from within the analysis window, select
the “Individual healing” button. You can enable one or more healing functions for
individual healing.
To include a healing function in healing according to the check profile and in checks
with healing, select the check box. For this purpose, you can enable only one healing
function at a time.

Example In the screenshot below, the “Activate” healing function is included in healing
according to the check profile and in checks with healing. Both the “Activate” and the
“Delete” healing functions are enabled for individual healing.

Healings can have side effects which may not be apparent directly after the healing. To
get a valid model assessment again, the model might have to be checked again after a
healing.
A special model assessment or notification in the analysis window can indicate that the
model needs to be checked again due to changes caused by Q-Checker healing and
analysis functions. To trigger this special model assessment or notification, select the
“Healing may affect model assessment” option.
 “Modified” model assessment: Administration manual, Modified
 Message in the analysis window: Administration manual, “Notice that a
recheck is required” check box

Dassault Systèmes 17 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Context help for check parameters

10 To apply the current settings to a criterion, click the “Apply changes” button.
Criteria manual

To leave the previous criterion definition unchanged, click the “Discard changes”
button .
11 If the criterion is one of several criteria with a common definition, you are prompted
whether to apply the changes to all criteria with this common definition.

• To apply changes only to the current criterion instance, click “Change only this”.
• To apply the changes to all criteria with this common definition, click “Change all”.

1.2 Context help for check parameters

Prerequisite: The criterion must be open for editing. To open the criterion for
editing, double-click the dialog, or click the “Edit definition” button.
To show the description of a certain check parameter in the help viewer, do one of the
following:
 Right-click the label of a parameter, then click the light bulb icon in the context menu.

 Alternatively, click inside a spin box, text box, list box, value list or check box of a
parameter, then press [F1].
 The help viewer shows the related entry in the online help.
Context help is not available for the check condition, element selection, criterion assess-
ments settings and healing settings.

1.3 Criterion definition dialog reference

To hide or show a particular section, click “–”/“+” in the section title.
To edit the definition of a criterion, double-click the criterion name in the profile
tree, or click the “Edit” button in the lower right corner of the criterion editor.

Dassault Systèmes 18 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Criterion definition dialog reference

To apply the changes, click the “Apply changes” button.

Criteria manual

To discard changes, click the “Discard changes” button.

Criterion title bar

“Name” Name of this criterion instance

“Source criterion” Name of the source criterion on which this criterion is based.

“Criterion assessment” section

“Priority” list box Select the priority of this criterion.

“Sum up weight for entity” check box If this option is selected, the weight defined in
the priority is charged for each single element that violates the criterion.
If this option is not selected, the weight defined in the priority is charged once for the
violated criterion, irrespective of the number of elements violating the criterion.

“Sum up weight for sub-elements” check box This option applies to geometry
elements with sub-elements. If this option is selected, the error weight is charged for
each single sub-element violating the criterion. If this option is not selected or unavail-
able, the error weight is charged according to the “Sum up weight for entity” option.

Example When checking a solid for mini-elements, several tiny faces can be found,
which are shown as sub-elements in the analysis tree.

Dassault Systèmes 19 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Criterion definition dialog reference

If the “Sum up weight for sub-elements” option is selected, the weight is charged for
Criteria manual

each single tiny face (Fig. 1). Otherwise the weight is charged only once per solid
(Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: The weight of criterion Tiny face is charged Fig. 2: The weight of criterion Tiny Face is charged
for each of the 18 tiny faces. The total weight is once, irrespective of the number of tiny faces.
9x18 = 162. The total weight is 9.

“Use only as precondition criterion (result will not affect model assessment)” check
box If this option is selected, the criterion assessment will not be included in the check
result and does not directly contribute to the model assessment.
If this option is not selected, the criterion assessment is included in the check result
and contributes to the model assessment.
The result for this criterion can be evaluated as a precondition for other criteria irrespec-
tive of this setting.

“Display message” list box with text box Select which error message to show in the
analysis window:
• “Standard message”: Q-Checker standard message
• “Custom message”: Custom error message
• “Standard message + Custom message”: Standard error message provided by
Q-Checker, followed by the custom error message.
• “Custom message + Default message”: Custom error message, followed by the
standard error message provided by Q-Checker.
Specify the custom error message in the text box. To specify the custom message in
other languages, click the language icon.

Dassault Systèmes 20 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Criterion definition dialog reference

Check settings
Criteria manual

“Check Condition” check box with list box If this check box is selected, the criterion is
applied only if the selected check condition is fulfilled. In the list box, select the check
condition.
If this check box is deselected, the criterion is applied always and uses no check condi-
tion.
This option cannot be selected unless a check condition is defined in the check environ-
ment.
 More on check conditions: Administration manual, 8 Check Conditions

“Element selection name” list box Select the element selection for the criterion. When
adding criteria from the criteria pool, the element selection uses the default setting
specified in the element selection dialog.
 More on element selection: Administration manual, 9 Element selections

 NOTE: All other check settings are specific to the respective criteria. You can find a
description of these settings in the criteria manual.
See below for a description of commonly used controls for check settings.

Commonly used controls for check settings

Value list with fixed values

• Select or deselect items by clicking the check boxes.

• To deselect all items, click the “Deselect all” button .
• To select all items, click the “Select all” button .

Dassault Systèmes 21 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Criterion definition dialog reference

• To show only the selected items, click the “Show selected items” button . To show
Criteria manual

all items, click this button again.

• To sort the items alphabetically in ascending or descending order, click the “Sort
items alphabetically” button .

Value list with user-defined values

• To add a new item to the value list, type the expression into the text box and click the
“Add item” button .
• To remove items from the value list, select the items to be removed and click the
“Delete selected item” button .

Select path or file name

To select a file or folder, click the “Select” button . You also can enter a valid path or
filename directly in the text box.

Multi-line text box

You can edit text directly in a multi-line text box. To edit text in a separate, resizable
window, click the “Edit in separate window” button.

Controls for geometry criteria

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Geometry checks use discrete
measurement points to check geometrical properties. Select a specification for these
points:
“Fix number of points” Select this option to generate a fixed number of points as
specified in the “Fix number of points per segment” field.

Dassault Systèmes 22 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Criterion definition dialog reference

“Selection of number of points to check on edges” Select this option to automatically

Criteria manual

adapt the number of measurement points to the geometry. The number of

measurement points depends on properties such as element size and curvature.
“Order of surface segments” Select this option to adapt the number of measurement
points to the polynomial degree n of a segment. The number of measurement points
is n+1.
This setting applies only to polynomial curves and polynomial surfaces. For other
curves and surfaces, the “Internal discretization points of edges” option is used instead.
This setting is only available for some criteria.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points per
segment. This value applies only if the “Selection of number of points to check” setting
is “Fix number of points”.

 NOTE
• Both accuracy and computational effort increase with the number of measurement
points.
• If accuracy is too high, tolerable deviations may be reported as errors.
• When searching for an error, it is a good idea to begin with a low number of
measurement points and to increase the number gradually until the error is found.

Healing settings

“Heal” check box If this option is selected, this healing method is used when
performing a healing according to the profile.
If this option is not selected, this healing method is not used when performing a healing
according to the profile.

“Healing may affect model assessment” check box Select this option to declare this
healing a critical healing.
After performing critical healings, the “Modified” model assessment is assigned, or the
“Recheck required” notification is shown, if enabled in the check environment.
 Administration manual, Modified
 Administration manual, “Notice that a recheck is required” check box

Healing methods For some criteria, more than one healing method is available. Select
the healing method to be applied by healing according to the profile.

Dassault Systèmes 23 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 General information about criterion definitions
Criterion definition dialog reference

“Individual healing” button If this button is selected, the healing function for this crite-
Criteria manual

rion is available in the analysis window. If this option is deselected, the healing function
for this criterion is not available in the analysis window.

Additional parameters Depending on the healing function, there can be additional

healing parameters for the respective healing functions, as shown below.

Usage list

Usage list of criterion instances with common definition This list shows a list of all
criterion instances that use the definition that is currently displayed in the criterion
editor.
• The instance in the active editor window is marked with an icon in the first column.
• Green text indicates that an instance is open for viewing. Red text indicates that an
instance is open for editing. Blue text indicates all other criterion instances.
• The “Profile” column shows the name of the associated profile.
• The “Model Type” column shows the name of the associated model type.
To hide or show this list, click the separator above the list.

Dassault Systèmes 24 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Batch criteria

2 Criteria Description
Criteria manual

2.1 Batch criteria

Q-Checker batch criteria hand over certain tasks to be processed in CATIA. The results
from CATIA are shown in Q-Checker.

 NOTE: CATIA routines in batch criteria always check models in their checked state.
Note the save settings for batch criteria.
 Administration manual, 2.3.8 Profile options

INFO: Batch criteria are not to be confused with batch checks. A Q-Checker batch
check is a sequence of checks without user interaction.

Dassault Systèmes 25 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Batch criteria

2.1.1 CATDUAV5 – Priority 1

Criteria manual

StcCatCleanCategory1 (1002)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion starts the CATDUAV5 utility in CATIA.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 1” checks for major errors.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 2” checks for major errors.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 3” checks for minor errors.
 For information about the CATIA CATDUAV5 utility, see the CATIA online
documentation.

Related criteria
 Preprocessing: Perform CATDUAV5 Clean, page 33
 Batch criterion: DataLifeCycle CATDUA, page 29

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Dassault Systèmes 26 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Batch criteria

2.1.2 CATDUAV5 – Priority 2

Criteria manual

StcCatCleanCategory2 (1003)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion starts the CATDUAV5 utility in CATIA.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 1” checks for major errors.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 2” checks for major errors.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 3” checks for minor errors.
 For information about the CATIA CATDUAV5 utility, see the CATIA online
documentation.

Related criteria
 Preprocessing: CATDUA V5, page 48
 Batch: DataLifeCycle CATDUA, page 29

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Instances of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Dassault Systèmes 27 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Batch criteria

2.1.3 CATDUAV5 – Priority 3

Criteria manual

StcCatCleanCategory3 (1004)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion starts the CATDUAV5 utility in CATIA.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 1” checks for major errors.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 2” checks for major errors.
• “CATDUAV5–Priority 3” checks for minor errors.
 For information about the CATIA CATDUAV5 utility, see the CATIA online
documentation.

Related criteria
 Preprocessing: CATDUA V5, page 48
 Batch: DataLifeCycle CATDUA, page 29

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Dassault Systèmes 28 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Batch criteria

2.1.4 DataLifeCycle CATDUA

Criteria manual

BatchCatdua (1394)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion starts the DataLifecycle CATDUA batch check in CATIA from within
Q-Checker. Their results are included in the Q-Checker check result.
This criterion requires a DataLifecycle CATDUA definition file. You can create this defi-
nition file in CATIA.
 Creating a check definition file for DataLifeCycle CATDUA, page 30

Background
DataLifecycle CATDUA is intended for the following tasks:
• Updating a model to the current CATIA version
• Finding broken in links in a document

Fig. 1: Executing CATDUAV5 using the DataLifeCycle utility

Related criteria
 Batch criterion: CATDUAV5 – Priority 1, page 26
 Preprocessing criterion: CATDUA V5, page 48

Dassault Systèmes 29 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Batch criteria

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Parameter
Definition of the DataLifeCycle-CATDUA options Insert the content of the DataLife-
Cycle CATDUA definition file into this text box.
 Creating a check definition file for DataLifeCycle CATDUA, page 30

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
DataLifecycle CATDUA is more versatile than CATDUA Priority 1/2/3 .
For more information see the CATIA online documentation.

Creating a check definition file for DataLifeCycle CATDUA

1 In CATIA, select “Tools” > “Utility”.
 The “Batch Monitor” window appears.
2 Open the “CATDUAV5” dialog by double-clicking “CATDUAV5”.
3 In the “Document Selection” list box at the top, select any part. In the list box in the
middle, select “CATDUA”.
(The name of the CATPart serves only as a placeholder; when executing a check, the
name will be replaced by name and path of the actual CATPart to be checked.)
 The “CATDUAV5” dialog appears.
4 In the “CATDUAV5” dialog, select “Check” from the list box at the top.
5 Select the priorities.
6 To save the definition file, click “Save”.

To use the definition in Q-Checker, insert the content of the generated definition file
into the “Definition of the DataLifecycle CATDUA options” text box.

Dassault Systèmes 30 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

2.2 Preprocessing
Criteria manual

Use preprocessings to prepare models during the check.

2.2.1 Fit All In

PreReframeScreen (1245)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This setting centers the model and fits it into the window (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).

 NOTE: This preprocessing is only available in interactive mode.

Background
When opening models in CATIA, the geometry view is restored as it was when the
model had been saved.

Fig. 1: View not fit to the screen Fig. 2: View fit to the screen

Dassault Systèmes 31 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Parameter
“Drawing: All sheets should be reframed” check box If this option is selected, all
sheets are fitted to the window. If this option is not selected, only the active sheet is
fitted to the window.

“Part: Reframe on” check box If this option is selected, the PartBody or the In Work
Object is fitted to the window. In the list box, select the object to be fitted to the
window.
If this option is not selected, the entire model is fitted to the window.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: When applying “Reframe on In Work Object” to a geometrical set, the view is
reframed on the geometrical set and its reference plane. This is in accordance with the
“Fit All In” function in .

Dassault Systèmes 32 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

2.2.2 Perform CATDUAV5 Clean

Criteria manual

PreForceCatduaClean (1589)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion starts the CATDUAV5 utility in CATIA for checking and cleaning the
model. The check result in Q-Checker contains the return codes from CATDUA V5.

CAUTION: The clean operation can result in new errors.

The result of the check and clean operations are the same, irrespective of whether
CATDUA V5 is started from within Q-Checker or directly in CATIA.

 NOTE: After cleaning with CATDUA V5, the model may contain significant changes
that affect the Q-Checker result.
Therefore a model update may be necessary. To apply an update, use preprocessing
criterion Perform Product/Part Update, page 42. In addition, we recommend checking
the model again.

Related criteria
 Batch Criteria: CATDUAV5 – Priority 1, page 26; CATDUAV5 – Priority 2, page 27;
CATDUAV5 – Priority 3, page 28, DataLifeCycle CATDUA, page 29
 Checking with CATDUA V5 without healing: CATDUA V5, page 48

Dassault Systèmes 33 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings

 NOTE: When using profiles created in Q-Checker for V5 2.17.x or earlier: The definition
of the former preprocessing criterion CATDUA V5 is adopted only for criterion

Dassault Systèmes 34 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

CATDUA V5, page 48.

Criteria manual

“Filter” list box Controls how the selection of rules in value lists “Priority 1”, “Priority
2”, “Priority 3” and “Further Rules” are used:
• “NoneBut”: Only the selected checks are processed.
• “AllBut”: All CATDUA checks available in the current CATIA version are processed,
except the selected checks.

“Priority 1”, “Priority 2”, “Priority 3” value lists Specifies the CATDUA checks to be
performed. Note the setting of the “Filter” list box.

“Further rules” text box If further checks become available in later CATIA releases, you
can add their names in this field.
Note the setting of the “Filter” list box.
Make sure that the codes in this field are entered correctly. Incorrect entries will be
ignored.

“In case of Enovia V4/V5 models, Ignore specific selected rules” check box If this
option is selected, rules in the “Ignore” text box are ignored when checking models
from Enovia V4 or Enovia V5.
Results for these CATDUA V5 checks differ depending on whether the checked model is
stored locally or in Enovia V5.
When using Enovia V4 or V5, we activating this option, and to keep all preset rules in
the text box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 35 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

2.2.3 Recompute the Tool Path for Machining Operations

Criteria manual

StdToolPathForMachiningOp (1392)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This preprocessing recalculates the tool paths of all machining operations for the
current model. If tool paths cannot be updated, an error is reported.

Background
CATIA can calculate and simulate NC tool paths (Fig. 1). Calculations respect the given
requirements, such as stock geometry, fixtures, and methods and strategies for
processing.
After changing the geometry, the tool path has to be updated. Otherwise, errors will
occur.

Fig. 1: Tool paths

Suggested solution
After changing the model, recalculate the tool path.

Dassault Systèmes 36 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: This criterion also applies to the “Machining Process List” element. Q-Checker
might report errors when checking this element. These errors are irrelevant as long as
the Machining Process List is not in use.
To exclude the Machining Process List from the check, apply a suitable element selec-
tion to the criteria.

Example
• Multi Select expression (English) for the element selection definition:

NOT PATHNAME = "Liste der Bearbeitungsprozesse"

• Multilingual Multi-Select expression (English, French, German) for the element

selection definition:

NOT PATHNAME = "Machining Process List|Liste des procédés|Liste der

Bearbeitungsprozesse"

Application Tip
A tool path is up-to-date if it the specification tree element is marked with the label
“Computed”(Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 37 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Up-to-date and not up-to-date toolpaths

Dassault Systèmes 38 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

2.2.4 Resetting Graphic Properties

Criteria manual

PreResetGraphicProperties (1499)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This preprocessing reverts user-defined graphic properties to the inherited default
values. The following properties can be reset:
Pick, Show, Layer, Color, Transparency, Thickness, Line type, Line width/edge width,
Point symbol, Inheritance of transparency in Products

Background
To change graphic properties of elements, mark them in the specification tree, then
select “Properties” on the context menu.
To change the graphical properties of BRep elements, mark the respective elements in
the geometry view, then select “Properties” on the context menu (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Solid features with user-defined color settings

Dassault Systèmes 39 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Reset all properties of BReps” check box If this option is selected, all graphic proper-
ties of B-Reps will be reset.

Element properties check boxes To reset specific graphic properties, activate the
respective check boxes.
The “Inheritance of transparency” property is only available for products.
 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Change the graphic properties of components according to the existing CAD
guidelines.
• To reset all graphic properties of an element, right-click the element, then choose
“Object” > “Reset Properties”(Fig. 2) on the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 40 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Resetting graphic properties

• Resetting graphic properties to their original values can become complicated when it
is not immediately obvious what needs to be adjusted, the properties of the
component, the corresponding BRep, or both.
To display the graphic properties of the selected object and its parents, you can use
the “Graphic Properties Wizard”(Fig. 3).
To display the graphic properties wizard, click the respective icon on the “Graphic
Properties” toolbar.

Fig. 3: Graphic Properties Wizard

Dassault Systèmes 41 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

2.2.5 Perform Product/Part Update

Criteria manual

PreForceCATProductUpdated (1590)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the components of Products or Parts are up-to-date.
Components that are not up-to-date are updated automatically.
In case of CATProducts, the root, all CATParts including their components, and the
constraints are checked. In case of CATParts, only the root component is checked.

Related criteria
 Product/Part Update, page 57

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Part components loaded in visualization mode” list box If components of a product
are loaded in visualization mode, their user-defined properties are not available. Select
an action to be performed in this case:
• “Load component in background”: Part components to be checked are switched to
design mode to make their properties available for the check. Part components that
are not included in the active element selection are not loaded.
• “Ignore component”: Part components in visualization mode will not be checked and
are never rated as incorrect.
• “Mark component as failed”: Part components in visualization mode will not be
checked and are always rated as incorrect.
• “Load component in background (always)”: All components in visualization mode are
loaded in the background. Part components that are not in the active element
selection are loaded, too. Select this option to take into account effects of sub-
components on the components to be checked.

Dassault Systèmes 42 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing
Criteria manual

 NOTE: Q-Checker will not check the update status of parts that are loaded neither in
design mode nor in visualization mode.

“Ignore measure features” check box If this option is selected, the update status of
measure features will not be checked. The measure features will not be updated auto-
matically in this case.

“Ignore analysis features” check box If this option is selected, the update status of
analysis features will not be checked. The analysis features will not be updated automat-
ically in this case.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 43 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

2.2.6 Perform Solid Update

Criteria manual

PreForceSolidUpdate (1591)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether solids have been updated after the latest changes. Solids
that are not up-to-date will be updated.

Background
You can change an already existing solid, for example by changing its parameters. As
long as the model has not been updated, the change has been registered in the history
but is not yet visible.

Fig. 1: Solid not up-to-date (not updated yet) Fig. 2: Solid is up-to-date

Criterion definition

 NOTE: We recommend that you examine thoroughly whether to use this preprocessing
function. Updates should be performed selectively by the designer. Automatic healing
in batch mode may result in unintentional changes to the geometry.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 44 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

2.2.7 Set 3D Window

Criteria manual

StdPerformCurrentWindowDefinition (1288)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
Use this preprocessing criterion to set the 3D window parameters (window type,
scaling factor, ...).

 NOTE
• This preprocessing criterion only takes effect in interactive mode.
• When using this criterion, the “Zoom” button in the Q-Checker analysis window
should not be selected, because the Zoom function would change the window
view again. To set the defined window view, deselect the Zoom button and repeat the
check.

Dassault Systèmes 45 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Set type of window” check box with list box Activate this option to check the type of
the window (that is the type of model projection). Select the required visibility from the
list.

View parameter check boxes and spin boxes Activate the options to set the corre-
sponding view parameters. Specify the required values in the left column of spin boxes,
and the associated tolerance in the right column. If the respective current values are
within the tolerance, they remain unchanged.
“Scale” Enlargement factor
“Origin” Coordinates of the screen center point in relation to the model origin
“Normal vector” Vector normal to the current image plane
“Vertical vector” Vector on the current image plane, directed upwards

Dassault Systèmes 46 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Preprocessing

“Eye position for conical projection” Coordinates of the viewer's position (camera
Criteria manual

point). This parameter is only available if the “Check type of window” parameters is
set to “Conical projection”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Fitting the model to the screen

To fit the model to the screen after checking and healing, select additionally Fit All In,
page 31.

Defined views
In CATIA, you can define, edit and apply views using “View” > “Named Views”.

Determining the view parameters

In most cases, the check parameters for this criterion are not obvious. Follow these
steps to determine the view parameters:
1 In CATIA, set the view according to the specifications.
2 Check the model using this criterion with criterion Current Window View, page 64 using
arbitrary parameter values.
 In the analysis window, the text box shows the parameters of the current view
(Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Listing of view parameters in the Q-Checker analysis window

3 Use the returned values to specify the parameters.

For example, copy the values from the analysis window into a text file, and from there
into the check profile editor.
It is sufficient to configure the following check parameters: “Check type of window”,
“Check normal vector”, and “Check vertical vector”.

Dassault Systèmes 47 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – General

2.3 Norms and Standards

Criteria manual

Use criteria in the “Norms and Standards” category to check various aspects of the
model structure.

2.3.1 General

2.3.1.1 CATDUA V5
PreCatdua (1486)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion starts the CATIA check utility CATDUA V5 as part of the Q-Checker check.
The return codes from CATDUA V5 are included in the Q-Checker check result.
For in-depth information about the CATDUA V5 utility in CATIA and an explanation of
its return codes, see the CATIA documentation (Common Functionalities – Using the
CATDUA V5 and The Table of the return codes detected by the CATDUA V5).

 NOTE: This criterion can be used with CATIA V5 R19 SP3 and later. With earlier
versions, the criterion returns a general error.

Related criteria
 Batch criterion: CATDUAV5 – Priority 1, page 26
 Batch criterion: DataLifeCycle CATDUA, page 29
 Check and clean operation in CATDUA V5: Perform CATDUAV5 Clean, page 33

Dassault Systèmes 48 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Filter” list box The filter controls how to evaluate the selected items in value lists
“Priority 1 / 2 / 3” and the entries in the “Further rules” text box:
“None but” Use only rules selected in the value lists and rules given in the “Further
rules” text box.
“All but” Use all rules that are available in this CATIA version, except those rules
selected in the value lists, and except those rules given in the text box.

“Priority 1/2/3” value lists The selected rules are used or not used, depending on the
“Filter” setting.
The value lists contain all rules available in CATIA V5 R19 SP3. You can add further rules
in the “Further rules” text box.

“Further rules” text box The selected rules are used or not used, depending on the
“Filter” setting. This field is intended for rules that are not available in the “Priority 1 / 2
/ 3” value lists.
Make sure to type the names correctly. If a rule is not recognized, it will be ignored.

Dassault Systèmes 49 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – General

“In case of Enovia V5 models, Ignore specific selected rules” check box and “Ignore”
Criteria manual

text box If this option is selected, the rules specified in the “Ignore” text box are not
applied to models from ENOVIA V5.
When using these checks, CATDUA V5 returns different check results depending on
whether the model is stored locally or in ENOVIA V5.
When using Enovia V5, we recommend activating this option, and to keep all preset
rules in the text box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 50 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

2.3.2 Saved Model State

Criteria manual

Use criteria of the “Saved Model State” category to check whether models are in the
required state.

2.3.2.1 Non-Allowed CATIA Version and Release

StdNonAllowedCATIAVersionAndRelease (1329)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks which combination of CATIA version, release and service pack has
been used last to save the model. If CATIA version, release or service pack do not match
the specification, the model will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Using a consistent CATIA version, release and service pack helps to avoid problems
when exchanging and reusing models.
Because of that, many companies require their suppliers to use a certain CATIA soft-
ware version. This can be ensured by a release management that involves the suppliers.

Suggested solution
• To avoid the problem, use the required CATIA software version to save older models
and when designing new models.
• Use the CATDUA (CATIA Data Upward Application) to update components to the
current software version. Afterwards you might need to updated the model. When
updating the model, inspect them for possible errors.

Dassault Systèmes 51 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
The criterion is fulfilled if the model corresponds to the specifications in the “Version”/
“Release”/“Service Pack” fields, if selected, or if the model corresponds to at least one
combination in the “Allowed releases and service packs” value list.
“Version” / “Release” / “Service Pack” check boxes with text boxes Activate the
respective check boxes to check version, release and service pack of the CATIA installa-
tion that has been used last to save the model. In the text boxes, specify the allowed
values. Specify a number or a relational operator followed by a number.
The following relational operators can be used:

Operator Exampl Version, release or service pack is ...

e

= =12 as given. The operator = can be omitted.

>= >=12 as given or later

> >12 later than given

<= <=12 as given or earlier

< <12 earlier as given

Dassault Systèmes 52 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

“Allowed releases and service packs” value list Specify allowed combinations of CATIA
Criteria manual

release and service pack used last to save the model. The version will not be checked
explicitely.

Example

Service Service
Pack from Pack to

2 all service packs up to 2

2 all service packs from 2 onwards

2 2 only Service Pack 2

0 0 GA (Service Pack 0)

both fields empty: any Service Pack

“Ignore documents created with CATIA earlier than V5R10” check box Documents
created in CATIA earlier than V5R10 contain no information about the CATIA release
they were created with. Specify how Q-Checker reacts when checking such models:
• Select this setting to rate these documents as in order, irrespective of the release.
• Deselect this option to check these documents under the assumption they were
created using CATIA V5R9.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 53 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

2.3.2.2 Non-Allowed Educational Licence

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedEduLicence (1462)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether the CATIA model has been created using a educational
license (ED2). If so, the model will be rated as incorrect.

Background
CATIA educational licenses are provided for education and training and must not be
used for other purposes.

Suggested solution
Select the correct CATIA license in “Tools” > “Options” > “General” > “Licensing”.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
When using an educational license, “CATIA V5 for Student” is displayed in the title bar
(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Indication of using an educational license

Dassault Systèmes 54 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

2.3.2.3 Maximum Document File Size

Criteria manual

StdMaximumDocumentFileSize (1315)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the data size of the model is larger than the maximum
allowed size. In this case, an error is reported.

Background
Models that require lots of memory might cause the following problems:
• Loading and saving models is slower
• Response times for changing a model increase
• Data exchange is more difficult or fails
• The performance of the CAD workstation is insufficient.

Fig. 1: Model data size

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA:
• Delete unused components from the model.
• Split a part into separate models, where possible.
 More information: Assembling a part from several models, page 56

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Maximum Size (in Byte)” spin box Specify the maximum data size in Byte.

“No error message if file does not exist” check box If this option is selected, no error is
reported if no file is available. (For example, this case will occur when checking a model
that has been imported from a database, of which no local file does exist.)

Dassault Systèmes 55 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip
Save the model before the check to use the current file size.

Assembling a part from several models

Prerequisite: In the CATIA settings for external references, the option “Keep link with
selected object” must be active.
You can find this setting in CATIA in “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part
Infrastructure” > “General”.
To assemble a part from several smaller models, proceed as follows:
1 Create or open the part in which you want to assemble the models.
2 Create sections of the part in separate models.
3 Select and copy the entire section using “Edit” > “Copy”.
4 Switch to the resulting part.
5 Insert the sections using “Edit” > “Paste Special” > “As Result with Link”.
 The assembled part with referenced sections has a smaller data size than a model
that contains all sections itself.

Dassault Systèmes 56 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

2.3.2.4 Product/Part Update

Criteria manual

StdCATProductUpdated (1235)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the components of a product or part are up-to-date. If that
does not apply, an error is reported.
In CATProducts, the root product, all CATParts including their components and the
constraints will be checked. In CATParts, only the root component will be checked.

Background
Design changes can affect connecting parts, references and derived drawings, and
therefore also the update status. Non-up-to-date components indicate that the model is
inconsistent (Fig. 1). If a model is not updated after being changed, there may be prob-
lems with the subsequent use of models.

Fig. 1: The Cylinder part component in the Fig. 2: The constraint Coincidence.1 in product Cylinder1.1 is
Motor product is not up-to-date. unresolved.

Suggested solution
• Use the Q-Checker healing function to update components.
• If there are unresolved operations, updating the model may not be sufficient. Trace
the problem back to its origin in the CATIA specification tree, and try to resolve it
starting from there.
• Missing parts have to be loaded.
• Unresolved constraints may be caused by unloaded or deleted reference elements.

Dassault Systèmes 57 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Part components loaded in visualization mode” list box If components of a product
are loaded in visualization mode, their user-defined properties are not available. Select
an action to be performed in this case:
• “Load component in background”: Part components to be checked are switched to
design mode to make their properties available for the check. Part components that
are not included in the active element selection are not loaded.
• “Ignore component”: Part components in visualization mode will not be checked and
are never rated as incorrect.
• “Mark component as failed”: Part components in visualization mode will not be
checked and are always rated as incorrect.
• “Load component in background (always)”: All components in visualization mode are
loaded in the background. Part components that are not in the active element
selection are loaded, too. Select this option to take into account effects of sub-
components on the components to be checked.

TIP: Q-Checker will not check the update status of parts that are loaded neither in
design mode nor in visualization mode.

“Ignore measure features” check box If this option is selected, the update status of
measure features will not be checked.

“Ignore analysis features” check box If this option is selected, the update status of
analysis features will not be checked.

Dassault Systèmes 58 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Update” The healing function updates non-up-to-date parts and products.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Display of the update status of components in the CATIA specification tree:

Icon Description
Part is up-to-date

Part is not up-to-date

Part is missing

Dassault Systèmes 59 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

2.3.2.5 Current Work Object

Criteria manual

StdCurrentWorkObject (1199)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain components of the model are in In Work state: If a
different component has this status, an error is reported.
The following components can be defined as allowed:
• The PartBody itself
• The last child element of the PartBody (in last position of the specification tree
branch)
• Body on the first level
• The last child element of a Body on first level
• any other element of the specified CAA type

Fig. 1: The PartBody is Fig. 2: The last child Fig. 3: A body on first Fig. 4: The last child
the In Work Object element of the level is the In Work element of a body
PartBody is the In Object on first level is the
Work Object In Work Object

Background
A typical requirement for the saved state of a model is that its PartBody or the last
element in the PartBody (Fig. 5) must be the In Work Object.

Example In the Part Design workbench, CATIA displays the model geometry up to the
state of construction for the In Work Object (see the application tip on display options).
For a complete view of the model geometry, the body itself must be defined as In Work
Object. A complete view is required especially if the model is handed over to other
users, or when exporting the model for other applications.

Dassault Systèmes 60 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State
Criteria manual

Fig. 5: The In Work Object is not the last element in the PartBody

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to define the PartBody as In Work Object.
• To avoid the problem, always define the required element as In Work Object when
finishing a design. To define the In Work Object, right-click the element and choose
“Define In Work Object”(Fig. 6).

Fig. 6: Define the In Work Object using the context menu

Dassault Systèmes 61 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“PartBody as In Work Object” check box If this option is selected, the PartBody is
allowed as In Work Object.

“and additionally the last element” check box This parameter applies only if “PartBody
as In Work Object” is selected.
If this option is selected, the last (lowermost) feature in the PartBody is also allowed as
In Work Object.

“List of allowed bodies on first tree level” value list Specify the types of bodies on first
level to be allowed as In Work Object.

“Further allowed elements” check box with list box If this option is selected, the
elements selected in the list box are also allowed as In Work Objects:

Dassault Systèmes 62 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

• “Last element of selected bodies”: The last element in allowed first-level bodies is also
Criteria manual

allowed as In Work Object.

• “Last element of an OpenBody”: The last element of a geometrical set is also allowed
as In Work Object.
• “Last element of an OrderedGeometricalSet”: The last element of an ordered
geometrical set is also allowed as In Work Object.
• “Last element of a HybridBody”: The last element of a geometrical set is also allowed
as In Work Object.
• “Last element of a Body”: The last element of a body is also allowed as In Work Object.

“Allow specific CAA types on first tree level” value list Specify the CAA types of
elements on first level that are allowed as In Work Object.

“Object has to be in” list box Choose the allowed visibility state for the In Work Object:
“SHOW” The In Work Object must be visible.
“NOSHOW” The In Work Object must be visible.
“SHOW + NOSHOW” The visibility state is not checked.
“Show, in case it is not the PartBody” The In Work Object must be visible; the visibility
state of the PartBody is not checked.
“No Show, in case it is not the PartBody” The In Work Object must be visible; the
visibility state of the PartBody is not checked.

Healing settings
“Set In Work Object to PartBody” The healing function defines the PartBody as In Work
Object. Use this healing function only if the PartBody is allowed as In Work Object.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In the specification tree, the name of the In Work Object is underlined.
• The display of the geometry area can be configured under “Tools” > “Options” >
“Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” > “Display” > “Display in Geometry Area”.

Dassault Systèmes 63 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

2.3.2.6 Current Window View

Criteria manual

StdCurrentWindowDefinition (1288)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the parameters of the current window view (window type,
scaling factor,…) comply with the specifications. If that does not apply, an error is
reported.

 NOTE
• This criterion and the healing function are available only in interactive mode. In batch
mode, this criterion is always fulfilled.
• Healing in batch mode is not possible.
• When using the healing function, the “Zoom” button in the Q-Checker analysis
window should be inactive, because the Zoom function would change the
window view after the healing. To set the defined window view, deselect the button
and apply the healing again.

Background
When loading a model in CATIA, the window view is restored to the state when the
model has been saved. If the geometry is fit to the window and oriented consistently
before saving, the model is displayed as expected on opening.

Fig. 1: User-defined view of a model

Dassault Systèmes 64 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

• Use the Q-Checker healing function to set the required window view.
• To avoid the problem, always apply the required window before saving a model. The
required view should be defined in the start model.
• Instead of the healing function, you can use the corresponding preprocessing
criterion:
 Set 3D Window, page 45

Dassault Systèmes 65 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check type of window” check box with list box Activate this option to check the type
of the window (that is the type of model projection). Select the required visibility from
the list.

View parameter check boxes and spin boxes Activate the options to check the corre-
sponding view parameters. Specify the required values in the left column of spin boxes,
and the associated tolerance in the right column.
“Scale” Enlargement factor
“Origin” Coordinates of the screen center point in relation to the model origin
“Normal vector” Vector normal to the current image plane
“Vertical vector” Vector on the current image plane, directed upwards

Dassault Systèmes 66 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Saved Model State

“Eye position for conical projection” Coordinates of the viewer's position (camera
Criteria manual

point). This parameter is only available if the “Check type of window” parameters is
set to “Conical projection”.

Healing settings
“Set Window View” The healing function applies the window view using the specified
check parameter values.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Defined views
In CATIA, you can define, edit and apply views using “View” > “Named Views”.

Determining the view parameters

In most cases, the check parameters for this criterion are not obvious. Follow these
steps to determine the view parameters:
1 In CATIA, set the view according to the specifications.
2 Check the model using this criterion with arbitrary parameter values.
 In the analysis window, the text box shows the parameters of the current view
(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Listing of view parameters in the Q-Checker analysis window

3 Use the returned values to specify the check parameters.

For example, copy the values from the analysis window into a text file, and from there
into the check profile editor.
It is sufficient to configure the following check parameters: “Check type of window”,
“Check normal vector”, and “Check vertical vector”.

Dassault Systèmes 67 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

2.3.3 Configuration
Criteria manual

The “Settings” folder contains criteria for checking general CATIA application settings.

2.3.3.1 Display in Specification Tree

StdSettingsDisplayInSpecTree (1443)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain items in the CATIA specification tree are shown or
hidden as specified. If the visibility of these objects in the specification tree does not
correspond to the specification, this is rated as incorrect.

Background
You can display or hide certain kinds of elements in the specification tree. Visibility is
controlled by CATIA settings (Fig. 1).
Users may be irritated if the settings are not as expected.

Fig. 1: “Display in Specification Tree” settings in CATIA

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to hide or show specification tree elements according to the
specifications.
• Manual Healing:
The corresponding CATIA settings can be found at:
For Parts: “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” >
“Display” > “Display in Specification Tree”
For Products: “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Product Structure” > “Tree
Customization” > “Parameter”
For Drawings: “Tools” > “Options” > “Mechanical Design” > “Drafting” >
“Specification Tree” > “Parameter”

Dassault Systèmes 68 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
Check boxes for the different specification tree object types Specify which types of
specification tree objects to show. If an option is selected, the corresponding CATIA
specification tree element has to be visible. If an option is not selected, the corre-
sponding CATIA specification tree element must not be visible.

Healing settings
“Set requested settings” The healing function activates or deactivates the specification
tree objects as specified in the check parameters.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 69 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

2.3.3.2 Magnitude Length

Criteria manual

StdMagnitudeLength (1200)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether the unit of length in CATIA corresponds to the specified
setting. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
This criterion does not check the unit of length that was used to create the active model.

Background
In the design process in CATIA, dimensions are specified without units of measure-
ment (Fig. 1, Fig. 2). The units are automatically applied using the settings in the
model. Make sure to use the correct units of measurement to avoid the risk of parts
with wrong dimensions being designed, passed on and produced.

Fig. 1: Sketch using millimeters as its length unit Fig. 2: The same sketch using inches as its unit of
length

Suggested solution
To change units of measurement in the CATIA application settings, go to “Tools” >
“Options” > “General” > “Parameters and Measurements” > “Units”(Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 70 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Setting the length unit

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Length Unit (Identifier)” text box Specify the required length unit.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Use a start model in which the correct units are already defined.
• The length unit is shown in many CATIA dialogs (Fig. 4).

Dassault Systèmes 71 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Length unit given in a dialog

Dassault Systèmes 72 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

2.3.3.3 Geometry Scale

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedSettingsForModelsize (1503)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the CATIA geometry scale setting matches the specifica-
tion. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
CATIA provides presets with different geometry scales and tolerance settings for
designing very small and very large parts. Existing parts can be loaded only if their
geometry scale matches the current geometry scale setting in the current CATIA
session. If the model has been created using a different geometry scale, a warning will
be issued (Fig. 1).
Assemblies can only contain parts with matching geometry scale.
Parts accidentally created using a non-allowed geometry scale cannot be processed any
further and must be created again using the correct geometry scale setting.

Fig. 1: CATIA issues a warning when opening a model with a different geometry scale.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Select the required geometry scale in “Tools” > “Options” >
“General” > “Parameters and Measurements”(Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 73 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: CATIA geometry scale setting

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed Geometry Scale, page 996.

Criterion definition

Parameter
“Allowed GeometryScale settings” list box Specify the allowed geometry scale.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• The geometry scale is saved with the model.
• Changing the geometry scale should be restricted using administrative settings.
• For a changed geometry scale setting to take effect, quit and restart the CATIA
session.

Dassault Systèmes 74 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

2.3.3.4 Display Performance

Criteria manual

StdDisplayPerformanceSettings (1507)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether the CATIA 3D display accuracy settings match the specifi-
cation. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
The 3D display accuracy setting controls the tessellation of faces. Tessellation means
that geometrical faces are represented by a network of triangles. The support points of
the triangular mesh are calculated using triangulation.
• A small value for 3D display accuracy results in a representation of faces using a fine
mesh. The distance between the geometry and the triangles of the tessellation is
small, therefore accuracy is high. On the downside, the display of a fine-meshed
tessellation takes longer to build up.
• A high value for 3D display accuracy results in a representation of faces using a coarse
mesh. The distance between the geometry and the triangles of the tessellation is
relatively large, therefore accuracy is lower. The advantage of coarse-meshed
tessellations is that the display is built up faster.

Fig. 1: Tessellated representation with high accu- Fig. 2: Tessellated representation with low accu-
racy/small deviations racy/higher deviations

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set the required 3D display accuracy settings.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Change the 3D accuracy setting in the CATIA application
settings.
“Tools” > “Options” > “General” > “Display” > “Performance”(Fig. 3)

Dassault Systèmes 75 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: 3D display accuracy settings in CATIA

Criterion definition

Check settings
“3D Accuracy” check box with list box If this option is selected, only one type of 3D
accuracy is permitted. In the list box, select the allowed type, “Proportional accuracy” or
“Fixed accuracy”.
If this option is selected, the type of 3D accuracy is ignored.

“Allowed values for Fixed/Proportional 3D accuracy (if activated)” spin boxes Allowed
value range for 3D display accuracy using “Proportional accuracy” or. “Fixed accuracy”,
respectively. Only the parameters for the active type of accuracy in CATIA are taken into
account.

Dassault Systèmes 76 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Set Display Performance settings” The healing function adjusts the 3D display perfor-
mance settings. Specify the required options and values.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Changing 3D display accuracy has an impact on the data size of models. A tessellated
representation (CGR, CATIA Graphical Representation) is added to the model. The
data size of the CGR depends on 3D display accuracy.
• As long as a model has not been modified, 3D display accuracy is not applied when
saving the model using “File” > “Save”. However, 3D display accuracy is applied
when saving the model using “File” > “Save as”.
• When working with V4 models, the maximum deviation for 3D accuracy must not be
set too high, otherwise the model cannot be displayed correctly.

Dassault Systèmes 77 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

2.3.3.5 Machining Settings

Criteria manual

StdMachiningSettings (1525)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain NC machining settings in CATIA match the speci-
fications. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Adjust the settings according to the specifications in
“Tools” > “Options” > “Machining” > “General” > “Tree Display”(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: “Update activity status automatically” setting in CATIA

Criterion definition

Check settings

“Update activity status automatically” check box

• Activate this option if the “Update activity status automatically” setting in CATIA
must be selected.
• Activate this option if the “Update activity status automatically” setting in CATIA
must be selected.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
The activity status of one or more activities can be displayed even if the “Update activity
status automatically” setting in CATIA is not selected. To display the activity status,
click the “Display Status of Selected Activities” button on the “Auxiliary Commands”

Dassault Systèmes 78 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

toolbar (Fig. 2).

Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Manually display the activity status

Dassault Systèmes 79 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

2.3.3.6 View Mode

Criteria manual

StdViewMode (1562)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the CATIA view mode setting corresponds to the specifi-
cation. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

 NOTE: The view mode can be checked and healed only in interactive mode.
In batch mode, the criterion is always fulfilled since no window view is available; also,
an automated healing is not possible.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set the required view mode.
• Manual healing in CATIA: To select a rendering mode, select “View” > “Rendering
Mode”

Criterion definition

Dassault Systèmes 80 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration

Check settings
Criteria manual

“Allowed view modes” value list Specify the allowed view modes.
The table lists the view modes that can be checked. The table also gives the required
view settings associated with the respective view modes. All other settings are arbitrary;
note however that some settings are interdependent and cannot be changed individu-
ally in the “Adjusting view mode” dialog in CATIA.

Name CATIA settings

“Shading”

“Shading with Edges”

“Shading with Edges without Smooth

Edges”

“Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges”

“Shading with Material”

“Wireframe”

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal” (not available)

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal” Activated:

• Edges and Points – all edges, all points
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

“Customize: Material with Edges” Activated:

• Edges and Points – all edges
• Shading – Material

“Customize: Wireframe Without Smooth Activated:

Edges Without Vertices ”
• Edges and points – no smooth edges,
no vertices
Not selected:
• Shading

Dassault Systèmes 81 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration
Criteria manual

Name CATIA settings

“Customize: Wireframe With Half Smooth Activated:

Edges Without Vertices ”
• Edges and points – Half-visible smooth
edges, no vertices
Not selected:
• Shading

“Customize: Shading With Edges With Activated:

Outlines ”
• Edges and Points – all edges
• Outlines
• Shading
Not selected:
• Shading – Material

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal Activated:

Without Vertices ”
• Edges and Points – all edges
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal Activated:

With Hidden Edges With Outlines ”
• Edges and Points – all points
• Outlines
• Hidden edges and points
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal • Activated:

With Hidden Edges With Outlines Without
• Edges and points – no vertices
Vertices”
• Outlines
• Hidden edges and points
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

“Customize: Wireframe With Half Smooth Activated:

Edge With Outlines Without Vertices”
• Edges and points – Half-visible smooth
edges, no vertices
• Outlines
Not selected:
• Shading

Dassault Systèmes 82 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration
Criteria manual

Name CATIA settings

“Customize: Wireframe Without Smooth Activated:

Edges Without Vertices”
• Edges and points – no smooth edges,
no vertices
Not selected:
• Shading

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal Activated:

With Hidden Edges Without Smooth Edges
• Edges and points – no smooth edges,
Without Vertices ”
no vertices
• Hidden edges and points
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal Activated:

With Hidden Edges With Half Smooth
• Edges and points – Half-visible smooth
Edges Without Vertices”
edges, no vertices
• Hidden edges and points
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal Activated:

Without Smooth Edges Without Vertices”
• Edges and points – no smooth edges,
no vertices
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

“Customize: Quick Hidden Lines Removal Activated:

With Half Smooth Edge Without Vertices”
• Edges and points – Half-visible smooth
edges, no vertices
• Dynamic Hidden Line Removal

Dassault Systèmes 83 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Configuration
Criteria manual

Name CATIA settings

“Customize: Shading With Edges With Activated:

Half Smooth Edge Without Vertices”
• Edges and points – Half-visible smooth
edges, no vertices
• Shading
Not selected:
• Shading – Material

“Customize: Shading With Edges With Activated:

Half Smooth Edge”
• Edges and points – Half-visible smooth
edges, no vertices
• Shading
Not selected:
• Shading – Material

“Allowed view render style” check box with list box Select this option to check the view
render style. In the list box, select the required setting, “Parallel” or “Perspective”.

Healing parameters
“Set first allowed view mode as current and/or set view render style” The healing func-
tion sets the view mode that is selected in the first position of the value list.
If the render style setting “Parallel” or “Perspective” has been checked, the healing func-
tion also sets the required render style. Note that CATIA does not consider switching
the render style as document modification. The changed render style is only saved to
the model if the model contains unsaved changes.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 84 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4 Texts
Criteria manual

2.3.4.1 Feature without Annotation Note

StdNonAnnotatedFeature (1413)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether elements in specified paths have one or more annotation
notes with specified content.
If the specified elements have no annotation notes or annotation notes with other texts
than specified, they will be marked as incorrect. If the specified elements do not exist,
no error is reported.

Background
Models can contain tolerances, measurements and annotation notes (Fig. 1). To avoid
delays, the required manufacturing information must be readily available.

Fig. 1: Model with annotation notes

Dassault Systèmes 85 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Path name” value list Specify the specification-tree paths of the elements to be
checked for annotation notes. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Element types” value list Specify the element types of the elements with annotations
to be checked.

“Allowed note-text content” value list Specify the allowed annotation text content. You
can use Regular Expressions.

“All annotation notes must match allowed text settings” check box If this option is not
selected, at least one annotation text of each element must match one text in the
“Allowed note-text content” value list.
If this option is selected, all annotation texts of each element must match the specifica-
tion.

Dassault Systèmes 86 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

INFO: In CATIA, you can add annotation notes using “Einfügen” > “Annotations” >
“Text” > “Text with leader” or in the Functional Tolerancing “ Annotation” workbench
with the “Text with leader” button .

Dassault Systèmes 87 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.2 Permitted Text Fonts

Criteria manual

StdPermittedTextFonts (1287)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a text uses only certain fonts (such as Courier or Times)
and font styles (such as Bold or Italic). If not, the affected elements will be rated incor-
rect.

 NOTE: Some types of elements, for example graphical annotations, contain text whose
font attributes cannot be changed. These elements will be ignored for this check.

A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Texts and measurements cannot be displayed correctly if the required font is missing
on the system.
Annotations in technical drawings have to fulfill certain requirements concerning legi-
bility, consistency and the ability to be archived and photographically reproduced. If
these requirements are not fulfilled, this may lead to problems in subsequent
processes.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace non-allowed fonts.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the element, then choose “Properties”. On the
“Font” tab card, select an allowed text font (Fig. 1).
Alternatively, you can use the “Text Properties” tool bar (Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Changing the text font using the “Properties” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 88 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Changing text properties using the “Text Properties” toolbar

Dassault Systèmes 89 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check only these elements” value list Specify paths and names of the elements to be
checked. If the value list is empty, no check is performed.

“Allowed Fonts Name” value list Specify the allowed font names. Type the names
exactly as shown on the fonts list in CATIA, e.g. “Courier New (TrueType)”.

“Allow only one font per text entity” check box If this option is selected, only one font
per element is allowed. If this option is not selected, more than one font per element is

Dassault Systèmes 90 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

allowed. Note that tables are considered one element.

Criteria manual

“Allowed Font Styles” value list Specify the allowed font styles.

“Font Size” spin box Specify the minimum and maximum allowed font size in millime-
ters.

“Further allowed font size” text box Here you can specify allowed font size values or
ranges of values.
In this field, all values must be in millimeters, irrespective of the default units in
Q-Checker.
• To specify a value range, enter the minimum and maximum allowed value, separated
by a hyphen.
• Separate values and value ranges by semicolon “;”.
• To specify no further allowed font sizes, leave this field empty.

Example The following entry allows all font sizes between 2.5 mm and 4 mm, and the
font sizes 6 mm, 8 mm and 10 mm:

2,5-4;6;8;10

Healing settings
“Set Font” The healing function replaces non-allowed text fonts with the font specified
in the healing text box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To exclude text elements on the sheet background from the check, add a suitable
Regular Expression to the “Path of entity” value list.

^[^\\]+\\[^\\]+\\(?!Background View)

• The list of text fonts available in CATIA for formatting text elements can be
customized by the administrator or defined in a customized environment (Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 91 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Customized selection of fonts in the standards definition

Dassault Systèmes 92 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.3 Selected Text/Dimension Attributes

Criteria manual

StdSelectedTEXTD2ElementAttributes (1251)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the formatting of texts, measurements and FT/A
elements match the following specifications:
• Line decoration (underline, overline, strikethrough)
• Frames
• Font attributes
• Text color
Additionally, the criterion can check attributes of annotations. If the formatting of text
or measurement elements does not match the specifications, the affected elements will
be rated as incorrect.

 NOTE: This criterion can check formatting properties that apply to the entire text or
dimension element, or to substrings (subtexts).
• Subtexts are one or more characters of text element.
• Texts refer to the entire text element.
• Format properties of dimensions are valid for the entire element. A different
formatting of subtexts is not possible and therefore ignored by this Q-Checker
criterion.

Background

Fig. 1: Texts and measurements with attributes

Dassault Systèmes 93 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

• Use Q-Checker healing to apply the specified text and dimension attributes to the
drawing.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”.
Correct the settings on the “Font” and “Text” tab cards, where required (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Changing the text font using the “Properties” dialog

Fig. 3: Changing text attributes using the “Text Properties” toolbar

Dassault Systèmes 94 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Only these Fonts will be checked” value list To check only text in certain fonts, add
the respective font names to this list.

“No scoring for text” check box If this option is selected, texts and dimensions must
not be underlined, overlined, or crossed out.

“No framing for text” check box If this option is selected, texts and dimensions must
not be framed.

“No scoring for subtext” check box If this option is selected, texts and dimensions
must not be underlined, overlined, or crossed out.

“No framing for subtext” check box If this option is selected, texts and dimensions

Dassault Systèmes 95 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

must not be framed.

Criteria manual

“Character Ratio for text” check box If this option is selected, the character ratio for the
entire element must be in the specified value range.

“Character spacing for text” check box If this option is selected, the character spacing
for the entire element must be in the specified value range.

“Character Ratio for subtext” check box If this option is selected, the character ratio for
any substring must be in the specified value range.

“Character Spacing for subtext” check box If this option is selected, the character
spacing for any substring must be in the specified value range.

“Check also annotations” check box If this option is selected, the criterion will also
check annotations, in addition to texts and dimensions. In annotations, Q-Checker will
only check the entire text, as formatting of subtexts is not available for annotations.

“Permitted display mode” list box If this option is active, the display mode of texts and
dimensions is checked. Specify the required display mode:
“Show Value” Show the text or dimension value
“Show Box” Show a box instead of the text or dimension value
“Hide Value” Hide the text or dimension value

“Non allowed color ranges for text” check box with text box If this option is selected,
the text color will be checked. Specify the non-allowed RGB colors (values 0...255) in the
text box.
• single colors, for example 128,128,255
• color ranges, for example 128-255,0-128,0
• several colors and color ranges divided by semicolon, for example 0,0,0;
128,128,0; 128-255,0,0

“Non allowed color ranges for subtext” check box with text box If this option is
selected, the text color of subtexts will be checked. Specify the non-allowed RGB colors
(values 0...255) in the text box.
• single colors, for example 128,128,255
• color ranges, for example 128-255,0-128,0
• several colors and color ranges divided by semicolon, for example 0,0,0;
128,128,0; 128-255,0,0

 NOTE: For some elements, some attributes are unavailable. Unavailable attributes are
ignored.

Dassault Systèmes 96 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Set” The Q-Checker healing function sets attribute values as specified for the check
parameters:
“No scoring for text/subtext check box” Remove all scorings (underlines) for the whole
text.
“No framing for text” Remove frames around whole text elements
“No framing for subtext” Remove frames around single characters or groups of
characters. This setting does not affect frames around the whole text.
“Character Ratio/Character spacing for text/subtext” Set the minimum allowed character
ratio or spacing.
“Non-allowed color ranges for text/subtext” Set the “text color” (RGB value) specified in
the Apply text color healing text box for the whole text if any or all characters in the text
have a non-allowed color. If this text box is empty, text colors remain unchanged.

 NOTE: To make the healings visible, it may be necessary to refresh the display or to
save and reopen the model.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
You can mark several time text and measurement elements at a time to change their
attributes in one.

Dassault Systèmes 97 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.4 Existence and Text Content of Parameters

Criteria manual

StdParameterExistenceAndTextContent (1592)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether certain parameters exist in a model, and whether their
values correspond to the specifications. If not, an error will be reported.
In particular, the following is checked:
• Existence of parameters
• Compare the text content with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the text content with a substring of the model name
• Compare the text content with the text content of other parameters

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
In CATIA, parameters can be used to control geometry elements and texts.

Example This criterion can be used to perform a plausibility check for parameter
values. For example, a parameter “Mass” representing the mass of a workpiece must
have a numeric value that is not zero.

Fig. 1: Parameter “Mass” with value “0” Fig. 2: Parameter “Mass” is not “0”

Dassault Systèmes 98 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition for the parameters” text box Rules for parameters and their values. The
criterion will check whether a parameter with the specified name does exist, and
whether the parameter has the required value (“text to be checked”).

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

NAME "Name"
"Expression"
...
[HEALING ( VALUE = "value" )]
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 99 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
NAMEName of the parameter to be checked. If the parameter must exist, use NAME
MUST_EXIST YES.
If the parameter to be checked does not need to exist, use NAME or NAME MUST_
EXIST NO.

Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 108
HEALING ( VALUE = "value") Optional. Defines the value (value) that Q-Checker
healing applies to the checked parameter. The value must correspond to the naming
rules. If no such value is defined, no healing can be performed.
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 108

“Mark parameters with <Unset> value as error” check box If this option is selected,
parameters without a value are rated as incorrect.
If this option is not selected, parameters without a value are checked as if their value
was an empty string.

INFO: A parameter without value is displayed as “<Unset>” in CATIA.

Healing parameters
“Set parameter content” The healing function replaces non-allowed parameter values
with a fixed value specified in the criterion definition.
The healing function is not available if no healing value has been specified in the crite-
rion definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 100 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Creating naming rules

Criteria manual

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Model name or document name

MODELNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.

Dassault Systèmes 101 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

DOCUMENTNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
MODELNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
DOCUMENTNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the model name or document name, add the following
parameters after MODELNAME or DOCUMENTNAME:
• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters
• Value of a parameter with name “id” in the same model

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "identifier of checked parameter"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "id" [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the parameter value, add the following parameters:
• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters

Healing
A Q-Checker healing is available for this criterion. The healing function replaces an
incorrect parameter value with a correct value. The correct value is defined as follows:

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Expression"
...
HEALING ( VALUE = "val" )
...
END_BLOCK

Where val is the value to replace the incorrect parameter value.

To apply the healing, use the controls in the analysis window, or configure a healing
according to the profile.

Dassault Systèmes 102 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The values of parameters “last_modification” and “update_time” must be equal.

Dassault Systèmes 103 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "last_modification"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "update_time"
ERROR_MSG
"Error: Last modification timestamp differs from update timestamp."
END_BLOCK

2. The length of parameter value “title_block” must not exceed 10 characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "title_block"
"^.{1,10}$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 104 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.5 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Product

Criteria manual

StdParameterExistenceAndTextContentCATProduct (1228)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether certain parameters exist in a product and whether their
content matches the specifications. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Existence of parameters
• Compare the text content with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the text content with a substring of the model name
• Compare the text content with the text content of other parameters

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
In CATIA, parameters can be used to control geometry elements and texts.

Example This criterion can be used to perform a plausibility check for parameter
values. For example, a parameter “Mass” representing the mass of a workpiece must
have a numeric value that is not zero.

Fig. 1: Parameter “Mass” with value “0” Fig. 2: Parameter “Mass” is not “0”

Dassault Systèmes 105 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition for the parameters” text box Rules for parameters and their values.
The criterion will check whether a parameter with the specified name does exist, and
whether the parameter has the required value (“text to be checked”).

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

NAME "parameter identifier"
"Expression"
...
[HEALING ( VALUE = "value" )]
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 106 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
NAMEName of the parameter to be checked. If the parameter must exist, use NAME
MUST_EXIST YES.
If the parameter to be checked does not need to exist, use NAME or NAME MUST_
EXIST NO.

Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 108
HEALING ( VALUE = "value") Optional. Defines the value (value) that Q-Checker
healing applies to the checked parameter. The value must correspond to the naming
rules. If no such value is defined, no healing can be performed.
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 108

“Mark parameters with <Unset> value as error” check box If this option is selected,
parameters without a value are rated as incorrect.
If this option is not selected, parameters without a value are checked as if their value
was an empty string.

INFO: Parameters without value are given as “<Unset>” in CATIA.

Healing parameters
“Set parameter content” The healing function replaces non-allowed parameter values
with a fixed value specified in the criterion definition.
The healing function is not available if no healing value has been specified in the crite-
rion definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 107 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Creating naming rules

Criteria manual

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Model name or document name

MODELNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.

Dassault Systèmes 108 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

DOCUMENTNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
MODELNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
DOCUMENTNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the model name or document name, add the following
parameters after MODELNAME or DOCUMENTNAME:
• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters
• Value of a parameter with name “id” in the same model

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "identifier of checked parameter"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "id" [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the parameter value, add the following parameters:
• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters

Healing
A Q-Checker healing is available for this criterion. The healing function replaces an
incorrect parameter value with a correct value. The correct value is defined as follows:

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Expression"
...
HEALING ( VALUE = "val" )
...
END_BLOCK

Where val is the value to replace the incorrect parameter value.

To apply the healing, use the controls in the analysis window, or configure a healing
according to the profile.

Dassault Systèmes 109 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Erreur: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The values of parameters “last_modification” and “update_time” must be equal.

Dassault Systèmes 110 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "last_modification"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "update_time"
ERROR_MSG
"Error: Last modification timestamp differs from update timestamp."
END_BLOCK

2. The length of parameter value “title_block” must not exceed 10 characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "title_block"
"^.{1,10}$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 111 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.6 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Part

Criteria manual

StdParameterExistenceAndTextContentCATPart (1229)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain parameters exist in a part and whether their
content matches the specifications. If that does not apply, the affected parameters are
rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Existence of parameters
• Compare the text content with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the text content with a substring of the model name
• Compare the text content with the text content of other parameters

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
In CATIA, parameters can be used to control geometry elements and texts.

Example This criterion can be used to perform a plausibility check for parameter
values. For example, a parameter “Mass” representing the mass of a workpiece must
have a numeric value that is not zero.

Fig. 1: Parameter “Mass” with value “0” Fig. 2: Parameter “Mass” is not “0”

Dassault Systèmes 112 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition for the parameters” text box Rules for the existence and content of parame-
ters.
The criterion will check whether a parameter with the specified name does exist, and
whether the parameter has the required value (“text to be checked”).

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

NAME "Name"
"Expression"
...
[HEALING ( VALUE = "value" )]
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 113 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
NAMEName of the parameter to be checked. If the parameter must exist, use NAME
MUST_EXIST YES.
If the parameter to be checked does not need to exist, use NAME or NAME MUST_
EXIST NO.

Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 115
HEALING ( VALUE = "value") Optional. Defines the value (value) that Q-Checker
healing applies to the checked parameter. The value must correspond to the naming
rules. If no such value is defined, no healing can be performed.
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 115

“Mark parameters with <Unset> value as error” check box If this option is selected,
parameters without a value are rated as incorrect.
If this option is not selected, parameters without a value are checked as if their value
was an empty string.

INFO: Parameters without value are given as “<Unset>” in CATIA.

Healing parameters
“Set parameter content” The healing function replaces incorrect parameter values with
a fixed value defined in the check definition.
The healing function is not available if no healing value has been specified in the
naming rule.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 114 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Application Tip
Criteria manual

Parameters can be linked to other parameters using formulas in order to adapt the
parameter values automatically after changes to the model.

Fig. 3: Parameter “Mass” is linked to a formula. Fig. 4: After changing the model, the value of
parameter “Mass” is calculated automatically.

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.

Dassault Systèmes 115 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
Criteria manual

• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Model name or document name

MODELNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.
DOCUMENTNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
MODELNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
DOCUMENTNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the name, add the following parameters:

• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters
• Value of a parameter with name “id” in the same model

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "identifier of checked parameter"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "id" [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the parameter value, add the following parameters after
PARAMETER_CONTENT:

• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end

• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters

Healing
A Q-Checker healing is available for this criterion. The healing function replaces an
incorrect parameter value with a correct value. The correct value is defined as follows:

Dassault Systèmes 116 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Expression"
...
HEALING ( VALUE = "val" )
...
END_BLOCK

Where val is the value to replace the incorrect parameter value.

To apply the healing, use the controls in the analysis window, or configure a healing
according to the profile.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Erreur: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.

Dassault Systèmes 117 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
Criteria manual

a comment.

Examples
1. The values of parameters “last_modification” and “update_time” must be equal.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "last_modification"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "update_time"
ERROR_MSG
"Error: Last modification timestamp differs from update timestamp."
END_BLOCK

2. The length of parameter value “title_block” must not exceed 10 characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "title_block"
"^.{1,10}$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 118 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.7 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Drawing

Criteria manual

StdParameterExistenceAndTextContentCATDrawing (1230)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether certain parameters exist in a drawing and whether their
content matches the specifications. If that does not apply, the affected parameters are
rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Existence of parameters
• Compare the text content with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the text content with a substring of the model name
• Compare the text content with the text content of other parameters

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
In CATIA, parameters can be used to control geometry elements and texts.

Fig. 1: Parameters in a drawing

Suggested solution
• To change parameters, double-click its specification tree entry (Fig. 2) in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 119 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Editing parameters

• Use the CATIA Formula Editor to create missing parameters (Fig. 3).
To open the formula editor, choose “Tools” > “Formula”.

Fig. 3: Creating a new parameter

Dassault Systèmes 120 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition for the parameters” text box Rules for the name and content of parameters.
The criterion will check whether a parameter with the specified name does exist, and
whether the parameter has the required value (“text to be checked”).

Format
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
NAME "parameter identifier"
"Expression"
...
[HEALING ( VALUE = "value" )]
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 121 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
NAMEName of the parameter to be checked. If the parameter must exist, use NAME
MUST_EXIST YES.
If the parameter to be checked does not need to exist, use NAME or NAME MUST_
EXIST NO.

Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 124
HEALING ( VALUE = "value") Optional. Defines the value (value) that Q-Checker
healing applies to the checked parameter. The value must correspond to the naming
rules. If no such value is defined, no healing can be performed.
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.

“Mark parameters with <Unset> value as error” check box If this option is selected,
parameters without a value are rated as incorrect.
If this option is not selected, parameters without a value are checked as if their value
was an empty string.

INFO: Parameters without value are given as “<Unset>” in CATIA.

Healing parameters
“Set parameter content” The healing function replaces incorrect parameter values with
a fixed value defined in the check definition.
The healing function is not available if no healing value has been specified in the
naming rule.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To show parameters in the specification tree, go to “Parameters and Measurements” >
“Knowledge” > “Parameter Tree View” and select the “With value” option (Fig. 4).

Dassault Systèmes 122 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Display setting for parameters in the specification tree

Format of naming rules

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 123 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Expressions for comparing text

Criteria manual

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Model name or document name

MODELNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.
DOCUMENTNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
MODELNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
DOCUMENTNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the name, add the following parameters:

• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters
• Value of a parameter with name “id” in the same model

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "identifier of checked parameter"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "id" [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the parameter value, add the following parameters after
PARAMETER_CONTENT:

• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end

Dassault Systèmes 124 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n

Criteria manual

characters

Healing
A Q-Checker healing is available for this criterion. The healing function replaces an
incorrect parameter value with a correct value. The correct value is defined as follows:

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Expression"
...
HEALING ( VALUE = "val" )
...
END_BLOCK

Where val is the value to replace the incorrect parameter value.

To apply the healing, use the controls in the analysis window, or configure a healing
according to the profile.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 125 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

General requirements
Criteria manual

• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").

• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The values of parameters “last_modification” and “update_time” must be equal.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "last_modification"
PARAMETER_CONTENT "update_time"
ERROR_MSG
"Error: Last modification timestamp differs from update timestamp."
END_BLOCK

2. The length of parameter value “title_block” must not exceed 10 characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "title_block"
"^.{1,10}$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 126 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.8 Existence and Content of Texts

Criteria manual

StdTextExistenceAndContent (1212)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether certain text elements exist and whether their content
matches the specifications. If not, the affected parameters will be rated as incorrect.
In Products and Parts, the following elements will be checked:
• 3D text elements (usually linked to 3D geometry)
In Drawings, the following elements are checked:
• 2D text elements
• balloons, roughness symbols, datum references and datum targets, GDT
(geometrical tolerance)
• Optional: Text in tables and 2D Dittos
In particular, the following checks are possible:
• Existence of text elements with specified element names
• Text content matching a list of Regular Expressions
• Text content matching a substring of the model name
• Text content matching the text content of other elements

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background

Fig. 1: Text element in a 3D model Fig. 2: Text element in a drawing

Dassault Systèmes 127 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

• Use Q-Checker healing to replace characters or strings.

• Manual healing in CATIA:
Change non-allowed text content according to the specifications. Double-click a text
element to edit its content (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Changing the text content in a drawing

• Manual healing of the element name in CATIA:

Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On the “Component
Properties” tab card, correct the value in the “Component name” field (Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Element name of an annotation

Dassault Systèmes 128 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition for the texts” text box Rules for the existence and content of text elements.
The criterion checks whether text elements exist and whether their content (“text to be
checked”) corresponds to the naming rules.
For all text elements in the model:

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 129 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

For a text element with a certain name:

Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

NAME [MUST_EXIST {YES|NO}] "name"
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 130 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
NAME Optional. Name of the text element to which the naming rule does apply.
If a text element with this name must exist, use NAME MUST_EXIST YES. When using
NAME or NAME MUST EXIST NO, a text element with the specified name is not required.

COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string “string”, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison does start. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 133
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 132

“Check also drawing tables” check box Activate this option to check also text in
drawing tables.

“Check also drawing dittos” check box Activate this option to check also text elements
in dittos. In case of an error, the ditto will be marked as incorrect.

“Consider empty strings” check box If this option is not selected, empty table cells are
ignored. Empty text boxes are recognized but cannot be healed using the healing func-
tion. If this option is selected, empty table cells and empty text boxes are recognized
and can be healed using the healing function.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To check only certain text elements (for example text elements on the sheet back-
ground), you can define and apply an element selection.

Dassault Systèmes 131 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Creating naming rules

Criteria manual

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Text element name

If the naming rule applies to all text elements, omit the NAME keyword.
If the naming rules applies to a certain text element, specify the element name with
NAME or NAME MUST_EXIST NO (these keywords are equivalent).

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "Name"
...
END_BLOCK

If a certain text element must exist, specify the element name with NAME MUST_EXIST
YES:

Dassault Systèmes 132 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME MUST_EXIST YES "Name"
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• The content of another text element in the same model

Dassault Systèmes 133 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
TEXT_CONTENT "name" [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

Replace name with the name of the profile.

To compare only part of the content, add the following parameters:
• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters
• Value of a parameter with name “id” in the same model

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
PARAMETER_CONTENT "id" [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

Replace id with the name of the profile.

To compare only part of the parameter value, add the following parameters:
• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters
• Combination of a Regular Expression followed by a substring of the model name or
vice versa.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression" + SUBSTRING_MODELNAME( m, n ) # Variante 1
SUBSTRING_MODELNAME( m, n ) + "Regular Expression" # Variante 2
...
END_BLOCK

Parameters m and n define the position of the first and last character in the checked
root product name.
A Regular Expression before or after the SUBSTRING_MODELNAME( m,n ) expression is
required.
• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

Dassault Systèmes 134 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.
• Regular Expressions for text in tables:
Internally, Q-Checker concatenates the text content of tables to one string, where ^] is
inserted as a separator between cells or rows.
To check the text content of tables using a Regular Expression, insert \^\] to mark the
border between columns or rows.

Example: Table in a drawing:

Regular Expression for an exact match with the text content of the table:

"^abc\^\]\^\]def\^\]ghi\^\]jkl\^\]mno$"

If check parameter “Consider empty strings” is not selected, empty cells are ignored.
In this case, the following Regular Expression also matches the text content of the
table:

Dassault Systèmes 135 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

"^abc\^\]def\^\]ghi\^\]jkl\^\]mno$"

 Further examples of text in tables: Examples of checking text in tables, page 137

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Dassault Systèmes 136 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Examples
1. A text element named “last_modification” must exist and must have the same text
content as text element “update_time”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME MUST_EXIST YES "last_modification"
TEXT_CONTENT "update_time"
ERROR_MSG
"Last modification is not the same as the update time"
END_BLOCK

2. The length of text element “title_block” must not exceed 40 characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME "title_block"
"^.{1,40}$"
ERROR_MSG
"Text title_block is too long (maximum length = 40)"
END_BLOCK

3. The content of all text elements in the model must begin with a number sign #.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^#"
ERROR_MSG
"Content does not begin with a #"
"Modify or delete the text element"
END_BLOCK

Examples of checking text in tables The following three examples require the
“Consider empty strings” option to be selected.
1. The first cell of a table must not be empty.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"^\^\]"
ERROR_MSG
"The first cell in a table must not be empty."
END_BLOCK

2. The last cell of a table must not be empty.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"\^\]$"
ERROR_MSG
"The last cell in a table must not be empty."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 137 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

3. No cell in at table must be empty.

Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"^\^\]"
"\^\]$"
"\^\]\^\]"
ERROR_MSG
"The table must not contain any empty cells."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 138 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.9 Existence and Content of Applicative Feature Attribute

Criteria manual

StdRootFeatureExtension (1395)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a specified Applicative Container does exist and contains
the specified Applicative Feature attributes and values.
Errors will be reported if the required elements are missing or if their attribute values do
not match the specification.

 NOTE: To use this criterion, the Daimler Supplier Package for CATIA must be
installed. Always make sure to use the latest version of this software.

Background
An Applicative Container can store metadata in a model, for example master data such
as supplier, material or weight. There are special applications to read and write Applica-
tive Containers in a model.
Problems may occur if required metadata or the Applicative Container itself is missing.

Fig. 1: Master data in an Applicative Feature

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to create missing Applicative Feature attributes and to correct
the values of existing attributes.
• Manual Healing: Use the required application to edit an applicative feature attribute.

Dassault Systèmes 139 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Applicative Container must exist” check box If this option is selected, the specified

Dassault Systèmes 140 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

applicative container must exist.

Criteria manual

If this option is not selected, the specified Applicative Features and attributes are
searched in any existing Applicative Container.

“Name of the applicative container” text box Name of the applicative container that
contains the attributes to be checked.

“Name of the Applicative Container Client ID” text box Client ID of the applicative
container that contains the attributes to be checked.

“Name of the applicative container feature” text box Name of the applicative feature
that contains the attributes to be checked.

“Additional user information” text box Here you can specify a user-defined error
message to appear in the analysis window along with the default Q-Checker error
message.

“Allowed is only one applicative-container feature” check box If this option is selected,
the specified Applicative Container must contain only the specified Applicative Feature.
The existence of several Applicative Features is rated as incorrect.
Choose “Simple check” from the list box to check only Applicative Container objects, or
“Advanced check” to check also CATIContainer objects.
If this option is deselected and if the Applicative Container contains several features, the
last (lowest) feature in the list will be checked.

“Attribute must exist – Attribute name” value list Specify the attribute names that
must exist in the Applicative Feature.

“Check attribute value” value list Specify the allowed attribute values. If an attribute
value is different to the specification, an error is reported. If an attribute with an empty
value must exist, leave the attribute value empty.
In the “Info” column, you can specify a custom error message to appear in the analysis
window along with the default Q-Checker error message.

“Check attribute value against other attribute value” value list For a text-based
comparison between substrings of two attribute values, specify the following:
“Name of the attribute” Name of first attribute
“Value (from - to)” First and last character position of the substring to be compared
from the first attribute value. Separate the first and last character position by a hyphen
“-”.
“Name of the attribute” Name of second attribute
“Value (at)” First character position of the substring to be compared from the second
attribute value The length of the substring to be compared is given by the substring
from the first attribute value.

Dassault Systèmes 141 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Example The screenshot shows a sample entry for comparing two substrings.

• Attribute “SampleAttr1”, substring from character position 3 to 5

• Attribute “SampleAttr2”, substring from character position 2

AB25514 # Wert von SampleAttr1. Ausschnitt ist "255"

D255V4 # Wert von SampleAttr2. Ausschnitt ist "255"
# Teilzeichenfolgen stimmen überein!

AB25514 # Wert von SampleAttr1. Ausschnitt ist "255"

DE255V4 # Wert von SampleAttr2. Ausschnitt ist "E25"
# Teilzeichenfolgen stimmen nicht überein!

Healing Parameters The healing function replaces non-allowed attribute values with
the specified attribute values. You cannot use Regular Expression for the healing func-
tion.
If a required attribute is missing, the healing function will creates the attribute and
assign the required value.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 142 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.10 Non-Allowed Formula Value

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedFormulaValue (1452)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether formulas in CATIA models contain non-allowed character
strings. In this case, an error is reported.

Background
Formulas and parameters can be used to express dependencies between model compo-
nents.

Fig. 1: Link between parameters using a formula

Example When deleting a parameter, you are alerted if the parameter is used in a
formula. If you still delete a linked parameter, the link to the parameter value is longer
valid, while the formula remains.
CATIA marks the names of deleted parameters in formulas with the suffix
“deleted”(Fig. 3).
With Q-Checker, you can check whether formulas contain the substring “deleted”.

Fig. 2: Alert when deleting a linked parameter

Dassault Systèmes 143 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Formula containing a deleted parameter

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete empty formulas.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Delete or replace incorrect formulas in the CATIA
specification tree.

Dassault Systèmes 144 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Formula part to check” list box Specify which part of formulas to check for non-
allowed character strings – the part right or left of the equal sign, or both parts.

“Not allowed string” value list Specify the strings that are not allowed. You can use
Regular Expressions.

Healing settings
“Delete” option The healing function deletes formulas with non-allowed content.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In the Formula editor, you can search for substrings in parameters and formulas using
the “Filter Name” text box.

Dassault Systèmes 145 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Searching for parameters containing a particular character string

Dassault Systèmes 146 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.11 Text not linked to Parameter

Criteria manual

StdTextNotLinkedToParameter (1464)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether text has an attribute link to a parameter. Additionally, the
criterion can check whether text with an attribute link corresponds to the parameter
value.
If these requirements are not fulfilled, affected elements will marked as incorrect.

Background
The title block of a drawing often contains information that is automatically inserted
from a PDM system, for example “drawing name” or “author”. CATIA uses attribute
links to link the text content to a parameter value. Changes to texts with attribute link
must be made using the dedicated interface. When changing a text with attribute link
manually, the attribute link is lost, and changes in the PDM system no longer update
the drawing.

Fig. 1: Text linked to a parameter

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Link incorrect texts to the correct parameters.

Creating an attribute link

1 Double-click the text element.
 The “Text editor” dialog appears.
2 Right-click the text element, and select “Attribute link” from the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 147 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Context-menu command for creating attribute links

 The attribute link dialog is displayed. At first, no attribute is selected yet.

3 Select a specification tree object (here: a parameter) to which the text should be linked.
 The attribute link dialog shows a list of available attributes.

Fig. 3: Attribute link dialog

4 Select the desired attribute.

5 Click “OK” to confirm the attribute link.

Fig. 4: The parameter value is shown in the text editor.

Dassault Systèmes 148 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Related criteria
Criteria manual

 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Drawing, page 119

 Existence and Content of Texts, page 127
 This criterion is the inverse of criterion Parameter Not Linked to Text, page 157.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Compare texts” check box If this option is not selected, it is only checked whether text
elements are linked to parameters. If this check box is selected, it is checked whether
text elements are linked to parameters and whether the text content corresponds to the
linked parameter value.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Checking attribute links

Right-click the text element and select “Query Object Links” from the context menu.

Fig. 5: Inspect the attribute link in the “Query Link Panel” dialog.

Showing parameters in the drawing specification tree

Dassault Systèmes 149 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

In “General” > “Parameters and Measurement” > “Knowledge”, select “With value”
Criteria manual

and “With formula”.

Fig. 6: Display setting for parameters in the specification tree

Searching for text elements with attribute link

To find text elements with attribute links, use search in “Advanced” mode (Fig. 7).

Fig. 7: Searching for text elements with attribute link

Dassault Systèmes 150 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.12 2D-Component Text Must Match Sheet Property

Criteria manual

Std2DCompTextMatchSheetName (1475)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the content of text elements with modifiable in instance
attribute in 2D components corresponds to the specification:
• Content of text element fully or partially matching the sheet name or sheet format
name
• Content of text element matching a fixed character string or Regular Expression
Text elements with an incorrect content will be rated as incorrect.

Background
For manufacturing and documentation of a part, it is crucial that the title block is filled
in exactly as required. Usually, an external 2D component containing the text block is
placed on the sheet background. Text elements have a unique name and the Modifiable
in Instance attribute to allow for editing with an application without losing the link to the
catalog. The Modifiable in Instance attribute allows text elements in 2D component
instances to be edited individually.

Fig. 1: The highlighted text elements can be edited in the 2D component instance

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace incorrect text content with the fixed compare string
or with the text specified for healing.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Replace any incorrect text.

Application Tip
Q-Checker identifies the 2D component to be checked as follows:
• Q-Checker searches the sheets and views for one or more respective 2D component
instances with the “Modifiable in instance” attribute selected.

Dassault Systèmes 151 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

• If there is more than one 2D component with the specified text element, an additional
Criteria manual

text element must be specified which exists only in the 2D component to be checked.

Dassault Systèmes 152 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual









Check settings

 Prerequisites for the selection of texts to be checked These parameter specify the 2D
components that contain the text elements to be checked.
Each specified sheet must contain exactly one 2D component that corresponds to the
specifications. If any of these sheets contains no or more than one 2D component that
matches the specifications, an error is reported.

Dassault Systèmes 153 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

 “Sheet name” text box Specifies the names of the sheets that contain 2D components
Criteria manual

with text elements to be checked. This field must not be empty. You can use Regular
Expressions.

 “View name” text box Specifies the names of the views that contain the 2D compo-
nents to be checked. This field must not be empty. You can use Regular Expressions.

 “Identifier” value list Specifies the names of the text elements that must exist in the 2D
component. This field must not be empty. You can use Regular Expressions.

 “Number of required 2D-Components” spin boxes Specifies the allowed number of 2D

components in the specified views  that contain the required text elements . Specify
the minimum ("min") and maximum ("max") allowed number. Each specified sheet
must contain at least one 2D component that corresponds to the specification.
If the number is greater than 1, a 2D component must be identified uniquely by param-
eter .
If the number of existing 2D components is not allowed, an error is reported.

 “In case of several 2D-Components, only one must have the identifier” text box This
parameter is required if the number of allowed 2D components  is greater than 1;
otherwise this field may be left empty.
Specify the name of a text element that exists only in the one 2D component containing
the text elements to be checked. An error is reported if the named text element exists in
more than one 2D component matching the specifications in  and .

 Conditions for comparing the strings The “Capture text” value list and “Check text”
value list define the required content of specific modifiable-in-instance text elements.
The requirements in both value lists must be fulfilled.
If both value lists are empty, this criterion will only check if every searched sheet
contains a 2D component that matches parameters  to .

 “Capture text” value list Specify the texts and the sheet properties to be compared:
“Sheet property” In this column, enter a Regular Expression for the sheet property to
be compared (sheet name or sheet format, see ).
“Text identifier” In this column, specify the name of the text element to be checked. If
there is no text element with the specified name, this comparison will be ignored.
“Text value” In this column, specify a Regular Expression for the required content of
the text elements. In place of the substring that must match the sheet property, insert
\1 as the back reference placeholder.

Example: Suppose a sheet must contain a text element that contains the number from
the end of the sheet name.

Dassault Systèmes 154 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

In the “Sheet property” column, enter the following Regular Expression that matches all
Criteria manual

digits at the end of a sheet name:

([0-9]*)$

If the sheet name is “Sheet123”, the expression captures the string “123”.
In the “Text identifier”, enter the name of the text element to be checked. If no matching
text element can be found, the comparison will be ignored.
In the “Text value” column, enter the following Regular Expression to define a back
reference to the respective sheet name substring.

\1

If the text element with the specified identifier does not contain the specified number,
an error is reported.

 “Check text value” value list Specify how to compare certain text elements with Regular
Expressions:
“Text identifier” In this column, specify the name of the text element to be checked.
“Text value” In this column, specify a Regular Expression for the required content of
the text elements.
“Healing” In this column, specify the replacement value used by the Q-Checker healing
function.

 “Property to compare” list box Specify which sheet property to compare, the sheet
name or the name of the sheet format.

Healing settings

 “Correct text value” The healing function replaces the content of incorrect 2D compo-
nent text elements.
• If the text content does not match any of the strings in value list , the text is fully
replaced with the string specified in the “Text value” column. This healing is available
only if the “Text value” field contains no metacharacters except back references.

Example For text value ^Blatt\1$, a healing can be performed.

For text value ^[A-z]+\1$, no healing can be performed.

• If the text content does not match the value in column “Text value” , the incorrect
text is fully replaced with the text specified in the “Healing” column.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 155 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Application Tip
Criteria manual

Making text elements modifiable in 2D component instances

1 On the detail sheet, right-click the reference text element of the 2D component.
2 Choose “Modifiable in instance” from the context menu.(Fig. 2)

Fig. 2: Applying the “Modifiable in instance” attribute

 From now on, you can change the content of this text element in any existing or
newly added instance of the 2D component.

Dassault Systèmes 156 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.13 Parameter Not Linked to Text

Criteria manual

StdParameterNotLinkedToText (1465)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether parameters have an attribute link to a text element
(Drawing) or to a FT/A text element (Product, Part). Additionally it can be checked
whether parameter value and text content are identical.
If a parameter is not to a text element or if parameter value and text content do not
match, an error is reported.

Background
The title block of a drawing often contains information that is automatically inserted
from a PDM system, for example “drawing name” or “author”. CATIA uses attribute
links to link the text content to a parameter value. Changes to texts with attribute link
must be made using the dedicated interface. When changing a text with attribute link
manually, the attribute link is lost, and changes in the PDM system no longer update
the drawing.

Suggested solution
In CATIA, create an attribute link to a parameter.
1 Double-click the text element.
 The “Text editor” dialog appears.
2 Right-click the drawing, and select “Attribute link” from the context menu.

Fig. 1: Context-menu command for creating attribute links

 The attribute link dialog is displayed. At first, no attribute is selected yet.

3 Select a specification tree object (here: a parameter) to which the text should be linked.
 The attribute link dialog shows a list of available attributes.

Dassault Systèmes 157 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Attribute link dialog

4 Select the desired attribute.

5 Click “OK” to confirm the attribute link.

Fig. 3: The parameter value is shown in the text editor.

Related criteria
 Existence and Text Content of Parameters in Drawing, page 119
 Existence and Content of Texts, page 127
 Text not linked to Parameter, page 147

Dassault Systèmes 158 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Compare texts” check box If this option is not selected, it is only checked whether text
elements are linked to parameters. If this check box is selected, it is checked whether
text elements are linked to parameters and whether the text content corresponds to the
linked parameter value.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To display the “Parameters” node in the drawing specification tree, go to “General” >
“Parameters and Measure” > “Knowledge”, and select the options “With value” and
“With formula”.

Dassault Systèmes 159 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: The parameter value is shown in the text editor.

• To find text elements with attribute links, use search in “Advanced” mode (Fig. 4).

Dassault Systèmes 160 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.14 Parameter Must Exist and Content Must Match Root-Feature Name
Criteria manual

StdParamContentMustMatchRootFeatureName (1558)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains certain parameters and whether their
content is fully or partly identical to the root-feature name. If that does not apply, the
affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background

Example The root-element name is defined by a naming rule and consists of several
parts (Fig. 1). To automatically identify and process the model, parts of the name must
match the specified parameter values.

Fig. 1: Parameters with values partly matching the root-feature name

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to add missing parameters and to change incorrect parameter
values.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Change the parameter values. When you add missing
parameters manually, make sure to set the correct parameter type.

Dassault Systèmes 161 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Name”, “Type” and “Text to compare” value list Specify the required parameters and
the text to compare.
“Parameter name” Full parameter name
“Parameter type” Parameter data type Allowed data types are “String”, “Real” or
“Integer”.
“Text to compare (Reg.Ex.)” The Regular Expression must fully or partly match the
root-feature name. Put the substring to match the parameter value in round brackets
“()”.

Example The text to compare is the Regular Expression \)([0-9]+)_. If the root part
name is 123_(abc)456_789, the parameter value must be 456.

Healing settings
“Correct parameters” option The healing function creates missing parameters and
replaces incorrect parameters according to the specifications.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 162 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.15 Formula Must Exist

Criteria manual

StdFormulaMustExist (1567)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether formulas in models contain non-allowed character
strings. If that does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.

Background
You can use formulas to calculate parameter values.

Example The value of parameter MyWeight is defined by a formula(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Example of a formula

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Change the formula in “Tools” > “Formula”.

Fig. 2: Editing a formula with the formula editor

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed Formula Value, page 143

Dassault Systèmes 163 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Required formula string” value list Specify the expressions that must exist in at least
one formula element of the checked model. Give a Regular Expression for the left and
right part of every required formula.
It may be necessary to put parameter names in single quotes ` (grave accent, Unicode
character U+0060) depending on the CATIA setting in “Tools” > “Options” >
“General” > “Parameters and Measurement” > “Knowledge”, “Surrounded by the
Symbol `” check box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
You can configure CATIA to show parameters and formulas in the specification tree
(Fig. 3):
• For Parts: “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” >
“Display” > “Display in Specification Tree”
• For Products: “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Product Structure” > “Tree
Customization” > “Parameter”
• For Drawings: “Tools” > “Options” > “Mechanical Design” > “Drafting” >
“Specification Tree” > “Parameter”

Dassault Systèmes 164 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: CATIA application settings for the display of parameters in CATParts

Dassault Systèmes 165 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.16 Text Content Must Match Sheet Format

Criteria manual

StdTextContentMustMatchSheetFormat (1582)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the content of text elements partly or fully matches the
sheet format name of the sheet on which the text elements are located. If they do not
match, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
To check only certain text elements, apply an element selection.

Example

Fig. 1: The content of text element and sheet format do not match.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Change the content of the text element, or change the sheet
format.

Criterion definition

Dassault Systèmes 166 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Check settings
Criteria manual

“Text name” text box Identifier of the text element to be checked This text element
must be part of the current element selection; otherwise this criterion will check
nothing.
If this field is empty, all elements in the current element selection will be checked.

“Sheet format name (Reg.Ex. with capture)” text box Regular expression for the sheet
format name. Put the substring of the sheet format name to be found as a capture into
parentheses ().

“Text content (Reg.Ex. with captured text)” text box Regular Expression for the text
content to be found Insert the placeholder \1 for the part of the sheet format name that
must exist in the text element.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Example Assume the sheet format name must be either “A4 ISO” or “A3 ISO”, and the
text element to be checked must contain the text “SIZE A4” or “SIZE A3”, respectively.
Use the following Regular Expression for parameter “Sheet format”:

^(A[3-4]) ISO$

Use the following Regular Expression for parameter “Text content”:

^SIZE \1$

Dassault Systèmes 167 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

2.3.4.17 Content of Feature Attribute

Criteria manual

StdContentOfRootFeatureAttribute (1548)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks
• whether the model has certain feature attributes
• whether certain feature attributes of the model have the required values
Errors are reported if a required feature attribute does not exist or if the value of a
feature attribute is not as required.
The features to be checked can be defined using element selection.
Criterion instances created with Q-Checker release 5.5.1 for V5 or earlier, only the root
is checked; element selection is not available.

Background
Special CAA applications can add feature attributes, which cannot be changed manually
in CATIA. For example, the start model version can be added to CATIA models as a root
feature attribute which is not to be changed.

Fig. 1: Root feature of a model Feature attributes are not visible in CATIA. Depending on the CAA applica-
tion used to create the attribute, visible parameters are added to the model, which contain name and
value of feature attributes.

Suggested solution
To create or modify feature attributes, a special CAA application is required.

Dassault Systèmes 168 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Texts

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Attribute must exist – Attribute name” value list Specify the names of feature attri-
butes that must exist in the model.

“Check attribute value” value list Specify the name of feature attributes whose values
are to be checked, and the allowed attribute values.
You can use Regular Expressions to specify attribute values.

TIP: To check the existence and content of a feature attribute, add its name to both the
“Attribute must exist” value list and the “Check the attribute value” value list. If a
feature attribute is only specified in the “Check the attribute value” value list, its value is
checked given that it exists; no error is reported if this attribute does not exist.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 169 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5 Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

2.3.5.1 Model Description

StdModelComment (1113)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the content of the model description matches the specifi-
cations in the check definition file. If that does not apply, the model is rated as incor-
rect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare one or more lines of the model description with a list of Regular
Expressions.
• Compare one or more lines of the model description with a combination of strings.
This combination of strings can consist of fixed character strings and standard model
properties (model name, definition, nomenclature, part number, revision).
• Compare one or more lines of the model description with a Applicative Feature
Attribute value.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
The model comment of 3D models is similar to the title block of drawings. The model
comment may contain information such as recent changes, release notes, or inspection
marks. Some companies require certain information to be included in the model
comment.

Example Further processing of the model with CAD interfaces and other applications
may fail if the model comment contains unsupported special characters.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace non-allowed characters or character strings in the
model description (Fig. 1) :
To replace characters and strings as specified in the check profile, click the “Replace”
button in the Q-Checker analysis window.
In the “Replace these characters…” field, you can specify additional character
replacements that are not specified in the check profile.

Dassault Systèmes 170 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Replacing single characters using Q-Checker healing in the analysis window

• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root component, and change its description in
“Edit” > “Properties” > “Product” in the “Description” field (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Model description in the “Description” text box

Dassault Systèmes 171 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the Model Description” text box The model description (“text to be
checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

LINE ln
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD [MUST_EXIST {YES|NO} ] "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 172 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
LINE ln Line or range of lines of the model description to be checked
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string, after the first occurrence of which the text
comparison starts. If the fixed string must exist, use KEYWORD MUST_EXIST YES.
If the existence of the fixed string is optional, use KEYWORD or
KEYWORD MUST EXIST NO. If the fixed string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text (the entire line) is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 175
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 174

“Empty document description is allowed” check box If this option is activated, an

empty model description is allowed.

“Maximum number of lines” spin box Maximum allowed number of lines in the model
description

Healing settings
“Replace” The healing function replaces the characters in the value list with their corre-
sponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

INFO: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can
temporarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check
profile. To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check
definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 173 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Creating naming rules

Criteria manual

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Range of lines
The model description can have more than one line. Specify the line or range of lines to
be compared:

BEGIN_BLOCK
LINE n [- m]
...
END_BLOCK

Line and range of lines

Notation Text lines to be compared

LINE n Line n

LINE - All lines

Dassault Systèmes 174 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Line and range of lines(continued)

Criteria manual

Notation Text lines to be compared

LINE - n Line 1 to n

LINE n - Line n until the last line

LINE m - n Line m to n

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 175 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• Model name or document name

Criteria manual

MODELNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.
DOCUMENTNAME returns the name of the model without its file name extension.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
MODELNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
DOCUMENTNAME [COLUMN m [NUMBER n]]
...
END_BLOCK

To compare only part of the name, add the following parameters:

• COLUMN m: Substring starting at character position m until the end
• COLUMN m NUMBER n: Substring starting at character position m with a length of n
characters
• Applicative feature attribute value.
The checked model must contain the specified Applicative Container; otherwise an
error is reported.

BEGIN_BLOCK LINE line

...
BEGIN_APPLICATION_FEATURE_ATTRIBUTE
APPLICATION_CONTAINER string
CLIENT_ID string
FEATURE_NAME string
ATTRIBUTE_NAME string
[COLUMN column [NUMBER number]]
END_APPLICATION_FEATURE_ATTRIBUTE
...
END_BLOCK

APPLICATION_CONTAINER string Name of the Applicative Container

CLIENT_ID string Client ID of the Applicative Container
FEATURE_NAME string Name of the Applicative Feature
ATTRIBUTE_NAME string Name of the Applicative Feature Attribute
COLUMN column NUMBER number Optional. Substring of the attribute value defined by
the position of the first character (column) and the number of characters (number) to
be considered

Dassault Systèmes 176 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. In line 5, starting at character 7, there must be an “L” followed by one or more
digits.

Dassault Systèmes 177 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
LINE 5
COLUMN 7
"^L[0-9]+"
ERROR_MSG
"The string in line 5 at column 7 is not L followed by a number."
"Change the model description."
END_BLOCK

2. Line10 or any subsequent line must contain the string “TITLE”, followed by the
model name.

BEGIN_BLOCK
LINE 10-
KEYWORD MUST_EXIST YES "TITLE"
MODELNAME
ERROR_MSG
"*ERROR* "TITLE": not found."
END_BLOCK

3. Any line, starting at position 10, must contain the first 6 characters of the model
name.

BEGIN_BLOCK
LINE - COLUMN 10
MODELNAME COLUMN 1 NUMBER 6
ERROR_MSG
"*ERROR* Model name not found."
END_BLOCK

4. The model must contain an Applicative Container with the specified properties.
Any line of the model description must contain a substring (8 characters starting
from position 2) of the attribute value, or the model description must contain the
string “Draft”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
LINE -
BEGIN_APPLICATION_FEATURE_ATTRIBUTE
APPLICATION_CONTAINER "App"
CLIENT_ID "The_Client"
FEATURE_NAME "Feat"
ATTRIBUTE_NAME "FeatAttr"
COLUMN 2 NUMBER 8
END_APPLICATION_FEATURE_ATTRIBUTE
"Draft" ERROR_MSG "Fehler!"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 178 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.2 Model Name

Criteria manual

StdModelName (1129)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether the model name corresponds to the specification. If that
does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the model name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
As companies usually have to handle huge numbers of files, naming conventions
should be used. The naming convention should allow for the unambiguous identifica-
tion of parts, and possibly their most meaningful properties such as application,
author, creation date, version number etc. This helps to identify files more easily.
Without naming conventions, there may be problems even when using data manage-
ment systems.

Suggested solution
Rename the files according to the specifications.
To avoid the problem, the basic structure of the model name should be used for the
start model already.

Dassault Systèmes 179 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the MODEL name” list box Naming rules for the model name. The
model name (“text to be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

Format:
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 180 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string “string”, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison does start. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 182
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 181

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 181 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
Criteria manual

combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

Dassault Systèmes 182 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

Dassault Systèmes 183 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The model name must be composed of part number and version number,
separated by an underscore.

BEGIN_BLOCK
PARTNUMBER(1) + STRING("_") + REVISION(1)
END_BLOCK

2. The model name must not contain any other characters than A to z and digits.

Dassault Systèmes 184 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
"^[a-z0-9]+$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 185 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.3 CATProduct Name

Criteria manual

StdCATProductName (1217)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the name of a CATProduct model corresponds to the
specification. If that does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the model name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
As companies usually have to handle huge numbers of files, naming conventions
should be used. The naming convention should allow for the unambiguous identifica-
tion of parts, and possibly their most meaningful properties such as application,
author, creation date, version number etc. This helps to identify files more easily.
Without naming conventions, there may be problems even when using data manage-
ment systems.

Suggested solution
Rename the files according to the specifications.
To avoid the problem, the basic structure of the model name should be used for the
start model already.

Dassault Systèmes 186 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the CATProduct document name” text box Naming rules for
CATProduct document names.
The product name (“text to be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming
rules.

Format:
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 187 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string “string”, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison does start. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 189
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 188

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 188 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
Criteria manual

combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

Dassault Systèmes 189 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

Dassault Systèmes 190 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples The product name must not contain any other characters than A to z and
digits.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
"^[a-z0-9]+$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 191 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.4 CATPart Name

Criteria manual

StdCATPartName (1216)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model name corresponds to the specification. If that
does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the model name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
As companies usually have to handle huge numbers of files, naming conventions
should be used. The naming convention should allow for the unambiguous identifica-
tion of parts, and possibly their most meaningful properties such as application,
author, creation date, version number etc. This helps to identify files more easily.
Without naming conventions, there may be problems even when using data manage-
ment systems.

Suggested solution
Rename the files according to the specifications.
To avoid the problem, the basic structure of the model name should be used for the
start model already.

Dassault Systèmes 192 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the CATPart document name” text box Naming rules for CATPart docu-
ment names.

Format:
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 193 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 195
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 194
 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Dassault Systèmes 194 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Case sensitivity
Criteria manual

Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
Replace string with the character position.
• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

Dassault Systèmes 195 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Specify after the keywords which part of the property value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

Dassault Systèmes 196 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The part name must be composed of part number and version number, separated
by an underscore.

BEGIN_BLOCK
PARTNUMBER(1) + STRING("_") + REVISION(1)
END_BLOCK

2. The part name must not contain any other characters than A to z and digits.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
"^[a-z0-9]+$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 197 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.5 CATDrawing Name

Criteria manual

StdCATDrawingName (1218)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the drawing name corresponds to the specification. If that
does not apply, the drawing is rated as incorrect.
The CATDrawing name can be compared to a list of Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Dassault Systèmes 198 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the CATDrawing document name” text box Naming rules for
CATDrawing document names.
The drawing name (“text to be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming
rules.

Format:
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 199 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 201
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 200

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 200 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
Criteria manual

combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following Regular Expressions:

Dassault Systèmes 201 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Dassault Systèmes 202 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Examples
1. The drawing name must begin with the string “DRW”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^DRW"
ERROR_MSG
"Drawing name does not begin with 'DRW'."
"Change the drawing name."
END_BLOCK

2. If the drawing name contains the substring “Rev”, the substring “Rev” must not be
followed by the digit 0.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "REV"
"^[^0]"
ERROR_MSG
"In the drawing name, 'Rev' must not be followed by '0'."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 203 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.6 Non-Standard Feature Name [O-EL-EN]

Criteria manual

StdNonStandardFeatureName (1334)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether features are named consistently. The following require-
ments can be applied:
• Names including their numeric suffixes (if available) must not be used more than
once.
• Number suffixes must form a gapless sequence, starting at 1.
• Number suffixes must be in ascending or descending order.
• The separator between element name and numeric suffix must be used uniformly.
If one or more of these specifications are violated, an error is reported.

Background
When creating features in CATIA, they are automatically named according to the type of
feature and a continuous number. To avoid misunderstandings and errors, features
should be named consistently.

Fig. 1: Features with standard names and modified names

Dassault Systèmes 204 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Features with standard names and modified names

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Component Properties” tab card, correct the value in the “Component name” field.

Dassault Systèmes 205 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore these types” value list Specify the types of elements not to be checked.

“Compare only the same types” check box Activate this check box to compare only
names of elements of the same element type. When this option is activated, the same
element name may occur more than once as long as the respective elements are of
different element types.
Deselect this check box to compare the names of all elements in the model with each
other. In this case, no element name must be used more than once.

“Number must be continuous” check box If this option is activated, number suffixes
are checked for continuous numbering, that is the numbering must start at 1 and must
not have any numbering gaps.

Examples

# Durchgängige Elementnummerierung
Point_1; Point_2; Point_3; Point_4; Point_5

# Unterbrochene Elementnummerierung
# nicht erlaubt, wenn Option aktiv
Point_2; Point_3; Point_4; Point_5

Dassault Systèmes 206 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Point_1; Point_3; Point_4; Point_5

Criteria manual

“Number must be in ascending/descending order” check box Activate this option to

check the order or numeric suffixes. Numeric suffixes must be in ascending or
descending order.

Examples

# Aufsteigend geordnete Reihenfolge

Point_1; Point_2; Point_4; Point_5; Point_6

# Absteigend geordnete Reihenfolge

Point_6; Point_5; Point_3; Point_2; Point_1

# Ungeordnete Reihenfolge
# nicht erlaubt, wenn Option aktiv
Point_2; Point_4; Point_1; Point_3; Point_5

“Allowed separator” text box Specify the character used as separator before the
numeric suffix in the element name. (By default, CATIA uses a point as separator.)
Leave this field blank if you do not want to check the separator; in this case, all charac-
ters left of the numeric suffix are considered to be part of the name.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: Element names with numeric suffix 0 (zero) are rated as incorrect.

Application Tip
The sequence of features in the specification tree can be put back in the order of
creation if the features are in a geometrical set. To revert to the original sequence, use
the “AutoSort” function on the context menu of the geometrical set.

Dassault Systèmes 207 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.7 Element Name

Criteria manual

StdElementName (1264)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the element names in the model correspond to the speci-
fication. If not, an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare element names with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare element names with a combination of strings. This combination of strings
can consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
Models can be created or processed in environments with other language settings. For
a smooth data exchange and better comprehension, avoid special characters and use
expressive names. Special characters may cause problems during automated
processing.

Example Many companies require that element names start with uppercase or lower-
case latin characters (A-Z or a-z) and numbers (0-9). After the first character, the
following additional characters are allowed:

. + , - _ = # ( ) %

Dassault Systèmes 208 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Example of a naming rule: All element names on first level must begin with an underscore.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace incorrect element names.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Component Properties” tab card, correct the value in the “Component name”
field (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Changing the element name in the “Properties” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 209 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Element selection” list box Choose which elements to check:
“Use element selection” Check the model according to the element selection
“Ignore element selection. Check all elements” All elements are checked regardless of
the element selection.

“Definition of the element name” text box Naming rules for element names.
The element name (“text to be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming
rules.

Format:
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"

Dassault Systèmes 210 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

...
Criteria manual

[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
logically combined by "AND".
NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 213
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 212

“Check only” check box with list box Specify the elements to be checked.
• To check all elements, deselect this check box.
• To check only renamed elements, activate this check box and choose “Renamed
elements” from the list box.
• To check only elements with CATIA default element names, select this option, and
select “Not renamed elements” from the list box.
Examples of names assigned by CATIA: Product.8, Pad.9

Dassault Systèmes 211 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Replace, New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed name with the
name specified in the text box.

 NOTE: This healing function is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same
name would be applied to all incorrect elements.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

 NOTE
• Healing of elements within structure components is not supported. This applies to
both healing functions.
• No Q-Checker healing is available for publish names of part components, as they
cannot be accessed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Dassault Systèmes 212 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Case sensitivity
Criteria manual

Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 213 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

Dassault Systèmes 214 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. Element names must begin with character #.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"^#"
ERROR_MSG
"Element name does not begin with #"
END_BLOCK

2. Element names must not be longer than 20 characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^.{1,20}$"
ERROR_MSG
"Element name is longer than 20 characters."
"Limit the name to 20 characters max."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 215 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.8 Result Element Name Must Match Body Name

Criteria manual

StdResultElementNameMustMatchBodyName (1423)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of certain result elements are fully or partly the
same as the names of the associated geometrical sets.
If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Within a geometrical set, the order of components in the specification tree is not neces-
sarily the order of creation: In geometrical sets, the order of elements can be custom-
ized using context menu commands, unlike in Ordered Geometrical Sets or Bodies.
Due to methodical considerations, it may be required that the name of the last compo-
nent (i.e. the result element of the geometrical set) of a given CAA type and the name of
the geometrical set must be equal. This naming helps to recognize the result element,
which is used outside the geometrical set.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to adapt the name of the result element or a specified
substring of the name to the body name.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Component Properties” tab card, correct the value in the “Component name”
field.

Dassault Systèmes 216 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Result Element CAA Type” value list CAA types of result elements to be checked. If the
value list is empty, no check is performed.

“Ignore result elements ” value list Names of result elements excluded from the check.
You can use Regular Expressions.

“Capture text” value list Specifications for the names of bodies to be checked and for
the required names of result elements. You can use Regular Expressions. If the value
list is empty, no check is performed.
• In the “Body name” field, specify a Regular Expression for the name of the body. Put
the substring that must be part of the result element name into brackets.

Dassault Systèmes 217 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• In the “Result element name” field, specify a Regular Expression for the solid name.
Criteria manual

Put \1 as a capture in place of the substring that must correspond to the specified
part name substring.
• An expression can contain multiple captures and back references \2, \3, ...

 NOTE: In order to use the healing function of the criterion, the Regular Expression in
the “Result element name” must not contain metacharacters except back references.
If the “Result element name” field contains other metacharacters, disable the
Q-Checker healing function.

Examples

Body Name Result element name

(.*) \1

This rule applies to all bodies. The result element name must contain
the entire name of the body.

#(.*) \1

This rule only applies to bodies whose The result element name must contain
names begin with #. the substring of the body name which
follows the # character.

([0-9]+)$ Result\1

This rule only applies to bodies whose The result element name must contain
names end in a number. “Result” followed by the number from the
end of the body name.

^Z.* Result[0-9]

This rule only applies to bodies whose The result element name must contain
names begin with Z. “Result”, followed by a number.
No Q-Checker healing is possible
because the expression contains
metacharacters other than back refer-
ences.

Healing settings
“Rename” The healing function adapts the name of the result element or a specified
substring to the body name.
In order to use the Q-Checker healing function of the criterion, the Regular Expression
in the “Result element name” must not contain metacharacters except back references.

Dassault Systèmes 218 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip

How to determine CAA element types and Q-Checker Element Types

You can use Q-Checker functions to determine element types:
• Read element types in Q-Checker check result (for all document types):
Perform a check using criterion Permitted Element Types in Model, page 442, for which
the “Allowed types” value list remains empty.
In the analysis window, all elements are listed as incorrect.
Click the “Element info” button, then select an element in the analysis tree. The
“Element info” dialog shows Q-Checker and CAA element types for the selected
element.
• Write element types to an XML file (CATProduct and CATPart):
Prerequisite: The CATIA environment variable TCAQC_SHOW_TOOLS with value
SPECTREETOXML must be set.
In CATIA, click the “Specification tree to XML” button, and select the save location for
the XML file.
Open the XML file in a text editor. XML element names correspond to Q-Checker
element types, and the caaType attribute value corresponds to the CAA element type.

Example The element named “Body.2” has the Q-Checker element type
“BooleanBody”, and its CAA element type is “MechanicalTool”.

...
<BooleanBody AliasName="Body.2" caaType="MechanicalTool">
...

Restoring the original order of creation within a geometrical set

In the CATIA specification tree, right-click the geometrical set and choose “AutoSort”
from the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 219 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.9 Solid Names Must Match Part Name

Criteria manual

StdSolidNameMatchPartName (1194)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a specified character string in the solid name (checked
name) corresponds to a specified character string in the part name (base of compar-
ison). If the two substrings do not match, an error is reported.

Background
When creating a new solid part, the name “PartBody” is automatically assigned to the
body. To identify parts uniquely, the solid should be renamed according to a naming
rule. This helps to reduce the risk of confusion and facilitates an automatic part list
generation.
Corporate CAD standards often require a special model nomenclature. The compliance
with naming rules can be checked and corrected where necessary with this criterion.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to rename solids with incorrect names according to the
naming rules.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Component Properties” tab card, correct the value in the “Component name”
field.

Dassault Systèmes 220 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Use parameter set” list box Checks with this criterion can be performed based on one
of the following alternative parameter sets:
• Use parameter set 1 to check using fixed specifications – substrings at a fixed
character position and of a fixed length will be checked.
• Use parameter set 2 for a more flexible check definition. For example, you can
compare substrings of different lengths and at starting at different character
positions.
Choose the parameter set to be applied.

Dassault Systèmes 221 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Parameter set 1
Criteria manual

If the model contains only one solid, solid name and part name must match exactly. If
there are several solids in the model, the name string is extended by a number suffix.
“Position” and “Number of characters” spin boxes Define the name string:
“Position”: Starting position of the solid name substring to be checked.
“Number of characters”: Number of characters to compare

“Ignore white spaces” check box If this option is selected, white-space character in the
model name will be ignored when comparing.

Example:
• If this option is not selected, the names “ABCD” and “AB CD” are considered
different.
• If this option is selected, the names “ABCD” and “AB CD” are considered equal.

“Check enumeration” check box If this option is activated, number suffixes of solid
names are checked regarding their format (number of characters and separator) and
regarding continuous numbering.

“Allowed separator” text box Specify the separator between element name and
numeric suffix.

“Number of characters for enumeration” spin box Specify the allowed number of digits
in the numeric suffix.

Dassault Systèmes 222 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Parameter set 2
Criteria manual

“Capture text” value list Specify substrings in which solid name and part name must
correspond with each other:
• Specify a Regular Expression for the part name in the “Part Name” column. Put the
substring that must be part of the solid name into brackets.
• Specify a Regular Expression for the solid name in the “Solid Name” column. Put \1
as a capture in place of the substring that must correspond to the specified part name
substring.
• An expression can contain multiple captures and back references \2, \3, ...
If the value list is empty, entire names must match.

 NOTE: In order to use the healing function of the criterion, the Regular Expression in
the “Result element name” must not contain metacharacters except back references.
If the “Solid name” field contains other metacharacters, disable the Q-Checker healing
function.

Examples

Part name Solid name

(.*) \1

This rule applies to all parts. The solid name must contain the entire
part name.

#(.*) \1

This rule only applies to bodies whose The solid name must contain the
names contain the character #. substring of the body name which
follows the # character.

([0-9]+)$ Solid\1

This rule only applies to parts whose The solid name must contain “Solid”
names end in a number. followed by the number from the end of
the part name.

^Z.* Solid[0-9]

This rule only applies to parts whose The result element name must contain
names begin with Z. “Solid”, followed by a number.
No Q-Checker healing is possible
because the expression contains
metacharacters other than back refer-
ences.

Dassault Systèmes 223 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

“At least one condition must match” check box If this option is selected, every solid
must fulfill at least one of the rules in the “Capture text” value list.
If this option is not selected, every solid must fulfill all rules in the “Capture text” value
list.

Healing Parameters
“Rename” The healing function depends on the parameter set that has been selected
for this criterion.
• Parameter Set 1:
The healing function changes solid names that do not match the part name or the
specified enumeration. If there are solid names matching the string but with no
continuous numbering, healing will close the numbering gaps.
With this parameter set, only the entire name can be changed, substrings cannot be
changed individually.

Example Assume the part is AXLE.

The model contains 4 solids: AXLE_001, AXLE_002, AXLE_004 und AXLE_005.
The healing function renames AXLE_005 to AXLE_003.

• Parameter Set 2:
The healing function replaces the checked named entirely with the name of the base
of comparison, according to the value of parameter “Capture text”.
If the “Capture text” value list contains more than one entry, no Q-Checker healing
can be performed.
In order to use the Q-Checker healing function of the criterion, the Regular Expression
in the “Solid name” must not contain metacharacters except back references.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 224 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.10 Sheet Name

Criteria manual

StdDraftName (1120)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether drawing sheet names correspond to the specification. If
not, an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the sheet name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the sheet name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings
can consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background

Example Corporate CAD rules may include naming rules for drawing sheets.
Sheet names must end with three digits to be identified by a archiving tool.

Fig. 1: “Sheet.2” does not correspond to the naming rule

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to rename incorrectly named sheets according to the
specification.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Sheet” tab card, correct the value in the “Name” field (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 225 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Changing the sheet name using the “Properties” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 226 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the sheet name” text box
The sheet name (“text to be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

Format
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 227 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

BEGIN_BLOCK ... END_BLOCK Start and end of a naming rule. Several naming rules are
Criteria manual

logically combined by "AND".

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 230
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.

“Sheet name has to be unique” check box If this option is selected, all sheet names
must be unique. Sheets with identical names are rated as incorrect.
If this option is not selected, the same sheet name is allowed for more than one sheet.

Healing settings
“Replace: New identifier” The healing function replaces a non-allowed sheet name with
the name specified in the text box.
This healing option is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same name would
be applied to all views.

“Replace these characters” When using individual healing in the analysis window, you
can specify further character and string replacements, which are not stored in the crite-
rion definition.
The healing function replaces the characters and substrings in the value list with their
corresponding replacement characters and substrings.
If the “Sheet name has to be unique” option is selected, this healing function can be
used only for a single incorrect sheet name.
For batch checks, this healing function is inactive.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 228 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Application Tip
Criteria manual

Linking text to a parameter

The content of text elements can be linked to a parameter using an attribute link, which
causes the text to update automatically when changing the parameter (Fig. 3).
 See Suggested solution, page 147

Fig. 3: Linking the sheet number in the title block to the sheet name

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Dassault Systèmes 229 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Case sensitivity
Criteria manual

Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following Regular Expressions:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 230 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The 2D component name must end with the string “Detail”.

Dassault Systèmes 231 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Detail$"
ERROR_MSG
"2D component name does not end on 'Detail'."
"Change the detail sheet name."
END_BLOCK

2. The 2D component name must contain the word “Component” followed by digits.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Component[0-9]+"v
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 232 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.11 Detail-Sheet Name

Criteria manual

StdDetailSheetName (1207)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of detail sheets of a drawing correspond to the
specifications. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to rename incorrectly named detail sheets according to the
specification.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Sheet” tab card, correct the value in the “Name” field (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Changing the sheet name in the “Properties” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 233 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the detail sheet name” The detail sheet name (“text to be checked”) is
checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 234 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 237
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 235

Healing settings
“Replace, New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

 NOTE: This healing function is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same
name would be applied to all incorrect elements.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

Dassault Systèmes 235 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 236 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
Criteria manual

entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following Regular Expressions:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.

Dassault Systèmes 237 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
Criteria manual

• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.

• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The detail sheet name must end with the string “Detail”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Detail$"
ERROR_MSG
"Detail sheet name does not end on 'Detail'."
"Change the detail sheet name."
END_BLOCK

2. The detail sheet name must contain the word “Sheet” followed by digits.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Sheet[0-9]+"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 238 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.12 View Name

Criteria manual

StdViewName (1122)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether view names in a drawing correspond to the specification.
If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
The names can be compared to a list of Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
To use multiple views in a drawing efficiently, view names should be indicative of the
view content (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: View names in the specification tree

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace non-allowed character strings in view names.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “View” tab card, correct the value in the “Name” field (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 239 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Changing a view name in the “Properties” dialog.

Dassault Systèmes 240 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the axis system name” text box The model name (“text to be checked”)
is checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 241 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 244
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.

Healing settings
“Replace, New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

 NOTE: This healing option is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same name
would be applied to all views.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

TIP: When using individual healing in the analysis window, you can temporarily define
additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile. The specifi-
cations made in this window must not contradict the check definition of the criterion.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

Dassault Systèmes 242 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 243 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
Criteria manual

entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following Regular Expressions:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.

Dassault Systèmes 244 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
Criteria manual

• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.

• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The view name must begin with the string “View”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^View"
ERROR_MSG
"View does not start with 'View'."
"Change the name."
END_BLOCK

2. The view name must contain the word “View” followed by digits.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"View[0-9]+"v
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 245 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.13 Detail-View Name

Criteria manual

StdDetailViewName (1208)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the detail name corresponds to the specification. If that
does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
The names can be compared to a list of Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background

Example Names of details (2D components) may only contain certain characters.
Certain other characters cannot be displayed correctly.

Fig. 1: Detail name contains a special character.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace non-allowed character strings in view names.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”.
Correct the value in the “2D Component” field.

Dassault Systèmes 246 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition for the parameters” text box Naming rules for the names of 2D compo-
nents.
Syntax of naming rules in criterion 2D Component name

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 247 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 250
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.

Healing settings
“Replace, Names” The healing function replaces a non-allowed name with the name
specified in the text box.

 NOTE: This healing function is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same
name would be applied to all incorrect elements.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

Dassault Systèmes 248 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 249 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
Criteria manual

entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following Regular Expressions:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.

Dassault Systèmes 250 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
Criteria manual

• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.

• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The 2D component name must end with the string “Detail”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"Detail$"
ERROR_MSG
"2D component name does not end on 'Detail'."
"Change the detail sheet name."
END_BLOCK

2. The 2D component name must contain the word “Component” followed by digits.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"View[0-9]+"v
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 251 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.14 View Name Must Match Sheet Name

Criteria manual

StdViewNameMatchSheetName (1367)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the view name (checked name) corresponds to the sheet
name (base of comparison). Entire names or substrings can be compared with each
other. If the strings are different, an error is reported.

Background
Some methods require that the name of a certain view corresponds to the sheet name.
This allows applications to automatically select and process this view.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace non-allowed character strings in view names.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose Properties. On
the “View” tab card, correct the value in the “View name” field.

Dassault Systèmes 252 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Concerning views” list box Choose whether one or all view names must match the
specification.

“Capture text” value list If no definition has been entered in the value list, the entire
names will be checked whether they match.
Specify substrings in which view name and sheet name must correspond with each
other:
• Specify a Regular Expression for the sheet name in the “Sheet Name” column. Put the
substring that must be part of the view name into brackets.
• Specify a Regular Expression for the view name in the “View Name” column. Put \1 as
a capture in place of the substring that must correspond to the specified substring of
the sheet name.
You can specify additional pairs of expressions to compare several substrings.
Using Regular Expressions, you can specify the starting position of substrings to be
compared in the checked name and base of comparison.

TIP: You can use Regular Expressions with captures to specify substrings.

Example
Sheet: D_1_XYZ

View: VD1589
View: VD1666
Assume the sheet name is D_1_XYZ.

Dassault Systèmes 253 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• The view name must start with the letter V.

Criteria manual

• At position 2, the first character of the sheet name is required.

• At position 3, the digit from the third position of the sheet name is required, followed
by an arbitrary digit.
Hence, the expression to be specified in the left box would be:

^([A-Z]).([0-9]+).*

this means the first character of the sheet name can be any character A to Z, followed by
one or more digits, and arbitrary character afterwards.
In the right box the following expression is to be written:

^V\1\2([0-9])+

this means
• The name must begin with the letter V.
• the next character is the character from position 1 of the sheet name (a capture of the
first expression in brackets)
• the next character is the character from position 3 of the sheet name (a capture of the
2nd expression in brackets).
• followed by one or more digits.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 254 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.15 Product Component Name

Criteria manual

StdProductComponentName (1234)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of product components correspond to the
specification. If that does not apply, the affected components are rated as incorrect.
The names can be compared to a list of Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
For better clarity, it makes sense to name products and product components according
to a common naming rule.

Fig. 1: Product component names. Part number and instance name (in brackets) are shown.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the component, and choose “Properties”. In the
“Properties”dialog, change the component name or part number.

Dassault Systèmes 255 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the product component name” text box The product component name
(“text to be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

Format:
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.

Dassault Systèmes 256 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
Criteria manual

the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 259
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 257

“Component Name to be checked:” list box Choose which component name to check:
• Component instance name
• Part number (reference name)
• instance name and part number

“Exceptions” list box Here you can specify exceptions. The selected types of compo-
nents will be ignored when checking component names.

INFO: The different types of components can be recognized by their icons in the CATIA
specification tree:

Part Component

Product Component

Shape Component

Structure Component

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

Dassault Systèmes 257 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 258 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
Criteria manual

entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of a Regular Expression followed by a substring of the model name or

vice versa.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression" + SUBSTRING_MODELNAME( m, n ) # Variante 1
SUBSTRING_MODELNAME( m, n ) + "Regular Expression" # Variante 2
...
END_BLOCK

Parameters m and n define the position of the first and last character in the checked
root product name.
A Regular Expression before or after the SUBSTRING_MODELNAME( m,n ) expression is
required.
• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 259 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

Dassault Systèmes 260 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The instance names of product component must begin with the first 10 characters
of the root product name, followed by the string “_CMP_” and further characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
SUBSTRING_MODELNAME(1,10) + "_CMP_.*"
END_BLOCK

2. The instance names of product components must contain the string “_v” followed
by the version number of the root product.

# Name muss "_v" enthalten

BEGIN_BLOCK
"_v"
END_BLOCK

# Im Namen muss auf "_v" die Versionsnummer des Hauptprodukts folgen

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "_v"
REVISION(1)
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 261 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.16 Coherence between Product Component Name and associated File

Criteria manual

Name
StdComponentNameMatchFileName (1205)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether instance names and/or reference names of product
components correspond to the components' part numbers (reference names). If that
does not apply, the affected components are rated as incorrect.

Background
Product files contain links to component files and constraints for these components.
They do not contain any geometry. Parts that have been renamed or moved in the file
system cannot be found anymore when loading a related product.
Using an appropriate naming rule helps to identify related parts and products.

Suggested solution
To avoid problems, use appropriate naming rules to indicate the relation between prod-
ucts, parts and instances.

Dassault Systèmes 262 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Components to be checked” value list Specify which types of components to check.

Kontrollkästchen “Check only substring (start position and length)” with spin boxes
Select this option to check a substring at a certain position within the component name
instead of the full name. In the spin boxes, define the start position and the length of
the substring.

Example In the following example, the substrings with start position 6 and length 4 are
equal:

Part_1234xyz
File_123456.CATPart

“Compared strings are not case sensitive” check box Select this option to ignore differ-
ences in uppercase and lowercase writing.

“Component Name to be checked” list box Choose which component name to check:
• Component instance name

Dassault Systèmes 263 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• Part number (reference name)

Criteria manual

• instance name and part number

 NOTE: If a component is in visualization mode, only its instance name can be checked.
In design mode, both names can be checked.

“Part components loaded in visualization mode” list box When checking a product
with parts in visualization mode, user-defined properties of parts in visualization mode
are not available. Choose one of the following actions:
“Load component in background” When loading a document in the background, its
properties become available and the check can be performed without restrictions.
“Ignore component” Parts in visualization mode are ignored and generally rated as
correct.
“Mark component as failed” Parts in visualization mode will not be checked and
generally rated as incorrect.

“In case of a part check only if the path matches the following expression” text box
Specify path and name of the parts to be checked. You can use Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 264 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.17 Instance Name Must Match Part Number

Criteria manual

StdInstanceNameMustMatchPartName (1447)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks the names of components (parts, products) in a product on the
following:
• Correspondence between part name and instance name (with or without suffix)
• gapless numbering of components with equal part numbers (optional)
• Continuous order of components with equal part numbers (optional)
Errors are reported for any violated partial check.

INFO
• The instance name of a component is shown in brackets. The instance name
indicates the use of a part component that may be referenced several times.
• In CATIA, you can configure in which order part number and instance name are
displayed.

Example The example in Fig. 1 contains the following errors:

• An instance name does not correspond to the part number.
• The instances of a referenced part are not numbered continuously.
• Components with same part numbers are not ordered continuously within the
product.

Fig. 1: Specification tree with incorrect naming, Fig. 2: Specification tree after correcting all errors
numbering and order

Dassault Systèmes 265 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Background
Criteria manual

For better clarity of the product structure, instance and part number should be equal.
The structure is even clearer if instance names are numbered continuously and grouped
by part number.

Suggested solution
• Manual healing of the instance name in CATIA: Mark the component and change its
instance name in “Edit” > “Properties” in the “Instance Name” field.
• Manual healing of the order of components in CATIA: Choose “Edit” >
“Components” > “Graph Tree Reordering”.
• Use Q-Checker healing to rearrange and number components correctly. Note
however that links may break (see healing parameters).
• When inserting components, make sure that numbering is continuous and that
components are ordered as required.

Dassault Systèmes 266 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Part of instance name before point must match part number” check box Activate this
option if the portion of the instance name left of the separator must match the part
number. The criterion is also violated if the instance name contains no separator.
Deselect this option if the entire instance name (including separator and numbering)
must match the part number.

Example If the present option is selected, instance names are rated as follows:

Instance name Part number Result

Part1.1 Part1 In order

Part2.1 Part2 In order

Part11.1 Part1 Error: The portion of the instance name

before the point (“Part11”) does not
match the part number (“Part1”).

Part1 Part1 Error: The instance name contains no

point.

Dassault Systèmes 267 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

“Continuous numbering for components with identical part number” check box Acti-
Criteria manual

vate this option if components with identical part number must be numbered continu-
ously. Deselect this option if an arbitrary numbering is allowed.

Example Continuous numbering of components

Part1.1
Part1.2
Part1.3

Example No continuous numbering of components

Part1.1
Part1.4
Part1.3

“Continuous order of components with equal part numbers” check box Activate this
option if components with identical part number must be in continuous order.
Deselect this option if components with identical part numbers do not need to be in
continuous order.

Example Continuous order of components

Product1.2
Product2.2
Part1.3
Part1.4
Part2.1
Part2.2

Example No continuous order of components

Part2.1
Part1.4
Part2.2
Product2.2
Part1.3
Product1.2

Dassault Systèmes 268 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

“Part components loaded in visualization mode” list box When checking a product
Criteria manual

with part components in visualization mode, user-defined properties of parts in visual-

ization mode are not available. Specify how to handle part components in visualization
mode:
“Load component in background” When loading a document in the background, its
properties become available. The check can be performed without restrictions.
“Ignore component” Parts in visualization mode are ignored and generally rated as
correct.
“Mark component as failed” Parts in visualization mode will not be checked and
generally rated as incorrect.

“Check only root component of CATProducts” check box Select this option to check
only the root component of a CATProduct and the components on the top level of the
specification tree. Components on lower levels of the specification tree do not belong to
the element selection.
The corresponding setting “Check only root component of CATProducts” in the
element selection definition does not apply to this criterion.

Healing settings
“Heal incorrect components” The healing function corrects component names
according to the specifications. Healing is only available for checked properties.
If “Continuous order of components with equal part numbers” is selected, components
will be arranged in continuous order and according to their numbering.

CAUTION: If components are renamed or moved with Q-Checker healing, existing

links between components will become broken.

 NOTE: The Q-Checker healing function cannot rename direct child elements of struc-
ture components. When you apply the healing, an error message is shown in the anal-
ysis window.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 269 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.18 Root-Product Name

Criteria manual

StdRootProductName (1225)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the root product name matches the specifications. If not,
an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare element names with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare element names with a combination of strings. This combination of strings
can consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
If naming rules are not observed, there may be problems when reusing the model.

Examples
• Names can be assigned according to fixed rules so that important information can be
inferred directly from the name.
• Only a certain set of characters may be used in the name to ensure that the data can
be processed in subsequent steps. Some applications cannot handle file names
containing special characters.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace non-allowed fonts.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the root element of the product, and choose
“Properties”. On the “Product” tab card, correct the value in the “Part number” field.

Dassault Systèmes 270 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the Root Product Name” The root product name (“text to be checked”)
is checked for conformance with naming rules.

Format
BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 271 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 274
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.

Healing settings
“Replace, New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

 NOTE: This healing function is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same
name would be applied to all incorrect elements.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

 NOTE: For a CATIA default installation, the display name is composed of the title, one
blank space and the review property of the model. The healing functions for this crite-
rion apply to the title, but not to the model revision property.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

 Creating naming rules, page 273

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 272 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Application Tip
Criteria manual

Checking in product context

In a product, only the root product is checked. Use product component selection in
Q-Checker to check also product components in product context.

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 273 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Replace col with the character position.

Criteria manual

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Dassault Systèmes 274 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Criteria manual

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:

• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.

Dassault Systèmes 275 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
Criteria manual

a comment.

Examples
1. The root product name must not contain blank spaces.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"\s"
END_BLOCK

2. In the root product name, the string “Env” must be followed only by characters A to
z.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "Env"
"^[A-z]+$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 276 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.19 Root-Part Name (Part Number)

Criteria manual

StdRootPartName (1224)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the root-part name, that is the part number, matches the
specifications. If not, an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare element names with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare element names with a combination of strings. This combination of strings
can consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
If naming rules are not observed, there may be problems when reusing the model.
Models cannot be attributed to the respective projects based on their names. Some
applications cannot handle file names containing special characters.

Example
• Names can be assigned according to fixed rules so that important information can be
inferred directly from the name.
• Only a certain set of characters may be used in the name to ensure that the data can
be processed in subsequent steps.

Dassault Systèmes 277 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Root-Part Name

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace non-allowed character strings in the root part name.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the root element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Product” tab card, correct the value in the “Part number” field.

Dassault Systèmes 278 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the root part name” text box The root part name (“text to be checked”) is
checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
match the text to be checked.
NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.

Dassault Systèmes 279 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
Criteria manual

the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 282
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 280

Healing settings
“Replace: New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

 NOTE: This healing function is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same
name would be applied to all incorrect elements.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

 NOTE: For a CATIA default installation, the display name is composed of the title, one
blank space and the review property of the model. The healing functions for this crite-
rion apply to the title, but not to the model revision property.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

Dassault Systèmes 280 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 281 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
Criteria manual

entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Dassault Systèmes 282 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The root part name must not contain blank spaces.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"\s"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 283 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2. In the root part name, the string “Env” must be followed only by characters A to z.
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "Env"
"^[A-z]+$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 284 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.20 Root-Product Name Must Match CATProduct Name

Criteria manual

StdRootProductNameMatchFileName (1227)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the root product name (checked name) corresponds fully
or partly to the file name (base of comparison). If that does not apply, the model is
rated as incorrect.

Background
Using suitable naming conventions helps to manage large amounts of CAD data.

Fig. 1: Root product name in the specification tree Fig. 2: Root part name in the “Properties” dialog
(marked red) and file name (marked yellow) (marked red)

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the component and change its name in “Edit” > “Prop-
erties” in the “Part Number” field.

Dassault Systèmes 285 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Capture text” value list Specify substrings that must be part of both the file name and
the root product name.
• In the “File name” column, specify the required file name using a Regular Expression.
To use parts of the file name as base of comparison, you can set captures in the
Regular Expression.
• Specify a Regular Expression for the root product name in the “Root product name”
column. Put \1 as a capture in place of the substring that must correspond to the
specified file name substring.
• An expression can contain multiple captures and back references \2, \3, ...
If file name and root product name must be identical, leave this value list empty.

 NOTE: In order to use the healing function of the criterion, the Regular Expression in
the “Root product name” must not contain metacharacters except back references.
If the “Root product name” field contains other metacharacters, disable the Q-Checker
healing function.

Examples

Dassault Systèmes 286 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

file name Root-Product Name

(.*) \1

The file name is arbitrary. The root product name must contain the
entire file name.

#(.*) \1

The file name must contain the character The root product name must contain the
#. substring of the body name which
follows the # character.

([0-9]+)$ Product\1

The file name must end in a number. The root product name must contain
“Product” followed by the number from
the end of the file name.

^Z.* Product[0-9]

The file name must begin with the letter The root product name must contain
Z. “Product”, followed by a number.
No Q-Checker healing is possible
because the expression contains
metacharacters other than back refer-
ences.

“At least one condition must match” check box If this option is activated, at least one
condition in the “Capture text” value list must be fulfilled.
If this option is not selected, all conditions in the “Capture text” value list must be
fulfilled.

Healing settings
“Rename” The healing function replaces the entire name with the name from the base
of comparison as specified by the Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: Q-Checker healing cannot be used to change substrings.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 287 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.21 Root Part Name (Part Number) Must Match CATPart Name
Criteria manual

StdRootPartNameMatchFileName (1226)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the root part name (checked name) corresponds fully or
partly to the file name (base of comparison). If that does not apply, the model is rated
as incorrect.

Background
Naming rules should be used to facilitate handling large amounts of CAD data. Without
appropriate naming rules, the use of data management systems may lead to funda-
mental problems.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to replace root part name with the entire file name or with a
substring of the file name.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root component and change its part number in
“Edit” > “Properties”.

Dassault Systèmes 288 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Capture text” value list Specify substrings that must be part of both the file name and
the root part name.
In the “File name” column, specify the required file name using a Regular Expression.
To use substrings of the file name as base of comparison, you can set captures in the
Regular Expression.
In the “Root part name” column, specify the required name using a Regular Expression.
Insert a back reference to a capture in place of the substring that must correspond to a
substring of the file name.
If file name and root part name must be identical, leave this value list empty.

 NOTE: In order to use the healing function of the criterion, the Regular Expression in
the “Root part name” must not contain metacharacters except back references.
If the “Root part name” field contains other metacharacters, disable the Q-Checker
healing function.

Examples

Dassault Systèmes 289 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

file name Root-Part Name

(.*) \1

The file name is arbitrary. The root part name must contain the
entire file name.

#(.*) \1

The file name must contain the character The root part name must contain the
#. substring of the file name which follows
the # character.

([0-9]+)$ _\1

The file name must end in a number. The root product name must contain “_”
followed by the number from the end of
the file name.

^Z.* Result[0-9]

The file name must begin with the letter The root part name must contain “_”,
Z. followed by a number.
No Q-Checker healing is possible
because the expression contains
metacharacters other than back refer-
ences.

“At least one condition must match” check box If this option is selected, at least one
condition in the “Capture text” value list must be fulfilled.
If this option is not selected, all conditions in the “Capture text” value list must be
fulfilled.

Healing settings
“Rename” The healing function replaces the root part name with the entire file name.

“Use filename until character” The healing function replaces the name with a substring
of the file name until the first occurrence of the character specified in the text box.

Example Assume an underscore _ is specified; the file name of the checked model is
A234_5_1.CATPart. The healing function sets the substring A234 as new root part
name.

 NOTE: Q-Checker healing cannot be used to change substrings.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 290 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.22 Model Revision

Criteria manual

StdRevisionStandardProperty (1408)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the value of the “Revision” model property corresponds
to the specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The property value can be compared to a list of Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
Product lifecycle and manufacturing information can be stored as properties of the root
component.
Applications can read these values automatically and use them e.g. for production plan-
ning. If required information is missing, there will be delays in subsequent processes.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the root element, and choose “Properties”. On the
“Product” tab card, correct the value in the “Version” field.

Dassault Systèmes 291 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the Model Revision” list box The model revision (“text to be checked”) is
checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 292 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 294
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 293

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Dassault Systèmes 293 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Case sensitivity
Criteria manual

Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 294 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

Dassault Systèmes 295 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The model revision must be composed of two groups of digits separated by a dot.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^[1-9][0-9]*\.[0-9]+$"
ERROR_MSG
"Model revision must have the format number.number"
"Change the property."
END_BLOCK

2. The model revision must not be empty.

BEGIN_BLOCK
".+"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 296 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.23 Model Definition

Criteria manual

StdDefinitionStandardProperty (1409)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the value of the “Definition” model property corresponds
to the specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The property value can be compared to a list of Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
Product lifecycle and manufacturing information can be stored as properties of the root
component.
Applications can read these values automatically and use them e.g. for production plan-
ning. If required information is missing, there will be delays in subsequent processes.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root component and change its version in “Edit” >
“Properties” on the “Product” tab.

Dassault Systèmes 297 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the Model Definition” list box The value of the “model definition” prop-
erty (“text to be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 298 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 301
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 299

Healing settings
“Replace: New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 299 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
Criteria manual

NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Dassault Systèmes 300 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Expressions for comparing text

Criteria manual

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Dassault Systèmes 301 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The model definition must begin with the character “#”.

Dassault Systèmes 302 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^#"
ERROR_MSG
"Model definition does not begin with '#'"
"Change the definition."
END_BLOCK

2. The model definition must contain only numbers.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^[0-9]+$"
END_BLOCK

3. Starting from character position 3, the model definition must contain a 5-digit
number or the text “abcde”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN 3
"^[0-9]{5}"
"^abcde"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 303 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.24 Model Source

Criteria manual

StdSourceStandardProperty (1411)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the value of the “Source” model property corresponds to
the specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Product lifecycle and manufacturing information can be stored as properties of the root
component.
Applications can read these values automatically and use them e.g. for production plan-
ning. If required information is missing, there will be delays in subsequent processes.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root product and change the “Source” property in
“Edit” > “Properties”, “Product” tab.

Criterion definition

Check settings
Source type check boxes Select the desired source types.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 304 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.25 Model Nomenclature

Criteria manual

StdNomenclatureStandardProperty (1410)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the value of the “Nomenclature” model property corre-
sponds to the specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The property value can be compared to a list of Regular Expressions.

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
Product lifecycle and manufacturing information can be stored as properties of the root
component.
Applications can read these values automatically and use them e.g. for production plan-
ning. If required information is missing, there will be delays in subsequent processes.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root product and change the “Source” property in
“Edit” > “Properties”, “Product” tab.

Dassault Systèmes 305 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the Model Nomenclature” text box The model description (“text to be
checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 306 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 309
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 307

“Compare Part Number with Nomenclature” check box If this option is activated, it
checked whether the nomenclature property value corresponds to the part number. If
not, an error will be reported.

Healing settings
“Replace: New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

Dassault Systèmes 307 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 308 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
Criteria manual

entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Dassault Systèmes 309 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The model nomenclature must not exceed 25 characters.

Dassault Systèmes 310 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^.{1,25}$"
ERROR_MSG
"Model nomenclature is too long."
END_BLOCK

2. The model nomenclature must not contain blank spaces at its beginning nor at its
end.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"^\s"
"\s$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 311 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.26 Published Element Name

Criteria manual

StdPublishedElementName (1294)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether published element names correspond to the specifica-
tion. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare element names with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare element names with a combination of strings. This combination of strings
can consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).
• Existence of certain published element names

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Change the publication name in “Tools” > “Publications”.

Dassault Systèmes 312 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the PUBLISH name” text box The published name of elements (“text to
be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

{ NAME MUST_EXIST YES [USE_REGEX] "Expression" |
[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}] }
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 313 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
NAME MUST_EXIST YES Optional. Published element name that must exist in the model
To specify the name using a Regular Expression, use NAME MUST_EXIST YES USE_
REGEX.

COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the name to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 317
When using NAME MUST_EXIST YES, the name to be checked is already defined in that
line. In that case, insert the following expression for Expression:

".*"

ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in

the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 315

Healing settings
No Q-Checker healing is available for publish names of part components, as they
cannot be accessed. If required, correct these errors manually.
“Replace: New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces the characters in the value
list with their corresponding replacement characters. Unicode characters can be used.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

Dassault Systèmes 314 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip

Settings for external references

In CATIA, choose “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part
Infrastructure”(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Recommended CATIA settings for external references:

Naming published elements

For better clarity, publish name and element name should match (Fig. 2, Fig. 3).

Fig. 2: Element name and corresponding publish Fig. 3: Element name and publish name do not
name match

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 315 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
Criteria manual

combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Required name
If a publication with this name must exist, use NAME MUST_EXIST YES.

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME MUST_EXIST YES "Name"
...
END_BLOCK

“Name” is the publication name.

To specify a publication that must exist and the name of which must match a Regular
Expression, use NAME MUST_EXIST YES USE_REGEX:

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME MUST_EXIST YES USE_REGEX "Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace Expression with the required Regular Expression.

Starting position
If no required name is specified with NAME MUST_EXIST:
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 316 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
Criteria manual

checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

If no required name is specified with NAME MUST_EXIST:
The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Dassault Systèmes 317 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Criteria manual

Argument pos specifies which part of the parameter value to use:

• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.

Dassault Systèmes 318 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
Criteria manual

a comment.

Examples
1. The model must have a publication, the name of which corresponds to a Regular
Expression (“P”, followed by a number).

BEGIN_BLOCK
NAME MUST_EXIST YES USE_REGEX "^P[0-9]+$"
END_BLOCK

2. The name of the checked publication must be composed of the part number and
the suffix “-pub”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
PARTNUMBER(1) + STRING("-pub")
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 319 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.27 Publication Name Must Match Published Element Name

Criteria manual

StdPublishNameMatchPublishedElementName (1426)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the published element name corresponds to the name of
the associated published feature. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Example

Veröffentlichtes Element

Veröffentlichter Name

Fig. 1: The published element name does not match the published name

Background
There are different methods for data exchange between parts. One method is to publish
an element and insert a copy into another part. The copied element remains linked to
its original. The link refers to the published name and is independent from the file path.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Change the publication name in “Tools” > “Publications”.

Dassault Systèmes 320 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Publication name” value list If this list is empty, all published names are checked.
To check publications with specific names, add these names to the list. You can use
Regular Expressions.
No error is reported if names on the value list do not exist in the checked model.

Healing parameters
“Rename” The healing function applies the names of published elements to the
respective publications.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 321 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.28 Layer Name

Criteria manual

StdLayerName (1371)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether layer names in the model correspond to the specification.
If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
In CATIA, every component is assigned to a layer. Users can define and redefine layer
names. Appropriately named layers can be used to classify and find components in the
model.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: On the “Graphic Properties” toolbar, click the “Layer” list box
and select “Other Layers”. In the “Named Layers” dialog, click a layer to edit its name.

Dassault Systèmes 322 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the layer name” text box The layer name (“text to be checked”) is
checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 323 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 325
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 324

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Dassault Systèmes 324 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Case sensitivity
Criteria manual

Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following Regular Expressions:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 325 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. Layer names must end on a number.

Dassault Systèmes 326 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
"[0-9]$"
ERROR_MSG
"Layer name must end on a number."
END_BLOCK

2. Layer names must not contain blank spaces.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
" "
ERROR_MSG
"Layer name must not contain blanks."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 327 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

2.3.5.29 Filter Name

Criteria manual

StdLayersFilterName (1372)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether layer filter names in the model correspond to the specifi-
cation. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
Filter definitions define sets of layers to be displayed. The filter name should indicate
which layers or elements will be displayed.

Suggested solution
• Manual healing in CATIA: Choose “Tools” > “Visualization Filters”, and mark a filter
(Fig. 1). Click the filter again to edit its name.
• To avoid the problem, standard filter should be defined in the start model already.

Fig. 1: Visualization filter dialog in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 328 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

“Definition of the layer name” list box Syntax of naming rules in criterion Filter name

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 329 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 331
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 330

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Dassault Systèmes 330 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

Case sensitivity
Criteria manual

Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 331 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Specify after the keywords which part of the property value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

Dassault Systèmes 332 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Descriptions/Names
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. Filter names must not contain numbers.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^[^0-9]+$"
ERROR_MSG
"Filter name must not contain numbers."
END_BLOCK

2. If the filter name begins with “Final_”, the part number must follow this string.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
KEYWORD "Final_"
PARTNUMBER(1)
ERROR_MSG
"Filter name contains 'Final_' but not the part number."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 333 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6 Sheets/Views
Criteria manual

2.3.6.1 Nested 2D Component

StdDetailInDetail (1101)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether an instance of a 2D component has been placed inside
another 2D component (nested 2D component). If so, the model will be rated as incor-
rect.

Background
Some print or visualization applications cannot resolve nested 2D components.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Explode the 2D component instance to remove associativity
to the detail sheet. To do this, right-click the 2D component instance in the specifica-
tion tree, then choose “Object” > “Explode 2D Component”(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Exploding a 2D component instance (context menu command)

Dassault Systèmes 334 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Finding 2D component instances

1 In CATIA, select “Edit” > “Find”.
2 Select “2D Component Instance” as element type in the dialog (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Searching the model for 2D component instances using “Find”

Editing a 2D component instance

To edit 2D component instances inserted as instance from a catalog, you have to
expose them first, as described below:
1 Right-click the 2D component instance in the specification tree.
2 On the context menu, choose “Objekt 2D Component” > “Expose 2D Component”.

Dassault Systèmes 335 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

 The 2D component instance will be separated from its catalog reference and can be
Criteria manual

edited.

Dassault Systèmes 336 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.2 Unused Details

Criteria manual

StdUnusedDetail (1100)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether a drawing contains details without instances. Empty
details are rated as incorrect.

Background
Unused details increase data size and compromise clarity.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete unused details.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Delete any unused details.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed unused details” value list Specify the names of details to be allowed even if
they are unused details.

“Search recursively” If this option is activated, the check will look for nested details.

Dassault Systèmes 337 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Remove” The healing function deletes unused details.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 338 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.3 Active Sheet

Criteria manual

StdFirstSheetMustBeCurr (1354)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the specified sheet of the drawing is active. You can
specify the required active sheet as follows:
• Sheet with a specified name
• Sheet with a specified index

Background
Automated processes may fail if the required drawing sheet is not active.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate the required sheet.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Activate the required sheet by clicking the corresponding
tab, or by double-clicking the specification tree entry.

Dassault Systèmes 339 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Define active sheet by name” check box with “Name of the active sheet” text box
Activate this option if a sheet with a particular name must be active. Specify the name in
the text box. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Define active sheet by index” check box with spin box Activate this option if a sheet
with a particular index must be active. Specify the index in the spin box. The index is the
position of the sheet in the CATIA specification tree, starting with the topmost sheet.

 NOTE: If both the “Define active sheet by name” option and the “Define active sheet by
index” option are not selected, the first sheet (index 1) must be active.

Healing settings
“Activate sheet” The healing function activates the required sheet as specified with the
check parameters, given that any sheet corresponds to the specification (index or
name).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 340 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.4 View Outside of Sheet

Criteria manual

StdNoViewOutsideTheSheet (1335)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the geometry of views is partly or entirely outside the
sheet. If so, the affected views are rated as incorrect.
If a view is partly outside of the view and the entire geometry in the view on the sheet,
the view is not rated as incorrect.

Background
Drawings are often plotted using automated applications. The plot area is usually
defined by the dimensions of the drawing sheet.
Geometry which is not positioned within the plot area will not appear on the plot
(Fig. 1, Fig. 2). As a result, some information is missing.

Fig. 1: All views within the drawing sheet

Dassault Systèmes 341 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Side view outside of the sheet

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete all views outside the sheet.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Move or delete the incorrect views.

Dassault Systèmes 342 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore elements in” check box with list box Activate this option to ignore elements
with the specified visibility state. Select the visibility state from the list box:
“Show” Ignore elements with status “Show”
“NoShow” Ignore elements with status “NoShow”
“Non-Visible” Ignore elements in hidden views, irrespective of their own visibility
status.

“Ignore background view” check box If this option is selected, elements in the back-
ground view are ignored in the check.

“Ignore elements” value list Specify the types of elements to be ignored by the check.
Elements of these types may be positioned outside the drawing sheet.

“Ignore elements with certain names (Reg.Exp.)” list box To exclude elements with
certain names from the check, enter Regular Expressions matching the names of these

Dassault Systèmes 343 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

elements.
Criteria manual

“Tolerance” spin box Specify the maximum allowed distance between geometry
elements and the drawing sheet.

“Ignore visual clipping” check box If this option is selected, the entire geometry inside
the view is checked.
If this option is not selected, only geometry elements are checked that are located
within the visual clipping frame. Drawing elements partly or entirely outside the visual
clipping frame are ignored.

INFO: In CATIA, the visible area of views can be limited using a rectangular clipping
frame.
To create a clipping frame, mark the view and choose “Edit” > “Properties” > “View”,
“Visualization and Behavior”, “Visual Clipping”.

“Show features outside of sheet as view subitems” check box This option controls the
degree of detail for visual error analysis for the Q-Checker analysis window.
If this option is not selected, the analysis tree shows the views but not the particular
geometry elements.
If this option is activated, the particular geometry elements are displayed as sub-
elements of views in the analysis tree.

Healing settings
“Delete all view subitems” The healing function deletes all incorrect elements posi-
tioned outside the sheet and listed as sub-elements in the analysis tree. These elements
cannot be deleted separately.
To use this healing function, the “Show features outside of sheet as view subitems”
option must be activated. Note that the check may take considerably longer when this
option is activated.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 344 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.5 Sheet Format

Criteria manual

StdSheetFormat (1307)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the format names and dimensions of drawing sheets
correspond to the specifications. If not, the affected drawing sheet is rated as incorrect.

Background
When creating a drawing, you can select an appropriate sheet format. The sheet format
defines the printable area.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Change the sheet format in “File” > “Page Setup” or in
“Edit” > “Properties”.

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed Sheet Size, page 349

Dassault Systèmes 345 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed Sheet Format” value list Specify the allowed format names and the respective
sheet sizes.
Enter the required width and height of the sheet in landscape orientation, separated by
a comma (,). You can enter up to three decimals for the width and height values. Use a
point (.) as decimal separator.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 346 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.6 Sheet Frame

Criteria manual

StdSheetShadow (1429)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the visibility of drawing sheet frames corresponds to the
specification. If that does not apply, the affected drawing sheet set is rated as incorrect.

Background
The frame around drawing sheets can be visible or hidden. Normally the frame is visible
as a guide for positioning views on the sheet.
If sheet frames are hidden, views be placed accidentally outside the limits of the sheet.
As the printable area coincides with the sheet format, elements outside the drawing
sheet frame will not be visible on the printout.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set sheet frame visibility according to the specification.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the sheet in the specification tree, then select
“Properties”. To define the sheet frame visibility, go to the “Sheet” tab, “Format”
section, “Display” check box.

Dassault Systèmes 347 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check also detail sheets” check box If this option is activated, detail sheets will be
checked additionally.

“Allowed visualization state” list box Specify the allowed visibility state of drawing
sheet frames.

Healing settings
“Display frame on/off” The healing function sets the visibility state of drawing sheet
frames according to the specification made in field “Allowed visualization state”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 348 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.7 Non-Allowed Sheet Size

Criteria manual

StdSheetSize (1515)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the dimensions of sheets correspond to the specifica-
tions.
If not, the affected sheet will be rated as incorrect.

Background
The DIN EN ISO 216 standard defines a range of standard paper sizes. In many compa-
nies, additional paper sizes are defined, for example for oversized drawings.
Non-standard paper sizes may cause problems when printing or archiving drawings.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the sheet and change its name or format in “Edit” >
“Properties”.

Related criteria
 Sheet Format, page 345
 Drafting Standard Name, page 351

Dassault Systèmes 349 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Names” value list Specify the names of sheets whose format is to be checked. You
can use Regular Expressions.
To check sheets regardless of their names, add the Regular Expression .*.

“Sheet types” list box Specify which types of sheets to check:

• “Sheet”: Sheets
• “Sheet(Detail)”: Detail sheets
• “Sheet+Sheet(Detail)”: Sheets and detail sheets

“Allowed sheet size” value list Specify one or more allowed sheet sizes by their
minimum and maximum allowed width and height.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 350 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.8 Drafting Standard Name

Criteria manual

StdDrawingStandard (1309)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether a drawing uses an allowed drafting standard. Drawings
using other drafting standards are marked as incorrect.

Background
To avoid ambiguities and misinterpretations, technical drawings have to be created
according to the applicable standards.
Typical drafting standards are ISO, ANSI or JIS.

Fig. 1: Drafting standard definition in CATIA

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set the required drafting standard.
• Manual healing in CATIA: To change the drawing standard, go to “File” > “Page
Setup”, “Standard” field.

Dassault Systèmes 351 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed standard” value list Specify the names of the allowed drafting standards. You
can use Regular Expressions.

Healing settings
“Apply standard” The healing function applies the drafting standard specified in the
text box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Every drawing contains a copy of the used standard which remains in use until a
different or updated standard is applied.
• When the drafting standard is changed or updated, the parameters of the affected
elements are changed to match the new specifications. This change cannot be
undone.

Dassault Systèmes 352 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.9 Drafting Standard Corresponds to Reference Document Standard

Criteria manual

StdDraftingStandard (1357)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the correct drafting standard (ISO, ASME, ...) has been
selected and whether the drafting standard in the model corresponds to the settings in
a reference document of the *.draftingstd.xml file type. If that does not apply, an
error is reported.
In addition, the criterion can check whether the properties in the model and in reference
document have the same order.

Example XML node taken from a CATIA drafting standards definition file
In the example, the node names are marked. The names of the required nodes have to
be used in the list boxes of this criterion.

<!-- Knoten -->

<std:typeval name="Formats"> <!-- Knotenname -->
<std:strval name="Name">J U.S.Standard</std:strval>
<std:floatval name="Width">1219.20</std:floatval>
<std:floatval name="Height">863.60</std:floatval>
<std:enumval name=FormatOrientationType>LandscapeByDefault
</std:enumval>
</std:typeval>
<!-- Knoten -->
<std:typeval name="Formats"> <!-- Knotenname -->
<std:strval name="Name">Letter</std:strval>
<std:floatval name="Width">279.40</std:floatval>Feld
<std:floatval name="Height">215.90</std:floatval>
<std:enumval name="FormatOrientationType">LandscapeByDefault
</std:enumval>
</std:typeval>
<!-- Knoten -->
<std:typeval name="Formats"> <!-- Knotenname -->
<std:strval name="Name">Legal</std:strval>
<std:floatval name="Width">355.60</std:floatval>
<std:floatval name="Height">215.90</std:floatval>
<std:enumval name="FormatOrientationType">LandscapeByDefault
</std:enumval>
</std:typeval>

INFO: In CATIA, the settings for drafting standards can be found in “Tools” > “Stan-
dards”. In the “Category” list box, select “Drafting”, and in the “File” list box, select the
required XML file.

Dassault Systèmes 353 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Background
Criteria manual

To avoid ambiguities and misinterpretations, technical drawings have to be created

according to the applicable standards.
Typical drafting standards are ISO, ANSI, and JIS.

Fig. 1: Drafting standards definition dialog in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 354 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of Drafting Standard” list box Insert the content of the CATIA drawing stan-
dard definition file into this text box.

“Order is important” value list Specify the XML nodes of the drafting standard file
within which the element sequence has to correspond to the reference document. Add
the names of the nodes to be checked.
Within all other nodes, the element sequence is not checked.

Dassault Systèmes 355 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

“More/Less XML entities allowed” value lists Specify the XML nodes of the drafting
Criteria manual

standard file which are allowed to contain more/less elements than the corresponding
node in the reference document. Add the names of the nodes to be checked.
The number of elements within all other nodes has to match the number of elements
within the corresponding node of the reference document.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
When the drafting standard is changed or updated, the parameters of the affected
elements are changed to match the new specifications. This change cannot be undone.

Dassault Systèmes 356 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.10 Empty Sheets

Criteria manual

StdSheetEmpty (1211)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether drawings contain empty sheets. If so, an error will be
reported.

Background
In some cases, empty sheets are required at a later stage, for example to add a note of
approval. For these cases, exceptions can be defined. Nevertheless, a drawing should
not contain sheets that remain unused throughout the process.

Fig. 1: Empty sheet “Sheet.2” in a drawing Fig. 2: Empty sheet “Sheet.2” and empty view
“Front view”

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete empty sheets. The last sheet of a drawing cannot be
deleted.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the sheet, then press the [DEL] key.

Dassault Systèmes 357 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed empty views” value list Names of sheets which may be empty. You can use
Regular Expressions.

“The view is also empty with the default text” check box If this option is selected,
sheets containing only the default text elements (view name, view scaling) are consid-
ered empty.
This option applies only if the “Allowed empty sheets” is selected.

“The sheet is empty even if it contains empty views” check box If this option is acti-
vated, sheets are also considered empty if they contain empty views.

“Ignore background view” check box If this option is selected, the background view of
sheets is ignored; only their main view will be checked.

“Do not ignore background view for these sheets” check box Use this parameter to
define exceptions if the “Ignore background view” option is selected. Define the names

Dassault Systèmes 358 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

of sheets whose background views shall be checked anyway. You can use Regular
Criteria manual

Expressions.

Healing settings
“Delete sheet (keep if last sheet on drawing)” The healing function deletes empty
sheets except the last sheet in a drawing.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 359 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.11 Empty Detail Sheets

Criteria manual

StdDetailSheetEmpty (1318)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains empty detail sheets. The existence of
empty detail sheets is rated as fault. Exceptions can be specified to allow certain detail
sheets to be empty.

Background
Sometimes empty sheets are required. For these cases, exceptions can be defined.
Nevertheless, a drawing should not contain sheets that remain unused throughout the
process.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete empty detail sheets. The last detail sheet of a
drawing cannot be deleted.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the sheet, then press the [DEL] key.

Dassault Systèmes 360 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed empty detail sheets” text box Specify the names of detail sheets that are
allowed to be empty. You can use Regular Expressions.

“The detail sheet is empty even if it contains empty detail views” check box If this
option is activated, a detail sheet is also considered empty if it contains unused 2D
components.

“The detail sheet is empty even if it contains unused detail views” check box If this
option is activated, a detail sheet is considered empty if it contains unused 2D compo-
nents.

Healing settings
“Delete detail sheet” The healing function deletes all empty detail sheets except the
last.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Empty detail sheets can be recognized by the missing entries in the specification tree
(Fig. 1, Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 361 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

The specification tree can be displayed and hidden by pressing the [F3] key.
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Detail sheet containing 2D components Fig. 2: Empty detail sheet

Fig. 3: Sheet with empty view

Dassault Systèmes 362 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.12 Non-Exposed/Exploded 2D-Component

Criteria manual

StdNonExposedDetail (1431)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
The criterion checks whether drawings contain 2D components with external links to
catalogs. If so, an error is reported. To allow external links to certain documents, you
can specify exceptions.

Background
Reusable objects such as drawing frames or title blocks are usually inserted from a
catalog. The component instances are linked by default to the catalog.
When a drawing contains 2D components that are linked to a catalog, problems can
occur in case of data exchange (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Error message when opening a drawing with unresolved links to a catalog.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to explode 2D components (convert to elements without
links) or expose the catalog link (create a local copy of the component on a detail
sheet).
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the 2D component and select “Edit” > “Object” >
“Expose 2D Component” or “Object” > “2D Component”.

Dassault Systèmes 363 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed path name for linked documents”/“Allowed relative path name for linked
documents”/“Allowed DLNames for linked documents” value lists Save locations of
drawings and drawing components to which the checked drawing may be linked.
Specify these save locations using absolute paths, relative paths, or DLNames.
For documents stored in VPM V4 or VPM V5, specify only the file name.

 NOTE: The linked documents will be loaded during the Q-Checker check. Permissions

Dassault Systèmes 364 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

to read these documents are required.

Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Expose 2D-Component” This healing function copies linked 2D components from the
catalog to a detail sheet in the checked drawing. The external link is replaced by an
internal link.
When using individual healing in the analysis window, you can select whether to copy
the 2D component to a new detail sheet, or to an existing detail sheet. When using
automatic healing, the detail is copied to a new detail sheets that have CATIA default
names.

“Explode 2D-Component”: The instance of the externally linked 2D component is

exploded, that is converted to independent drawing elements. The external link is
removed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Use “Edit” > “Links” to analyze, find and replace external links.
To check the paths of linked components, linked documents have to be loaded in the
current session.

Dassault Systèmes 365 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.13 Sheet Projection Method

Criteria manual

StdSheetProjectionAngle (1308)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether drawings sheets use the required projection method:
“ISO projection method A (First Angle Standard)” or “ISO projection method E (Third angle
standard)”. If the wrong projection method is used, an error is reported.

Background
In technical drawings, the part is projected onto planes orthogonal to each other, using
orthographic parallel projection. Views are arranged around the main view according to
a defined method, e.g. arrow method, ISO method A, or ISO method E (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).
The ISO methods require a graphical symbol to be read unambiguously. ISO method E
is commonly used in Europe, while ISO method A is commonly used in the US. If
projections methods are not used consistently, they are likely to be misinterpreted.

Fig. 1: Projections arranged according to “ISO Fig. 2: Projections arranged according to “ISO
projection method A (First Angle Standard)” projection method E (Third Angle Standard)”

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the sheet in the specification tree, then select
“Properties”. Select the required projection method (Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 366 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Drawing sheet properties

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed projection method” list box Specify the required projection method.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 367 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.14 Only one Sheet per Drawing

Criteria manual

StdDraftOnlyOne (1145)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether drawings contain more than one sheet (detail sheets do
not count). An error is reported if the drawing has more than one sheet.

Background
Depending on how drawings are managed, it can be easier to use only one sheet per
drawing (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Drawing with 2 sheets (not allowed) Fig. 2: Drawing with one sheet (allowed)

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 368 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.15 Sheet must exist

Criteria manual

StdSheetMustExist (1396)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether a drawing contains sheets with certain specified names. If
not, an error will be reported.

Background
When using external applications to print a drawing, the sheets for printout have to be
defined. The sheets to be printed can be identified by their sheet names. If the required
naming rules are not applied, the print application cannot find the sheets to be printed
out, and the process fails.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: To rename a sheet, right-click the sheet, then select “Proper-
ties”. Change the sheet name in the “Name” text box.

Dassault Systèmes 369 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore empty sheet” check box If this check box is activated, empty sheets will not be
checked.

“The view is also empty with the default text” check box If this option is activated,
views containing only the default text elements (view name, view scaling) are consid-
ered empty.
This option applies only if the “The sheet is empty even if it contains empty views”
option is selected.

“The sheet is empty even if it contains empty views” check box If this option is acti-
vated, a sheet containing only empty views is considered empty.
This option is only in effect if option “Ignore empty sheet” is activated.

“Apply check only if more than one sheet exists” check box If this option is activated,
the check is only performed if the drawing contains more than one sheet. If the “Ignore
empty sheet” option is selected, the check will be performed only if there is at least one
non-empty sheet.

“Sheet must exist” value list Specify the names of the required sheets. You can use
Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 370 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.16 Only one View in each Sheet

Criteria manual

StdDraftOnlyOneView (1146)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether every sheet contains only one sheet. An error is reported if
a sheet contains more than one view.

Background
Depending on how drawings are managed, it can be easier to use only one view per
sheet (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Sheet with more than one view (not allowed) Fig. 2: Multiple sheets with one view each
(allowed)

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Rearrange views by cutting and pasting views onto separate
sheets.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 371 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.17 Sheet/View Must Exist

Criteria manual

StdViewMustExist (1147)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether certain sheets with certain views do exist. An error is
reported if the required combinations of sheets and views are missing.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Add the missing sheets and views, and name them according
to the specifications.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Sheet/view combinations” value list Specify the names of required sheets and views
on these sheets. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Allow only one occurrence of sheet/view combination” check box If this option is
selected, the names of sheets and views in the “Sheet/View combinations” value list
may exist only once.
If this option is not selected, the names may exist more than once.
Names are ignored if they are not specified in the value list.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 372 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.18 Empty View must exist

Criteria manual

StdViewEmptyMustExist (1148)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether certain sheets contain required empty views. If not, an
error will be reported.

Background
In some cases, empty views are required at a later stage, for example to add a note of
approval.

Fig. 1: The specification tree shows a list of sheets and views

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Create missing views and name them according to the speci-
fications.

Dassault Systèmes 373 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Sheet/view combinations” value list Specify the names of required sheets and views
on these sheets. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Allow only one occurrence of sheet/view combination” check box If this option is
selected, the names of sheets and views in the “Sheet/View combinations” value list
may exist only once.
If this option is not selected, the names may exist more than once.
Names are ignored if they are not specified in the value list.

“Only one view allowed on the sheet” check box If this option is activated, only one
view per sheet is allowed.

“The view is also empty with the default text” check box If this option is activated, a
view is considered empty if it contains only default text.

“Ignore these types” value list Specify the element types to ignore. If the view contains
these types of elements, the view is considered empty.

Dassault Systèmes 374 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Dassault Systèmes 375 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.19 Empty Views

Criteria manual

StdViewEmpty (1144)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the drawing contains empty views. If so, the empty views
will be rated as incorrect. Types of views can be defined as an exception.

Background
In some cases, empty views are required at a later stage, for example to add a note of
approval. Unused empty views should be avoided.

Fig. 1: “Front view” is empty

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete empty views.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the view, and press the [DEL] key.
• When deleting the only view on a sheet, the sheet itself should also be deleted. You
can use criterion Empty Sheets, page 357 for this.

Dassault Systèmes 376 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed empty views” value list Specify the names of empty views to be allowed in a
drawing. You can use Regular Expressions.

“The view is also empty with the default text” check box If this option is activated, a
view is considered empty if it contains only default text.

“Ignore these types” value list Specify the types of views to be ignored by the check.

Healing settings
“Delete view” The healing function deletes all empty views except the last view on the
drawing sheet.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 377 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.20 Empty Detail Views

Criteria manual

StdDetailViewEmpty (1210)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether drawings contain empty 2D components. Empty 2D
components are rated as incorrect.

Background
Unused empty 2D components should be avoided.

Fig. 1: Drawing tree with 2D components

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete empty detail sheets.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the 2D components, and press the [DEL] key.
• When deleting the only 2D component on a detail sheet, the detail sheet itself should
also be deleted. You can use criterion Empty Detail Sheets, page 360 for this.

Dassault Systèmes 378 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed empty 2D components” value list Specify the names of allowed empty 2D
components. You can use Regular Expressions.

Healing settings
“Delete detail view” The healing function deletes all empty 2D components except the
last 2D component on the sheet.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To identify and edit a 2D component reference, double-click the 2D component
instance. Alternatively, right-click the 2D component instance and select “Edit Refer-
ence Component” from the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 379 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.21 View Frames [D-OR-VF]

Criteria manual

StdViewFrame (1142)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the correct frame type is used for the views.

Background
Visual Clipping can be used to hide regions of a view that are not required. This allows
for a more compact visualization and improves the clarity of the drawing.
However, transformations or design changes may result in modified drawing geometry
outside the view frame. If relevant geometry is outside the visible area, the view frame
needs to be adjusted.

Fig. 1: Entire drawing Fig. 2: Drawing with visual clipping

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: To deactivate a view frame, mark the view, go to “Edit” >
“Properties” and deselect the “Visual Clipping” option.

Dassault Systèmes 380 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed exceptions” value list Specify the names of views that may use a frame type
other than the allowed frame type selected in the “Allowed frame type” list box. Regular
Expressions can be used to specify views names.

“Allowed frame type” list box Specify the allowed frame type:
“FINITE” Drawing with visual clipping
“INFINITE” Drawing without visual clipping

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 381 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.22 Drawing Frame/Header as 2D Component

Criteria manual

StdDrawingFrameHeader (1188)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether certain views contain one or more 2D components with
certain properties. An error is reported if the required 2D components do not exist or
have other properties.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Insert the missing 2D component instances, and adjust any
incorrect properties of existing 2D component instances.

Dassault Systèmes 382 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“View names” value list Names of views to be checked for the existence of 2D compo-
nents. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Drawing frame/header 2D components” value list Names of the 2D components to

Dassault Systèmes 383 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

be checked. You can use Regular Expressions.

Criteria manual

“Check only external 2D components” check box If this option is activated, only 2D
component instances with external references are checked.

“2D component must exist in specified views” check box If this option is selected, 2D
components specified in the “Drawing frame/header 2D components” value list must
exist in all views to be checked.
If this option is not selected, the specified 2D components are not required.

“2D component position” check box with spin boxes If this option is selected, 2D
components must have the specified position. The horizontal (“H”) and vertical (“V”)
coordinates and the allowed tolerances (“TolH”, “TolV”) are specified in the spin boxes.
The coordinates are relative to the active axis system of the view.
If this option is not selected, the position of 2D components is not checked.

“2D component scaling” check box with spin boxes If this option is activated, 2D
components must use the required scaling factor. The allowed scaling factor and its
tolerance are specified in the spin boxes.
If this option is not selected, the scaling of 2D components is not checked.

“2D component rotation angle” check box with spin boxes If this option is activated,
2D components must have the required rotation angle. The allowed rotation angle and
its tolerance are specified in the spin boxes. The rotation angle is relative to the active
axis system of the view.
If this option is not selected, the rotation angle of 2D components is not checked.

“Only one 2D component per view” check box If this option is activated, every view
may contain only one 2D component.
If this option is not selected, views may contain any number of 2D components.

“Check also detail sheets” check box If this option is activated, detail sheets will be
checked additionally.
If this option is not selected, detail sheets will not be checked.

“2D component corresponding to sheet dimension” value list Specify the required
dimensions of sheets that contain an instance of the given 2D component.
Regular Expressions can be used to specify the names of 2D components. Specify the
allowed height and width in mm. Separate height and width by comma.
Leave this value list empty to ignore the sheet size.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
2D reference components can be made available in the start model or in a catalog.

Dassault Systèmes 384 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.23 View Scaling

Criteria manual

StdViewScaling (1191)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether all views are shown in the required view scale. If that does
not apply, the affected views are rated as incorrect.

Suggested solution
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the view in the specification tree, then select
“Properties”. On the “View” tab, correct the value in the “Scale” field.
• To avoid the problem, always set the correct view scale when creating a view.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed scaling factors” value list Specify the allowed view scales. Specify the scaling
factor as a the ratio of two integers, separated by a colon, for example 1:20 or 4:3.

“Path name of views” text box To check only certain views, enter a Regular Expression
for the paths of views to be checked. To check all views, leave this field empty.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 385 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Application Tip
Criteria manual

In the criterion definition, you can specify the scale factor as a ratio of whole numbers.
According to DIN ISO 5455, only the following scale factors are allowed:
• 1:1 for the natural scale
• X:1 for magnification, where X is a whole number.
• 1:X for reduction, where X is a whole number.

Dassault Systèmes 386 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.24 View Angle

Criteria manual

StdViewAngle (1384)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the view angle is in the allowed range. If that does not
apply, the view is rated as incorrect.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set the required view angle.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the view in the specification tree, then select
“Properties”. On the “View” tab, correct the value in the “Angle” field.
When changing the view angle, make sure that the resulting representation is not ambi-
gious.

Dassault Systèmes 387 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed exceptions: View names” Specify the names of views for which an arbitrary
view angle is allowed. You can use Regular Expressions.

“View Angle Values from ... to ...” value list Specify the allowed value range of the view
angle. To specify a discrete value, set an identical value in columns “from” and “to”.

Healing settings
“Set Angle” The healing function replaces incorrect view angles with the value specified
in the spin box.
The specified value has to be within the valid range.
Healing will change the view. After changing the view angle, make sure that the view
clearly shows all required information.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 388 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.25 Generative View Dress-up Properties

Criteria manual

ChkStdViewDressUpProperties (1602)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the use of certain dress-up elements in generative views
corresponds to the specification. If not, the affected view is rated as incorrect.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Correct the properties of the generative view (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: “Properties” dialog containing the generative view properties

Dassault Systèmes 389 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check parameters
“Allowed exceptions” value list Names of sheets and views to be ignored in the check.
Specify Regular Expressions for both sheet and view names.

“Non-allowed … state” check boxes with list boxes If the respective check box is
selected, the corresponding dress-up property will be checked. In the list box, choose
the non-allowed state, either “On” (property must not be selected) or “Off” (property
must be selected).

Dassault Systèmes 390 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

“Non-allowed Fillets status” value list Specify the non-allowed settings for the “Fillets”
Criteria manual

dress-up property. Select the non-allowed settings in the value list:

• “None”: Select this option if the “Fillets” property must not be selected.
• “Approximated Original Edges”: The “Approximated Original Edges” setting is not
allowed.
• “Boundaries”: The “Boundaries” setting is not allowed.
• “Projected Original Edges”: The “Projected Original Edges” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbolic”: The “Symbolic” setting is not allowed.

“Non-allowed 3D Points status” value list Specify the non-allowed settings for the “3D
Points” dress-up property. Select the non-allowed settings in the value list:
• “None”: Select this option if the “3D Points” property must not be selected.
• “3D symbol inheritance”: The “3D symbol inheritance” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Coincident”: The “Coincident”/“Circle” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Concentric”: The “Concentric”/“Double Circle” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Cross”: The “Cross” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Dot”: The “Dot / Small Full Square” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Full Circle”: The “Dot” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Full Square”: The “Dot / Small Full Square” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Plus”: The “Plus” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Small Dot”: The “Small Dot” setting is not allowed.
• “Symbol Star”: The “Star” setting is not allowed.

Fig. 2: Selection of dress-up symbols for 3D points in CATIA. Top to bottom: Cross (selected), Plus, Coin-
dicent/Circle, Concentric/Double Circle, Full Circle, Full Square, Star, Small Full Square, Small Dot

“Non-allowed 3D Wireframe status” value list Specify the non-allowed settings for the
“3D Wireframe” dress-up property. Select the non-allowed settings in the value list:
• “None”: Select this option if the “3D Wireframe” property must not be selected.
• “Can be hidden”: The “Can be hidden” setting is not allowed.

Dassault Systèmes 391 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

• “Is always visible”: The “Is always visible” setting is not allowed.
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 392 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.26 View Name is the Same in Specification Tree and in the View
Criteria manual

StdViewNameTheSameAsInTreeAndView (1415)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the name of any particular view is identical both inside the
view and in the specification tree. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
In CATIA, you can specify to insert text elements with view name, scale, and other
values when creating new views. These texts are linked to the respective view properties
using attribute links.
If the view name is added manually to a view, the text is not linked to the view property.
When editing an existing text with attribute link manually, the attribute link is lost. The
displayed name may differ from the actual view name.
This may cause irritations and errors when using the drawing.

Fig. 1: Correct and incorrect view names

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Adapt the text to the view name, or create an attribute link.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 393 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Application Tip
Criteria manual

 Suggested solution, page 147

 Application Tip, page 149

Dassault Systèmes 394 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.27 Locked Views

Criteria manual

StdLockedViews (1312)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the lock status of certain views (locked or unlocked)
corresponds to the specification. If a view has a different name, it is marked as incor-
rect.

Background
Views can be locked to prevent changes. In locked views, you can neither add nor
remove elements, and views are not updated while they are locked. Element attributes
such as color or line width can still be changed.
Certain User Defined Features (UDF) require a locked view to be inserted correctly.

Fig. 1: Specially marked locked view in the specification tree of a drawing

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the view in the specification tree, then select
“Properties”. On the “View” tab, change the “Lock View” option.

Dassault Systèmes 395 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Mark views if:” list box Specify which lock status of views is allowed.
“LOCKED” Locked views are not allowed.
“NOT LOCKED” Unlocked views are not allowed.

“Allowed exceptions” value list Specify the names of views that are allowed to have an
arbitrary lock status.

Healing settings
“Switch to the permitted state” The healing function applies the required lock status to
views with incorrect lock status.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
When working on a drawing, you can recognize locked views as follows:
• In the specification tree, views are marked with a lock icon next to the normal icon
(Fig. 1).
• Locked views are not updated after the geometry has been modified. When updating,
CATIA displays a corresponding alert.
• Objects such as dimensions and texts cannot be added. CATIA shows a
corresponding alert when trying to do so.

Dassault Systèmes 396 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.28 No active View in Sheet

Criteria manual

StdNoActiveView (1204)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether a sheet contains an active view. If so, the view is rated as
incorrect.

Background
Plotting software may not work if a view is active instead of a sheet.

Suggested solution
• Use the Q-Checker healing function to disable views.
• To avoid the problem, activate the required sheet in the completed drawing by
double-clicking the sheet element in the specification tree.

Criterion definition

Healing settings
“Set all views inactive” The healing function deactivates all views.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
An activated view can be recognized by the underline under its name in the specifica-
tion tree and by the colored highlighting of the dashed frame line around the view

Dassault Systèmes 397 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

(Fig. 1, Fig. 2).

Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Active view/detail view Fig. 2: No active view/detail view

Dassault Systèmes 398 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.29 No active Detail View in Detail Sheet

Criteria manual

StdNoActiveDetailView (1209)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether there are active 2D components in a drawing. If so, the
affected 2D components will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Plotting software may not work if a view is active instead of a sheet.

Fig. 1: “Front View” (view) and “2D Component.1” Fig. 2: No active view/detail view
(detail view) are active

Suggested solution
• Use the Q-Checker healing function to disable views.
• To avoid the problem, activate the required sheet in the completed drawing by
double-clicking the sheet element in the specification tree.

Dassault Systèmes 399 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Set all views inactive” The healing function deactivates all 2D components.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 400 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.30 View Frame Visibility

Criteria manual

StdViewFrameVisibility (1233)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the visibility of view frames corresponds to the specifica-
tion. If that does not apply, the affected views are rated as incorrect.

Background
View frames are intended for easier handling of views. The are not a part of applicable
drawing standards and should not be visible in the final drawing. Some plotting applica-
tions use viewing frames to define the printable area.

Fig. 1: View with view frame Fig. 2: View without view frame

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to apply the required visibility.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the view in the specification tree, then select
“Properties”. On the “View” tab, correct the “Lock View” option.

Dassault Systèmes 401 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed Frame Visibility” list box Specify the allowed view frame visibility.

Healing settings
“Set Visibility” The healing function applies the required view frame visibility.

 NOTE: To make the changes visible, the views need to be refreshed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can define the view frame visibility for all newly created views. To do this,
go to CATIA application settings and choose “Mechanical” > “Drafting” > “General” >
“Display View Frame”.

Dassault Systèmes 402 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.31 View Generation Mode Options

Criteria manual

ChkStdViewGenerationModeOptions (1603)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the options for the “Raster” view generation mode corre-
spond to the specification. If not, the affected view is rated as incorrect.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Correct the properties of the generative view in the “Proper-
ties” dialog (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Options for the Raster view generation mode

Related criteria
 View generation mode check: Non-Allowed View Generation Mode, page 426

Dassault Systèmes 403 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check parameters
“Allowed exceptions” value list Specify the sheets and views not to be checked. You
can use Regular Expressions.

“Non-allowed raster mode” value list Specify the raster modes which are not allowed:
• “Dynamic Hidden Line Removal”
• “Shading”
• “Shading with Edges”
• “Shading with edges, no light source”
• “Shading, no light source”

Dassault Systèmes 404 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

“Non-allowed level of detail for visu” value list Specify the level of detail settings for
Criteria manual

visu that are not allowed:

• “Customize”
• “High quality”
• “Normal quality”
• “Low quality”

“Non-allowed customized level of detail for visu” check boxes with spin boxes If this
option is selected, the level of detail DPI value for visu will be checked. In the spin
boxes, set the lower and upper limit of the non-allowed value range.

“Non-allowed level of detail for print” value list Specify the level of detail settings for
print that are not allowed:
• “Customize”
• “High quality”
• “Normal quality”
• “Low quality”

“Non-allowed customized level of detail for print” check boxes with spin boxes If this
option is selected, the level of detail DPI value for print will be checked. In the spin
boxes, set the lower and upper limit of the non-allowed value range.

Dassault Systèmes 405 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.32 CATPart/CATProduct Name linked to View Must Match CATDrawing

Criteria manual

Name
StdNameProductLinkedByView (1202)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of drawings partially or completely match the
names of the associated CATParts or CATProducts. If that does not apply, an error is
reported.

Background
Appropriate naming rules can help to identify related product datasets and versions and
may be required for data management.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Name 3D models and the associated generated drawings
using the applicable naming rules.

Related criteria
 CATDrawing Name, page 198

Dassault Systèmes 406 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings

 NOTE: This criterion can be configured in two ways:

• To compare substrings of the names at fixed positions, fill in only the “Compare
substrings at position” field.
• To compare names using Regular Expressions, fill in only the “Drawing Name/
CATPart/CATProduct name” value list.
Do not fill in values for the respective other parameter. If values are defined for both
parameters, the criterion assessment may be ambiguous.
If no values are defined for both parameters, the result will be a general error.

“Compare substrings at position” Use this parameter to compare substrings at fixed

positions, or the entire name. Specify the positions at which characters will be
compared like this:

Character position specification

Expression Description

m Compare a single character at position m

-n Compare substrings from the start to position n

n- Compare substrings starting at position n to the end

- Compare entire strings

m-n,p,q- Compare the various substrings separated by comma, in this

example: Characters from position m to n, at position p and from
position q to the end

Dassault Systèmes 407 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

When using this parameter, leave the “Drawing name/CATProduct/CATPart name”

Criteria manual

value list empty.

“Drawing Name/CATProduct/CATPart File Name” value list Use this parameter to

compare according to Regular Expressions.
When using this parameters, leave the “Compare substrings at position” field empty.
If none of the Regular Expressions in column “Drawing name” matches the drawing
name, the criterion results in the “Not called” assessment.
 For using Regular Expressions with back-references see Example on *** 'Example' on
page 253 ***.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 408 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.33 View linked to 3D

Criteria manual

StdViewNotLinkedToProduct (1203)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether a drawing contains views created using Generative
Drafting.
Views not created using Generative Drafting are rated as incorrect.

Related criteria
 View with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct, page 412

Dassault Systèmes 409 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore these view types” value list Specify the types of views to be ignored.

“Allowed exceptions: View names” Specify the names of views to be ignored. You can
use Regular Expressions.

“Ignore views which contain only these components” value list Views are ignored if
they contain only elements of the selected types.

“Mark views without document links as error” check box Select this option to mark all
views without link to a 3D model as incorrect.

“Allowed number of pointed documents” check box with spin boxes Select this option
to specify the allowed number of documents linked to the views of a drawing. Specify
the minimum and maximum allowed number in the spin boxes.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 410 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Application Tip
Criteria manual

If a view is linked to 3D geometry, you can inspect the link: Right-click the view in the
specification tree and choose “Query Object Links” from the context menu. This menu
entry is not available if the view is not linked to 3D geometry.

Fig. 1: Representation of isolated (interactive) views and unreferenced views in the specification tree

Dassault Systèmes 411 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.34 View with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct

Criteria manual

StdViewWithBrokenLink (1243)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether links between views and the associated Part or Product
are broken. If so, an error will be reported.

 NOTE: A broken link can have two possible causes:

• The reference model is missing.
• The reference model has not been loaded into the CATIA session.
Before the check, make sure all reference models are loaded. Otherwise the check result
will depend on which models are loaded or not.
In a batch check, Q-Checker will load the drawing without reference models.
To load all available reference models automatically into the CATIA session, select the
“Load reference documents” option in the CATIA application settings.

Fig. 1: View with a broken link to the associated 3D geometry

Suggested solution
To fix links between models in CATIA, use the “Edit Links & Relations” function. The
linked model must be available.
Choose “Edit” > “Links”.

Related criteria
 View linked to 3D, page 409

Dassault Systèmes 412 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check parameters
“Ignore locked views” If this option is activated, locked views will not be checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 413 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.35 View Update

Criteria manual

StdViewUpdate (1232)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether generative views are up-to-date. If that does not apply, an
error is reported.

 NOTE: Before the check, make sure all reference models are loaded. Otherwise the
check result will depend on which models are loaded or not:
• If the reference model is loaded in the CATIA session, Q-Checker detects the update
status of the generative view.
• If the reference model is not loaded or unavailable, the view has a broken link and will
be ignored. In this case, the criterion is considered fulfilled.
In a batch check, Q-Checker will load the drawing without reference models.
To load all available reference models automatically into the CATIA session, select the
“Load reference documents” option in the CATIA application settings.

 NOTE: A locked view cannot be updated. It will be ignored in the check and fulfil the
criterion.

Background
Views that are not up-to-date indicate inconsistencies within the drawing or between
the drawing and the linked 3D geometry.

Fig. 1: Non up-to-date views Fig. 2: Up-to-date views

Dassault Systèmes 414 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

• Use the Q-Checker healing function to update views. The linked 3D geometry is not
updated.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the sheet and select “Edit” > “Update current sheet”.

Criterion definition

Healing settings
“Update” The healing function updates non-up-to-date generative views.
The “not up-to-date” icons in the specification tree are not automatically reset when
performing this Q-Checker healing. To refresh the specification tree, collapse and
expand the specification tree once.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In the following cases, it is not clear whether a view is up-to-date:
• Unreferenced drawing: The link between drawing and model is broken.
• Unreferenced sheet: The link between sheet and model is broken.
• Unreferenced view: The link between view and model is broken.
• Locked view: A locked view cannot be updated.

INFO: In the CATIA specification tree, non-up-to-date elements are marked with
the “Not updated” icon.

Dassault Systèmes 415 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.36 Permitted Generative View Style

Criteria manual

StdPermittedGenViewStyle (1454)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether generative views use the specified generative view style. If
that does not apply, the affected views are rated as incorrect.

Background
The generative view style defines how a 3D model is converted into a 2D representation.

Example The drawing of a sheet metal stencil requires only the outer pattern without
hidden lines.

Certain views must be generated according to a given standard.

Fig. 1: View generated with standard “3D-2D- Fig. 2: View generated with standard “3D-2D-
hidden-line” hidden-line”

Fig. 3: View generated with standard “3D-2D- Fig. 4: View generated with standard “3D-2D-
hidden-line” hidden-line”

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the view in the specification tree, and apply the required
generative view style in “Edit” > “Properties” > “View”, “Generative view style”.

Dassault Systèmes 416 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed” value list Specify which generative view styles are allowed for which views.
Specify combinations of view names and the required view types. You can use Regular
Expressions.
If the value list is empty, no check is performed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To select between different view types, select “Tools” > “Options” > “Mechanical
design” > “Drafting” > “Administration” and deselect the “Prevent generative view style
usage” option.

Fig. 5: Option to allow or prevent the use of generative view styles

Dassault Systèmes 417 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.37 Scale of External 2D Component

Criteria manual

StdScaleOfExternal2DComponent (1519)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether 2D component instances are shown in the required scale.
If that does not apply, the component is rated as incorrect.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to apply the correct scale according to the healing parameter.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the 2D component in the specification tree, then
select “Properties”. On the “2D Component Instance” tab, correct the value in the
“Scale” field (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Title block as 2D xomponent instance with non-allowed scale

Dassault Systèmes 418 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed scaling factors for component” value list Specify the allowed scaling factors.
The required notation of scaling factors are two integer numbers, separated by a colon.

“Views to be checked” check boxes Specify the types of views to be checked. Select the
check boxes to check the particular types of views:
“BackgroundView” background view
“MainView” main view
“View” Any other working view
“BackgroundView (Detail)” Detail background view
“MainView (Detail)” Detail main view
“View (Detail)” Detail of any other working view

Dassault Systèmes 419 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Set the Scaling Factor” The healing function replaces incorrect 2D component scaling
factors with the value specified in the “Set a scaling factor to heal” text box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• When inserting a 2D component, you can already inspect its scale setting and adjust
it, if necessary (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Inserting a 2D component instance from a catalog

• You can use search to find 2D component instances and to select them for manual
correction (Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 420 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Finding 2D component instances using CATIA search

Dassault Systèmes 421 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.38 No active Background View

Criteria manual

StdNoActiveBackgroundView (1284)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the background view of a drawing sheet is active. If so, the
model will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Every detail drawing sheet has a main view (working view) and a background view.
• In main view you can add additional views such as “front view” or “left view”.
• The sheet background is normally used to place elements such as drawing frames or
BOM tables. Views should not be added to the background.
When a drawing has more than one sheet, a different view may be active on different
drawing sheets.

Fig. 1: Drawing frame on the background of a sheet

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate the required working view.
• Manual healing in CATIA: To switch between working views and the background,
choose “Edit” > “Background” or “Edit” > “Working views”.
•
•

Dassault Systèmes 422 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Set to main view” The healing function activates the main view of detail sheets.

 NOTE: If the background view is active when starting Q-Checker, no Q-Checker healing
can be performed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
If the drawing background is active, CATIA functions for the generation of views are
missing, whereas the function for generating a drawing frame is active. It may not be
immediately obvious that the active view is not the main view.

Dassault Systèmes 423 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.39 No active Background Detail View

Criteria manual

StdNoActiveBackgroundDetailView (1285)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the detail background view is active. If so, an error will be
reported.

Background
Every detail drawing sheet has a main view (working view) and a background view. In
the main view, you can add 2D components. Normally, one should not save a drawing
as long the background of a detail sheet is active.
When opening a drawing, the last view is restored. If a drawing has been saved with the
background of a detail sheet activated, problems and delays in subsequent processes
may occur.

Fig. 1: Drawing frame on the background of a detail sheet

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate the required working view.
• Manual healing in CATIA: To switch between working views and the background,
choose “Edit” > “Background” or “Edit” > “Working views”.
•
•

Dassault Systèmes 424 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Set to main view” The healing function activates the main view of detail sheets.

 NOTE: If the background view is active when starting Q-Checker, no Q-Checker healing
can be performed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
One can recognize the sight on the drawing by missing or existence of special func-
tions. If the drawing background is active, the functions for the generation of views are
missing, and the frame function is available.

Dassault Systèmes 425 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.40 Non-Allowed View Generation Mode

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedViewGenerationMode (1540)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether generative views have the required properties. If that does
not apply, an error is reported.

Background
For some applications, the exact view generation mode is not suitable, because exact
views of complex or large assemblies require a lot of memory.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the error element, and choose “Properties”. On
the “Generation” tab, correct the “Generation Mode” option.

Fig. 1: Generated view in “raster” mode

Dassault Systèmes 426 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed exceptions” value list Specify the names of views that are allowed to use a
different view generation mode.

“Allowed generation mode” list box Specify the allowed view generation mode, “exact
view”, “CGR”, “Approximate” or “Raster”.

“Allowed Only generate parts larger than value” check box with spin box If this option
is selected, the “Only generate parts larger than” property will be checked. Specify the
allowed value in the spin box.

“Allowed Enable occlusion culling status” check box with list box If this option is
selected, the “Enable occlusion culling” property will be checked. In the list box, select
the allowed setting.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
You can specify a preset for the view generation mode to be used for every newly gener-
ated view. To do this, go to CATIA application settings and choose “Mechanical” >
“Drafting” > “View”.

Dassault Systèmes 427 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

2.3.6.41 Sheet Scaling

Criteria manual

StdSheetScaling (1539)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether sheets are shown in the required scale. If that does not
apply, the drawing sheet is rated as incorrect.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the sheet in the specification tree, then choose
“Properties”. On the “Sheet” tab, correct the value in the “Scale” field. This value
applies to all views on this sheet.

Fig. 1: Sheet with scale 1:2

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed scaling factors” value list Specify the allowed drawing sheet scaling factors.
Specify the scaling factor as a the ratio of two integers, separated by a colon, for
example 1:20 or 4:3.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 428 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Sheets/Views

Application Tip
Criteria manual

The scale does not affect the position of views and other objects on the sheet.

Dassault Systèmes 429 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7 Elements
Criteria manual

Criteria in the “Elements” folder can be used to check for certain element types within a
model.

2.3.7.1 General

2.3.7.1.1 Maximum Number of Elements

StdMaximumNumberOfElements (1314)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of elements in the model is greater than the
specified maximum number. If so, the model will be rated as incorrect.
This criterion takes into account only elements that can be checked with Q-Checker. For
example, automatically generated parameters do not count. A sketch counts as a single
element; sketch elements are not counted individually.

Background
Problems may occur if memory usage or the number of elements in a model is very
high: Response times will increase, loading and saving the model takes longer, and data
exchange may be difficult.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA:
• Delete unused components.
• Split a part into separate models, where possible. For details see Prerequisite: In the
CATIA settings for external references, the option “Keep link with selected object” must be
active., page 56

Dassault Systèmes 430 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Maximum number” spin box Specify the maximum allowed number of elements in a
model.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 431 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.2 Conditional Feature Properties

Criteria manual

StdConditionalFeatureProperties (1311)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks model features for their properties or their number, based on user-
defined conditions.
• When checking feature properties, the selected elements must or must not have
certain specified properties.
• When checking the number, the specified number of elements with certain properties
must exist in the model.
If a feature does not correspond to the specified properties or number, an error is
reported.

 NOTE: This criterion can check a multitude of properties. Some of these properties can
be checked with other Q-Checker criteria that are easier to configure. We recommend
looking up whether the intended check is already covered by an existing criterion.

Dassault Systèmes 432 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Elements to be checked” value list Specify which elements are available to be
checked:
“Ignore element selection. Check all elements” All elements are available. The element
selection will be ignored. With this setting, elements can be checked that cannot be
included in an element selection, for example sheets and views in a drawing.
“Use element selection” Only elements that belong to the element selection can be
checked.

“Definition of the conditional feature properties” text box Check definition for checking
properties and the number of certain elements.

Dassault Systèmes 433 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General
Criteria manual

Property check
BEGIN_BLOCK
IF( <select> ) # Element selection
THEN( <check> ) # Property check
[HEALING( <healing> )] # Optionale Korrektur
ERROR_MSG # Fehlermeldung
"Error message"
"can have several lines"
[ERROR_MSG_DE # Fehlermeldung in weiteren Sprachen
"Error message"
"can have several lines"]
END_BLOCK

Amount check
BEGIN_BLOCK
IF( <select> ) # Element selection
AMOUNT number or number range # Number check
ERROR_MSG # Fehlermeldung
"Error message"
"can have several lines"
[ERROR_MSG_DE # Fehlermeldung in weiteren Sprachen
"Error message"
"can have several lines"]
END_BLOCK

<select> Q-Checker expression for element selection. See Q-Checker expressions for
element selection and property checks, page 438.
<check> Q-Checker expression for property check. See Q-Checker expressions for element
selection and property checks, page 438.
<healing> Q-Checker expression for healing. Healing is only available for property
checks. See Healing function for conditional feature properties, page 440
More information:
 Check definition for conditional feature properties, page 435

“Check part components” check box with list box Select this option to check also
product components.
Deselect this option to check the product without its components.
Properties of components loaded in visualization mode are not available. Choose an
action to perform in this case:
“Load component in background” To make all properties available, parts are switched to
design mode in the background.
“Mark component as failed” Parts in visualization mode will not be checked and will
always be rated as incorrect.

Dassault Systèmes 434 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

“Load component temporarily” Parts loaded in visualization mode are loaded in design
Criteria manual

mode for the check, and unloaded again after the check.

 NOTE: The analysis window shows all error elements of the components. However,
you cannot select these error elements. To analyze particular error elements, check the
respective part itself, or run a check with product component selection.

Healing settings
“Healing according to criterion definition:” The healing function performs the healings
defined in “Definition of the conditional feature properties”.

 NOTE: The healing function cannot be applied to product components.

To apply Q-Checker healings to product components, check the part itself, or run a
check with product component selection.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Check definition for conditional feature properties

Overview:
 Structure of a check definition, page 435
 Selecting the elements to be checked, page 436
 Property check, page 437
 Amount check, page 438
 Q-Checker expressions for element selection and property checks, page 438
 Healing function for conditional feature properties, page 440

Structure of a check definition

First, define the selection of elements to be checked. To define the selection, specify the
required properties of the elements to be selected.
Next, define the requirements to which the selected elements must correspond. These
requirements can refer to the number of elements in the selection, or certain element
properties.
The check definition with conditional feature properties is written as a block of state-
ments.
Every block is composed of the following instructions:
1. Keyword BEGIN_BLOCK
2. Definition of the element selection as an IF instruction

Dassault Systèmes 435 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

3. Either a THEN instruction for checking parameter values, or an AMOUNT instruction for
Criteria manual

checking the number of selected elements.

4. an optional HEALING instruction to define healing parameters when checking
property value checks.
5. Error messages in different languages (ERROR_MSG_DE, ERROR_MSG_EN, ERROR_MSG_
FR, ERROR_MSG_JP) or monolingual (ERROR_MSG)

6. the closing keyword END_BLOCK

Comment lines are marked at the beginning with character #.

Property check
BEGIN_BLOCK
IF( <select> ) # Element selection
THEN( <check> ) # Property check
[HEALING( <healing> )] # Optionale Korrektur
ERROR_MSG # Fehlermeldung
"Error message"
"can have several lines"
[ERROR_MSG_DE # Fehlermeldung in weiteren Sprachen
"Error message"
"can have several lines"]
END_BLOCK

Amount check
BEGIN_BLOCK
IF( <select> ) # Element selection
AMOUNT number or number range # Number check
ERROR_MSG # Fehlermeldung
"Error message"
"can have several lines"
[ERROR_MSG_DE # Fehlermeldung in weiteren Sprachen
"Error message"
"can have several lines"]
END_BLOCK

A single check definition may contain several blocks, which are processed inde-
pendently from each other and in the given order.

Selecting the elements to be checked

First, select the elements to be checked: Use the IF keyword and an expression to select
elements by their name, path, type, or by other properties.

Dassault Systèmes 436 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General
Criteria manual

Example The highlighted expression selects all elements of the Point type.

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF ( TYPE = Point )
...

Example Select all element of the Part type and whose names begin with the letter A

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF ( TYPE = Part AND NAME = "A.*" )
...

Example: Select all elements which are directly based on a sketch and which are not on
layer 1

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF ( DIRECT_PARENT( TYPE = Sketch ) AND LAYER != 1 )
...

The selected elements are subsequently checked for further properties, or for their
number.

Property check
Properties checks check every element within the selection whether the specified prop-
erties have the required values. Use keyword THEN followed by an expression which
defines the required properties. The result of this expression is a Boolean value (true or
false).

Example
• The selected elements must have a parent element in the specification tree of the
“OpenBody” type.

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF ( ... )
THEN ( TREE_PARENT(TYPE = OpenBody) )
ERROR_MSG
"..."
END_BLOCK

• If the selected elements are published, they must have a certain color.

Dassault Systèmes 437 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF ( ... )
THEN ( PUBLISHED = TRUE AND COLOR = 0,0,255 OR PUBLISHED = FALSE )
ERROR_MSG
"..."
END_BLOCK

TIP: Depending on the objective of the check, element properties can be evaluated in
the IF instruction or in the THEN instruction:
• The IF instruction acts as a filter and builds a selection of elements with properties
that are relevant for the check. Usually, the actual properties to be checked are not
defined in this instruction.
• The THEN instruction evaluates the element properties to determine which elements
are in order and which are faulty.

Amount check
To check the number of elements in a selection, use the AMOUNT keyword, followed by a
number or numeric range:

Statement Number of selected elements is

AMOUNT n exactly n

AMOUNT n-m between n and m

AMOUNT n- at least n

AMOUNT -n up to n

Example The selection contains all sketches in the model. The check definition requires
that this selection must not contain more than 3 elements.

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF ( TYPE = Sketch ) # Definition der Auswahl
AMOUNT -3
...

The number of parent and child elements of a selected element, can be checked as part
of the properties check (THEN).

Q-Checker expressions for element selection and property checks

Q-Checker expressions for element selection (IF) and property checks (THEN) can be
formed using the keywords listed below.

Dassault Systèmes 438 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

• Element properties:
Criteria manual

 Element name (NAME)

 Element path name (PATHNAME)
 Q-Checker element type (TYPE)
 CAA element type (CAA_TYPE)
 Visibility state (SHOW)
 Effective visibility (VISIBLE)
 Visibility of parameters and relations (HIDDEN)
 Color (COLOR)
 Transparency (TRANSPARENCY)
 Transparency inheritance (TRANSPARENCY_INHERITANCE)
 Layer (LAYER)
 Point type (PT_TYPE)
 Line type (LN_TYPE)
 Line thickness (THICKNESS)
 Selectability (PICK)
 Existence of parent elements in the history (PARENT_EXIST)
 Existence of child elements in the history (CHILD_EXIST)
 Negative Body (NEGATIVE_BODY)
 Element attributes (HAS_ATTRIBUTE)
 Number of direct child elements in specification tree (NUM_DIRECT_TREE_
CHILD)
• Model properties:
 Root-component property (MODEL_PROPERTY)
 Component properties in a product (COMPONENT_PROPERTY)
 Electrical type of model (MODEL_ELEC_TYPE)
 Electrical type of a component in the product (COMPONENT_ELEC_TYPE)
• Special properties:
 Model name and element name partly identical (SUBSTRING_NAME)
 Published element (PUBLISHED)
 Publication name (PUBLISHNAME)
• Properties of parent elements and child elements:
 Parent element (PARENT)/Direct parent element (DIRECT_PARENT)
 Child elements (CHILD)/Direct child elements (DIRECT_CHILD)

Dassault Systèmes 439 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

 Parent elements in specification tree (TREE_PARENT)/Direct parent element in

Criteria manual

specification tree (DIRECT_TREE_PARENT)

 Child elements in specification tree (TREE_CHILD)/Direct child elements in
specification tree (DIRECT_TREE_CHILD)
• Logical combination of expressions for element selection (IF) and property checks
(THEN):
Boolean operators NOT, OR and AND
Partial expressions in parentheses ( ) are evaluated first.
 More information: Administration manual, Structure of Q-Checker Expressions

Healing function for conditional feature properties

You can add a healing definition to properties checks with conditional feature proper-
ties (THEN). Use the HEALING keyword with the following expressions:
 Visibility healing (SHOW)
 Color healing (RGB color code)
 Transparency healing (TRANSPARENCY)
 Layer healing (LAYER)
 Point type healing (PT_TYPE)
 Line type healing (LN_TYPE)
 Line thickness healing (THICKNESS)
 Healing by moving an element (MOVE)
 Healing by renaming an element (NAME)
 Healing by deleting an element (DELETE)
Description of the available healing functions for conditional feature properties:
 Administration manual, 15.5.6 Healing Keywords

Example Elements with line type 5 must have a line width of 2. The healing function
applies the required line width.

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF ( LN_TYPE = 5 )
THEN ( THICKNESS = 2 )
HEALING ( THICKNESS = 2 )
ERROR_MSG
"Wrong Thickness"
"Healing is available"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 440 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Result and error messages

Criteria manual

If the THEN or AMOUNT instructions of a block is fulfilled, the criterion is fulfilled. If the
properties or number check results in an error, the error message is displayed.
In the result of property checks, errors are attributed to the respective faulty element. In
the result of number checks, results cannot be attributed to a particular element, there-
fore all error messages are displayed with the check criterion.
You can add language-dependent error messages which are displayed in the active
language of the Q-Checker user interface, or you can add a language-independent error
message.

Keyword Language of the error message

ERROR_MSG language-independent/all other languages

ERROR_MSG_DE German

ERROR_MSG_EN English

ERROR_MSG_FR French

ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese

Error messages may use more than one line, where each line of the message is put in
quotation marks.

Example German and multilingual error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
IF( NAME = "zahn" AND TYPE = Parameter )
THEN( PATHNAME = ".*\\Gear\\.*" )
ERROR_MSG_DE
"Der Elementpfad ist falsch."
"Das Element muss sich innerhalb des Elements Gear befinden."
ERROR_MSG
"The path for this entity is wrong."
"The entity must be within the entity Gear."
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 441 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.3 Permitted Element Types in Model

Criteria manual

StdAllowedTypeInModel (1072)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains non-allowed types of elements. If so,
the model will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Possible reasons why certain element types are not allowed:
• Certain types of elements may cause technical problems during further use of the
data.
• Some types of elements require a special CATIA license to be created or edited.

Example Some companies do not allow the use of hybrid elements due to restrictions
in further processes.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete non-allowed elements.
• To avoid problems, get informed about allowed and recommended design methods,
especially about the use of surface, solid and hybrid models.

Dassault Systèmes 442 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed types” value list Specify the allowed types of elements.

 NOTE: If this list is left empty, no element of any type is allowed, and the models is
always rated as incorrect.

“Not allowed types” value list Specify exceptions from the selection of allowed element
types. If an element group is selected to be allowed, you can exclude single element
types of this element group and define them as not allowed.

Example On the screenshot, the Body element type has been selected as not allowed as
an exception from the ALL element group.

Dassault Systèmes 443 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Remove” The healing function deletes all elements with non-allowed element types.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 For more information on element types and element groups, see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Dassault Systèmes 444 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.4 Permitted Element Types in SHOW

Criteria manual

StdAllowedTypeInShowInModel (1073)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether only certain types of elements are in “visible”/“SHOW”
state. Other types of elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
The construction methodology may require a defined visibility state for certain
construction or calculation elements. This can be used to improve clarity of a complex
model, or to prepare a model for selective data export.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set elements with incorrect visualization state to
“NOSHOW”.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Clean up the model after finishing the design.

Dassault Systèmes 445 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed types” value list Specify the types of element for which the “visible”/“SHOW”
state is allowed.
Elements of these types are allowed to, but do not need to be visible. All other types of
element must not be visible.

“Not allowed types” value list Specify exceptions from the selection of allowed element

Dassault Systèmes 446 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

types. If an element group is selected to be allowed, you can exclude single element
Criteria manual

types of this element group and define them as not allowed.

Example In the “Allowed types” list, the element group “ALL” containing all element
types is selected. The “Not allowed types” list, the “Curve” and “Point” element types
are selected. All elements except elements of the “Curve” or “Point” type are allowed to
be in “visible”/“SHOW” state.

“Element name exception” value list Specify the names of allowed elements although
their element type is selected in the “Not allowed types” list. You can use Regular
Expressions.

“Do not mark elements which parents are in NOSHOW” check box If this option is
activated, elements in “visible”/“SHOW” state are not rated as incorrect if one of their
parent elements is in “hidden”/“NOSHOW” state.

Healing settings
“Set to NOSHOW” The healing function hides elements with incorrect visualization
state.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 More information on element types and element groups see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Dassault Systèmes 447 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.5 Permitted Element Types in NOSHOW

Criteria manual

StdAllowedTypeInNoShowInModel (1092)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether only certain types of elements are in “hidden”/
“NOSHOW” state. Other types of elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
The construction methodology may require a defined visibility state for certain
construction or calculation elements. This can be used to improve clarity of a complex
model, or to prepare a model for selective data export.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to make non-allowed hidden elements visible (“SHOW”).
• Manual healing in CATIA: Clean up the model after finishing the design.

Dassault Systèmes 448 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check only the associated attribute of the element” check box If this option is not
selected, the visibility state of the result element is checked. The visibility state of the
resulting solid is “NOSHOW” if any of the contributing solid features is in
“NOSHOW”.
If this option is selected, the visibility state of the respective feature is checked. In this
case, the visibility state of the result element based on the construction history is not
considered.

“Allowed types” value list Specify the types of element for which the “hidden”/
“NOSHOW” state is allowed.
Elements of these types are allowed to, but do not need to be hidden. No other types of
elements may be hidden.

Dassault Systèmes 449 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

“Not allowed types” value list Specify exceptions from the selection of allowed element
Criteria manual

types. If an element group is selected to be allowed, you can exclude single element
types of this element group and define them as not allowed.

Example In the “Allowed types” list, the element group “ALL” containing all element
types is selected. The “Not allowed types” list, the “OpenBody” element type is selected.
Therefore all elements except elements of the “OpenBody” type are allowed to be in
“Hidden”/“NOSHOW” state.

“Element name exception” value list Specify the names of elements that are allowed to
be hidden although their element type has been defined as an exception in the “Not
allowed types” list. You can use Regular Expressions.

Healing settings
“Set to SHOW” The healing function sets elements with incorrect visualization state to
“visible”/“SHOW”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 For more information on element types and element groups, see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Dassault Systèmes 450 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.6 Permitted Elements Types in PICK

Criteria manual

StdAllowedTypeInPickInModel (1470)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether only certain types of elements are in “selectable”/“PICK”
state. Other types of elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Elements can be locked against unintentional selection or changes in the geometry area
by making them not selectable, i.e. by applying the “NOPICK” state. These elements
can still be selected using CATIA search and via the specification tree.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set elements with incorrect “pickable” state to “not
pickable” or to delete these elements.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the incorrect element in the specification tree,
then select “Properties”. On the “Graphic” tab, correct the “Pickable” option.

Related criteria
 Permitted Element Types in NOPICK, page 454

Dassault Systèmes 451 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed types” value list Specify the types of elements that are allowed to be pickable.
Elements of these types are allowed to, but do not need to be pickable. No other types
of elements may be pickable.

“Without” value list Specify non-allowed types of elements that have been selected as
part of an allowed element group in the “Allowed types” value list.

Example In the “Allowed types” list, the element group “ALL” containing all element
types is selected. In the “Without” value list, the “SolidBody” element type is selected as
an exception.

Dassault Systèmes 452 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Therefore all elements except elements of the “SolidBody” type are allowed to be pick-
Criteria manual

able.

“Permit all logically linked elements (PARENTS)” check box If this option is activated,
elements are allowed to be pickable if they are logically linked elements.

Healing settings
“Set to NOPICK” The healing function sets elements with an incorrect pickable state to
“not pickable”.

“Remove” The healing function deletes elements with an incorrect pickable state.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 More information on element types and element groups see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Application Tip
Use CATIA search to find and selected non-selectable geometry elements. Once you
have selected the elements, you can apply the required property value to all selected
elements at the same time.

Dassault Systèmes 453 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.7 Permitted Element Types in NOPICK

Criteria manual

StdAllowedTypeInNoPickInModel (1093)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether only certain types of elements are in “not selectable”/
“NOPICK” state. Other types of elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Elements can be locked against unintentional selection or changes in the geometry area
by making them not selectable, i.e. by applying the “NOPICK” state. These elements
can still be selected using CATIA search and via the specification tree.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to make non-allowed not selectable elements selectable again
(that is, apply the “PICK” state).
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the incorrect element in the specification tree,
then select “Properties”. On the “Graphic” tab, correct the “Pickable” option.

Related criteria
 Permitted Elements Types in PICK, page 451.

Dassault Systèmes 454 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed types” value list Specify the types of element for which the “not pickable”/
“NOPICK” state is allowed.
Elements of these types are allowed, but don't need to be in “not pickable”/“NOPICK”
state. All other element types have to be pickable.

“without” value list Specify non-allowed types of elements that have been selected as
part of an allowed element group in the “Allowed types” value list.

“Permit all logically linked elements (PARENTS)” check box If this option is activated,
elements are allowed to be not pickable if they are logically linked elements.

Dassault Systèmes 455 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Set to PICK” The healing function sets non-allowed not pickable elements to the pick-
able state.

“Remove” The healing function sets non-allowed not pickable elements to the pickable
state.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 For more information on element types and element groups, see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Application Tip
Use CATIA search to find and selected non-selectable geometry elements. Once you
have selected the elements, you can apply the required property value to all selected
elements at the same time.

Dassault Systèmes 456 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.8 The Same Feature Registered in More Than One Body [O-GL-IG]
Criteria manual

StdFeatureRegisteredWithMoreThanOneGroup (1332)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether features are registered in more than one body or geomet-
rical set of the same part. If so, an error will be reported.

Background

Example Sketches can be created both in geometrical sets and in bodies. When
creating a block based on a sketch which is not registered in the active body, an addi-
tional entry for the sketch is created in the active body. The same applies to other types
of elements.

If the same elements are registered with more than one body, problems may occur
when meshing a mode, or duplicate elements may be generated when exchanging the
model with another CAD system.

Fig. 1: Skizze.1 is registered in two different bodies

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the element, then select “Object” > “Change
Geometrical Set”.

Dassault Systèmes 457 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 458 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.9 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area [O-CM-OB]

Criteria manual

StdGeometryOutsideWorkingArea (1189)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether 3D geometry elements (in CATIA V4 called Space Geom-
etry) are positioned outside of the specified working area. Elements which are posi-
tioned entirely or (optional) partly outside the working area are rated as incorrect.

Background
In some CAD systems, the geometry must not be outside a certain working area. When
loading element outside this working area, the CAD system may react abnormally or
crash.

Fig. 1: Working area delimited by a sphere Fig. 2: Working area delimited by a cube

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete or hide incorrect elements.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Change the parameters of the elements to position them
within the defined working area.

Related criteria
 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area in Product, page 462

Dassault Systèmes 459 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check if elements are inside” list box Choose the shape of the working area within
which the elements have to be positioned:
• Cube: The working area is delimited by a cube and centered on the origin of the active
axis system.
• Sphere: The working area is delimited by a sphere and centered on the origin of the
active axis system.
• Cuboid: The working area is delimited by a cuboid and is positioned relative to the
origin of the active axis system.

“Size” spin box Specify the size of the working area:

• Cube: This value defines the half length of a cube edge.
• Sphere: This value defines the sphere radius.
• Cuboid: This value is not used for cuboids. Instead, define parameters “Cuboid X/Y/Z
range”.

“Cuboid X/Y/Z range” spin boxes If the “Check if elements are inside” list box is set to
“Cuboid”, specify the dimensions of the cuboid-shaped working area. Specify the

Dassault Systèmes 460 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

minimum and maximum coordinates of the cuboid in X, Y and Z directions.

Criteria manual

Use “Cuboid” to define cuboid and cubic working areas that are not centered on the
origin.

“Check only Bounding Box” check box If this option is not selected, the bounding
boxes of all sub-elements of the element to be checked are taken into account (Fig. 3).
If this option is selected, the bounding box of the element to be checked is taken into
account. In this case, an element can be identified as partly outside the working area,
even if all its sub-elements are located entirely outside the working area (Fig. 4).

Fig. 3: If the current option is not selected, the Fig. 4: If the current option is selected, the
bounding boxes of every face are taken into bounding box of the element to be checked is
account. In the figure, the bounding boxes of taken into account. In the figure, the element
all sub-elements (red dashed line) are outside bounding box (red dashed line) is partly
the working area (green hatched area). outside the working area (green hatched area).

“Check also if an element is partially outside” check box If this option is selected,
elements are considered incorrect if they are positioned either fully or partly outside the
working area.
If this option is not selected, elements are considered incorrect only if they are posi-
tioned fully outside the working area.

“Working area centered on geometry Bounding Box” check box If this option is
selected, the coordinates of the working area refer to the spatial center of the geometry
bounding box. If this option is not selected, the coordinates of the working area refer to
the model origin.

Healing settings
“Delete” option The healing function deletes incorrect elements.

“Set to NOSHOW” The healing function hides incorrect elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 461 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.10 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area in Product

Criteria manual

StdGeometryOutsideWorkingAreaProduct (1605)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the 3D geometry of part components of a product is posi-
tioned outside of the specified working area. Elements which are positioned entirely or
(optional) partly outside the working area are rated as incorrect.
Components with broken links will be ignored. Note that this criterion can check visible
and hidden elements. Hidden elements can be excluded from the check using an appro-
priate element selection. Such an element selection can be particularly useful when
using the “Set to NOSHOW” healing function,

Background
In some CAD systems, the geometry must not be outside a certain working area. When
loading element outside this working area, the CAD system may react abnormally or
crash.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to hide incorrect elements.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Change the parameters of the elements to position them
within the defined working area.

Related criteria
 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area [O-CM-OB], page 459

Dassault Systèmes 462 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check if elements are inside” list box Choose the shape of the working area within
which the elements have to be positioned:
• Cube: The working area is delimited by a cube and centered on the origin of the active
axis system.
• Sphere: The working area is delimited by a sphere and centered on the origin of the
active axis system.
• Cuboid: The working area is delimited by a cuboid and is positioned relative to the
origin of the active axis system.

“Cube half length/Sphere radius” spin box Define the size of the working area:
• Cube: This value defines the half length of a cube edge.
• Sphere: This value defines the sphere radius.
• Cuboid: This value is not used for cuboids. Instead, define parameters “Cuboid X/Y/Z
range”.

“Cuboid X/Y/Z range” spin boxes If the “Check if elements are inside” list box is set to
“Cuboid”, specify the dimensions of the cuboid-shaped working area. Specify the
minimum and maximum coordinates of the cuboid in X, Y and Z directions.
Use “Cuboid” to define cuboid and cubic working areas that are not centered on the
origin.

“Check also if an element is partially outside” check box If this option is selected,

Dassault Systèmes 463 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

elements are considered incorrect if they are positioned either fully or partly outside of
Criteria manual

the working area.

If this option is not selected, elements are considered incorrect only if they are posi-
tioned fully outside the working area.

Healing settings
“Delete” option The healing function deletes incorrect elements.

“Set to NOSHOW” The healing function hides incorrect elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 464 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.11 Permitted Surface Feature Types in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdPermittedSurfaceTypeInOpenBodies (1279)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain bodies contain only allowed surface components.
If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
To improve the model structure for reuse, certain types of surface features are allowed
only in certain geometrical sets.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Surface features of a certain type that in a non-allowed
geometrical set can be moved to another geometrical set. Right-click the element, then
select “Object” > “Change Geometrical Set”.

Dassault Systèmes 465 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Body types to be checked” value list Specify which types of bodies to check.

“Surface has to be in” check boxes with list boxes If this option is selected, surface
features must have a certain visibility state. In the list box, choose the allowed state,
“SHOW” (visible) oder “NOSHOW” (hidden).

“Allowed surface types” value list Specify the allowed types of surface features.

“List of bodies to be checked” value list Specify paths and names of the bodies that
contain the elements to be checked. You can use wildcards.

Dassault Systèmes 466 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

 For examples see the description of the “Bodies to be checked” field in Elements
Criteria manual

without Child Elements in Specific Bodies, page 782.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 467 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.12 Elements in Specific Bodies Must Be Published

Criteria manual

StdElementsInBodiesMustBePublished (1277)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain bodies contain published elements of specified
element types. If these elements are not published, an error is reported.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: To publish an element, mark the element and choose
“Tools” > “Publication”.

Related criteria
 Feature Must Exist in Specific Bodies, page 814

Dassault Systèmes 468 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Element name identical to the corresponding publication name” check box If this
check box is activated, the published name and the element name must be identical. If
they are not identical, an error is reported.

“Check only elements in SHOW” check box If this option is activated, only elements in
SHOW state will be checked.

“List of element types to be checked” value list Specify the types of elements to be
checked. At least one element type must be selected.

“Bodies to be checked” value list Specify paths and names of the bodies that contain
the elements to be checked. You can use wildcards. At least one path has to be selected.
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784.

Dassault Systèmes 469 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

“List of feature names to be checked” value list Specify the names of the elements to
Criteria manual

be checked These elements must belong to a body selected in the “List of bodies to be
checked”. You can use Regular Expressions. At least one element has to be specified.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Surface and wire elements that are not in the correct geometrical set can be moved into
the correct geometrical set. Right-click the element, then select “Object” > “Change
Geometrical Set”.

Dassault Systèmes 470 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.13 Empty Body

Criteria manual

StdUnusedBodies (1295)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains empty bodies. Empty bodies are rated
as incorrect.
Q-Checker element types Body, HybridBody, OpenBody (geometrical sets) and Ordered-
GeometricalSet are taken into account. Additionally, bodies of the PartBody and Hybrid-
PartBody types can be taken into account.
Bodies of Q-Checker element types BooleanBody and HybridBooleanBody are not taken
into account.

Background
In the specification tree, the model geometry is structured into different units (bodies,
geometrical sets, parts, components, ...). Wire and surface components are grouped in
geometrical sets, volume components are grouped in bodies.

Fig. 1: a. Non-empty body (has child elements), b. empty body

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to delete unused empty bodies.

Dassault Systèmes 471 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check PartBody” check box If this option is selected, an empty body of the PartBody
or HybridPartBody type is not allowed.
If this option is not selected, the part body is ignored.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes empty bodies.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In many cases, a predefined start model must be used for component design. Start
models may contain empty bodies which must not be moved or deleted.

Dassault Systèmes 472 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.14 Empty body must exist

Criteria manual

StdEmptyBodyMustExist (1421)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains empty bodies with certain names. If that
does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.
Q-Checker element types Body, HybridBody, OpenBody (geometrical sets) and Ordered-
GeometricalSet are taken into account. Additionally, bodies of the PartBody and Hybrid-
PartBody types can be taken into account.
Bodies of Q-Checker element types BooleanBody and HybridBooleanBody are not taken
into account.

Background
In the specification tree, the model geometry is structured into different units (bodies,
geometrical sets, parts, components, ...). Wire and surface components are grouped in
geometrical sets, volume components are grouped in bodies.
Normally, geometrical sets and bodies are not empty. However, empty bodies may be
required for certain applications.

Fig. 1: a. Non-empty body, b. empty body

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: To make a set empty as required, move the components to
other bodies or decide whether they can be deleted.

Dassault Systèmes 473 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check PartBody” check box If this option is activated, the PartBody must be empty.

“Body Name” value list Specify the names of bodies that must be empty.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In many cases, a predefined start model must be used for component design. Start
models should already contain the required empty bodies.

Dassault Systèmes 474 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.15 Deactivated Feature

Criteria manual

StdInactivatedEntities (1296)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains deactivated features. If so, the affected
elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Elements in a model may have been disabled for various reasons:
• After changing a model, the model cannot be updated anymore. If the problem
cannot be resolved otherwise, the affected component can be deactivated.
• Components can be deactivated for better handling of the model and to decrease
memory usage.

Fig. 1: Component “Kantenverrundung.1” is deactivated.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate or delete deactivated features.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the deactivated element, then choose
“Properties”. On the “Mechanical” tab, correct the “Deactivated” option.

Dassault Systèmes 475 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Exceptions for allowed deactivated features” value list Specify which deactivated
features are allowed as exceptions. Specify the path and name of these features. You
can use Regular Expressions.

“Select for product components the reference of the path” list box For product compo-
nents, specify whether the paths in the “Exceptions for allowed deactivated features”
contain the instance name or part number of the component.

 NOTE: The instance name of a part component cannot be read if the part component
is not loaded in design mode. Part components that are not loaded are ignored without
notification to the user.
Therefore we recommend combining this criterion with the following criteria:
 View linked to 3D, page 409
 View with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct, page 412
 Product component with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct, page 850

“For components loaded in visu mode: select action for part number” list box The part
number of a part component cannot be read if the part component is not loaded in

Dassault Systèmes 476 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

design mode. For this case, specify how to handle the part components defined as
Criteria manual

exceptions:
“Load component in background” Load components in the background and check them.
If a component cannot be loaded (due to a broken link), the part number cannot be
read; in this case, the part component is rated as incorrect.
“Ignore component” The component is not checked and not rated as incorrect.
“Mark component as failed” The component is not checked and always rated as
incorrect.

Healing settings
“Activate (also deactivated parent elements)” This healing function activates deacti-
vated elements including any deactivated parent elements.

“Remove” This healing function deletes deactivated elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To find deactivated features even in complex models, use “Tools” > “Parameterization
Analysis”(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Using parameterization analysis to identify deactivated components

Dassault Systèmes 477 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.16 Activated Feature

Criteria manual

StdActivatedFeature (1313)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain elements are deactivated. If that does not apply,
the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Elements in a model may have been disabled for various reasons:
• After changing a model, the model cannot be updated anymore. If the problem
cannot be resolved otherwise, the affected component can be deactivated.
• Components can be deactivated for better handling of the model and to decrease
memory usage.

Fig. 1: Activated element “Machining allowance” Fig. 2: Deactivated element “Machining allowance”

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to deactivate or delete activated features.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the deactivated element, then choose
“Properties”. On the “Mechanical” tab, correct the “Deactivated” option.

Dassault Systèmes 478 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Feature path” value list Specify the names of components that must be deactivated.
You can use Regular Expressions.

“Select for product components the reference of the path” list box For product compo-
nents, specify whether the paths in the “Exceptions for allowed deactivated features”
contain the instance name or part number of the component.

 NOTE: The instance name of a part component cannot be read if the part component
is not loaded in design mode. Q-Checker will ignore these part components without
notifying the user.
Therefore we recommend combining this criterion with the following criteria:
 View linked to 3D, page 409
 View with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct, page 412
 Product component with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct, page 850

“For components loaded in visu mode: select action for part number” list box The part
number of a part component cannot be read if the part component is not loaded in
design mode. This setting defines how to handle part components in this case:
“Load component in background” Load components in the background and check them.

Dassault Systèmes 479 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

If a component cannot be loaded (due to a broken link), the part number cannot be
Criteria manual

read; in this case, the part component is rated as incorrect.

“Ignore component” The component is not checked and not rated as incorrect.
“Mark component” The component is not checked and always rated as incorrect.

Healing settings
“Deactivate” This healing function deletes deactivated elements.

“Remove” This healing functions deletes activated elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 480 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.17 Unresolved Feature

Criteria manual

StdNonSynchronizedEntities (1302)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains unresolved features. If so, the affected
elements will be rated as incorrect.
The criterion also recognizes unresolved components in the specification tree of draw-
ings, except sheets and views.

Background
Design changes may affect connecting parts, referenced elements within models, draw-
ings and therefore the update status. If a model contains unsuitable parameter values
or if required elements have been deleted, the update fails. Components that fail to be
updated are called unresolved features.
In the CATIA specification tree, unresolved features are marked with an exclama-
tion mark on yellow background (Fig. 1, Fig. 2) .

Fig. 1: Unresolved feature “EdgeFillet.1” Fig. 2: Unresolved feature “DesignTable.1” inside a

drawing

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete unresolved features.
• When updating a model, CATIA offers you the following functions to handle update
problems: “Edit”, “Deactivate”, “Isolate” or “Delete”.

Dassault Systèmes 481 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Options for handling components with update problems

Dassault Systèmes 482 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore Publications” check box If this option is selected, publications will be ignored.
Published elements themselves will be checked.

“Ignore Deactivated Features” check box If this option is activated, deactivated

elements will be ignored.

“Ignore all except publications” check box If this option is selected, only publications
of elements will be checked. Published elements themselves will not be checked.

“Ignore Tubing Part Connector publications” check box If this option is selected, publi-
cations of the Tubing Part Connector type will not be checked.

“Ignore elements in sketches” check box If this option is selected, elements in

sketches will not be checked. If this option is not selected, elements in sketches are
checked whether they can be resolved.
If the sketch itself cannot be resolved, its elements will not be checked.

 NOTE: If both “Ignore Publications” and “Ignore Deactivated Features” are selected,
nothing will be checked.

Healing settings
“Remove unresolved feature” The healing function deletes unresolved features.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 483 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Application Tip
Criteria manual

To find deactivated features even in complex models, you can use Parameterization
Analysis (Fig. 4).
In CATIA, choose “Tools” > “Parameterization Analysis”.

Fig. 4: Using parameterization analysis to identify deactivated components

Dassault Systèmes 484 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.18 Parameter Properties

Criteria manual

StdParameterProperties (1601)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether parameters have the required properties. If that does not
apply, the affected parameters are rated as incorrect.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the parameter, then choose “Object” > “Lock” or
“Object” > “Unlock” on the context menu.

Criterion definition

Check parameters
“Not allowed lock status” check box with list box If this option is selected, the lock
status of parameters will be checked. In the list box, choose the not-allowed lock status.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 485 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.19 User-Defined Feature [O-EL-UD]

Criteria manual

StdUserDefinedFeature (1336)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains user-defined features (UDF). If so,
these features will be rated as incorrect.

Background
User-defined features are reusable components with certain user-defined properties. A
user-defined feature can contain both geometry and process-related attributes, for
example drill type or purpose (Fig. 1). These attributes can be used later, for example in
NC programs.
Normally, user-defined features are only compatible with the original CAD system and
cannot be transferred to other CAD systems.

Fig. 1: Parameter definition of a user-defined component

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 486 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.20 Non-Allowed Associative Feature

Criteria manual

StdInconsistentFeatureReference (1351)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains elements with a non-allowed link
status. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.
The check is available for elements with the following link status:

Link type Icon Description

Internal CCP Geometry copied from the same part, synchronized

Non-associative Copied element without associativity

External Broken link

External Reference model found but not loaded

External Geometry copied from other part, synchronized

External Referenced published element, synchronized

External Referenced published element, not synchronized

External Not synchronized geometry

Background
There are different methods for copying components (e.g. geometry, parameter,
formulas, ...) within or between models. You can insert in the following ways: “As
Result”, “As Result with Link” or “As Specified in Part Document”. When inserting the
copy “As Result With Link”, changes to the original apply also to the copy.
Some data management system cannot manage links between models. When moving
models in the file system, it may occur that links cannot be resolved anymore. Unre-
solved links cause delays and extra cost.

Application Tip
• Use Q-Checker healing to isolate non-allowed associative features.

Dassault Systèmes 487 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

• To fix links between models in CATIA, use the “Edit Links & Relations” function. The
Criteria manual

linked model must be available.

Choose “Edit” > “Links”.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Non-allowed associative feature type” value list Specify the types of associative
features that are not allowed.

Healing settings
“Isolate” The healing function isolates elements that have a non-allowed link
status. After the elements have been isolated, the specification tree icons of these
elements change to the “Broken link” icon.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 488 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.21 Visualization State of Published Entities

Criteria manual

StdVisStatusOfPublishedEntities (1445)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether published elements have the specified visualization state.
If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
There are different methods for data exchange between parts. One method is to publish
an element and insert the element as a copy into another part. The copied element
remains linked to its original. The link refers to the published name and is independent
from the file path.
The process may be delayed if the visualization state does not correspond to the
requirements.

Fig. 1: Published element Flange is hidden

Suggested solution

Manual healing in CATIA

Set the correct visualization state according to the specification.

Dassault Systèmes 489 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Visualization mode” list box Specify the correct visualization state for published
elements:
“SHOW” Elements in “Visible”/“SHOW” state
“SHOW+VISIBLE” All visible elements, that is elements with status “Visible” whose
parent elements are also in “Visible” state.
“NOSHOW” Elements in “Hidden”/“NOSHOW” state
“NON-VISIBLE” All non-visible elements, that is elements which are either hidden
themselves or which have at least one hidden parent element.

Healing settings
“Set visualization mode” The healing functions sets the visualization mode of
published elements according to the specification in the “Visualization mode” list box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 490 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.22 Non-Allowed Assembly Constraints

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedAssemblyConstraints (1532)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the assembly contains non-allowed assembly constraints.
If so, an error will be reported.

Background
The relative position of components in an assembly is defined by assembly constraints.
Types of assembly constraints are contact, offset, coincidence, and angle constraints.
Components are unambiguously positioned in 3D space if assembly constraints have
been applied to each of the six degrees of freedom. Consequently, such components
cannot be repositioned. A component is also unambiguously positioned when it has
been fixated.

Fig. 1: Assembly constraints in the specification tree

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA:
• Delete non-allowed assembly constraints, or replace them with allowed assembly
constraints.

Dassault Systèmes 491 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

• To change assembly constraints, right-click the component, then choose “Object” >
Criteria manual

“Change Constraint”(Fig. 2). In the dialog, specify the new assembly constraints
(Fig. 3).

Fig. 2: Changing assembly constraints: Selecting the context menu command

Fig. 3: Changing assembly constraints: Selecting a new constraint

Dassault Systèmes 492 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Non-allowed constraint types” value list Specify the non-allowed types of assembly
constraints.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Assembly dependencies can be analyzed using the “Assembly Design” workbench.
• Analyze assembly constraints: Choose “Analyze” > “Constraints”, to identify the state
of assembly constraints (Fig. 4).
• Analysis of assembly dependencies between components: Select “Analyze” >
“Constraints” to identify dependencies between assembly constraints (Fig. 5).

Dassault Systèmes 493 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: State of assembly constraints Fig. 5: Assembly dependencies

Dassault Systèmes 494 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.23 Low Intensity

Criteria manual

StdLowIntensity (1565)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the “Low Intensity” property has the allowed mode for all
checked elements. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
Elements that do not have the “Low Intensity” property will be ignored, for example the
root element.

Background
The “Low Intensity” setting can be found in the properties of the respective element
(“Edit” > “Properties”, “Graphic” tab) (Fig. 2) This particular setting is checked using
the current criterion.
There are other functions having the same visual effect (Fig. 1):
• In the CATIA “2D Layout for 3D Design” workbench, right-click any view in the
geometry area or specification tree, and choose “Background” > “Low-intensified”
from the context menu.
• In the sketcher, click to activate the “Low intensity background” button on the
“Visualization” toolbar.
• In the CATIA “Generative Shape Design” or “Wireframe and Surface” workbench,
click to activate the “Low intensity background” button on the “Tools” toolbar.
Problems and irritations may occur if the “Low Intensity” option in the element proper-
ties has been activated.

Fig. 1: Part displayed with low Intensity

Dassault Systèmes 495 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Graphic properties of an element with the “Low Intensity” option activated

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set the “Low Intensity” option to the required value.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the incorrect element in the specification tree, go to
“Edit” > “Properties” > “Graphic” and change the “Low Intensity” option.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Non allowed mode” list box Choose the non-allowed value for the “Low intensity”
option (“On” or “Off”).

Dassault Systèmes 496 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Healing parameters
Criteria manual

“Set allowed mode” The healing function sets the “Low intensity” setting to the
allowed value.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
The default color for elements display in low intensity mode is dark green. To specify a
different color in , go to “Tools” > “Optionen” > “Allgemein” > “Anzeige” >
“Darstellung”(Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Default setting for the low intensity color

Dassault Systèmes 497 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

2.3.7.1.24 Allowed Unit

Criteria manual

StdAllowedFTADimensionUnit (1419)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether FT/A dimensions use an allowed unit of measurement.
Non-allowed units of measurement are rated as incorrect.

Background
Dimensions use the units of measurement defined in the currently used standard.
However, it may be necessary to build an assembly from models that have been created
using different units of measurement, for example millimeters and inches. It is not
immediately obvious that different units of measurement are used.
There is a danger of manufacturing parts with wrong dimensions if this inconsistency is
not remedied.

Fig. 1: FT/A dimensions in inches Fig. 2: Inches is used as the unit of measure-
ment

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed units of measurement in FT/A dimensions according to the speci-
fications.

Dassault Systèmes 498 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed Units” value list Specify the allowed units of measurement.

INFO: The items in the value list correspond to the items in the “Properties” dialog,
“Value” tab, “Format” section, “Description” value list.

“Further allowed units” value list When using user-defined units of measurement that
are to be allowed, specify them in this text box.

Check box “Check also dual value (if activated)” If this option is selected, the criterion
checks also the unit of measurement of the dual value, if a dual value is enabled.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To change the units for several FT/A dimensions at the same time, mark all affected FT/
A dimensions. Right-click one of the elements, then choose “Properties”. Change the
unit for all selected elements on the “Value” tab in the “Format” section.

Dassault Systèmes 499 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2 Drawing
Criteria manual

2.3.7.2.1 Non Associative Drawing Entities (on 3D)

StdDrawingEntityGenerated3D (1215)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This check identifies whether a drawing contains drawing elements that have not been
generated. If not, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Generative drawings are based on a 3D master representation. Therefore no elements
should be added that modify the drawing geometry. Additional drawing elements might
be misinterpreted and lead to errors in the fabricated part.

Fig. 1: Generated front view of a 3D part

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to delete non-associative drawing elements.

Fig. 2: Manually added geometry in a view

Dassault Systèmes 500 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed types” value list Specify the types of non-associative drawing elements
allowed as exceptions.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes all non-allowed elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To highlight manually added drawing elements, use the “Filter Generated Elements”
function in CATIA.

Fig. 3: “Filter generated elements” button

Dassault Systèmes 501 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.2 Non Associative Dimensions

Criteria manual

StdNonAssociativeDimensions (1220)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether dimensions in a drawing are not associated with a 3D
model. If so, the affected dimension elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Associative dimension are linked to the respective element of the 3D model. After
changing the 3D model, the associated dimensions are updated.
When using non-associative dimensions, a drawing update will have no effect on the
respective dimension.

Fig. 1: Non-associative dimensions before Fig. 2: Non-associative dimensions after updating

updating a modified 3D model a modified 3D model The dimensions do not
fit to the geometry.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete non-associative dimensions.
• Replace non-associate dimensions with associative dimensions.

Dassault Systèmes 502 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes non-associative dimensions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA, you can specify whether to create non-associative dimensions. To do this,
go to CATIA application settings and choose “Mechanical” > “Drafting” >
“Dimension”, and click the “Associativity on 3D” button.

Fig. 3: Base settings for drawing dimensions in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 503 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Base settings for associative dimensions in CATIA

Fig. 5: Base settings for associative dimensions in CATIA

• If the “Activate analysis display mode” option is activated, dimensions are shown in
different colors, according to their type (not up-to-date, isolated, fake dimension)
(Fig. 6).
You can find this setting in CATIA application settings, “Mechanical” > “Drafting” >
“Display” > “Activate elements' analysis”.

Fig. 6: Activate analysis display mode

To activate or deactivate analysis display mode, you can also click the “Activate
Analysis Display Mode” button on the “Visualization” toolbar (Fig. 7).

Fig. 7: “Activate analysis display mode”

Dassault Systèmes 504 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.3 Fake Dimensions

Criteria manual

StdFakeDimension (1063)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the drawing contains fake dimensions. If so, the affected
elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Fake dimensions are neither related to the actual appearance nor to the associated 3D
geometry. When using fake dimensions at all, they should be marked distinctively.
Otherwise there is the risk of putting parts with unrealistic dimensions into production.
Consequently, drawings with fake dimensions should not be passed on.

Fig. 1: Associative dimensions (green) and fake dimensions (white)

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to restore the original dimensions, or to delete the
dimensions.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the dimension element and deactivate “Fake
Dimension” in the “Edit” > “Properties” dialog.

Fig. 2: “Fake Dimension” option in the “Properties” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 505 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Exception Field” list box and “Exception Character” text box Specify whether certain
fake dimensions are allowed.
“NOTHING” No fake dimensions are allowed.
“Simple Text (MainValue)” Fake dimensions are allowed if the dimensions has a certain
main value Specify a Regular Expression for allowed main values in fake dimension in
the “Exception character” text box.
“Before Text” Fake dimensions are allowed if they are preceded by a certain text. Specify
a Regular Expression for the preceding text in text box “Exception character”.
“After Text” Fake dimensions are allowed if they are followed by a certain text. In the
“Exception character” text box, specify a Regular Expression for the required
postponed text.
“Before & After Text” Fake dimensions are allowed if they are preceded and followed by
a certain text. In the “Exception character” text box, specify a Regular Expression for
the required preceding and postponed text.

 NOTE: Preceding and following text of drawing dimension elements are defined in the
“Properties” dialog, “Dimension Texts” tab, “Associated Texts”.

Dassault Systèmes 506 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Restore original value” The healing function replaces fake dimensions with standard
dimensions.

“Remove” This healing function deletes fake dimensions; the element remains without
a dimension.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• You can use CATIA search to find and select non-associative dimensions.

Fig. 3: Finding non-associative dimensions using CATIA search

• If the “Activate analysis display mode” option is activated, dimensions are shown in
different colors, according to their type (not up-to-date, isolated, fake dimension)
(Fig. 4).
You can find this setting in CATIA application settings, “Mechanical” > “Drafting” >
“Display” > “Activate elements' analysis”.

Fig. 4: Activate analysis display mode

To activate or deactivate analysis display mode, you can also click the “Activate
Analysis Display Mode” button on the “Visualization” toolbar (Fig. 5).

Dassault Systèmes 507 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing
Criteria manual

Fig. 5: “Activate analysis display mode”

Dassault Systèmes 508 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.4 Non up-to-date Dimensions

Criteria manual

StdNonUpToDateDimension (1236)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether drawing dimensions are up-to-date. In case of non-up-to-
date dimensions, an error is reported.

Background
Non-up-to-date dimensions are not in accordance with the current design. Outdated
information like this may result in planning errors.

Fig. 1: Model with a modified distance Fig. 2: Non-up-to-date dimension in a Fig. 3: Display of non-up-to-date views in
drawing the specification tree

Non-up-to-date dimensions often coincide with a non-up-to-date view. Even up-to-date

views may contain non-up-to-date dimensions if the associated geometry has been
deleted from the 3D model. If the required information from the 3D model is no more
available, the view can be updated but not the affected dimensions.
This is also the cause why dimensions on manually created drawing elements (rather
than generated from 3D) are recognized as non-up-to-date dimensions.

Fig. 4: The hole feature has been deleted Fig. 5: The view has been updated, but not the dimensions
from the part

Dassault Systèmes 509 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes non-up-to-date dimensions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 510 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.5 Non-Standard Display Accuracy of Dimension [D-OR-DI]

Criteria manual

StdNonStandardToleranceOfDimensions (1331)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the accuracy of dimension main value and dual value
correspond to the specification. If that does not apply, the dimensions are rated as
incorrect.

Background
Manufacturing tolerances depend on various factors such as material and manufac-
turing method. The display accuracy of dimensions has to be adapted to the given toler-
ance.

Fig. 1: Display accuracy with three decimals Fig. 2: Display accuracy with one decimal

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set the required display accuracy.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the dimension element, and choose
“Properties”. On the “Value” tab, “Format” section, correct the “Accuracy” setting.

Dassault Systèmes 511 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Main Value/Dual Value accuracy” check box with list boxes Select the respective
options to check the display accuracy of main and dual value. In the list boxes, choose
the minimum (“min”) and maximum (“max”) allowed display accuracy. Available
values: “0.1”, “0.01”, “0.001”, “0.0001”

Healing settings
“Set accuracy” The healing functionality sets the required display accuracy.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 512 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.6 Identical 2D Components

Criteria manual

StdIdentical2DComponents (1281)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether a view contains two or more 2D component instances
with the same reference, position and size. If so, the affected 2D components will be
rated as incorrect.

Background
A 2D component is an image of a detail that was inserted into the workspace. Several
instances of the same 2D component positioned in the same place and with the same
scale may cause problems. Moreover data size increases.

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to delete redundant 2D component instances.

Criterion definition

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing functions deletes redundant 2D component instances.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 513 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.7 Drawing Picture Properties

Criteria manual

StdDrawingPictureProperties (1506)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether pictures in drawings use an allowed graphic file format. If
that does not apply, the affected pictures are rated as incorrect.

Background
To reuse a drawing from another CAD system in CATIA, the drawing can be inserted as
picture into the CATIA drawing. The inserted picture has to contain all relevant
elements such as measurements, tolerances, borders, title block, etc.
When the picture is converted to a compressed format inside CATIA, it might not be
usable for subsequent processing. For instance, pictures stored in a certain format
might fail to be converted to a certain archiving format.

Fig. 1: Drawing containing one inserted image that has been compressed using the "PNG" method.

Suggested solution
• Right-click the picture, then choose “Properties”. On the “Picture” tab, selected a
valid format from the “Compression” list box (Fig. 2).
• In some cases, the picture has to be converted externally to a valid file format, or
recreated in a valid format.

Dassault Systèmes 514 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Changing the compression setting in the picture properties

Dassault Systèmes 515 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Not allowed format” value list Specify the non-allowed formats.

INFO: The “DrwPictureNONE” setting applies to all inserted pictures that still have
their native format. This may be any bitmap format valid in CATIA.

“Pixel size of picture” check box with spin boxes If this option is activated, the pixel
size (that is the number of pixels in horizontal and vertical direction) of pictures must
be within the specified range. Specify the allowed value ranges for width X and height Y
in the spin boxes.
Deselect this option to allow pictures of any pixel size.

“Size of picture” check box with spin boxes If this option is activated, the dimensions
of the picture on the drawing sheet must be within the specified range. Specify the
allowed value ranges for width and height in the spin boxes.
Deselect this option to allow pictures with arbitrary dimensions on the drawing sheet.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 516 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Application Tip
Criteria manual

Before using pictures in CATIA drawings that will be exported to other applications,
make sure which data formats can be used without problems.

Dassault Systèmes 517 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.8 Scale Text Must Match View Scale Value

Criteria manual

StdScaleTextMustMatchViewScale (1526)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the view scale displayed as default text of a view matches
the actual view scale value. An error is reported if they do not match.

Background
Irritations and problems may occur if the scale text and the actual scale do not match.

Fig. 1: Scale text and actual scale value do not match

Suggested solution
To change the scale text, double-click the text element and change the value in place or
in the “Text Editor” dialog.

Fig. 2: Changing the scale text manually

Dassault Systèmes 518 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Statement of scale in the text to be checked” text box Specify a Regular Expression for
the required scale text. The expression includes the view scale value, given as ratio of
two natural numbers. Each of the two numbers forming the ratio has to be put in paren-
theses.
Only text elements matching this specification are checked.

“Mark the view(s) without default text” check box If this option is activated, views
without default text are not allowed and rated as incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To adjust the scale automatically to a changed view scale, you can insert an attribute
link.
 See Suggested solution, page 147

INFO: In CATIA, the “Scale” attribute can be found in the “Properties” dialog of the
respective view under“View” > “Scale”.

Dassault Systèmes 519 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.9 Non-Allowed Element Type in 2D Component

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedElementTypeIn2DComponent (1564)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether 2D components contain elements of a non-allowed
element type. If so, the affected 2D components are rated as incorrect.

Background
Subsequent processes may fail if they cannot handle certain types of elements in 2D
components, for example pictures.

Fig. 1: 2D component instance containing a picture

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: To delete a 2D component, mark the 2D component, then
press the [DEL] key.

Dassault Systèmes 520 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Not allowed types” value list Specify the types of elements not allowed in 2D compo-
nents.

“Check recursively 2D components” check box If this option is activated, nested 2D

components will also be checked. If this option is not selected, only elements of 2D
components are checked that are directly within this component.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Manual healing in CATIA:
• To find the referenced 2D component, double-click its 2D component instance, or
right-click the instance and choose “Edit Reference Component” from the context
menu.
• You can use search to find 2D component instances (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 521 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Searching for 2D component instances in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 522 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.10 Non-Allowed Overlapping Feature

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedOverlayFeature (1569)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether certain types of drawing elements are overlapped by
certain other drawing elements. If so, these latter elements will be marked as incorrect.
An overlap between drawing elements occurs if their respective bounding boxes coin-
cide partly or entirely.
Only drawing elements situated on the same sheet will be considered.

Background
Certain regions of a drawing such as the title block may not overlap with other
elements.

Fig. 1: The red text overlaps with the title block

Dassault Systèmes 523 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Parameter
“Overlapped feature types” value list Specify the types of elements to be checked for
overlapping elements.

Example Placed title blocks (element type “DrwDitto”or “DrwDittoExternal”) or tables

(“DrwTable”) must not overlap with other drawing elements. To do this, select
“DrwDitto”, “DrwDittoExternal” and “DrwTable” in the “Overlapped feature types” value
list.

“Check only overlaps with features of the selected types and path names” value list
Specify paths and names of elements that must not overlap with the named types of
elements. You can use Regular Expressions.
Leave this value list empty if no elements must overlap with the named types of
elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 524 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

Application Tip
Criteria manual

During analysis in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can highlight incorrect elements
using the “Mark Violated Entities” function.

Fig. 2: Marking incorrect elements during analysis.

Dassault Systèmes 525 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing

2.3.7.2.11 Open Sketch

Criteria manual

StdOpenSketch (1577)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the profile of a sketch is closed within the given tolerance.
If that does not apply, the sketch is rated as incorrect.

Example

Fig. 1: Filled surface based on a sketch The contour of the sketch is not point-continuous, having a
distance of 0.09 mm.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA:
• Edit the sketch to close its contour (Fig. 2).
• Use sketch analysis to find open sketches, and to close them (Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 526 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Drawing
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Closing an open contour by adding a position constraint

Fig. 3: Sketch Analysis dialog

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Max. distance between sketch limiting points” spin box Maximum distance between
limiting points of sketch elements up to which a sketch contour is considered closed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 527 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

2.3.7.3 Sketches
Criteria manual

2.3.7.3.1 Non-Allowed Sketch Constraint Types

StdNonAllowedSketchConstraintTypes (1422)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketches contain non-allowed constraints. If so, an error
will be reported.

Background
Sketches should be fully constrained. Fully constrained sketches are required to adapt
models quickly and reliably to modified constraints. A However, a sketch is also fully
constrained if all of its geometry elements have been fixed. To change a sketch with
fixed elements, additional effort is required as the fix constraints have to be replaced.

Fig. 1: Fixed line

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed types of constraints with allowed constraints.

Dassault Systèmes 528 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Non allowed sketch constraint type” value list Specify the non-allowed types of
constraints.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Fix constraints can be recognized by the anchor symbol (Fig. 1).

Dassault Systèmes 529 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

2.3.7.3.2 Non allowed sketch positioning type

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedSketchType (1391)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketches use an allowed sketch positioning type. If that
does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Some company standards require sketches to be positioned using a certain method.
Advantage of positioned sketches: You can specify origin and orientation of sketch axes.
Sketches that have not been positioned according to the specifications may result in
problems during modification or reuse of the model.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the sketch in the specification tree, then select
“Object” > “Change Sketch Support”(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: “Sketch Positioning Dialog” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 530 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Sketch Reference” check box with list box If this option is selected, only sketches on a
certain layer are checked for their sketch positioning type. Choose the layer from the list
box.
Deselect this option to check sketches on any layer.

“Non-allowed sketch positioning type” value list Specify the non-allowed sketch posi-
tioning types. If this value list is empty, all types are allowed.

“Reverse Hoption/Reverse Voption/Invert is not allowed” check boxes Activate the

options if the corresponding sketch positioning settings are not allowed.

“Non-allowed definition mode Implicit for” check box with list box If this option is
selected, the value “Implicit” is not allowed for the sketch positioning settings (origin,
orientation, or both).

“X Axis orientation option is not allowed” check box Select this option is the X axis

Dassault Systèmes 531 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

must not be the absolute axis of the sketch.

Criteria manual

“Y Axis orientation option is not allowed” check box Select this option is the Y axis
must not be the absolute axis of the sketch.

“Z Axis orientation option is not allowed” check box Select this option is the Z axis
must not be the absolute axis of the sketch.

Healing settings
“Change incorrect type into” list box The healing function applies the sketch posi-
tioning type specified in the healing list box to the incorrect elements. Choose the
required sketch positioning type from the list box:
• “One Plane”, identical to the “Positioned” type in CATIA
• “Sliding”
• “Isolated”

 NOTE
• The healing function cannot change sketches of the “Isolated” type.
• Sketch references remain unchanged by Q-Checker healing. If the healing cannot be
performed due to references, an error message is shown.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• When creating a sketch in CATIA using “Positioned sketch”, the user is
prompted to choose the sketch positioning type.
• When creating a sketch in CATIA using “Sketcher”, the “Sliding” position type is
selected automatically.

Dassault Systèmes 532 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

2.3.7.3.3 Empty Sketch

Criteria manual

StdEmptySketch (1248)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains empty sketches. If so, an error will be
reported.

Background
Certain elements such as construction elements or axes of rotation are not visible
outside the sketcher. Therefore sketches may appear empty.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed” value list Sketches are also considered empty if they contain only elements
of the types specified here.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes empty sketches.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 533 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

2.3.7.3.4 Non-Allowed Types in Sketch

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedTypeInSketch (1509)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketches contain non-allowed types of elements. If so, an
error will be reported.
The following element types can be specified as not allowed:

Feature type Sketch element created using

Projection “Project 3D elements”

Offset “Offset”

Silhouette “Project 3D Silhouette Edges”

Intersection “Intersection”

Background
The sketcher is used to create contours, which can be used for a wide range of compo-
nents. However, not all types of sketch elements created with the sketcher may be used
in sketches, due to methodological restrictions. Non-allowed types of sketch elements
that are used in spite of these restrictions may cause problems in subsequent
processes.

Fig. 1: Projected sketch elements in a geometrical set within a sketch

Suggested solution
To replace non-allowed element types, mark the sketch and select “Edit” > “Object” >
“Replace”.

Dassault Systèmes 534 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Replacing non-allowed sketch elements

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Non-Allowed Types in Sketch” value list Specify the non-allowed types of elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 535 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• You can use “Sketch Analysis” to analyze and edit projections and intersections in
sketches.

Fig. 3: Sketch Analysis dialog

• Sketch elements based on projections or intersections are marked in yellow (default

setting, may be configured differently).
• Projected elements and intersections are arranged in the “Use edges” geometrical set
within the sketch.

Dassault Systèmes 536 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

2.3.7.3.5 Non-allowed Deactivated Elements in Sketch

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedDeactivatedSketchConstraints (1524)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketches contain deactivated elements. If so, the affected
sketches are rated as incorrect.

Background
Deactivated sketch constraints can indicate the following:
• Problems during the modification of the model, due to which unresolvable
constraints have been deactivated
• Inconsistent and over-constrained sketches. Constraints have been deactivated to
make a sketch iso-constraint.

Fig. 1: Deactivated distance constraint Length.8 and deactivated parallelism constraint Parallelism.3

Suggested solution
• Unnecessary deactivated sketch constraints can be found quickly and deleted directly
from within the Sketch Analysis dialog.

Dassault Systèmes 537 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: “Sketch Analysis” dialog

• Sketch constraints that have been deactivated for test purposes can be activated
again on the context menu. Mark the deactivated sketch constraint in the
specification tree or geometry and choose “Edit” > “Object” > “Activate” or the
corresponding context menu entry.

Fig. 3: Activate deactivated sketch constraints (on the context menu)

Dassault Systèmes 538 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Element types to be checked” value list Select the types of sketch elements that must
not be deactivated.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
CATIA can be configured to invoke an Update error for under-constrained sketch geom-
etry. To do this, choose “Tools” > “Options” > “Mechanical Design” > “Drafting”, and
select the “Generate update errors when the sketch is under-constrained” option.

Fig. 4: Example of sketcher settings to identify non-ISO-constrained sketch geometry

Dassault Systèmes 539 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches

2.3.7.3.6 Non-Allowed Sketch Element Linked to Origin

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedSketchElementLinkedToOrigin (1533)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketch elements have been attached to the origin on
creation and thus cannot be modified. If so, an error will be reported.

Background
If sketch geometry elements are attached to the sketch origin, they cannot easily be
changed but require complex reworking.

Fig. 1: Construction line attached to the sketch origin

Suggested solution
• Replace invalid sketch elements with newly created sketch elements that are not
attached to the origin (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 540 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Replacing an invalid sketch element

• If one end point of a line is attached to the sketch origin, the constraint can be
removed by relimiting the line on the respective side (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Relimiting a line

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To display the hierarchical relations of the sketch origin, right-click the sketch origin and
choose “Parents/Children” from the context menu (Fig. 4, Fig. 5). This allows you to
identify all sketch elements attached to the sketch origin.

Dassault Systèmes 541 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Sketches
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Analysis of the Parent-Child relationship Fig. 5: Analysis of the Parent-Child relationship for the sketch origin
for the sketch origin

Dassault Systèmes 542 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

2.3.7.4 Axis Systems

Criteria manual

2.3.7.4.1 Current Axis System

StdCurrentSpaceAxis (1049)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the required current axis system is active. If a different
axis system is activated, an error is reported.

Background
Some start models contain more axis systems than just the axis system used as part
origin.

Example Additional axis systems can be used to position functional areas such as stock
or work objects. When construction is done, the axis system used as part origin has to
be active.

Fig. 1: Multiple axis systems per model

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate the required axis system.
• Manual healing in CATIA: To activate an axis system in CATIA, right-click the axis
system and choose “Object” > “Define as current”.

Dassault Systèmes 543 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Current Axis System” text box Specify the name of the axis system that must be
active. You can use a Regular Expression.
If no active axis system is allowed, leave this text box empty.

Healing settings
“Change current Axis System” The healing function activates the axis system specified
in the healing text box.
The healing can be performed only if the Regular Expression in text box “Active axis
system” matches exactly one axis system in the model and the name in the “Active axis
system” text box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Active and inactive axis systems are displayed differently in CATIA:
• The active axis system is normally displayed using solid lines.
• Inactive axis systems are normally displayed using dashed lines.

Fig. 2: Display of axis systems in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 544 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

2.3.7.4.2 Allowed Axis-System Position

Criteria manual

StdAxisSystemPosition (1461)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether axis systems with specified names are positioned within a
specified coordinate range. If that does not apply, the affected axis systems are rated as
incorrect.

Background
Methodical guidelines may require the axis system of a model to be positioned in the
model origin. When creating an assembly, the axis systems of all components are
superimposed and require no further assembly constraints. If the axis system has been
changed, the position within the assembly becomes incorrect, leading to errors and
additional cost.

Fig. 1: The “Absolute Axis System” is not positioned in the model origin

Suggested solution
To change the position of an axis system, double-click the axis system. In the “Axis
System Definition” definition dialog, click “More” and specify the coordinates of the
required axes.

Dassault Systèmes 545 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Axis system name” value list Specify the names of the axis systems to be checked.
You can use Regular Expressions. If no name has been specified, no check is
performed.

“Axis/Coordinate” check boxes with spin boxes Activate these options to check the
position of the axis system in the respective direction. Specify the allowed value range in
the spin boxes:
• “X-coordinate”/“Y-coordinate”/“Z-coordinate” are the coordinate of the axis system
origin.
• “X-axis: X-coordinate”/“X-axis: Y-coordinate” are the components of the vectors
describing the axis directions.

Dassault Systèmes 546 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

To specify a single point instead of a range, set the same coordinate value for minimum
Criteria manual

and maximum.

“Check active axis system only” check box If this option is activated, only the current
axis system is checked.
If this option is not selected, the axis systems specified in value list “Axis system name”
are checked.

Healing parameters
“Set as not current” The healing function deactivates the current axis system if its posi-
tion does not correspond to the specification.
Inactive axis systems remain unchanged. While this healing function can be used with
any check configuration, it is most effective when used with the “Check active axis
system only” option activated.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To adjust the size of the axis systems. go to CATIA application settings and choose
“Tools” > “Optionen” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” > “View”.

Dassault Systèmes 547 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

2.3.7.4.3 Axis System Name [O-CS-CN]

Criteria manual

StdAxisName (1124)

Applicable to CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of axis systems correspond to the specifica-
tion. If that does not apply, the affected axis systems are rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
Individual parts are normally designed with reference to a part coordinate system;
assemblies use a global coordinate system. Additional axis systems may be required,
for example for production-related tasks or quality assurance. The names of coordinate
systems should be significant of their purpose.

Suggested solution
Rename axis systems according to the requirements.

Dassault Systèmes 548 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of the axis system name” text box The axis system name (“text to be
checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 549 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 552
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 551

Healing settings
“Replace, New name” The healing function replaces a non-allowed view name with the
name specified in the text box.

 NOTE: This healing function is not available in batch mode, as otherwise the same
name would be applied to all incorrect elements.

“Replace these characters” The healing function replaces single characters or character
strings as specified in the value list. Specify characters and character strings and their
replacements in the value list.

“Remove” The healing function deletes all axis systems that do not match the required
naming rules.

TIP: When using individual healing in the Q-Checker analysis window, you can tempo-
rarily define additional character replacement rules that are not part of the check profile.
To apply a healing, the result must match the specification given in the check definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 550 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

Creating naming rules

Criteria manual

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

Dassault Systèmes 551 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
Criteria manual

checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All expressions are logically combined by OR. The naming rule is fulfilled
if the name matches at least one expression.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:
• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Dassault Systèmes 552 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

Specify after the keywords which part of the property value to use:
Criteria manual

• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.

• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

Error messages
If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Error: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Dassault Systèmes 553 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems
Criteria manual

Examples
1. Allow all axes whose name starts with “#”.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^#"
ERROR_MSG
"Name does not begin with '#'"
"Rename or delete the axis."
END_BLOCK

2. Allow all axes whose name is composed of the string AXIS_ followed by uppercase
characters. If the name does not contain the substring AXIS_, the entire name must
contain only uppercase characters.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "AXIS_"
"^[A-Z]+$"
END_BLOCK

3. Allow all axes whose name begins with a single digit or with the character “N” at
character position 2.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^[0-9]"
"^.N"
END_BLOCK

4. Allow all axes whose name is composed of the part number, an underscore and the
version number.

BEGIN_BLOCK
PARTNUMBER(1) + STRING("_") + REVISION(1)
ERROR_MSG
"Incorrect axis name."
"Axis name must be part number, underscore and revision number"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 554 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

2.3.7.4.4 Non-Standard Axis System [O-CS-NO]

Criteria manual

StdReverseAxis (1059)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the orientation of a local coordinate system is different
from the required orientation (right-hand or left-hand). If so, the axis system will be
rated as incorrect.

Background
Inconsistent use of differently oriented axis systems can lead to significant problems:
• When constructing in a space with left-handed orientation while the machine tool
uses a right-handed orientation, the resulting part is reversed left to right.
• When exchanging data between systems that use differently oriented axis systems,
the resulting model is mirrored with respect to the original.

Suggested solution
Axis systems can be converted between left-handed and right-handed orientation by
inversion of an axis.

Fig. 1: Changing the orientation of an axis system

 NOTE: The created component is connected to the local axis system. When the local
axis system is changed and updated, all components based on the local axis system are
updated, too.

Dassault Systèmes 555 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed orientation” value list Specify the allowed orientation of axis systems.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Rule of thumb to determine the sequence of axes in a right-handed Cartesian coordi-
nate system:
• If the thumb, index finger and middle finger of the right hand form right angles
between each other, the thumb indicates the X-axis, the index finger the Y-axis and
the middle finger the Z-axis.
• Left-handed systems follow the same rule using the left hand.
Active and inactive axis systems are displayed differently in CATIA:
• The active axis system is normally displayed using solid lines.
• Inactive axis systems are normally displayed using dashed lines.

Dassault Systèmes 556 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

2.3.7.4.5 Non-Reference Axis System Active [O-CS-NR]

Criteria manual

StdNonReferenceAxisSytemeActive (1387)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the current axis system is the reference axis system. If that
does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
The position of a part in an assembly is typically determined by a single axis system.
Components must be designed in mounting position relative to the reference axis
system. On loading an assembly, the components are already in the required position
and require no assembly constraints for positioning. If components has not been
designed in mounting position, the components are positioned incorrectly in the
assembly.

Fig. 1: Assembly with a component designed in mounting position

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to deactivate the current axis system if it is not the reference
axis system.

Dassault Systèmes 557 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Elements – Axis Systems

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Deactivate axis system” The healing function deactivates the current axis system if it
is not the reference axis system.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Active and inactive axis systems are displayed differently in CATIA:
• The active axis system is normally displayed using solid lines.
• Inactive axis systems are normally displayed using dashed lines.

Dassault Systèmes 558 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids – Axis Systems

2.3.8 Solids
Criteria manual

2.3.8.1 Solid Feature with Child Elements

StdSolidFeatWhitChildElem (1368)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain solid features have child elements. If so, the
affected solid features are rated as incorrect.

Background
Certain solid features should not be used as a base for child elements.

Example Geometry based on object edges is likely to become unstable when changing
the parent element. Therefore fillet features should have no child elements.

Fig. 1: Vertex with reference to the center of a fillet

Suggested solution
If possible, redefine child elements to use an allowed parent element. Right-click the
child element, then select “Object” > “Definition” > “More”.

Fig. 2: Replacing a constraint

Dassault Systèmes 559 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Solid Feature types” value list Specify the types of solid features to be checked.> If the
value list is empty, no check is performed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To inspect the hierarchical relations between components, mark the element and
choose “Tools” > “Parents/Children” or the corresponding entry on the context menu.
The Parents/Children dialog also displays external references and the names of the
models to which these references point to.

Fig. 3: Parent/Children analysis result

Dassault Systèmes 560 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.2 Allowed Solid Features

Criteria manual

StdAllowedSolidFeaturePrimitives (1267)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains non-allowed types of solid elements.
If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Certain types of solid elements may not be allowed in order to ensure both compati-
bility with other systems and consistent designs.

Example For some applications, hole features may not be allowed. Instead, Power
Features have to be used, because they supply additional information such as center
point and direction.

Fig. 1: Not allowed solid features

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed solid features with appropriate types of features.

Dassault Systèmes 561 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed Types” value list Specify the allowed types of solid features.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 562 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.3 Maximum Number of Solid Features per Body

Criteria manual

StdMaximumNumberOfSolidFeaturesPerBody (1320)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of certain solid elements within a body is
greater than specified. If so, an error will be reported.

Background
In principle, a part is exactly one body. In the “Part Design” workbench, components
are geometrically connected with each other (feature-based), and components are topo-
logically connected by Boolean operations with each other (body-based). New compo-
nents are always inserted at the end of the part history. The part geometry is evaluated
strictly sequentially in the order of the entries in the structure tree.
The body-based method allows for a clearer structure. Updates after modifications are
generally faster. If a part consists of an inner and outer geometry, make sure that the
inner geometry is subtracted from the outer geometry using a single operation.

Fig. 1: Feature-based model structure Fig. 2: Body-based model structure

Dassault Systèmes 563 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Exception” value list Specify the bodies to be ignored. Specify the path and name of
these bodies. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Count only these solid features” value list Specify the types of solid features to be
checked. For any other type, an arbitrary number of solid features is allowed. If this list
is empty, solid features of all types are taken into account.

“Maximum Number of Solid Features per Body” spin box Specify the maximum
allowed number of solid features per body.

“Maximum number of solids per type” check box with spin box Activate this option to
limit the number of solid features per type and body. Specify the maximum allowed
number in the spin box.
Deselect this option to check the number of solid features per body according to the
parameter “Maximum number of solid features per body”.

“Max. number of sketch-based solid features” check box with spin box Activate this

Dassault Systèmes 564 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

option to limit the number of solid features that are directly based on a sketch. Deacti-
Criteria manual

vate this option if no such limitation is required.

“Consider Boolean sub-bodies as separate bodies” check box Activate this option to
consider the input elements of Boolean operations as single bodies. The input elements
of the Boolean operation are checked; the resulting Boolean body is ignored.
Deactivate this option to consider the input elements of Boolean operations as indi-
vidual elements. The resulting Boolean body is checked; the input elements of the
Boolean operation are not checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Suggested solution
There are a few ways to restructure a model using the “Part Design” workbench:

 NOTE: After changing the structure, the model has to be updated. The resulting geom-
etry may change. Some features may have to be adjusted.

• Reorder the elements in the specification tree. Mark the element and choose “Edit” >
“Object” > “Reorder” or the corresponding context menu entry.

Fig. 3: “Reorder” command on the context menu Fig. 4: EdgeFillet.5 is placed before EdgeFillet.2.

• Move elements into a new body Mark an element to be moved, then choose “Edit” >
“Object” > “Insert in new” or the corresponding context menu entry.

Dassault Systèmes 565 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids
Criteria manual

Fig. 5: “Insert in new” context menu entry

Dassault Systèmes 566 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.4 Only one Profile per Solid Feature

Criteria manual

ChkStdSolidOneProfilePerFeature (1223)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a solid feature has more than one profile. If so, the
affected solid features are rated as incorrect.
The following types of profiles are checked: Pad, Pocket, Shaft, Rib, Slot, Groove.

Background
In some cases, multiple profiles per solid element are not allowed.

Example The pocket feature is based on three profiles. The depth of the pockets cannot
be set individually. To set individual depths, separate pocket features must be defined
for each profile.

Fig. 1: Three profiles in one sketch

Fig. 2: Solid with a pocket feature defined over three profiles

Dassault Systèmes 567 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 568 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.5 Multi-solid part [G-MO-MU]

Criteria manual

StdMultiSolidPart (1111)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a part contains more than one solid. If so, the model will
be rated as incorrect.

Background
A part should not contain more than one solid; instead, parts should be assembled in a
product.
Problems may occur when using parts with more than one solid:
• Part management cannot handle multiple solids per part.
• Calculations across models, kinematic simulations and other applications cannot be
performed.

Fig. 1: Two solids (Housing ad Shaft) in one part

Dassault Systèmes 569 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed elements” value list Specify the names of bodies to be ignored in this check.
You can use Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Start a design with a product, then create and add the individual parts.

Dassault Systèmes 570 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.6 One Solid, at least, in Part

Criteria manual

StdAtLeastOneSolidInPart (1201)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains at least one solid. If that does not
apply, an error is reported.

Background
The final version should be a solid part. For solid parts, parameters such as mass and
center of gravity can be determined. A solid part ensures the model is a closed volume,
which is the preferred type of geometry for further use.
In contrast, further use of surface models may be difficult.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Only the PartBody is allowed for the Solids” check box If this option is selected, any
solids must be within the PartBody.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Whenever possible, models should be created as solid parts. If this is not possible,
the resulting volumes should be embedded in a solid or converted.
• A solid body in a model does not necessarily mean that any surface geometry is part
of the solid body.

Dassault Systèmes 571 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.7 Solid Updates

Criteria manual

StdSolidUpdate (1081)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether solids have been updated after the latest changes. If that
does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
You can change an already existing solid, for example by changing its parameters. As
long as the model has not been updated, the change has been registered in the history
but is not yet visible.

Fig. 1: Solid not up-to-date (not updated yet) Fig. 2: Solid is up-to-date

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to update the model.
• By default, a model is updated after being modified. Otherwise you can update the
model manually. A failed update indicates design errors.

Dassault Systèmes 572 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Perform update” The healing function updates solids that are not up-to-date.

 NOTE: Do not use this healing function in batch checks. Updates should be performed
selectively by the designer. Automatic healing in batch mode may result in uninten-
tional changes to the geometry.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 573 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.8 Missing construction history for this solid [O-SO-MH]

Criteria manual

StdMissingSolidConstructionHistory (1333)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a solid contains datum features, that is elements without
construction history. If so, an error will be reported.

Background
In CATIA, the construction history of parts is stored. Both geometry and the order of
construction are documented in the specification tree.
Advantages:
• Parts can be adapted to new requirements more easily. You can change a model by
adjusting its parameters and updating the geometry.
• Given a well-structured model, the relevant geometry can be extracted easily from the
model.
Modifications to models without generation parameters is more expensive.

Fig. 1: Model with full history Fig. 2: Isolated solid element

Fig. 3: Solid inserted as Datum Feature

Dassault Systèmes 574 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore Sketch Datum Features” check box If this option is activated, sketches without
history (Sketch Datum Features) are ignored in this check.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Components which are described by an isolated solid may be converted into a solid
with history. Use the “Feature Recognition” function in the “Part Design” workbench.
Components which are described by an isolated solid may be converted into a solid
with history.

Dassault Systèmes 575 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.9 Unused Solid Construction Geometry

Criteria manual

StdSolidUnusedSolidFeatures (1356)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether solids contain solid features that do not contribute to the
geometry. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Unused solid features are features whose surface does not (or no more) contribute to
the final geometry. Possible reasons are, among others, a wrong arrangement of
components, changed parameters or subsequent operations. Unused solid compo-
nents often contain construction history information that is no longer required for the
model structure.
Unused information adversely affect handling and clarity of model data and may cause
problems when updating the solids.

Fig. 1: Pad with pocket Fig. 2: After changing a pad parameter, the pocket
is no longer visible

Suggested solution
See whether unused solid features may be deleted. Do not delete elements that are still
used as constraints.
To identify and delete elements not used for the creation of solid features, use
“Tools” > “Delete useless elements” in CATIA (Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 576 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: “Delete Useless Elements” dialog in CATIA

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Check all elements independently of element choice” check box If this option is acti-
vated, only elements without child elements are checked. Elements with child elements
are ignored.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: This criterion does not check thickness features.

 NOTE: In sheetmetal models, solid features located above a Wall Recognition feature
in the specification tree are ignored (Fig. 4).

Dassault Systèmes 577 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Solid features above the Wall Recognition feature named “Recognize.2” are ignored.

Dassault Systèmes 578 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.10 Negative Bodies / Sub-Bodies

Criteria manual

StdNegativeBodies (1430)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains negative bodies or negative sub-bodies.
If so, the affected bodies will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Structuring a model with bodies can improve the clarity of a model. Bodies added to the
geometry are marked with a plus sign in the specification tree icon. If the first compo-
nent of a body has negative polarity, the entire body has negative polarity. Negative
polarity of a component is indicated by a minus sign in the specification tree.
The polarity of bodies in a model has a large impact on part geometry. If polarity is
neglected, errors in subsequent processes may occur.

Fig. 1: “Body.2” (negative) und “Body.4” (positive)

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• The PartBody is always positive, its polarity cannot be changed.

Dassault Systèmes 579 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

• The first component in a body (that is its uppermost child in the specification tree)
Criteria manual

must have a positive polarity so that the body itself remains positive.

Dassault Systèmes 580 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids

2.3.8.11 Number of Visible Faces

Criteria manual

StdRatioFacesInShowToFacesInNoShow (1574)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the ratio of visible faces to the total number of faces is
greater than or equal to the required ratio. If the ratio is less than the required ratio, the
model is considered incorrect.

Fig. 1: Visible faces Fig. 2: Not visible faces

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Delete solids and faces that are no longer used.
Elements that are no longer in use can be found and deleted using “Tools” > “Delete
Useless Elements”(Fig. 3). This function takes into account elements that are no Part
Design components and elements whose input elements are useless elements. By
default, these elements have the Delete status. To exclude particular elements from
being deleted, right-click the respective list item and select “Keep” from the context
menu.

Dassault Systèmes 581 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Analysis of elements not used in any solid

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Number of Visible Faces” value list and “Ratio of number of faces visible / in total
[%]” The required ratio can be graded with regard to the total number of faces.
In the “Minimum total number of faces” column, specify the number of faces starting at
which the specified ratio is required. If the total number of faces is less than the
smallest number in this column, the criterion is also fulfilled.
In the “Ratio of number of faces visible/in total” column, specify the required ratio of
the number of visible faces to the total number of faces as a whole-number percentage.

Dassault Systèmes 582 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Solids
Criteria manual

Example

Minimum total number Ratio of number of faces

visible/in total

100 40

10 50

• If the model contains less than 10 faces in total, the ratio is not evaluated. The
criterion is fulfilled.
• If the model contains 10 to 99 faces in total, at least 50% of all faces must be visible.
• If the model contains 100 or more faces in total, at least 40% of all faces must be
visible.

“Ignore surfacic elements” check box If this option is selected, surfacic features are not
counted in.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 583 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

2.3.9 Material
Criteria manual

2.3.9.1 Material Assignment is Allowed for Element Type

StdMaterialAssignmentIsAllowedForElementType (1238)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether materials are assigned only to certain types of elements. If
that does not apply, other elements with material definition are rated as incorrect.

Background
Material information has to be assigned only to certain types of elements, thus allowing
materials to be read out and processed automatically, for example when creating a bill
of materials.

Fig. 1: Ambiguously assigned material definition

Suggested solution
Always place material definitions below the In Work Object. First mark the required
element as In Work Object, then apply a material.

Related criterion
 Material Assignment Must Exist for Element Type, page 586

Dassault Systèmes 584 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Element types” value list Specify the types of elements to which material definitions
may be applied.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 For more information on element types and element groups, see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Dassault Systèmes 585 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

2.3.9.2 Material Assignment Must Exist for Element Type

Criteria manual

StdMaterialAssignmentMustExistForElementType (1237)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a material has been assigned to elements of certain types.
If that does not apply, the element is rated as incorrect.

Background
Material information has to be assigned only to certain types of elements, thus allowing
materials to be read out and processed automatically, for example when creating a bill
of materials.

Fig. 1: Material definitions applied to elements

Suggested solution
Always place material definitions below the In Work Object. First mark the required
element as In Work Object, then apply a material.

Related criteria
 Material Assignment is Allowed for Element Type, page 584.

Dassault Systèmes 586 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Element types” value list Specify the types of elements to which a material definition
must be applied.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 For more information on element types and element groups, see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Dassault Systèmes 587 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

2.3.9.3 Material Corresponds to Material Reference Catalog

Criteria manual

StdMaterialToCatalogDefinition (1463)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the materials of the model (CATIA element type Material-
Feature) match the material specifications in a material reference catalog. Materials are
not allowed if they have different properties, or if they are not included in the reference
material catalog.

Background
To ensure that the correct material data is used for FEM simulation or DMU, mechan-
ical material properties (Young's Modulus of elasticity, Poisson's ratio, density etc.)
must be identical to those in the material reference catalog.

Fig. 1: Material properties of a part

Suggested solution
Delete incorrect material definitions from the model, and apply the correct definition
from the reference catalog.

Dassault Systèmes 588 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Material catalog A – from Q-Checker environment folder” list box Click the “Choose”
button to select a material catalog from the check environment directory.
If the check environment has been newly created and not saved yet, the check environ-
ment directory is unknown. In this case, save the check environment first, then try
again.

“Material catalog B - Path and file name for additional catalogs” value list Specify any
further material catalogs which are reference for material properties in the model Give
the full pathname of the material catalog files in the file system or DLNames.
You can use wildcards. In DLNames, you can use wildcards only in the file name.

Dassault Systèmes 589 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

You can use Windows and CATIA environment variables. The notation for environment
Criteria manual

variables is ${VARNAME}, where VARNAME is the variable name.

Examples
• Path with environment variable:
${CATStartupPath}\Materials\Catalog.CATMaterial

• Path with placeholder: All files whose names begin with “C”
C:\temp\C*

• DLName with environment variable and placeholder:

${DL}\C*

“Name of material feature to be checked” value list Specify the names of the materials
to be checked
To check all material in the models, use the wildcard expression .*. If the list is empty,
nothing is checked.

“Material properties to be checked” value list Choose the material properties to be

checked. If the list is empty, nothing is checked.

“Mark material features not contained in the catalog” check box If this option is acti-
vated, material definitions are rated as incorrect if they are not defined in the reference
catalog.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: To use a copy of a CATIA material catalog as reference, proceed as follows to

create the copy.
1. In CATIA, open the material catalog to be copied.
2. Choose “File” > “Save as”. In the “Save as” dialog, select the “Save as new
document” option to create a new UUID for this copy.
3. Save the new copy under the required name and directory.

Dassault Systèmes 590 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

Background:
Criteria manual

CATIA V5 does not allow opening two files with the same unique identifier (UUID) at
the same time.
A material catalog referenced in the check profile cannot be loaded if a catalogue with
the same UUID is already loaded in the CATIA session. The referenced, not loaded
material catalogue will be ignored. If no further reference catalogues can be loaded, the
check returns the error message “None of the specified catalogues could be loaded”. If
other reference catalogues can be loaded, the check result applies only to these cata-
logues; therefore the check result might not be as expected.
To work with two or more copies of the same material catalogue, each copy must be
saved with its own UUID as described above.

 NOTE: Material catalogs (*.CATMaterial) can be language-dependent. The CATIA

session language determines which language-dependent material catalog to use.
Material catalogs are stored in the following directory of the CATIA installation:
• English: …\startup\materials\
• other languages: …\startup\materials\[Language]\
where [Language] is the language name.
For company-specific material catalogs there is normally only one language version,
therefore language-related problems are unlikely to occur.

Application Tip
Make sure that the material catalog used by the check environment and the CATIA
material catalog are identical. CATIA material names are language-dependent. Material
specifications are rated as incorrect even if only their names differ from those in the
material reference catalog.

Fig. 2: Material “Steel” in the material catalog for the Fig. 3: Material “Stahl (Steel)” in the material
English language setting catalog for the German language setting

Dassault Systèmes 591 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

2.3.9.4 Linked/Unlinked Material

Criteria manual

StdMaterialLink (1516)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks the link properties of materials. In particular, the following is
checked:
• model materials linked to any material library
• model materials not linked to any material library
• model materials linked to a specific material library
Errors are reported a material link does not have the required properties.

Background
A preset material from a catalog can be assigned to an element. The material can be
assigned to an element as an unlinked or as a linked object, in which case model mate-
rials are updated automatically if the material catalog has changed. Some databases do
not support these links.

Fig. 1: PartBody material linked to a catalog Fig. 2: PartBody material not linked to a catalog

Suggested solution
To replace an invalid material link, set the element as In Work Object, open the material
catalog, and assign the required material.

Dassault Systèmes 592 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Mark unlinked material” check box If this option is selected, materials without a link
to any material catalog are marked as incorrect.

“Mark material linked to any catalog” check box If this option is selected, materials
linked to any material catalog are marked as incorrect.

“Mark material linked to a Part/Product” check box If this option is selected, materials
linked to any Part or Product are marked as incorrect.

“Mark material linked to a wrong catalog” check box If this option is selected, material
links to certain material catalogs are checked. Specify the path and name of allowed
material catalogs in the “Allowed material catalog path/DLName” and “Name of the
allowed material catalog” text boxes.

“Check for wrong catalog: Use DLName instead of path” Select this option to enter a
DLName in the “Allowed material catalog path/DLName” text box. Deselect this option
to enter a file system path.

“Check for wrong catalog: Allowed material catalog path/DLName” text box If the
“Mark material linked to a wrong catalog” option is selected, specify the allowed loca-
tion for material catalogs. You can enter a DLName or path, depending on the option
“Use DLName instead of path”. Links to material catalogs in other locations are rated
as incorrect.

“Check for wrong catalog: Allowed material catalog name” text box If the “Mark mate-
rial linked to a wrong catalog”option is selected and if the “Check for wrong
catalog: Allowed material catalog path” text box is filled in:
• Leave this field empty to allow any material catalog located in the “Allowed material
catalog path”.

Dassault Systèmes 593 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

• To allow only a certain material catalog in the specified location, enter its filename
Criteria manual

(including the filename extension). Links to any other material catalog are rated as
incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
When opening an existing material from the material catalog, the tree icon is cubical. If
the material has been changed in the catalog, a spherical tree icon is displayed instead.

Fig. 3: The material definition has been changed in the catalog

Dassault Systèmes 594 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

2.3.9.5 User-Defined Property Value Must Match Material in Catalog

Criteria manual

StdUserDefPropDoesNotCorrespToMaterialReferenceCatalog (1571)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the values of certain user-defined properties are identical
to material names in the specified material catalogs. If that does not apply, an error is
reported.
Materials not referenced from a catalog are not considered.

Background
Incorrect material information can cause delays and additional cost.

Fig. 1: User-defined property with name Fig. 2: Excerpt from a material catalog with material
“Material” and value “Aluminium” “Aluminium”

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Change the value of the user-defined property to the required
material name.

Related criteria
 Existence and content of user-defined properties: User-Defined Properties Not Applied
to Root-Product/Part, page 983

Dassault Systèmes 595 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“User-defined properties to be checked” value list In the “Property name” column,
specify the names of properties whose values must match material names in one of the
specified catalogs.
In the “Ignore properties with these values”, you can specify exceptions for certain
property values. Give a Regular Expression for property values that do not need to corre-
spond to a material name.
The following cases are not considered errors:
• If the model does not contain any of the specified properties
• If no value has been assigned to some of the specified properties
You can check for these cases with criterion User-Defined Properties Not Applied to Root-
Product/Part, page 983.

“Material catalog A – from Q-Checker admin folder” list box If there are material cata-
logs in the directory, choose the applicable material catalog containing materials to
which the user-defined property values refer.

“Material catalog B - Path and file name for additional catalogs” value list Specify the
material catalogs to which the user-defined properties are to be compared. Give the full

Dassault Systèmes 596 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Material

pathname of the material catalog files in the file system or DLNames. You can use
Criteria manual

Windows and CATIA environment variables.

The notation for environment variables is ${VARNAME}, where VARNAME is the variable
name.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 597 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

2.3.10 Layer and Filter

Criteria manual

2.3.10.1 Permitted Element Types on Layer

StdAllowedTypeOnLayer (1052)

Applicable to CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether only certain types of elements are assigned to specific
layers. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Assigning certain types of elements to different layers can improve handling and clarity
of models. The required layer filters can be defined in the start model.

Fig. 1: Assigning a layer using the “Graphic Properties” toolbar

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to assign elements on the wrong layer to the required layer.

Dassault Systèmes 598 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

To configure the check parameters, proceed as follows:

Dassault Systèmes 599 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

 Select in the “Elements to be checked” list box whether to check all elements or
Criteria manual

elements in the current element selection.

 Select the element types and element groups to be allowed on particular layers:
1. Select a layer in the “Layer setting” list.
2. Click “Edit element types for the selected layer” .
3. Select in the list on the right the element types and element groups to be allowed on
the selected layer.
4. To confirm the selection, click “Apply selected element types to layer” .
 In the “Exceptions for layer settings” list, you can narrow down the selection of allowed
element types. This applies if the selection of allowed elements includes element
groups such as “ALL” or “3D Features”.
1. Select a layer in the “Exceptions for layer settings” list.
2. Click “Edit element types for the selected layer” .
3. Select in the list on the right the element types and element groups to be excluded
from the allowed selection.
4. To confirm the selection, click “Apply selected element types to layer” .
 You can copy the element types selected for layers in the “Layer setting” list and in the
“Exceptions for layer settings” list to other layers:
1. Click the “Show/Hide options for copying a range of layers” button .
2. Use the “Copy these layers from ... until ...” spin boxes to define the range to be
copied.
3. Use the “to these layers from ... until” spin boxes to define the target range where
these layers will be inserted.
4. If the target range is greater than the copied range, the copied range is inserted in a
fixed periodical sequence. Use the “Step widths” parameter to define the fixed
interval in which copied blocks are inserted.

Dassault Systèmes 600 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

5. To copy the element types, click “Apply selected element types to layer” .
Criteria manual

Example for copying layer ranges When using the settings in Fig. 2, layers 1 to 2 are
copied to layers 4 to 99. The step width specifies that the copied range is inserted in
intervals of 4 layers.

Fig. 2: Settings for copying layers Fig. 3: Result after copying the layers

Dassault Systèmes 601 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Check settings
Criteria manual

“Elements to be checked” value list Specify which elements to check:

“Use element selection” Element selection according to the “Element selection”
parameter.
“Ignore element selection. Check all elements” All elements are checked regardless of the
element selection.

“Layer setting” value list Select the allowed element types or element groups for the
respective layer.
To edit the element types for a layer, select the layer in the list, then click the “Edit
element types for the selected layer” button.
“Copy Block of Layers” spin boxes and button Use these controls to copy the
current selection of allowed element types and groups to another layer.

“Source layer block, first layer/last layer” spin boxes Specify a continuous source range
of element types and groups to be copied. Give the ordinal number of the first and last
layers to be copied.

“Target layer block, first layer/last layer” spin boxes Specify a continuous target range
of layers into which the source range is to be inserted. Give the ordinal number of the
first and last layers. To insert the source layer range in a periodical, fixed sequence,
select a larger target range.

“Step” spin box Specify the distance between first source layers in the target layer
block.
If the step width is larger than the number of layers in the source range, layers with an
existing selection are not overwritten.
If the step width is smaller than the source range, the length of the source range is used
as step width.
The last copied source range is cut off if it does not coincide with the end of the target
range.

“Exceptions for layer settings” value list Use this setting to define exceptions from
element groups selected in the “Current Layer” list.
Choose the element types and element groups that are not allowed on the layer selected
in the “Layer setting” column.
To edit the element types for a layer, select the layer in the list, then click the “Edit
element types for the selected layer” button.
“Copy Block of Layers” spin boxes and button
 “Copy Block of Layers” spin boxes and button.

Dassault Systèmes 602 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Transfer to first permitted layer”: The healing function assigns elements on a non-
allowed layer to the next allowed layer.

“Transfer to fixed layer” The healing function assigns elements on a non-allowed layer
to the layer specified by the number in the spin box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 For more information on element types and element groups, see Administration
manual, 14 Q-Checker Features Types and Feature Groups

Application Tip

Example Elements could be assigned to layers like this:

• Layer 0: Working layer
• Layer 1: Wireframe geometry
• Layer 2: Area
• Layer 3: Solids
• Layer 4: Annotations
• Layer 5: Auxiliary geometry

To represent elements with a double-sided description, one could define two layer
blocks. (1-5 = inner geometry, 6-10 = outside geometry) Other element groups would be
assigned to layer blocks with higher layer numbers. We recommend not to keep
multiple parts within a model, regardless of whether they are on separate layers or not.

Application Tip
The layer number for the layer named “None” is 1000.

Dassault Systèmes 603 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

2.3.10.2 Elements in SHOW on Layers

Criteria manual

StdElementInShowOnLayer (1198)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether elements on certain layers are in “visible”/“SHOW” state.
If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Subsequent applications (for example DMU) may require that elements on certain
layers are visible.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to apply the required visibility state to the affected elements.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the affected elements in the specification tree, and
change their visibility state in “View” > “Hide/Show” > “Hide/Show”.

Dassault Systèmes 604 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Elements to be checked” value list Specify which elements are available to be
checked:
“Ignore element selection. Check all elements” All elements are available. The element
selection will be ignored. With this setting, elements can be checked that cannot be
included in an element selection, for example sheets and views in a drawing.
“Use element selection” Only elements that belong to the element selection can be
checked.

“Layer setting” text box Specify the layers to be checked. Enter a search expression
using the following pattern:

Expression Description

m Check the layer with ordinal number m

m-n Check the layers with ordinal numbers m to n

-n Check all layers starting at the first position until position n

n- Check all layers starting at position n to the end

- Check all layers

m-n,p,q- Check all layers Check multiple layers (layers m to n, layer p

and layers q to the last layer)

Dassault Systèmes 605 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Set to SHOW” The healing function changes the visibility of elements on the checked
layers to“Visible/SHOW”.

“Remove” The healing function deletes invisible elements on the checked layers.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 606 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

2.3.10.3 Elements in NOSHOW on Layers

Criteria manual

StdElementInNoShowOnLayer (1231)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether elements on certain layers are in “hidden”/“NOSHOW”
state. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Subsequent applications (for example DMU) may require that elements on certain
layers are visible.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to apply the required visibility state to the affected elements.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the element in the specification tree, then
choose “Hide/Show”.

Dassault Systèmes 607 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Elements to be checked” value list Specify which elements are available to be
checked:
“Ignore element selection. Check all elements” All elements are available. The element
selection will be ignored. With this setting, elements can be checked that cannot be
included in an element selection, for example sheets and views in a drawing.
“Use element selection” Only elements that belong to the element selection can be
checked.

“Layer setting” text box Specify the layers to be checked. Enter a search expression
using the following pattern:

Expression Description

m Check the layer with ordinal number m

m-n Check the layers with ordinal numbers m to n

-n Check all layers starting at the first position until position n

n- Check all layers starting at position n to the end

- Check all layers

m-n,p,q- Check all layers Check multiple layers (layers m to n, layer p

and layers q to the last layer)

Dassault Systèmes 608 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Set to NOSHOW” The healing function changes the visibility of elements on the
checked layers to “Hidden/NOSHOW”.

“Remove” The healing function deletes visible elements on the checked layers.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 609 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

2.3.10.4 Current Filter for Layer Group [O-GL-LA]

Criteria manual

StdCurrentFilterForLayerGroup (1440)

Applicable to CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether certain filters are active and whether the filter definition
corresponds to the specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Filters are used to define a set of visible layers. When applying a filter, the elements on
all other layers become invisible.
To improve the handling of models, it may be required to assign elements to certain
layers.
If the required filter is not active, problems in subsequent processes may occur.

Fig. 1: The “All visible” default filter is active. All Fig. 2: The user-defined “Part in Design Position”
elements are visible. filter is active. Only the final part is visible.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate the first allowed filter. For more information, see
Check settings, page 611.

Dassault Systèmes 610 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Default filter: All visible” check box If this option is activated, the “All visible” default
filter in CATIA is allowed to be active.

“Default filter: Only current layer visible” check box If this option is activated, the
“Only current layer visible” default filter in CATIA is allowed to be active.

“Filter” value list Specfiy names and definitions for user-defined filter that are allowed
to be active.
In the “Definition” column, either use the same syntax as for the CATIA filter definition
or a Regular Expression that matches the filter definition.
In the “Definition (healing) ” column, specify a filter definition be applied by Q-Checker
healing. Use the CATIA syntax for filter definitions. Regular Expressions must not be
used here.

 NOTE: At least one filter must be allowed in the check settings.

Dassault Systèmes 611 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Set first possible filter as current filter” The healing function activates filters as
follows:
• If the “All visible” default filter is active, all layers are made visible.
• If the “All visible” layer filter must not be active and the “Only current layer visible”
filter is allowed, the current layer is made visible.
• If neither of the default filters is allowed, the first user-defined filter in the “Filter”
value list is made visible. The filter definition is taken from “Definition (healing)”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Both in CATIA and in Q-Checker, you can select elements by layer.
• Layer “None” in CATIA corresponds to layer 1000 in Q-Checker. Elements on this layer
are always visible.
• Layer and filter definitions for CATParts are stored in the CATPart itself. If no model-
specific filter and layer definition is available, filter and layer definitions from the
CATUserSetttings are in effect.
• The filter and layer definitions for CATDrawings are stored in the CATDrawing itself.

INFO: To define and activate layer filters in CATIA, go to “Tools” > “Visualization
Filters”.

Dassault Systèmes 612 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

2.3.10.5 Filter and Layer Definition

Criteria manual

StdFilterDefinition (1441)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the definitions of certain user-defined filters correspond
to the specifications. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
No error is reported for a filter defined in the criterion which does not exist in the
model.

Background
Filters are used to define a set of visible layers. When applying a filter, the elements on
all other layers become invisible.
To improve the handling of models, it may be required to assign elements to certain
layers.
If a required filter defined differently, defined views cannot be displayed as required.

Fig. 1: The “All visible” default filter is active. All Fig. 2: The user-defined “Part in Design Position”
elements are visible. filter is active. Only the final part is visible.

Suggested solution
Create any missing filters, and redefine incorrect filters.

Dassault Systèmes 613 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Filter” list box Specify name and definition of each user-defined filter that must exist.
In the “Definition” column, either use the same syntax as for the CATIA filter definition
or a Regular Expression that matches the filter definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Both in CATIA and in Q-Checker, you can select elements by layer.
• Layer “None” in CATIA corresponds to layer 1000 in Q-Checker. Elements on this layer
are always visible.
• Layer and filter definitions for CATParts are stored in the CATPart itself. If no model-
specific filter and layer definition is available, filter and layer definitions from the
CATUserSetttings are in effect.
• Layer and filter definitions for CATDrawings are stored in the CATDrawing itself.

INFO: To define and activate layer filters in CATIA, go to “Tools” > “Visualization
Filters”.

Dassault Systèmes 614 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

2.3.10.6 Unused Filter [O-GL-GL]

Criteria manual

StdFilterUsed (1442)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains unused filters. A filter is considered
unused if none of the layers in the filter definition contains any elements. Unused filters
are rated as incorrect.

Background
Filters are used to define a set of visible layers. When applying a filter, the elements on
all other layers become invisible.
To improve the handling of models, it may be required to assign elements to certain
layers.

Fig. 1: The “All visible” default filter is active. All Fig. 2: An empty filter is active. No elements are
elements are visible. visible.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete unused filters.
• Manual healing in CATIA: To delete empty filters in , go to “Tools” > “Visualization
Filter”.

Dassault Systèmes 615 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Layer and Filter

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Remove filter” The healing function deletes unused filters. If an unused filter is the
active filter, the filter is deleted, and the “All visible” filter is set as active filter.

 NOTE: Filters deleted using Q-Checker healing will be listed as incorrect again after a
recheck. This error will be cleared when opening the model the next time.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Both in CATIA and in Q-Checker, you can select elements by layer.
• Elements assigned to layer “None” are always visible.
• Layer “None” in CATIA corresponds to layer 1000 in Q-Checker.
• Layer and filter definitions for CATParts are stored in the CATPart itself. If no model-
specific filter and layer definition is available, filter and layer definitions from the
CATUserSetttings are in effect.
• Layer and filter definitions for Drawings are stored in the CATPart itself.

Dassault Systèmes 616 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic

2.3.11 Graphic
Criteria manual

2.3.11.1 Non-Allowed B-Rep/Feature Color

StdNonAllowedBRepColor (1366)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether solids, solid features, shells and (optionally) BReps have a
non-allowed transparency value. Elements with a non-allowed color are rated as incor-
rect.

Background
You can apply any color to the BRep of components. Colors also mark certain states of
a model. For example, the last changes to a part are marked with a certain color. The
working surface of cast parts is also marked with a certain color. When exchanging data
with other systems, information may be lost if the target system does not support
certain colors.

Fig. 1: Colored BRep of a solid

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to replace incorrect colors either with an allowed replacement
color or with the automatic color assigned by CATIA.

Dassault Systèmes 617 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Color ranges are” list box Specify whether the value list contains the allowed or non-
allowed color ranges.

“Range from … to …” value list Specify the reference color ranges ranges. Depending
on the setting in “Color ranges are”, the specified color ranges are allowed or not.
Every RGB color is defined by three numbers 0 to 255, one for the red, green and blue
component, respectively. The three numbers or numeric ranges are separated by
comma.
To define color ranges, specify the start and end RGB value of the color range.
To define a single color, set the same value in the “to” and “from” field.

“Check also BRep-Elements” check box If this option is activated, BRep elements are
checked for their color, otherwise only the color of solids, solid elements and shells.

“Ignore elements with automatic color” If this option is activated, elements with auto-
matic color are ignored.
The automatic color is a color preset, by which the color of the respective parent element

Dassault Systèmes 618 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic

is inherited.
Criteria manual

“Display also violated Solid Features (healing function unavailable)” check box If this
option is selected, erroneous solid features are not only listed as a sub-element of the
respective body but with a separate entry in the analysis tree (Fig. 2). Note that the
display of violated solid features increases the number of error elements and might
affect the model assessment.
The healing function heals the color of the solid feature, but not the color of BRep faces.

Fig. 2: Display of solid features in the specification tree

Healing settings
“Adjust color” This healing function replaces a non-allowed color with the color speci-
fied in the text box.

“Set automatic color” This healing function assigns the automatic color to elements
with a non-allowed color, according to CATIA application settings.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: To configure this criterion and to evaluate the check results correctly, it is
important to understand the workings of visual attributes in CATIA. Otherwise it might
appear that model assessment and healing function of this Q-Checker criterion do not
work correctly.

Dassault Systèmes 619 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic

2.3.11.2 Non-Allowed B-Rep/Feature Transparency

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedBRepTransparency (1412)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether solids, solid features, shells and BReps have a non-
allowed transparency value. If so, the model will be rated as incorrect.

Background
You can apply a variable degree of transparency to the BRep of components. This allows
to inspect the internal geometry of a model.

Fig. 1: Transparent faces of a solid

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set the required transparency value.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the component in the specification tree, then
choose “Properties”. On the “Graphic” tab, correct the transparency value.

Dassault Systèmes 620 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Not allowed transparency ranges” value list Specify the non-allowed transparency
ranges.

Example To allow no transparency, specify a value range from 1 to 255.

“Check also BRep-Elements” check box If this option is activated, the transparency of
B-Reps is additionally checked, otherwise only the transparency of solids, solid
elements and shells.

Healing settings
“Adjust transparency” The healing function replaces non-allowed transparency values
with the value specified in the text box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To display the graphic properties of the selected object and its parents, you can use the
“Graphic Properties Wizard”(Fig. 3). To display the graphic properties wizard, click the
respective icon on the “Graphic Properties” toolbar.

Dassault Systèmes 621 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Graphic Properties Wizard

Dassault Systèmes 622 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic

2.3.11.3 Edge Fillet BRep Color Determined by Radius

Criteria manual

NormEdgeFilletBRepColorDeterminedByRadius (1611)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether edge fillet features with a certain fillet radius have a
certain BRep color.

Background
Edge fillet features can be color-coded to mark different fillet radiuses. This criterion
checks if the correct colors have been applied to edge fillets.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to set an allowed color.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the component in the specification tree, then
choose “Properties”. On the “Graphic” tab, set the correct color.

Dassault Systèmes 623 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Norms and Standards – Graphic

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
List of ranges and values This defines the radiuses to check and the corresponding
colors.
Define the boundaries of a radius range in columns “Radius range from” and “Radius
range to”. To define an exact radius, set the same value as lower and upper boundary.
Define the corresponding colors as RGB codes with number values 0...255 in colums
“Red/Green/Blue”.
Edge fillets with radiuses not defined in this list will not be checked.

“Tolerance for radius” spin box Tolerance by which the fillet radius may deviate from
the defined radiuses.

Healing settings
“Set first allowed color” This healing function applies the color defined in the list of
ranges and values. If more than one color is allowed for a particular radius, the first
allowed color defined in the list will be used.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 624 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4 Methodology
Criteria manual

2.4.1 FT/A

2.4.1.1 Non-Allowed Activation Status of Annotation Set

StdNonAllowedActivationStatusOfAnnotationSet (1403)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether annotation sets have the required activation status. If that
does not apply, the affected annotation set is rated as incorrect.

Background
The Annotation Set contains components created in the “Functional Toler-
ancing&Annotation” workbench (Fig. 1). The annotation set can be turned off to reduce
the number of components in the geometry area and in the specification tree. When the
annotation set is turned off, FT/A components are hidden from both the specification
tree and the geometry area (Fig. 2).
The deactivated annotation set is still visible in the specification tree. It is not directly
obvious whether the annotation set is deactivated or empty. This equivocation may
cause problems.

Fig. 1: Activate annotation set; FT/A components are visible

Dassault Systèmes 625 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Inactivate annotation set; FT/A components are hidden

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate or deactivate the annotation set according to the
specification.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the annotation set and choose “Annotation Set
Switch on/Switch off” from the context menu (Fig. 3).
Alternatively, change to the “Functional Tolerancing & Annotation” workbench and
choose “Insert” > “Visualization” > “List Annotation Set Switch On/Switch
Off”(Fig. 4).

Fig. 3: Changing the status of the annotation set in the context menu

Dassault Systèmes 626 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Changing the status of the annotation set

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Mark entities if:” list box Specify the non-allowed annotation set status.

Healing settings
“Switch activation status” The healing functions sets the annotation set activation
status according to the specification:
• If “Switched on” is the incorrect state, the healing function changes the state of the
annotation set to “Switched off”.
• If “Switched off” is the incorrect state, the healing function changes the state of the
annotation set to “Switched on”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 627 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.2 FT/A Tolerancing Standard

Criteria manual

StdTolerancingStandard (1346)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the standard used in FT&A elements matches one of the
required standards. If that does not apply, the affected FT/A elements are rated as
incorrect.

Background
In the “Functional Tolerancing & Annotation”, “Product Functional Tolerancing &
Annotation” and “Process Tolerancing & Annotation” workbench, FT/A elements with
manufacturing and mounting information can be added to 3D geometry. This allows to
include all relevant information in the model, thus avoiding additional drawings. To
standardize visual appearance, tolerances and measurements have to comply with a
predefined standard, such as ISO, JIS, ANSI, ASME or a company standard.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed tolerancing standard” value list Specify the names of the allowed tolerancing
standards. You can use Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Make sure that the correct standard is active before creating FT/A elements. Existing
FT/A elements cannot be changed to a different standard.

Dassault Systèmes 628 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.3 FT/A Reference System Must Exist

Criteria manual

StdToleranceReferenceSystemMustExist (1348)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks the following:

Check whether An error is reported if

FT/A reference system does exist the specified reference system does not
exist

Datum Reference Frame exists and is if the datum reference frame is missing
named correctly? or named incorrectly

Continuous numbering of datum the numbering of datum targets is not

targets? (optional check) continuous

Reference system assigned to a specified the reference system is not applied to a

capture? (optional check) specified capture

the capture contains only the FT/A refer- the capture contains the FT/A reference
ence system (optional check) system and other elements.

Background
To fixate components, a reference system with three references (primary, secondary,
and tertiary reference) must be defined. The primary reference is defined by three
datum targets, the secondary reference is defined by two datum targets, and the tertiary
reference is defined by one datum target.
Problems may occur if the reference system is not complete, or if requirements have
not been observed.

Dassault Systèmes 629 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Primary simple datum and A and three datum targets A1, A2 and A3

Suggested solution
Create and name tolerances and annotations in accordance with the CAD guidelines.

Related criteria
 FT/A Reference Frame Must Exist, page 684

Dassault Systèmes 630 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Name of the reference system” text box Specify the name of the allowed reference
system. The name must have exactly three characters.

“Check the order of further targets” check box If this option is activated, the
numbering of datum targets must be continuous.

“Check if the system lies in a capture” check box and “Name of the capture” text box
If the check box is activated, the reference system must be part of a certain capture.
Specify the name of the capture in the text box.

“Only the system may lie in the capture” text box If this check box is activated, only the
FT/A reference system is allowed to be situated in the specified capture.

Healing settings
“Adapt the system” The healing function changes incorrect names in the capture and
the reference system as follows:
• The name of the datum reference frame is replaced by the name specified in the
“Name of the reference system” text box. As a precondition, a reference system must
exist.
• The capture name is replaced by the name specified in the “Capture name” text box. If
no capture exists, a capture with the specified name will be created, and the reference
system is added to this capture.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 631 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• Make sure that the correct standard is active before creating FT/A elements. Existing
FT/A elements cannot be changed to a different standard.
• If FT/A elements are assigned to the wrong capture, they can be rearranged using the
“Capture Management” command on the context menu.

Fig. 2: Visibility definition using “Capture Management”

Dassault Systèmes 632 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.4 FT/A Fake Dimensions

Criteria manual

StdFTFakeDimension (1386)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains FT/A Fake Dimensions, that is dimen-
sions that do not refer to the actual part. Fake dimensions are rated as incorrect.

Background
In the “Functional Tolerancing & Annotation”, “Product Functional Tolerancing &
Annotation” and “Process Tolerancing & Annotation” workbench, FT/A elements with
manufacturing and mounting information can be added to 3D geometry. This allows to
include all relevant information in the model, thus avoiding additional drawings.
FT/A dimensions can also be fake dimensions. This may cause errors in subsequent
processes and in manufacturing of parts.

Fig. 1: Fake and real dimensions

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to revert to the original dimensions.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the dimension element, and choose
“Properties”. On the “Value” tab, deselect the “Fake Dimension” check box (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 633 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: “Properties” dialog of a FT/A element with fake dimension.

Dassault Systèmes 634 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Exception Field” list box and “Exception Character” text box Specify whether certain
fake dimensions are allowed.
“NOTHING” No fake dimensions are allowed.
“Simple Text (MainValue)” Fake dimensions are allowed if the dimensions has a certain
main value In the “Exception character” text box, specify a Regular Expression for
allowed fake dimensions.
“Before Text” Fake dimensions are allowed if they are preceded by a certain text. Specify
a Regular Expression for the preceding text in text box “Exception character”.
“After Text” Fake dimensions are allowed if they are followed by a certain text. In the
“Exception character” text box, specify a Regular Expression for the required
postponed text.
“Before & After Text” Fake dimensions are allowed if they are preceded and followed by
a certain text. In the “Exception character” text box, specify a Regular Expression for
the required preceding and postponed text.

 NOTE: In CATIA, preceding and following text of drawing dimension elements are
defined in the “Properties” dialog, “Dimension Texts” tab, “Associated Texts”.

Healing settings
“Restore original value” This healing functions restores the original dimensions.

“Remove” This healing functions deletes fake dimensions. The associated element
remains without a FT/A dimension.

Dassault Systèmes 635 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Dassault Systèmes 636 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.5 Geometry Linked to FT/A

Criteria manual

StdLinkedGeometryToAnnotationInShow (1347)

Applicable to CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether geometry elements linked to FT/A elements are in the
specified paths. If that does not apply, the affected geometry elements are rated as
incorrect.
Additionally, it can be checked whether the visibility of geometry elements is “Visible”/
“SHOW”. If that does not apply, the affected geometry elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Annotations created with FT/A are linked with the geometry. Some applications require
that the linked geometry is in “Visible”/“SHOW” state.

Fig. 1: Annotations with linked geometry

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to apply the required visibility “Visible”/“SHOW”.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the geometry element, and change its visibility in
“View” > “Hide/Show”. If elements with FT/A elements must be hidden, make them
visible first, then hide the superordinate geometrical set.

Dassault Systèmes 637 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Geometry is allowed in the following paths only” list box Specify the allowed paths for
geometrical elements. You can use Regular Expressions.

“and geometry must be in SHOW” check box If this option is activated, geometry
elements linked to FT/A elements must be in “visible”/“SHOW” state.
Deactivate this setting if geometry elements linked to FT/A may have any visibility.

“Ignore geometry types” value list Specify the types of geometry elements to be
ignored by the check.

Healing settings
“Set to SHOW” The healing function changes the visibility of hidden geometry
elements to “Visible”/“SHOW”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 638 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• To highlight annotations and the linked geometry, activate “3D-Annotation-Query

Switch On/Switch Off” on the “Visualization” toolbar.
• To find and manage links between annotations and geometry, right-click an FT/A
element and choose “Associated Geometry” > “Geometry Connection Management”
from the context menu (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Annotation and linked geometry (highlighted)

• To enable or disable all annotations in the model, right-click the “Annotation Set” and
select “Annotation Set Switch on/Switch off” in the context menu.

Fig. 3: Deactivating annotations in a model

Dassault Systèmes 639 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.6 Not allowed link of FT/A elements

Criteria manual

StdLinkedGeometryToAnnotation (1483)

Applicable to CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether FT/A elements are linked to certain geometry elements.
The affected FT/A elements are rated as incorrect.
The following partial checks can be performed:
• Check the type of the linked geometry element
• Check the path of the linked geometry element
• Check FT/A elements linked to vertices or infinite geometry
• Check FT/A elements without links to any geometry element
• Check FT/A elements with links to more than one geometry element

Background
In the CATIA “Functional Tolerancing & Annotations” workbench, tolerances and
dimensions can be added to 3D geometry, thus replacing separate drawings for fabrica-
tion. It is generally important that FT/A elements are legible and contain the correct
information.

Fig. 1: Annotations with linked geometry

Suggested solution
Links to non-allowed elements can be replaced (Fig. 2). On the context menu for the
FT/A element, choose “Associated Geometry” > “Geometry Connection Management”.

Dassault Systèmes 640 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Replacing linked geometry using “Geometry Connection Management”

Dassault Systèmes 641 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Elements linked to these geometry elements are faulty” value list Specify the non-
allowed types of reference geometry elements.

“Elements are faulty if linked geometry path does not match” value list Specify the
required paths of reference geometry elements. You can use Regular Expressions. To
allow any path, specify the following Regular Expression:

.*

Dassault Systèmes 642 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

“Elements with broken or missing link to geometry are faulty” check box If this option
Criteria manual

is selected, FT/A elements with a broken or missing link are rated as incorrect (Fig. 3).

“Elements with missing link to geometry are faulty” check box If this option is
selected, FT/A elements with a missing link are rated as incorrect. Elements with
broken links are not rated as incorrect (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Element “Text.1” has a broken link (indicated by the yellow circle with exclamation mark). Elements
“Flag Note.1” and “Text.2” are not linked to geometry (indicated by the red X).

“Elements linked to a vertex are faulty” check box If this option is selected, FT/A
elements must not link to vertices.

“Elements linked to infinite geometry are faulty” check box If this option is selected,
FT/A elements must not link to infinite geometry (infinite lines or surfaces).

“Elements linked to multiple geometry are faulty” check box If this option is selected,
FT/A elements linked to more than one geometry element are faulty.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 643 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.7 Active Capture

Criteria manual

StdActiveCapture (1401)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a specified capture or no capture is active according to
the specifications. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Captures can be used to control the visibility of FT/A components. When creating FT/A
components, they are automatically assigned to the currently active capture.
The assignment of newly created FT/A elements may be wrong if the wrong capture is
active.

Fig. 1: Active captures in the annotation set

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to activate the required capture.
• Manual healing in CATIA: To activate a capture, double-click its entry in the
specification tree, then right-click the entry and choose “Set Current” from the context
menu.
• Create missing captures.

Dassault Systèmes 644 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Capture state” list box Specify which captures are allowed to be active:
“No capture must be active” No capture must be active.
“One capture must be active” A single arbitrary capture must be active.
“Capture with a specific name must be active” A specified must be active. In the
“Capture name” text box, specify the name of this capture.

“Name of the capture” text box Name of the capture You can use Regular Expressions.
This settings applies only to the “Capture with a specific name must be active” check
setting and to the “Activate specific capture” healing function.

Healing settings
The healing function changes the status of captures. Select the appropriate healing
function according to the check settings.
“Deactivate captures” This healing function deactivates all views. This healing function
corresponds to the “No capture must be active” check setting.

“Activate first capture” This healing function activates the first capture. This healing
function corresponds to the “One capture must be active” check setting.

“Activate specific capture” This healing function activates the capture specified in the
“Capture name” text box. This healing function corresponds to the “Capture with a
specific name must be active” an to the “One capture must be active” check settings.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 645 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• In the specification tree, the active capture is marked with a red dot.
• Captures can also be used to define filters(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Filter definition for the selection of FT/A elements

Dassault Systèmes 646 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.8 Permitted FT/A Types in Specific Capture

Criteria manual

StdPermittedFTATypeInSpecificCapture (1402)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain types of FT/A elements are only assigned to the
specified captures. If that does not apply, the affected FT/A elements are rated as incor-
rect.

Background
To show FT/A elements selectively, you can define which FT/A to show in which
captures. When activating a capture, only FT/A elements assigned to this capture are
displayed. FT/A elements that are assigned to the wrong capture may confuse users
and cause delays.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click an incorrectly assigned FT/A element, and choose
“Capture Management”(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Visibility definition using “Capture Management”

Related criteria
 FT/A Types Must Be Assigned to Specific Captures, page 650
 Occurrences of FT/A Types in Captures, page 666

Dassault Systèmes 647 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of captures” value list Specify the captures that may contain only certain types of
FT/A elements. Give the names of these captures. You can use Regular Expressions.

“List of FT/A types” value list Specify the types of FT/A elements that are allowed in
the specified captures. In the preset, all types are allowed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To check multiple captures with different allowed types of FT/A elements, create an
additional instance of this criterion for every capture.
• To hide all annotations, right-click the annotation set and select “Annotation Set
Switch on/Switch off” on the context menu (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 648 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Deactivating annotations in a model

Dassault Systèmes 649 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.9 FT/A Types Must Be Assigned to Specific Captures

Criteria manual

StdAnnotMustLayInASpecCapture (1352)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain types of FT/A elements are assigned to one or
several specified captures. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as
incorrect.

Background
To show FT/A elements selectively, you can define which FT/A to show in which
captures. When activating a capture, only FT/A elements assigned to this capture are
displayed. FT/A elements that are assigned to the wrong capture may confuse users
and cause delays.

Dassault Systèmes 650 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Part with datum, datum targets, dimensions and annotation planes

Fig. 2: Capture that displays datum and datum Fig. 3: Capture that displays dimensions only
targets only

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to assign FT/A elements to the correct captures, and to create
missing captures.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click an incorrectly assigned FT/A element, and
choose “Capture Management”(Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Visibility definition using “Capture Management”

Dassault Systèmes 651 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Related criteria
Criteria manual

 Permitted FT/A Types in Specific Capture, page 647

Dassault Systèmes 652 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Specific captures to check” list box Specify which captures the FT/A elements have to
be assigned to:
“All from list” Each FT/A element to be checked must be assigned to at least one
capture.
“Any capture from document” Each FT/A element to be checked must be assigned to at
least one capture. Note that Q-Checker healing is not possible with this setting.
“All from list and at least one additional capture” Each FT/A element to be checked must
be assigned to all specified captures, and to at least one additional capture.

Dassault Systèmes 653 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Assign this entity to specific capture” This healing function assigns FT/A elements to
the required capture. If the required capture is missing, the FT/A elements remain
unchanged.

“Assign this entity to specific capture, if necessary create requested capture” This
healing function assigns FT/A elements to the required capture. If required captures are
missing, they will be created.

“Assign this entity to specific capture, if necessary create requested capture and set
camera” This healing function assigns FT/A elements to the required capture. If
required captures are missing, they will be created. In addition, the camera specified in
the “Camera name (viewpoint)” text box will be applied to the capture, given that the
named camera does exist.

 NOTE
• These Q-Checker healing functions cannot be used if FT/A elements must be
assigned to arbitrary captures.
• If FT/A elements must be assigned to all specified at and least one additional capture,
Q-Checker will assign FT/A elements only to the specified captures (partial healing).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To check whether a certain FT/A element type is uniquely assigned to a certain
capture, add only one capture to “List of requested captures”.
• To check several unique assignments, you can add further instances of this criterion
to the profile.

Fig. 5: Deactivating annotations in a model

• To hide all annotations, right-click the annotation set and select “Annotation Set
Switch on/Switch off” on the context menu (Fig. 5).

Dassault Systèmes 654 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.10 Non-Allowed Semantic/Non-Semantic FT/A Elements

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedSemanticFTAElements (1400)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether FT/A elements have the required semantic state
(“semantic” or “not semantic”). If that does not apply, the affected FT/A elements are
rated as incorrect.

Background
Semantic FT/A elements are created using the “Semantic Tolerancing Advisor”. In
semantic tolerances, attribute value, geometry and syntax must be consistent. Semantic
FT/A elements can be used for applications such as tolerance analysis, inspection,
manufacturing and assembly process.

Fig. 1: “Semantic Tolerancing Advisor”

Suggested solution
Non-semantic FT/A elements cannot be converted into semantic elements. Use
“Semantic Tolerancing Advisor” to create new semantic FT/A elements.

Dassault Systèmes 655 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Mark entities if” list box Select whether semantic or non-semantic elements are not
allowed:
• “Semantic”: Semantic FT/A elements are not allowed.
• “Non-semantic”: Non-semantic FT/A elements are not allowed.

“Allowed exceptions” value list Specify the types of FT/A elements to be ignored.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA application settings, you can configure the creation of semantic and non-
semantic FT/A elements: “Mechanical” > “Functional Tolerancing & Analysis” >
“Tolerances”.
• Non-semantic FT/A elements can be marked in colors using a CATIA application
setting (Fig. 2): “Mechanical” > “Functional Tolerancing & Analysis” > “Display”.

Dassault Systèmes 656 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Semantic and non-semantic FT/A elements. Non-semantic elements are marked with a red wavy
line.

Dassault Systèmes 657 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.11 Capture Definition

Criteria manual

StdCaptureDefinition (1477)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether captures have a camera and/or a view, and whether the
camera zoom factor is within the specified range. If that does not apply, the capture is
rated as incorrect.

Background
Captures can be used to control the visibility of FT/A components. When creating FT/A
components, they are automatically assigned to the currently active capture. To find
information more easily, you can assign a view and a camera to each capture.
If a capture does not have the required components (view, camera), FT/A elements not
displayed as required, which way cause problems when generating drawings and in
other subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: Capture definition

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Add the missing components (view, captures) to incorrect
captures.
• To add a camera: Double-click the capture to be edited. On the “Capture Options”
toolbar, select the required camera from the “Cameras” list (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 658 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Adding a camera

• To add a view: Double-click the capture to be edited. On the “View Point” toolbar,
click the “Named views” button. Thereafter the“ Named Views” dialog box will be
opened. Select here the required view (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Adding a view

Related criteria
 View Name Must Match Capture Name, page 661

Dassault Systèmes 659 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Capture must have a camera” check box If this option is selected, all captures must
have a camera.

“Capture must have a view” check box If this option is selected, all captures must have
a view.

“Camera zoom factor range” check box Select this option to check the camera zoom
factor. Use the spin boxes to set the minimum and maximum allowed zoom factor.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To identify associated captures, views and cameras, their names should match.
• In the specification tree, active captures are marked with a red dot.

Dassault Systèmes 660 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.12 View Name Must Match Capture Name

Criteria manual

StdViewNameMustMatchCaptureName (1478)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of views in captures match the capture name.
If that does not apply, the affected views are rated as incorrect.
Additionally, this criterion can check for views are not used in any capture. If that does
apply, these views are rated as incorrect.

Background
Captures can be used to control the visibility of FT/A components. When creating FT/A
components, they are automatically assigned to the currently active capture. A view and
a camera can be assigned to every capture. That way, required information can be found
more easily.
To identify associated captures and views in the CATIA specification tree, their names
should match one another. If their names do not match, it is less easy to identify them.

Fig. 1: Capture definition with a view

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to name the view according to the capture. This healing is not
possible, if the same view is used in more than one capture.
• To add a view: Double-click the capture to be edited. On the “View Point” toolbar,
click the “Named views” button. Thereafter the“ Named Views” dialog box will be
opened. Select here the required view (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 661 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Adding a view

Related criteria
 Capture Definition, page 658
 Camera Name Must Match Capture Name, page 664

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Mark the views not used in any capture” check box If this option is selected, views
not used in any capture are not allowed.

Dassault Systèmes 662 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Rename” The healing function adopts the capture name as the new view name.

 NOTE: If a view is used in more than one capture, no healing can be performed. An
error message will be issued.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To identify associated captures, views and cameras, their names should match.
• In the specification tree, active captures are marked with a red dot.

Dassault Systèmes 663 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.13 Camera Name Must Match Capture Name

Criteria manual

StdCameraNameMustMatchCaptureName (1479)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of cameras in captures match the capture
name. If that does not apply, the camera is rated as incorrect.

Background
Captures can be used to control the visibility of FT/A components. When creating FT/A
components, they are automatically assigned to the currently active capture. A view and
a camera can be assigned to every capture. That way, required information can be found
more easily.
To identify associated captures and cameras in the CATIA specification tree, their
names should match one another. If their names do not match, it is less easy to identify
them.

Fig. 1: Capture and camera with matching names

Suggested solution
• Check the assignment of camera and capture. To assign a different camera to a
capture, see the suggested solution for criterion Capture Definition, page 658.
• Use Q-Checker healing to name the camera according to the capture. This healing is
not possible if the same camera is used in more than one capture.

Related criteria
 Capture Definition, page 658
 View Name Must Match Capture Name, page 661

Dassault Systèmes 664 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing parameters
“Rename” The healing function adopts the capture name as camera name.

 NOTE: If a camera is used in more than one capture, no healing can be performed. An
error message will be issued.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To identify associated captures, views and cameras, their names should match.
• In the specification tree, active captures are marked with a red dot.

Dassault Systèmes 665 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.14 Occurrences of FT/A Types in Captures

Criteria manual

StdAllowOnlyOneFTAInCapture (1491)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain types of FT/A elements are assigned to more than
one capture. The affected FT/A elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
To show FT/A elements selectively, you can define which FT/A to show in which
captures. When activating a capture, only FT/A elements assigned to this capture are
displayed. This improves the clarity of the model.
User may be confused by FT/A elements that are assigned to more than one capture.

Related criteria
 Permitted FT/A Types in Specific Capture, page 647
 FT/A Types Must Be Assigned to Specific Captures, page 650

Dassault Systèmes 666 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of FT/A types” value list Specify the types of FT/A elements that are allowed in
only one capture.

“Ignore capture” text box Captures are not checked if their name matches the given
Regular Expression.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To hide all FT/A elements, right-click the annotation set and select “Annotation Set
Switch on/Switch off” in the context menu.

Fig. 1: Deactivating annotations in a model

Dassault Systèmes 667 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.15 Permitted NOA Attributes

Criteria manual

StdFTANoaAttributes (1494)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of note object attributes (NOA) correspond to
the specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
NOA features are 3D annotations to which a type has been assigned. This type can be
used to evaluate the purpose of the annotation, or the process in which the annotation
is relevant. Problems may occur if a NOA feature has an unknown or invalid type.

Fig. 1: Text with NOA type “Qualitätsprüfung” (quality assurance)

Suggested solution
Replace invalid NOA types with allowed NOA types. To change the definition of incor-
rect NOA features, double-click the NOA feature and select the required NOA type
(Fig. 1).

Dassault Systèmes 668 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed NOA Types” value list Specify the allowed NOA types. You can use Regular
Expressions.
If the value list contains more than one entry, the type of each NOA feature must corre-
spond to at least one specified type.
If the value list is empty, all NOA types are rated as incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
NOA types cannot be changed if no NOA type definitions are installed. In this case, the
NOA assistant is unavailable.

Dassault Systèmes 669 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.16 Non-Allowed Basic Dimension Reference

Criteria manual

StdFTABasicDimensionReference (1495)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether one or both reference points of a framed basic dimension
are situated on a constructed drill-hole axis. If that does not apply, the FT/A element is
rated as incorrect.

Background

Example If framed basic dimensions of drill-holes do not refer to the drill-hole axis but
on its center or its surface, the axis is displayed as a very long line, thus causing prob-
lems in external viewer applications.

Fig. 1: Incorrect: The dimension does not refer to a constructed Fig. 2: Correct: The dimension refers to the constructed drill-hole
element but to the center of the drill hole. axis.

Suggested solution
Change the geometry reference of the FT/A element. Right-click the FT/A element and
choose “Associated Geometry” > “Geometry Connection Management” from the
context menu (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Replacing the reference of a basic dimension using “Connection management”

Dassault Systèmes 670 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Construction elements (for example the rotation axis of a cylindrical surface) can be
added afterwards. Mark the element and click “Constructed Geometry Creation” on the
“Geometry for 3D Annotations” toolbar (Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Creating a drill-hole axis, using “Constructed Geometry Creation”

Dassault Systèmes 671 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.17 View Orientation Corresponds to Camera Orientation

Criteria manual

StdViewAndCameraOrientation (1496)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether views and cameras with identical names have the same
orientation. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
FT/A elements assigned to a view are only shown parallel to the screen if view and
camera have the same orientation. If view and camera do not have the same orienta-
tion, the annotated view may be unclear.

Fig. 1: View “Front view” and camera “Front view” with identical orientation

Fig. 2: View “Front view” and camera “Front view” with different orientation

Suggested solution
Assign a correctly oriented plane to the view. To do this, right-click the view and choose
“View Associativity Management” in the context menu. In the dialog, choose a suitable
face as reference.

Dassault Systèmes 672 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Replacing the plane associated to a view

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Use the “Normal View” function to orient a view parallel to the screen.

Fig. 4: Orienting a view parallel to the screen

Dassault Systèmes 673 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.18 Capture Name Must Match View Name

Criteria manual

StdCaptureNameMustMatchViewName (1541)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether capture names and their referenced view names match a
given pattern. If that does not apply, the capture is rated as incorrect.

Background
To identify the relation between capture and view in the CATIA specification tree more
easily, their names should match fully or partly (Fig. 1). If he names do not match, the
structure is less clear and may cause problems in subsequent steps.

Fig. 1: Captures and views with partly or fully matching names

Suggested solution
• Adjust the names of incorrectly named captures. Mark the capture and change its
name in “Edit” > “Properties” > “Feature Properties”(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Renaming a caption

• To replace an incorrectly assigned, proceed as follows:

Make sure that the “Active View State” button is activated on the “Capture Options”
toolbar (Fig. 4).

Dassault Systèmes 674 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Double-click the incorrect structure element in the specification tree to activate the
Criteria manual

capture. Next, right-click the correct view in the specification tree and click “Activate
view” on the context menu.

Fig. 3: Incorrectly assigned view Fig. 4: Assigning a view to a capture

Related criteria
 Capture Definition, page 658
 View Name Must Match Capture Name, page 661
 Camera Name Must Match Capture Name, page 664

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Capture text” value list / “Name of view” value list Specify which capture and view
names must match each other. You can use Regular Expressions.
 For using Regular Expressions with back-references see Example on *** 'Example' on
page 253 ***.

Dassault Systèmes 675 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Dassault Systèmes 676 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.19 Unused FT/A Datums

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedUnusedDatum (1543)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains reference elements that are not refer-
enced within a reference frame. If so, an error will be reported.

Background
Shape and location tolerances improve the function and exchangeability of parts and
assemblies. They are shown in addition to the dimensional tolerance only if required for
functional reasons or for economical manufacturing.
Otherwise unused datum elements are not necessary and may compromise the clarity
of view (Fig. 1). Therefore they should be deleted.

Fig. 1: Datum element “F” is not used in any of the tolerance of shape and location elements

Suggested solution
Delete unused FT/A datums.

Related criteria
 FT/A Reference System Must Exist, page 629
 FT/A Reference Frame Must Exist, page 684

Dassault Systèmes 677 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allow datums linked to other FT&A features across” check box with list box If this
option is not selected, datum elements without reference frames are not allowed.
If this option is selected, datum elements without reference frames are allowed if
another FT/A element is linked to the same BRep or geometry element. In the list box,
select whether reference element and FT/A feature must belong to the same BRep
feature or geometry feature.

“Allowed FT/A types” value list Specify the types of FT/A features for which a reference
element without reference is allowed on the same B-Rep or geometry element.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Relations between annotations and geometry can be visualized using markup elements.
Click the “3D Annotation Query” button on the “Visualization” toolbar to activate the
visualization (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 678 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Display or hide marking elements for FT/A components.

Dassault Systèmes 679 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.20 Annotation Content Does Not Correspond to Root Feature

Criteria manual

Properties
StdUserDefPropNotAppliedToFTA (1544)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a certain annotation text exists and contains the part
number, or names or values of user-defined properties of the model. If that does not
apply, an error is reported.

Background
If the text does not contain the required property names and values, problems may
occur in subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: Annotation text containing user-defined root feature properties

Suggested solution
Change the annotation text as required. To change the text, double-click the text
element.

Dassault Systèmes 680 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Editing a text element

Dassault Systèmes 681 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check also Part Number” check box with text box If this option is selected, the text
annotation must contain the part number.
In the “Part number format” text box, specify an expression for the substring that
contains the part number. Use the placeholder %VAL% for the part number. You can use
Regular Expressions.

“User-defined properties to be checked” value list Specify user-defined properties

whose name or value must be contained in the annotation text. You can use Regular
Expressions.
In the “Name” column, give an expression for the property name.
In the “Format” column, give an expression for the substring that contains the property
name or value. You can use the following placeholders:
• %ID% for the property name
• %VAL% for the property value

Examples
• The expression User.* in the “Name” column and the expression --%VAL%-- in the
“Format” column require that the annotation text must contain all property values
whose name begins with “User”. Property values must be present in the given
annotation in the following form: --Property value--
• The .* expression in the “Name” column and %ID% : %VAL% in the “Format” column

Dassault Systèmes 682 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

require that all user-defined properties must be contained in the specified text
Criteria manual

element in the following form: Property name : Property value

“Format entries are not case sensitive” check box If this option is selected, the speci-
fied expressions are evaluated case-insensitive.

“Name of the capture” text box Specify the name of the annotation text to be checked.
You can specify a fixed string or a Regular Expression. A Regular Expression must be set
in quotation marks.

Application Tip
The annotation text or part of it can be linked to a root Feature Property using an attri-
bute link. This ensures that property values in the annotation text remain up-to-date.

Dassault Systèmes 683 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.21 FT/A Reference Frame Must Exist

Criteria manual

StdFTAReferenceFrameMustExist (1545)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains a reference frame with the specified
name exists, and whether the referenced elements (datums) exist (Fig. 1). An error is
reported if the reference frame or reference elements do not exist.

Background
A missing reference frame, or a reference frame other than specified may cause prob-
lems in subsequent processes (quality control, manufacturing, assembly,...).

Fig. 1: Reference frame with reference elements A, B and C.

Suggested solution
• To create a reference frame, choose “Insert” > “Annotations” > “Datum
Referencing” > “Reference Frame”.
• To edit a reference frame, double-click the respective specification tree element, or
mark the element and click the “Tolerancing Advisor” button(Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 684 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Editing a reference frame using Tolerance Advisor

Related criteria
 FT/A Reference System Must Exist, page 629

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Name of the reference system” text box Specify the required datum reference frame
label. A datum reference frame label always consists of three characters, with each char-
acter standing for a reference element.

“Order of the three characters must match” check box If this option is selected, the
order of the characters must match the order specified in “Name of the reference
system” If this option is not selected, any order is allowed.

Example If this option is not selected and the name of the reference system is “ABC”,
the following datum reference frame labels are allowed: “ABC”, “ACB”, “BAC”, “BCA”,
“CAB” and “CBA”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 685 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Application Tip
Criteria manual

Make sure the required FT/A standard is applied before creating new FT/A features.
Later changes of the FT/A standard may result in unexpected results.

Dassault Systèmes 686 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.22 Non-Allowed Empty FT/A Views

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedEmptyFTAViews (1586)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether FT/A views contain no FT/A elements. Empty FT/A views
are marked as incorrect.

Example

Fig. 1: The marked element is an empty view.

Suggested solution

Manual healing in CATIA

Delete empty FT/A views. To do this, mark the empty FT/A view and press the [DEL]
key.
Only empty FT/A views can be deleted. When trying to delete an FT/A view that is not
empty, CATIA displays a message (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Message when trying to delete an FT/A view that is not empty.

Dassault Systèmes 687 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Application Tip
The command “Select Annotations” on the context menu is only available if the FT/A
view is empty (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: If the “Select annotations” command on the context menu is unavailable, the FT/A view is empty.

Dassault Systèmes 688 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.23 Non-Allowed FT/A Elements Without Text Content

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedFTAElementsWithoutTextContent (1587)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the text content of flag notes and dimensions is empty.
The affected elements are marked as incorrect.
In addition, this criterion can check whether the text content is all spaces.

Fig. 1: FT/A element without text content

Suggested solution

Manual healing in CATIA

• Delete unused empty FT/A elements.
• Insert the missing text content. To edit an FT/A element, double-click the element.

Criterion definition

Dassault Systèmes 689 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Check settings
Criteria manual

“Mark also if the text content is all spaces” check box If this option is selected,
elements are rated as incorrect if their text is all spaces.

Dassault Systèmes 690 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.24 Only one FT/A Link per BRep Element of Geometry

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedGeometryWithMultipleFTALinks (1593)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether more than one FT/A element is linked to the same BRep
element. If so, the affected geometry is rated as incorrect.

Background
Multiple FT/A elements that are linked to the same BRep element might show redun-
dant or inconsistent information.

Fig. 1: FT/A elements Roughness.1 and Roughness.2 are linked to the same BRep face.

Suggested solution

Manual healing in CATIA

Delete unused FT/A elements. Make sure that the remaining FT/A information is
correct and complete.

Dassault Systèmes 691 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“FT/A types to be considered” value list Select the types of FT/A elements to be
considered. Only FT/A elements of the selected types are counted.

 NOTE: You can use element selection to select the reference geometry of the FT/A
elements to be checked. Element selection cannot be used to select FT/A elements
directly.

Dassault Systèmes 692 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.25 Separator for Geometrical Tolerance

Criteria manual

StdSeparatorForGeometricalTolerance (1528)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the geometrical tolerance in semantic FT/A features is
shown using the specified decimal separator. If that does not apply, the affected
element is rated as incorrect.
Non-semantic tolerances are ignored.

Background
Different decimal separators may confuse users and cause automated data processing
to fail.

Fig. 1: Geometrical tolerance with a comma as decimal separator

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to apply the required decimal separator.

Dassault Systèmes 693 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

• Depending on the type of FT/A feature, either double-click the element in and edit its
Criteria manual

definition, or mark the element and select “Edit” > “Properties” to set the required
decimal separator (Fig. 2, Fig. 3).

Fig. 2: Definition dialog for geometrical tolerance Fig. 3: Properties dialog with geometrical tolerance

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed Separator” list box In the list, select the allowed decimal separator. If the
allowed separator is a blank space, select “<blank>”. If no separator is allowed, select
“<empty>”.

Healing settings
“Change the Separator” The healing function replaces non-allowed separators with the
correct separators.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 694 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Application Tip
Criteria manual

The application setting for the decimal separator in geometrical tolerances can be
found in “Tools” > “Options” > “Mechanical Design” > “Functional Tolerancing &
Annotation” > “Tolerances”(Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Defining the separator in the CATIA application settings

Dassault Systèmes 695 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.26 FT/A View Definition

Criteria manual

MethFTAViewDefinition (1606)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the definition of an FT/A view is isolated or has an asso-
ciative support element. If the support element status does not match the specification,
an error is reported.

Background
An FT/A view associated with a plane or coordinate system will be updated after the
associative element has changed. An isolated FT/A view remains unchanged.

Fig. 1: FT/A view definition when creating the view Fig. 2: FT/A view definition being edited

Suggested solution
To change the state of the support element, choose “Change view support” from the
context menu. In the “Type” list box, choose the desired setting “Associative” oder
“Isolated”(Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 696 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Associativity state” check box with list box Select this option to check the associative
state. In the list box, select the required setting, “Associative” or “Isolated”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 697 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

2.4.1.27 Capture Display

Criteria manual

MethCaptureDisplay (1608)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the visibility of bodies is managed by captures, and
whether certain bodies must be visible in a capture. In particular, the following is
checked:
• Check the parameter “Manage the visibility of part instances, bodies and geometrical
sets” in the capture definition
• If visibility management by captures is allowed: Check the visibility of bodies in certain
captures. Captures are marked as incorrect if they do not assign the required visibility
to bodies.

 NOTE: This criterion requires CATIA V5-6R2013 (R23) or later. When using this crite-
rion with an earlier CATIA release, Q-Checker reports a general error.

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to adjust the definition of captures according to the specifica-
tions.

Dassault Systèmes 698 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – FT/A

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Captures must not manage the visibility of bodies” check box Select this option if the
visibility of bodies must not be managed by captures.
If this option is selected, the “Displayed capture must show only these bodies, if avail-
able” value list in the criterion definition must be empty.

“Displayed capture must show only these bodies, if available” value list In the left
column, enter the names of captures which must manage the visibility of bodies.
In the right column, enter the names of bodies which must be visible when the corre-
sponding capture is displayed. You can use Regular Expressions.
Bodies not defined as visible in the respective capture must be hidden.
To execute this check, the “Captures must not manage the visibility of bodies” check
box must be deselected in the criterion definition.

Healing settings
“Heal captures according to the specified criterion settings” The healing function
adjusts the capture definition according to the specifications of the criterion.
Depending on the specification, the healing will deselect the “Manage the visibility of
part instances, bodies and geometrical sets” option or assign certain bodies to captures
as specified.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 699 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2 Process
Criteria manual

 NOTE: Criteria in the “Process” folder check also the “Machining Process List” element.
Errors may be reported when checking this element. These errors are irrelevant as long
as the Machining Process List is not in use.
To exclude the Machining Process List from the check, apply a suitable element selec-
tion to these criteria, as shown in the following example.

Examples
• Multi-Select expression (English) for the element selection:

NOT PATHNAME = "Liste der Bearbeitungsprozesse"

• Multilingual Multi-Select expression (English, French, German):

NOT PATHNAME = "Machining Process List|Liste des procédés|Liste der

Bearbeitungsprozesse"

The expressions in the respective languages are connected by logical OR (vertical bar
“|”).

 Element selection definition: Administration manual, 5 Model assessments and

priorities

Dassault Systèmes 700 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.1 NC Machining Fixture

Criteria manual

StdProcessOperationDefinedFixture (1511)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether an NC machining fixture is defined. If that does not apply,
the machining operation is rated as incorrect.

Background
For machining, workpieces must be fixed to the NC machine. When calculating a tool
path, the fixtures have to be considered; otherwise collisions between tool and fixtures
could occur, causing damage and high cost.

Suggested solution
Edit the NC process operation and define the missing fixtures.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To calculate possible collisions, configure the options on the “Collisions checking” tab
(Fig. 1).

Dassault Systèmes 701 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Options for collision checking

Dassault Systèmes 702 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.2 NC Machining Rough Stock

Criteria manual

StdProcessOperationDefinedStock (1510)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a NC machining stock is defined. If that does not apply,
the machining operation is rated as incorrect.

Background
For calculating tool paths, both the final shape of the workpiece and the stock must be
known. If the stock is undefined, the machining process will be delayed.

Fig. 1: Configuring a machining operation

Suggested solution
Edit the process operation and define the stock.

Dassault Systèmes 703 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 704 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.3 NC Machining Safety Plane

Criteria manual

StdProcessOperationDefSafetyPlane (1512)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a safety plane is defined for NC machining. If that does
not apply, the machining operation is rated as incorrect.

Background
For each process operation, a safety plane can be defined that is used to generate linear
tool paths. The safety plane helps to avoid collisions between tool and workpiece, which
otherwise could cause high costs due to tool breakage or damage to the workpiece.

Suggested solution
Edit the NC process operation and define a safety plane.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In , you can use geometry analysis to analyze the status of the safety plane (Fig. 1). The
respective command can be found on the context menu of the safety plane.

Dassault Systèmes 705 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Geometry analysis dialog

Dassault Systèmes 706 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.4 Machining Operation Feeds and Speeds Properties

Criteria manual

StdMachiningOpFeedsAndSpeedsProp (1513)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the “Automatic compute from tooling feeds and speeds”
option is set according to the specification. If the setting does not correspond to the
specification, the process operation is rated as incorrect.

Background
When the tooling data has been changed, the feed rate has to be adjusted. This adap-
tion is done automatically in CATProcess documents only if the “Automatically
compute from tooling data” option is active. If this setting is inactive, the quality of the
finished workpiece may not meet the standards.

Suggested solution
Double-click the process operation to display the definition of the process operation.
On the “Feeds and Speeds” tab, configure the settings according to the requirements
(Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Machining Operation Feeds and Speeds Properties

Dassault Systèmes 707 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Automatically compute from tooling data (feeds)” check box If this option is selected,
the automatic calculation of feeds from tooling data must be selected.
If this option is not selected, the automatic calculation of feeds from tooling data must
not be selected.

“Automatically compute from tooling data (speeds)” check box If this option is
selected, the automatic calculation of speeds from tooling data must be selected.
If this option is not selected, the automatic calculation of speeds from tooling data
must not be selected.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In the CATIA application settings, you can defint that the automatic computation of
feeds and speeds is activated by default (Fig. 2). “Tools” > “Options” > “Machining” >
“Resources”.

Fig. 2: Application settings for feeds and speeds

Dassault Systèmes 708 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.5 Non-Allowed NC Machine

Criteria manual

StdAllowedOperationMachineName (1514)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether NC machining operations use only allowed machine
names. If that does not apply, the affected machining operations are rated as incorrect.
The check compares the part number of the machine (Fig. 2) in the resource list to the
allowed machine names.

Background
For each NC processing step, you can select a machine from the defined set of
machines in the Machine Editor. Both standard and generic machines may be defined,
including all required NC parameters and kinetic definition data for the respective
process operation.
Problems in the manufacturing process will occur if a machine has been assigned incor-
rectly to a processing step.

Fig. 1: Machine name in the resource list

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed NC machines with allowed NC machines. To do this, edit the defi-
nition of the process operation and choose a different machine in the machine editor.

Dassault Systèmes 709 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Selecting a machine in the machine editor

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Allowed Operation Machine Name” value list Specify the allowed machine names.
You can use Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 710 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.6 Non-Allowed NC Machine PPWords Table

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedMachiningOpPPWordsTable (1535)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether an allowed PPWords Table is assigned to the process
operations. If that does not apply, the affected machining operations are rated as incor-
rect.

Background
If the post processing instructions include NC commands which are not compatible to
the NC machine, problems in the manufacturing process will occur.

Fig. 1: Name of the PPWords table

Suggested solution
In the list of PPWords tables, select an allowed PPWords table (Fig. 1).

Dassault Systèmes 711 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed elements” value list Specify the names of allowed PPWords tables. You can
use Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In the CATIA application settings, you can specify the path to PPWords tables:
“Tools” > “Options” > “Machining” > “Resources”(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: File path to PPWords tables

Dassault Systèmes 712 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.7 Non-Allowed PPWords

Criteria manual

StdPPWordsFromPPTable (1518)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether PP Instructions contain invalid PP Words. If so, the
process operation is rated as incorrect.

Background
A PPWords table contains the valid NC commands for a NC machine. If the post
processing instructions include NC commands that are not compatible to the NC
machine, problems may occur during the manufacturing process.

Fig. 1: Post-processing instructions

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed NC commands with NC commands from a valid PPWords table.

Dassault Systèmes 713 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of allowed PPWords” value list Specify the allowed PPWords for PP instructions.
You can use Regular Expressions.

“Check also PPWords from NC macros for” check box with list box If this option is
selected, NC macros are also checked for non-allowed PPWords. In the list box, select
the group of NC macros to be checked:
• Activated macros
• Deactivated macros
• All macros

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 714 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.8 Non-Allowed Machining Operation Tool Name/Tool Number

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedMachiningOpToolName (1522)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether NC machining operations use allowed tool names and
tool numbers. If not, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Machining operations using invalid tool names will cause delays in the manufacturing
process. Either the tool has to acquired, or the machining operation has to be changed
and recalculated.

Fig. 1: Name of a tooling assembly Fig. 2: Tool name

Suggested solution
To replace an incorrect tool or tool assembly, double-click the process operation. In the
dialog, click the “Tooling” tab, then click the “Tool” or “Tool assembly” tab (Fig. 3). The
tool or tool assembly can be replaced with an existing tool or with a tool from a catalog
or external database.

Fig. 3: Replacing the tool in a process operation

Dassault Systèmes 715 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of allowed tool names” value list Specify the allowed tool names and tool
numbers. You can use Regular Expressions.
To allow any tool name, specify the following Regular Expression in the “Tool name”
field: .*
To allow any tool number, leave the “Tool number” field empty.

“List of allowed tool assemblies” value list Specify the allowed tool assembly names
and numbers. You can use Regular Expressions.
To allow any tool name, specify the following Regular Expression in the “Tool name”
field: .*
To allow any tool number, leave the “Tool number” field empty.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
A new tool inserted from a tool catalog or an external tooling database is not used for
the operation in the following cases:
• The tool number of the new tool is already used in the resource list.
• The tool is not on the resource list.

Dassault Systèmes 716 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.9 Consistent Settings for Machining Operations

Criteria manual

StdMachiningOperationConsistence (1523)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the settings for machining operation are coherent. In
particular, the criterion can check whether the machining operations
• are up-to-date and resolved
• apply to the entire geometry
• have the required lock status
If the required properties are not fulfilled, the affected process operations are rated as
incorrect.

Background
Due to changes to the workpiece or the process operation, the defined machining oper-
ations can become invalid. These errors can lead to major problems during fabrication
if they are not resolved.

Example Possible states of process operations and tool paths

Display in specification Description

tree

Unresolved machining operation

Machining operation not up to date

Locked tool path and operation parameters

Locked tool path

Suggested solution
• If the resolve status is invalid or the selected geometry is incomplete: Double-click the
machining operation and add the missing entries in the dialog (Fig. 1).

Dassault Systèmes 717 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Editing an unresolved machining operation

• If the tool path lock status is invalid: Mark the machining operation and change the
settings according to the specification in “Edit” > “Object”, or on the context menu
(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Using the function on the context menu to lock the tool path

Dassault Systèmes 718 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check complete geometry selected” check box If this option is selected, the complete
geometry has to be selected for the process operation.

“Check resolve status” check box If this option is selected, machining operations will
be checked whether they can be resolved.

“Check update status” check box If this option is selected, machining operations will
be checked whether they are up-to-date.

“Check lock status” check box with list box If this option is selected, machining opera-
tions will be checked whether they have the required lock status. Specify the required
lock status in the list box.
“Unlock” The machining operation must be unlocked.
“Lock” The machining operation must be locked.
“Lock tool path” The machining operation must be locked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
The status of one or more activities can be displayed even if the “Update activity status
automatically” in “Tools” > “Options” > “Machining” > “General” > “Tree Display”
option is not selected. To display the activity status, click the “Display status of selected
activities” on the“Auxiliary commands” toolbar (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Display the activity state without automatic update

Dassault Systèmes 719 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.10 Machining Operation Strategy Properties

Criteria manual

StdMachiningOpStrategyProp (1554)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain NC machining strategy parameters are within the
allowed range. If that does not apply, the affected machining operations are rated as
incorrect.
Currently a check of the “Machining Tolerance” strategy parameter is available.

Background
The machining tolerance represents the maximum allowed distance between the theo-
retical and the calculated tool path.

Fig. 1: Machining tolerance setting for a facing operation

Suggested solution
Adjust the incorrect settings according to the requirements. To do this, double-click the
machining operation in the specification tree (Fig. 2) and change the incorrect value
(Fig. 1).

Dassault Systèmes 720 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Opening the machine editor by double-clicking the machining operation

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Machining tolerance” check box with spin boxes If this option is selected, the
machining tolerance is checked.
Specify the allowed value range in the spin boxes. Give the smallest allowed value in the
“min” box and the largest allowed value in the “max” box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 721 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.11 NC Machine Numerical Control Properties

Criteria manual

StdNCMachineNumericalControlProp (1555)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether certain numerical control (NC) parameters are within the
allowed range. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The following parameters can be checked:
• Minimum interpolation radius
• Maximum interpolation radius
• Minimum discretization step
• Minimum discretization angle

Background
The minimum/maximum interpolation radius values are used for defining circular
interpolations in the NC output data. These parameters are used when calculating the
tool path and generating the NC output data and should be checked and, if necessary,
adjusted before adding new machining operations. Otherwise the correct circular inter-
polation might be missing from the APT output file.

Fig. 1: Settings for the generation of circular interpolations

Suggested solution
Adjust the incorrect settings according to the requirements. To do this, double-click the
Part Operation entry in the specification tree to open the “Part Operation” dialog, then

Dassault Systèmes 722 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

click the “Machine Editor” button. Adjust the incorrect values on the “Numerical
Criteria manual

Control” tab (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Opening the machine editor by double-clicking the machining operation

Criterion definition

Check settings
Check boxes with spin boxes for parameter values Select the properties to be checked.
Specify the allowed value range for the respective properties in the spin boxes. Give the
smallest allowed value in the “min” box and the largest allowed value in the “max” box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Make sure to recalculate the tool path before generating the output file if the interpola-
tion value has been changed after adding machining operations and generating the tool
path. To recalculate the tool path, right-click the machining operation, then click
“Compute tool path” on the context menu. In the next dialog, select the “Force compu-
tation” option and confirm the calculation.

Dassault Systèmes 723 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.12 NC Machining Simulation Stock Accuracy

Criteria manual

StdNCMachiningStockAccuracy (1556)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the machining stock accuracy for machining simulation is
within the allowed range. If that does not apply, the process operation is rated as incor-
rect.

Suggested solution
Adjust the stock accuracy according to the specifications. To do this, double-click the
process operation in the specification tree. In the “Part Operation” dialog, click the
“Simulation” tab and set an allowed value for “Stock Accuracy” (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Display the definition of a part operation

Fig. 2: Stock accuracy setting

Dassault Systèmes 724 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Stock accuracy min/max” spin boxes Specify the allowed value range for stock accu-
racy. Give the smallest allowed value in the “min” box and the largest allowed value in
the “max” box.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 725 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

2.4.2.13 Activated NC Macro Must Exist

Criteria manual

StdActiveNCMacro (1557)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether an allowed number of NC macros of the specified types
are activated. If the number of activated NC macros is not within the allowed range, an
error is reported.

Suggested solution
In the specification tree, double-click the machining operation (Fig. 1), and select the
“Macro” tab. In “Macro Management”, activate or deactivate missing or redundant
macros on the context menu (Fig. 2) of the particular macros.

Fig. 1: Double-clicking a machining operation to display the machine editor

Dassault Systèmes 726 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Machine editor, “Macro” tab

Dassault Systèmes 727 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Process

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Numbers of activated NC macros” spin boxes Specify the allowed number of acti-
vated NC macros. Give the smallest allowed value in the “min” box and the largest
allowed value in the “max” box.

“NC macro types to be checked” value list Specify the types of NC macros to be
counted. To exclude macros of a certain type from the macro count, remove the respec-
tive item from the selection.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 728 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3 Part
Criteria manual

2.4.3.1 Structure of Part Specification Tree

StdStructureOfCATPartSpecTree (1306)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the specification tree structure of a part matches a given
reference part structure. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The following characteristics of the model structure are checked:
• Hierarchical structure and existence of elements in the specification tree
• Position of elements on the top level of the specification tree
• Element names
• Element types
In addition, the following characteristics can be checked:
• Position of elements within a branch of the specification tree
• Layers of elements
• Visibility (Show/NoShow) of elements
Parameters, axis systems, relations and annotations are ignored.

Background
Using a defined construction method helps to retrieve information from models more
easily.
The application of a standardized construction method can be supported by a start
model that already contains essential components required for the method.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to adjust visibility, layer and position of incorrect elements, or
to add missing bodies. In the analysis window, make sure to apply the appropriate
healing function to the error element.
• Renaming components: Right-click the component, and choose “Properties”. Correct
the component name.
• Inserting a missing geometrical set:
Select “Insert” > “Geometrical Set”.
• Moving a component into another body: Right-click the component and choose
“Change Body” from the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 729 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

• Changing the order inside a component: Right-click the element, then select
Criteria manual

“Object” > “Reorder children”.

• To avoid problems, use an appropriate start model.

Related criteria
 Structure of Product Specification Tree, page 843.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“XML reference” text box Insert the XML reference structure.
 Defining the reference structure, page 731

Healing Parameters
“Set Show and/or Layer” The healing function applies the required visibility state
(SHOW or NOSHOW) and layer to incorrect elements (partial healing).

“Set last position” This healing function puts incorrect elements into the position
defined in the reference (partial healing).

“Create missing bodies” This healing function adds missing bodies (Body, Geometrical
Set, Ordered Geometrical Set, Boolean Body) as defined in the reference (partial healing).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 730 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Defining the reference structure

Criteria manual

To define a reference structure, create a model with the required structure. Next, create
an XML description of the model structure using the “Specification tree to XML” func-
tion in Q-Checker.
Optionally, you can edit the XML description of the reference structure directly.
 Deriving the reference structure from a part, page 731
 Editing the XML description of the reference structure, page 732

Deriving the reference structure from a part

Create a part with the required reference structure. The reference takes into account the
following model characteristics:
• Hierarchical structure and existence of elements in the specification tree
• Position of elements on the top level of the specification tree
• Element names
• Q-Checker element types
Initially, no further characteristics are included.
You can define additional characteristics in user-defined parameters of the model.
These characteristics apply to the element to which the parameter is attached.
If no parameter can be attached to an element of the CATIA specification tree, you can
attach the corresponding parent parameter QC_PARENT_… to its child element.
 Parameter names see Keywords for structure characteristics, page 733
To create an XML description of the reference model structure, click the “Specifi-
cation tree to XML” button on the Q-Checker toolbar in CATIA.
If this button is not available, set the CATIA environment variable TCAQC_SHOW_TOOLS
with value SPECTREETOXML.
To insert the XML reference into the criterion definition, open the XML document in a
text editor, then copy the entire content from the XML document to the “XML refer-
ence” text box.

Dassault Systèmes 731 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Example

Fig. 1: Reference specification tree without parame- Fig. 2: Reference specification tree with parameters
ters for additional characteristics

Fig. 1 shows a specification without parameters. The hierarchy of elements with the
same names and Q-Checker element types of a checked model must correspond to the
reference structure. In the checked model, the order of the specified geometrical sets
“Design”, “Manufacturing” and “Material” must correspond to the reference structure.
Fig. 2 shows a specification with parameters. The following additional characteristics
apply:
• Geometrical set “Draft” can have any name (QC_NAME=.*) and must not be visible
(QC_SHOW=false).
• Geometrical set “Final” must be visible (QC_SHOW=true).
• In geometrical set “Design”, the position of elements “Draft” and “Final” must
correspond to the reference structure (QC_ORDER=true).

Editing the XML description of the reference structure

The XML description of the reference structure defines the characteristics to be
checked.
The XML root node can have any valid name. In the XML description created by
Q-Checker, the root node name is “QChecker”.

<QChecker>
...
</QChecker>

Dassault Systèmes 732 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

The reference structure is defined inside the root node. Each XML element corresponds
Criteria manual

to an element of the model.

The XML element name corresponds to the Q-Checker element type of the respective
element. Each XML element requires the attributes AliasName for the element name
and caaType for the CAA element type.

Example Definition of an element with Q-Checker element type “RootPart”, CAA type
“MechanicalPart” and element name “Part1”.

<QChecker>
<RootPart AliasName="Part1" caaType="MechanicalPart">
...
</RootPart>
</QChecker>

You can define additional characteristics in optional XML attributes.

 XML attributes see Keywords for structure characteristics, page 733

Example Attribute QC_NAME defines that the name of the PartBody must match the
Regular Expression ^B_.* or the attribute value of AliasName.

<QChecker>
<RootPart AliasName="Part1" caaType="MechanicalPart">
...
<PartBody AliasName="PartBody"
caaType="MechanicalTool"
QC_NAME="^B_.*">
...
</PartBody>
...
</RootPart>
</QChecker>

Keywords for structure characteristics

Use the following keywords as parameter names in the reference model or as attribute
names in the XML reference structure.
These parameters are optional.

Dassault Systèmes 733 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Keywords for structure characteristics

Keyword Parameter values XML attribute values Description

QC_NAME Regular Expression The element name to be

QC_PARENT_NAME checked must match the
reference element name
or the given Regular
Expression.

QC_TYPE • “ALL” for any Q-Checker element type The element type to be
QC_PARENT_TYPE checked must match the
• Q-Checker element types (no element groups except
reference element type or
“ALL”)
the given parameter value.
 Administration manual, Q-Checker Features
Types and Feature Groups

QC_LAYER Layer number. Layer 1000 corresponds to layer “None” The layer of the checked
QC_PARENT_LAYER in CATIA. element must match the
parameter value.
If this characteristic is not
defined, any layer is
allowed.

QC_SHOW “true”: Show “1”: Show The element must have

QC_PARENT_SHOW “false”: NoShow “0”: NoShow the specified visibility.
If this characteristic is not
defined, the element may
have any visibility.

QC_ORDER “true”: Same position “1”: Same position The checked element and
QC_PARENT_ORDER “false”: Any position “0”: Any position the reference element
must have the same posi-
tion within the specifica-
tion tree branch.

QC_LAST Integer number The checked element

must have the specified
position within the specifi-
cation tree branch.
Counting starts with 1 at
the last element of the
branch.

Dassault Systèmes 734 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Keywords for structure characteristics(continued)

Criteria manual

Keyword Parameter values XML attribute values Description

Parameter name “true”: CAA type must “1”: CAA type must match The CAA element types of
QC_CAA_TYPE match “0”: Any CAA type is the checked element and
XML attribute “false”: Any CAA type is allowed the reference element
name allowed must match.
QC_CAATYPE If this characteristic is not
defined, the checked
element may have any
CAA type.

QC_AMOUNT Number or numeric range The checked element

QC_PARENT_AMOUNT must exist in the specified
Example If the specificied element must exist three number.
times, set QC_AMOUNT with value 3. If this characteristic is not
If the specified element must exist at least once and no defined, the element must
more than five times, set QC_AMOUNT with value 1-5. exist once.

QC_AMOUNT_ Number or numeric range For the feature and all its
STRUCTURE sub-elements, the speci-
QC_PAREMT_ fied number of instances
AMOUNT_STRUCTURE is allowed.
If this characteristic is not
defined, the element and
its sub-structure must
exist once.

Dassault Systèmes 735 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.2 Open Body in Body

Criteria manual

StdOpenBodyInBody (1323)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a body contains a geometrical set (Open Body). If so, an
error will be reported.

Background
In the specification tree, geometrical sets can be inserted in linear order (all on the
same structural level) or in hierarchical order (inside another body). Geometrical sets in
hierarchical order can be placed in geometrical sets, in the PartBody or in any other
body.
If geometrical sets are hierarchically positioned in a PartBody or another body, prob-
lems in subsequent processes may occur.

Example For NC programming, geometrical sets must not be positioned within a body.
Otherwise the geometry for NC machining cannot be retrieved correctly, and tool paths
are calculated incorrectly.

Fig. 1: Geometrical set “Open_body.1” on the same Fig. 2: Geometrical set “Open_body.1” on a subor-
structural level dinate level

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the geometrical set, then choose “Change Body”
to change its position.

Dassault Systèmes 736 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Open body is not allowed in” list box Specify whether geometrical sets with a certain
visibility (“SHOW”, “NOSHOW”) must not be positioned within another body.
Choose “SHOW+NOSHOW” to allow geometrical sets to be positioned within another
body irrespective of their visibility.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 737 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.3 Non-Allowed Solid Feature Mixed With Boolean Feature

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowMixBodyChild (1353)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain types of solid features and Boolean features are
situated inside the same body on the same specification-tree level. If so, the affected
solid features are rated as incorrect.

Background

Example Incorrect and correct state

Fig. 1: Element “Pad.1” is not allowed to be on the Fig. 2: Manual healing: “Pad.1” and demoulding
same structural level as Boolean operations “Vorn” have been moved to a separate body
(“Assemble”). “Body.33”.

Fig. 3: Element “Solid.1” is not allowed on the Fig. 4: Healing: The imported element “Solid.1” is
same structural level with Boolean operations not directly linked to “Body.3”.
(“Assemble”).

Dassault Systèmes 738 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Example Casting parts and forgings are generally built up using a special construction
method which reflects the manufacturing process. If components are built up according
to this method, relevant information for manufacture are already contained in the
construction. Example: Raw part, finished part, machining allowance, casting cores.
This construction method is used primarily in the engine development and in the devel-
opment of the powertrain components. This method is recommended for complex
casting parts and forgings. The advantages of this method outweigh its disadvantages.
Advantages:
• High associativity
• Good change management
• Reliable and stable changes of base geometry
• Representation of complex parts
• ...
The construction method must be adhered to for the advantages to take effect.

Suggested solution
Structure the component according to the construction guidelines.
Incorrectly arranged components can be partly rearranged in the specification tree. The
following modifications are possible:
• Changing the sequence
• Moving elements to another body The newly created body containing the Assemble
operation is added to the specification tree. The type of the Boolean operation can be
changed afterwards.
The corresponding functions can be found on the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 739 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check also Boolean bodies” check box If this option is activated, the structure inside
Boolean elements is checked using the same specification. If this option is not selected,
the structure inside Boolean elements is ignored.

Example If this option is not selected, only direct child elements of

the “PartBody” are checked. If this option is selected, the direct
child elements of “Body.3” and “Body.2” are checked additionally.

“Ignore features situated after Boolean features” check box Acti-

vate this option to check only solid features that are located in a
body above a Boolean feature. Solid features below the last Boolean element in the
respective body are ignored.
If this option is not selected, solid features are checked irrespective of their position
relative to Boolean elements.

Example

Dassault Systèmes 740 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

If this option is activated and solid features of the type

Chamfer are not allowed, the “Chamfer.2” feature is not
marked as incorrect, as it is situated below after the last
Boolean feature (“Assemble.3”). Element “Chamfer.1” is
marked as incorrect, as it is situated above a Boolean
element (“Assemble.3”).

“Not allowed solid feature types” value list Specify the

types of solid elements that must not be situated on the same specification tree level as
Boolean elements.

“Non-allowed associative feature type” value list Specify the types of references that
must not be situated on the same specification tree level as Boolean elements.
The following reference types can be specified as non-allowed:

Link type Specification Description

tree icon

Non-associative Geometry copied from the same part, synchronized

Internal CCP Copied element without associativity

External link Broken link

Reference model found but not loaded

Geometry copied from other part, synchronized

Referenced published element, synchronized

Referenced published element, not synchronized

Not synchronized geometry

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 741 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.4 Center of Gravity

Criteria manual

StdCenterOfGravity (1424)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks certain properties of the center of gravity. If these properties are
not available, an error is reported.

 NOTE: To use this criterion, the Daimler Supplier Package for CATIA must be
installed. Always make sure to use the latest version of this software.
If the Daimler Supplier package is installed, the “DC Masterdata
Tools” toolbar is available and has a button for “DC Weight
Management” (marked red in the figure).

Background
For the calculation of weight of a vehicle using DC Weight Management, each part must
have a special weight attribute in an applicative container. After DC Weight Management
has added material definitions to surfaces with thin-part attributes or solids, weight and
center of gravity are calculated automatically. The center of gravity is shown as a symbol
in the specification tree.

Fig. 1: Weight Management dialog in DC Weight Management

Fig. 2: Center of Gravity in specification tree

Dassault Systèmes 742 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Weight entry in applicative container

Suggested solution
Use DC Weight Management to add or update the center of gravity attribute.

Criterion definition

Healing settings
“Update the applicative container feature” The healing function updates the applica-
tive container element.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 743 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.5 Sketch Not Fully Constrained

Criteria manual

StdSketchFullyConstrain (1247)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketches are fully constrained. Under-constrained and
over-constrained sketches are rated as incorrect.
Standard sketch elements are always checked. Use the check parameters to define
which construction elements to check.

Background
• A sketch is under-constrained if any required dimensions or conditions are missing
(Fig. 1). In this case, the sketch geometry still can be displaced.
• A sketch is over-constrained if it has more dimensions or conditions than required
(Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Under-constrained sketch geom- Fig. 2: Over-constrained sketch geometry Fig. 3: Fully-constrained (ISO-constraint)
etry (white color) (purple color) sketch geometry (green color)

Suggested solution
In CATIA, use sketch analysis (Fig. 4) to analyze whether geometrical elements in the
sketch are under-constrained, over-constrained or ISO-constrained (i.e. distinctly struc-
tured).
• or under-constrained sketches, add the missing constraints. Make sure that the
sketch profile is not only defined as such, but also its position in the sketching plane.
• Redundant constraints from over-constrained sketches must be deleted, defined as
reference or deactivated.

Dassault Systèmes 744 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Sketch analysis

Dassault Systèmes 745 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Sketch name – Exception” text box Specify the names of sketches to be ignored. You
can use Regular Expressions.

“Check also associated geometry entities” check box If this option is selected,
construction elements associated with standard elements are checked. These elements
must be fully constrained.
If this option is not selected, construction elements associated with standard elements
are ignored. Exception: If “Check also construction entities” is selected, all construction
elements are checked.

“Check also construction entities” check box If this option is activated, all construction
elements are checked, including auxiliary geometries.
Even if construction elements are fully constrained, a translation between line and auxil-
iary geometry may still be possible. To check for the required type of constraint, activate
the “Check all construction entities” option.

“Ignore construction elements with CAA type” text box This option is only in effect if
“Check also construction entities” option is selected. Specify the CAA types of construc-
tion elements to be ignored. To specify more than one CAA type, use a Regular Expres-
sion.

“Ignore Deactivated Features” check box If this option is activated, deactivated

Dassault Systèmes 746 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

elements will be ignored.

Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Example A line is considered fully constrained (shown in green in the sketcher) if it

runs parallel to a coordinate axis. However, the line end points are still undercon-
strained and can be moved along the line. In CATIA sketch analysis (“Tools” > “Sketch
Analysis”), these points are consequently marked as under-constrained.
If both geometry elements (the line) and construction elements (the end points of the
line) are considered, the check recognizes the sketch as under-constrained.

Application Tip
• In the Sketcher, you can perform a rapid diagnosis of sketch geometry.
On the “Tools” toolbar, click “Sketch Solving Status”(Fig. 5).

Fig. 5: Rapid diagnosis of the sketch geometry

• In CATIA, you can mark non-ISO-constrained sketch geometry in colors (Fig. 6). To
do this, go to CATIA application settings and choose “Mechanical” > “Sketcher” >
“Visualization of diagnosis”.
To invoke an update error for non-ISO-constrained sketches, select “Generate update
errors when the sketch is under-constrained”(Fig. 6).

Dassault Systèmes 747 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 6: Example of sketcher settings to identify non-ISO-constrained sketch geometry

Dassault Systèmes 748 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.6 Only one Curve in Sketch

Criteria manual

StdOnlyOneCurveInSketch (1249)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketches contain only one curve. If that does not apply,
the sketch is rated as incorrect.

Background
Sketches that contain more than one profile are only of limited use.

Example If a sketch contains more than one profile, the “Extrude” feature results in a
multi-domain topology.

Fig. 1: Two profiles in one sketch

Suggested solution
Create symmetry lines, auxiliary points as construction elements. Construction
elements are only available for the sketcher.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 749 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Application Tip
Criteria manual

To analyze sketch elements, use “Sketch Analysis” on the “Tools” toolbar.

Dassault Systèmes 750 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.7 Constraints Referencing the H or V Axis

Criteria manual

StdConstraintsReferencingTheHOrVAxis (1399)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether sketches have constraints referencing H or V axis or the
origin. If so, the sketch is rated as incorrect.

Background

Example When defining lines in a sketch as horizontal or vertical, parallel constraints

to the respective axis are added (Fig. 1). When changing the support element of a
sketch, sketch constraints may become invalid (Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Lines with parallelism constraint to the V Fig. 2: Inconsistent sketch geometry
axis or H axis

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed sketch constraints.

Dassault Systèmes 751 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check referencing on” list box Specify the non-allowed formats: References to the
horizontal (H) or vertical (V) axis, to the origin, or both.

“Ignore Constraint type” value list Specify the types of constraints to be ignored. The
ignored types of constraints are allowed to have references to the H and V axes, and to
the origin.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To view the hierarchical relations between components of a part, select Edit“Parents/
Children”(Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 752 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Analysis of Parent-Child relations of “Plane.1”.

Dassault Systèmes 753 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.8 Material Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation

Criteria manual

StdMatOrientationToSurfaceNormal (1262)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
Material Orientation is a user-defined feature (UDF) that is defined by a point and a
surface.
This criterion checks whether the material orientation of surfaces in geometrical sets
corresponds to the normal of the topological surface that defines the UDF.
An error is reported in the following cases:
• Surfaces with different material orientation
• Surfaces onto which the point from the UDF definition cannot be projected
• Adjacent surfaces whose distance to the reference surface is too large
• Optional: Surfaces with multiple UDFs, surfaces without UDFs, surfaces with non-
allowed visibility

Background
Defined material thickness and material orientation are prerequisites for the definition
of the fixing and clamping concept. In surface-based models, material orientation can
be described by a material arrow. The arrow orientation represents the material side,
the arrow length represents the material thickness. This is sufficient to define material
side and material thickness. A user-defined feature (UDF) can be used as material
arrow. The UDF is taken from a library and positioned as an associative feature on the
result surface. The surface itself must be an associative “invert surface” in a special
geometrical set. The surface normal of “invert surfaces” can be edited and made visible,
which is an advantage as opposed to using offset surfaces and “copy-paste”.

Suggested solution
Change the surface normal orientation to match the direction of the material arrow.

Related criteria
Note that the UDF-based material arrow in this criterion and the material thickness vector
in criterion “Material Thickness Vector Corresponds to Thick Surface Orientation” are
different concepts.
 Material Thickness Vector Corresponds to Thick Surface Orientation, page 759

Dassault Systèmes 754 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“UDF Name” text box Specify the name of the material orientation UDF to be checked,
This box must not be empty. You can use Regular Expressions. The default value is .*
(any name).

“UDF Type” text box Specify the type of the named UDFs. Only UDFs of this type are
checked. Leave this box empty to check all named UDFs.

“Only one UDF allowed in part” If this option is activated, only one UDF is allowed in
the model.

“UDF must exist” check box If this option is activated, an error is reported if none of
the specified UDFs does exist in the model.

Dassault Systèmes 755 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

“Allowed path names for reference surfaces” text box Specify the paths and names of
Criteria manual

the reference surfaces to be allowed. You can use wildcards. The default value is * (any
path or type).

“List of open bodies to be checked” text box Specify the paths and names of geomet-
rical sets (Open Bodies) to be checked. You can use wildcards. The default value is *
(any path or type).
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784

“Visibility of surfaces to be checked” check box with list box If this option is activated,
the reference surfaces must have the visibility specified in the list box. Select the
required visibility state from the list:
“SHOW” Reference surface must have the “Visible”/“SHOW” attribute.
“SHOW+VISIBLE” Reference surfaces must be in “Visible”/“SHOW” state and must be
actually visible, that is none of their parent elements must be in “NOSHOW” state.

“Projection distance less than” spin box Specify the maximum allowed distance
between the UDF point and its projection onto the surfaces of the geometrical set. A
surface is rated as incorrect if the distance between UDF point and its projection onto
the surfaces of the geometrical set is greater than the specified value.

“Difference angle of normal vector less than” spin box Specify the maximum allowed
angle between the normal vector of the UDF surface and the normal vector of the
surfaces in the geometrical set.
A surface is rated as incorrect if the angle difference between the normal vectors is
greater than the specified value.

“Tolerance for neighbouring surfaces (distance of edge end points)” spin box Specify
the maximum allowed distance between two faces within which they are considered
adjacent surfaces.

Healing settings
“Invert GSMInverse-Surfaces” The healing function inverts the surface orientation of
incorrectly oriented surfaces of the “GSMInverse” type (i.e. surfaces derived from other
surfaces).
This is a partial healing. For all other incorrect surfaces, this healing function has no
effect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To change the position of the material arrow, double-click its geometrical
representation or its specification tree entry (Fig. 1). In the definition dialog, change
the input parameters (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 756 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Material arrow with input parameters

Fig. 2: Input parameters of the material arrow

• To inspect and change the surface normal orientation, use the “Invert Orientation”
function (Fig. 3, Fig. 4).

Fig. 3: Inverting the surface normal Fig. 4: Inspecting the original orientation

• To check surfaces for child elements, mark the surfaces and choose “Tools” >
“Parents/Children”.

Dassault Systèmes 757 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 5: Parent and child elements

Dassault Systèmes 758 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.9 Material Thickness Vector Corresponds to Thick Surface Orientation

Criteria manual

ChkStdMaterialThicknessVectorCorrespondstoThickSurfaceOrientation (1600)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a limit point of the specified material vector lies on the
input surface of a thick surface, and whether the material thickness vector and the thick
surface have the same orientation.
Additionally, the criterion can check whether the material thickness vector is normal to
the thick surface.
The criterion is violated if the material thickness vector has a wrong orientation, and
also if there are no or more than one lines with the specified name.
The check returns a general error if more than one thick surface has been created on the
same input surface, or if there is no thick surface.

Fig. 1: Thick surface ThickSurface.1 with material thickness vector MaterialThicknessVector

The material thickness vector is defined as a line. One limit point of this line must have
the input surface of the thick surface as a direct or indirect parent element. See Fig. 2
and Fig. 3 for examples of such element relations.
The material thickness vector points from the limit point which is nearer to the input
surface to the limit point further away. The orientation of the material thickness vector
corresponds to the thick surface normal if the angle between them is less than 90°.

Dassault Systèmes 759 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Diagram of parent elements of a material thickness vector. One limit point of line MaterialThick-
nessVectorA is a point projected onto InputSurface.

Fig. 3: Diagram of parent elements of a material thickness vector. One point of line MaterialThicknessVec-
torB is a point on InputSurface.

Related criteria
Note that the material thickness vector and the UDF-based material arrow in this criterion
and in criterion “Material Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation” are different
concepts.
 Material Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation, page 754

Criterion definition

Check parameters
“Material thickness vector name” text box Name of the material thickness vector. You
can specify a fixed string or a Regular Expression. A Regular Expression must be set in
quotation marks.

Dassault Systèmes 760 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

“Distance of limit point to surface less than” spin box Maximum allowed distance
Criteria manual

between the input surface and the nearest limit point of the material thickness vector.

“Check if normal to surface with angle tolerance” check box with spin box If this
option is selected, the material thickness vector must be normal to the thick surface. In
the spin box, specify the allowed tolerance angle between the material thickness vector
and the normal of the input surface.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 761 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.10 Inverted Surface Orientation Corresponds to Thick Surface

Criteria manual

Orientation
StdThickSurfaceOrientationToInvertSurface (1425)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether thick surfaces and inverted surfaces inside the same solid
or Boolean element have an identical normal orientation. If that does not apply, the
affected inverted surfaces are rated as incorrect.
The check examines the angle between the normal vectors of the thick surface and the
normal vector in a point of the related inverted feature (which has been generated by
projecting a point from the thick surface onto the related inverted feature). The angle
must be within the specified tolerance.

Background
Parts can be based on surfaces or solids. When a part is based surfaces, the final model
should still be a solid model, which is better suited for applications such as DMU or
tool manufacturing. Problems may occur if subsequent processes use the invert surface
instead of the thick surface, as their respective material sides are different.

Fig. 1: Display of the orientation of an Invert Fig. 2: Display of the orientation of an Invert
Surface Surface

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to adapt the orientation of the invert surface to the orientation
of the thick surface.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the dimension element, and choose “Object” >
“Definition”.

Dassault Systèmes 762 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Name of the solid body or Boolean operation” text box Specify the name of the solid
or Boolean element to be searched for thick surfaces.

“List of open bodies to be checked” value list Specify paths and names of the geomet-
rical sets (Open Bodies) to be searched for invert surfaces. You can use wildcards.
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784

“Projection distance less than” spin box Specify the maximum allowed distance
between a check point of the thick surface and its projection onto the invert surface.
Within the specified distance, an invert surface is regarded to be related to the thick
surface.

“Difference angle between normal vectors less than” spin box Specify the maximum
allowed angle difference between the normal vectors of the thick surface and the related
inverted surface.

Healing settings
“Invert” The healing function inverts incorrectly oriented GSM invert surfaces.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 763 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.11 Thin Part Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation

Criteria manual

StdThinPartOrientationCorrespondsToSurfaceOrientation (1263)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether surface normals and material orientation of thin parts
point into the same direction. If not, the thin part is rated as incorrect.

Background
In the CATIA “Generative Shape Design” workbench, two thickness parameters can be
assigned to sheet metal parts. The parameters are only visible in the specification tree.

Fig. 1: Thin Parts Attribute Definition Fig. 2: Representation of the thickness orientation

Suggested solution
Double-click the element tot change the “Thin Parts Attribute” definition.

Dassault Systèmes 764 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Body types to be checked” value list Specify the types of bodies to be checked.

“List of bodies to be checked – Body path name” value list Specify paths and names of
the bodies to be checked. You can use wildcards.
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784

Application Tip
To show the surface normal, mark the surface and choose “Insert” > “Operations” >
“Orientation” > “Reset Initial”.

Dassault Systèmes 765 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.12 Surface Must Exist in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdSurfaceMustExist (1268)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain bodies contain at least one surface. If that does
not apply, the affected bodies are rated as incorrect.

Background
CATIA models may contain not only the final part geometry but also other geometry
representing intermediate production steps or attachments. To identify data correctly,
design rules may require that elements are assigned to particular bodies.

Fig. 1: Surface feature in a geometrical set

Suggested solution
To reassign an element in CATIA, right-click the element and choose “Object” >
“Change Body”.

Dassault Systèmes 766 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of body types to be checked” value list Specify the types of bodies to be checked.

“List of bodies to be checked – Body path name” value list Specify paths and names of
the bodies to be checked. You can use wildcards.
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784

“Recursively scan specified bodies” check box with list box If this option is selected,
subordinate bodies are checked whether they contain surface features. Select the
requirement for this check from the list:
• “At least one in each body”: Each body must contain at least one surface feature.
• “At least one in overall bodies”: At least one subordinate body must contain at least one
surface feature.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 767 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.13 Features with External Links (Multi-Model-Link) in Part

Criteria manual

StdFeaturesWithExternalLinksInCATPart (1272)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains features with external links. Features
with external links are rated as incorrect.

Background
Components with external links can be created by editing CATParts in a product
context, or by copying and pasting components. Features with external reference are
copies of referenced elements, and are placed in a special geometrical set. These
features are linked to their respective reference elements and have no own parameters.
If the external reference changes, the feature changes as well.
External features cannot be handled by some databases, or they may not be in compli-
ance with the applicable design rules.

Fig. 1: External link created to an non-published Fig. 2: External link with published reference
component, created by copy and paste with
link

Suggested solution
To isolate elements with external references, mark the element and select “Edit” >
“Links and Relations”. In the dialog, click “Isolate link”. This will only remove the link;
the geometry is retained.

Dassault Systèmes 768 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore deactivated Feature” check box If this option is selected, deactivated features
are not checked for external references.

Healing settings
“Isolate” This healing functions isolates elements with external references by removing
the link.

“Deactivate” This healing function deactivates elements with external links.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In the CATIA application settings, you can configure how to handle external objects. To
do this, choose “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” >
“General”.

Dassault Systèmes 769 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.14 MML (Multi-Model-Link) Reference Not Published

Criteria manual

StdExtRefMustBePublished (1428)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether elements with external links had been published in the
referenced model at the time when the link had been created. If that does not apply, an
error is reported.

 NOTE: A CATIA PX1 license is required to use this criterion.

Background
Components with external links can be created by editing CATParts in a product
context, or by copying and pasting components. Components with external references
are copies of the referenced elements: These features are linked to their respective refer-
ence elements and have no own parameters. If the external reference changes, the
feature changes as well.

Fig. 1: External link created to an non-published Fig. 2: External link with published reference
component, created by copy and paste with
link

Suggested solution
Delete non-allowed links and replace them with links to published elements.

Related criteria
 MML (Multi-Model-Link) Reference Not Published (by Name Evaluation), page 772

Dassault Systèmes 770 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can configure how to handle external objects. To do this, choose
“Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” > “General”.

Dassault Systèmes 771 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.15 MML (Multi-Model-Link) Reference Not Published (by Name

Criteria manual

Evaluation)
StdExtRefFeatMustBePublished (1473)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether elements with external links had been published in the
referenced model at the time when the link had been created. Elements with external
link must have a publication path.
An error is reported if the referenced features not were published (but placed by copy-
and-paste).

Example

Fig. 1: The publication path indicates a link to a published component.

 NOTE: This check does not allow to verify whether the referenced feature is still exis-
tent and published in the referenced model and whether the referenced model is exis-
tent when the check is performed.

Background
Components with external links can be created by editing in product context, or by
copying and pasting components. Components with external references are copies of
the referenced elements: These features are linked to their respective reference

Dassault Systèmes 772 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

elements and have no own parameters. If the external reference changes, the feature
Criteria manual

changes as well.

Fig. 2: External link to a non-published component Fig. 3: External link to a published compo-
nent

Suggested solution
Delete non-allowed links and replace them with links to published elements.

Related criteria
 MML (Multi-Model-Link) Reference Not Published, page 770

Criterion definition

“Check publication path” check box Select this option to check the text content of the
publication path.

“Allowed publication path” text box Specify a Regular Expression with which the publi-
cations paths in the model must match. This parameter applies only if the “Check publi-
cation path” option is selected.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can configure how to handle external objects. To do this, choose
“Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” > “General”.

Dassault Systèmes 773 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.16 Permitted Body for non-associative Datum Features

Criteria manual

StdPermittedBodyForDatumFeatures (1269)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether datum features (that is elements with non-associative
relations) are assigned to the correct bodies. If that does not apply, the affected
elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Non-associative datum features are elements that have no own parameters. In CATIA,
the specification tree icons of non-associative datum features are marked with a red
lightning symbol.
Some CAD rules require that externally referenced elements are placed in certain
geometrical sets as non-associative datum features. The geometry has no associative
link to the original part.

Fig. 1: Non-associative surface

Suggested solution
• To move elements, right-click the element, then choose “Object” > “Change Body”.
• To create non-associative datum features, activate the “Create Datum” toggle button
on the “Tools” toolbar.

Dassault Systèmes 774 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of permitted bodies” value list Specify the paths and names of bodies that are
allowed to contain non-associative relations. You can use wildcards.
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784

“Check multiple occurrence” check box If this option is not selected, the specification
of allowed bodies in the “List of allowed bodies” value list applies to bodies in which a
datum feature has been created.
If this option is selected, the specification of allowed bodies in the “List of allowed
bodies” value list also applies additionally to bodies in which a datum feature is re-
used.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 775 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.17 Only One Surface Allowed in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdOnlyOneSurfaceInShow (1270)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether bodies contain more than one surface. Bodies containing
more than one surface are rated as incorrect.

Fig. 1: Surface feature in a geometrical set

Suggested solution
To reassign an element in CATIA, right-click the element and choose “Object” >
“Change Body”.

Dassault Systèmes 776 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of body types to be checked” value list Specify the types of bodies to be checked.

“Check only” check box with list box If this option is selected, only surfaces with the
specified visibility (“SHOW” or “NOSHOW”) are checked. Select the required visibility
from the list. Surfaces with a different visibility are ignored.
If this option is not selected, surfaces are checked irrespective of their visibility.

“List of bodies to be checked” value list Specify paths and names of the bodies to be
checked. You can use wildcards.
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784

“Recursively scan specified bodies” check box with list box If this option is activated,
the number of surfaces features in subordinate bodies is also checked. Select the
requirement for this check from the list:
• “Only one in each body”: Only one surface is allowed in each body.
• “Only one in overall bodies”: Only one surface is allowed altogether in all subordinate
bodies.

 NOTE: Hybrid bodies cannot be search recursively.

Dassault Systèmes 777 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Dassault Systèmes 778 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.18 Associative Elements (Parent/Children) in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdAssociativeElements (1274)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the parent elements of certain elements have the required
element type and are within the specified body. If that does not apply, an error is
reported.
This criterion considers only of types Sketch, Point, Curve and Surface.
To limit the selection to certain types of child elements, you can apply an element selec-
tion with Multi Select TYPE.

Background
Different types of elements, such as wireframe or surface elements, can be placed in
different bodies. This improves structural clarity and allows for easier changes.

Fig. 1: Parent and child elements sorted into different geometrical sets

Suggested solution
To reassign an element in CATIA, right-click the element and choose “Object” >
“Change Body”.

Dassault Systèmes 779 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of types of parents elements to be check” value list Specify the allowed types of
parent features.

“List of bodies to be checked for parent elements” value list Specify the paths and
names of geometrical sets that contain the parent elements to be checked. You can use
wildcards. See above for examples.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Element selections
To limit the selection to certain types of child elements, you can apply an element selec-
tion with Multi Select.

TYPE = Sketch

To limit the selection to certain types of child elements, you can apply an element selec-
tion with Multi Select.

Dassault Systèmes 780 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

TREE_PARENT( TYPE = OpenBody OR TYPE = OrderedGeometricalSet )

These conditions can be combined:

TREE_PARENT( TYPE = OpenBody OR TYPE = OrderedGeometricalSet )

AND TYPE = SKETCH

Dassault Systèmes 781 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.19 Elements without Child Elements in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdWithoutChildElements (1289)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether elements in certain bodies are in use, that is whether they
have child elements. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Unused details increase data size and compromise clarity.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete unused elements.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Delete unused elements in the specification tree.

Dassault Systèmes 782 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Body types to be checked” value list Specify the types of bodies that contain the

Dassault Systèmes 783 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

elements to be checked.
Criteria manual

“List of types of elements to be checked” value list Types of elements to be checked.

“Do not mark elements linked to FT/A elements” check box If this option is selected,
elements linked to FT/A features are never marked as incorrect.

“List of bodies to be checked” value list Paths and names of bodies that contain the
elements to be checked. You can use wildcards.

Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders

• Check all bodies in the model

• Check all bodies named “Component”:

*\Bauteil

• Check all bodies that are subordinate to a body named “Component”:

*\Bauteil\*

• Check all bodies named “Component” and all its subordinate bodies:

*\Bauteil
*\Bauteil\*

“Exceptions: Paths of bodies to be ignored” value list Specify paths and names of
bodies to be excluded from the “Bodies to be checked” list. Elements in this body are
not checked.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes all unused components.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 784 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.20 Surface Must Have Thin Part Attribute in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdSurfaceMustHaveThinPartAttribute (1278)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether surface features in specified bodies have material thick-
ness attributes (thin part attributes). If that does not apply, the affected elements are
rated as incorrect.
Additionally it can be checked if the thickness attribute values are within the specified
value range.

Background
In the CATIA “Generative Shape Design” workbench, material thickness can be applied
to surfaces.
Design rules may require that surfaces with thin-part attributes must be within certain
geometrical sets, in favor of a clear, systematic structure and to avoid delays in the
process.

Fig. 1: Surface with thin-part attribute

Suggested solution
Create or modify thin-part attributes in the CATIA Generative Shape Design workbench
using the “Thin Parts Attribute” function of the “Generative Shape Design” workbench.

Dassault Systèmes 785 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of body types to be checked” value list Specify the types of bodies to be checked.

“List of bodies to be checked – Body path name” value list Specify paths and names of
the bodies to be checked. You can use wildcards.
 Example: Specifying paths and names using placeholders, page 784

“Thickness 1” and “Thickness 2” check boxes with spin boxes If these options are
activated, the thickness of elements must be within the value range specified in the
min/max fields.

Healing settings
“Set Thickness” The healing function replaces non-allowed values for “Thickness 1”
and/or “Thickness 2” with the values specified in the spin boxes.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 786 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Application Tip
Criteria manual

To move an element to another body, mark the element and choose “Edit” > “Object” >
“Change Body”.

Dassault Systèmes 787 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.21 Offset Capability (Thick Surface) of Thin Parts

Criteria manual

StdOffsetCapabilityOfThinParts (1280)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether surfaces in specified bodies can be transformed into an
offset feature of a specified type. If no offset surfaces can be created, the affected bodies
are rated as incorrect.

Background
In the CATIA “Generative Shape Design” workbench, material thickness can be applied
to surfaces.
The attributes are only visible in the specification tree. CATIA does not check whether
an offset feature can be created.

Suggested solution
If a surface is not capable of being used in an offset feature, inspect the surface for
possible causes (see Application Tip, page 789). Offset capability depends on properties
of the original surface. The smallest curvature radius must not be less than the offset
value, except certain fillet elements. Point and normal continuity of surfaces also have
an impact on the offset capability.

Related criteria
 Offset Capability of Surface, page 816

Dassault Systèmes 788 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Offset feature to create” list box Specify the type of elements to be created based on
the surfaces:
“Solid” Thick Solid
“Volume” Thick Volume
“Surface” Two offset surfaces

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• The offset capability of thin parts refers to the following offset features:

Type Icon

Thick Solid

Thick Volume

Offset surface – two offset elements

• To avoid incorrect results, use this criterion in conjunction with Thin Part Orientation
corresponds to Surface Orientation, page 764.
• To find the smallest curvature radius of a surface, use criterion Small Curvature Radius
in Surface [G-SU-CR], page 1070. Set the material thickness as the minimum allowed
curvature radius.
Alternatively, you can use CATIA function “Surfacic curvature analysis”. To display the
results of the analysis, the “Shading with material” view mode must be used.

Dassault Systèmes 789 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.22 Area Ratio of Surfaces in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdOpenBodyShellAreaRatio (1350)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion compares the total area of all faces of a certain body with the total area of
all faces of certain other body. If the ratio is not within the specified range, an error is
reported.

Background

Example The fabrication of pressing or deep drawing tools often requires parts without
any holes or trimmings. To use such parts as molds, they must have a defined slightly
enlarged scale.

Fig. 1: Workpiece with holes without trimmings Fig. 2: Workpiece with holes and trimmings

Suggested solution
To avoid errors, make sure to respect all requirements for fabrication.

Dassault Systèmes 790 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of body types to be checked” value list Specify the types of bodies to be checked.

“Name of 1st body” text box Specify the name of the first body, which is used as base
of comparison.

“Name of 2nd body” text box Specify the name of the body whose faces are compared
to the faces of the first body.

“Area ratio of surfaces in 2nd body to surfaces in 1st body at least” spin box Allowed
minimum value for the surface area ratio of two bodies.

“Area ratio of surfaces in 2nd body to surfaces in 1st body at most” spin box Allowed
maximum value for the surface area ratio of two bodies.

“Compute only surfaces in show” check box If this option is activated, only faces in
“Visible”/“SHOW” state are checked.

“Bodies must exist and contain surfaces for computation” check box If this option is
activated, the 1st and 2nd body must exist and contain faces. If a specified body is
missing or has no faces, an error is reported.
Deselect this option to ignore missing bodies and bodies without faces.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 791 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Application Tip
Criteria manual

There are different functions to extend a surface, which can be applied with respect to
the requirements:
• “Extrapolate”
• “Swept Surface Definition/Line”
• “Swept Surface Definition/explicit”

Dassault Systèmes 792 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.23 Thick Surface Definition

Criteria manual

StdThickSurfaceMustExist (1420)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the offset of certain thick surfaces is within the specified
range. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
Additionally it can be checked whether the offset orientation has been inverted.

 NOTE: This criterion checks only offset surfaces that are created in the Part Design
workbench. Offset surfaces created in the Generative Shape Design workbench are not
checked.

Background
Parts can be based on surfaces or solids. When a part is based surfaces, the final model
should still be a solid model, which is better suited for applications such as DMU or
tool manufacturing. Errors may occur if orientation and thickness do not match the
specifications.

Fig. 1: Thick surface Fig. 2: Display of the orientation of an Invert

Surface

Suggested solution
Adjust the parameters of the incorrect thick surface. To do this, right-click the surface,
and choose “Object” > “Definition”.

Dassault Systèmes 793 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Path names for reference surfaces to check” value list Specify the paths and names of
the reference surfaces to be checked (that is the parent elements on which thick
surfaces are based).

“First/Second Offset” check boxes and spin boxes If these options are selected, the
first and second offset are checked, respectively. In the spin boxes, specify the allowed
offset value ranges.

“Offset Direction” list box Allowed offset orientation with respect to the default orien-
tation in CATIA:
“Direction not reversed” The offset orientation must be the default orientation given by
CATIA.
“Direction reversed” The offset orientation must be the opposite direction with regard to
the default orientation given byCATIA.
“Both” Both orientations are allowed.

“Check for matching of thickness parameters with reference values” check box with list
box If this option is activated, the selected thickness values must match their reference
values (Fig. 3). In the list, select the thickness values that must match the reference
values (“Thickness1”, “Thickness2”, or both)

Dassault Systèmes 794 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Parameter value “Thickness1” corresponds to the first offset, and “Thickness2” corresponds to the
second offset.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 795 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.24 Non-Allowed Parent/Child Relationship

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedParChildRel (1355)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains a non-allowed parent-child relation-
ship. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Design rules may require certain components not to be used as a base for other compo-
nents. This is to avoid problems when changing and updating a model.

Examples
• Sketches should not be based on solids (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).
• Wire geometry should not be based on solids.
• A draft should not be based on an edge fillet.
• Only the part's axis system may refer to the coordinate planes.

Fig. 1: Non-allowed element relation: The sketch is Fig. 2: Non-allowed element relation: The sketch is
based on a solid (specification tree view) based on a solid (parents/children)

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed parent elements with suitable allowed elements. In many cases,
an error can be resolved by changing an element.(Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 796 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Replacing a non-allowed reference to a solid

Dassault Systèmes 797 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of types of child elements to be checked” value list Element types of the child
elements to be checked.

“List of not allowed types of parent elements” value list Non-allowed types of parent
elements

“Recursively scan for parents” check box If this option is activated, not only direct
parent elements but all ancestor elements are checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To display hierarchical relations, right-click an element and choose “Parents/
Children” on the context menu (Fig. 4). The Parents/Children view included external
references and the names of the models to which these references point.

Dassault Systèmes 798 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Analysis of Parent-Child relations for “Plane.1”

Dassault Systèmes 799 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.25 Saving as V4 Data

Criteria manual

StdSavingAsV4Data (1373)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether CATParts can be saved as CATIA V4 models. If that does
not apply, a general error is reported.

Dassault Systèmes 800 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Setting option” list box Specify whether to check also the “Save As V4” settings in
CATIA V5:
“Check if settings match” The CATIA V5 settings for saving as V4 models are compared
to the respective parameters in the check settings. If the settings do not match, an
error is reported.
In CATIA, you can find these settings in “Tools” > “Options” > “Compatibility” >
“Saving as V4 data”.
“Ignore settings” The CATIA V5 settings for saving as V4 data are not checked.

“Temporary modelfile or filepath” text box Directory where the temporary model file is
saved during the check. You can use a file system directory, a DLName, or a system/
environment variable.
The notation for environment variables is ${VARNAME}, where VARNAME is the variable
name.
To select a directory in the file system, click “Open directory”.

Settings Specify the settings for saving a CATPart as V4 model. These settings corre-
spond to the CATIA V5 application settings in “Tools” > “Options” > “General” >
“Compatibility” > “Saving as V4 data”.

 NOTE: In fields “Writing Code Page index” and “Model Unit index”, specify the posi-
tion number according to the “Save as V4 data” tab in CATIA.

Dassault Systèmes 801 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Example: If the value “ISO8859-1” is on position 12 of the list, specify the value “12” for
Criteria manual

the check parameter.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To analyze the error, activate the following CATIA setting: “Tools” > “Options” >
“General” > “Compatibility” > “Save as V4 data” > “Create an error feature in CATPart”.
The error feature created with this setting helps you to narrow down the error cause.

Fig. 1: Elements that prevent saving as a V4 model

Dassault Systèmes 802 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.26 Non-Allowed Path of Parent Feature

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedParentPath (1398)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether parent elements are in the required position relative to
their child elements. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
In the specification tree, parent elements must be situated above their child elements
and on the same structure level themselves or in a geometrical set on the same struc-
ture level.

Fig. 1: The allowed positions of parent elements for the element “Entity” are marked with the green frame.

Background
A suitable model structure facilitates working on a model. An unsuitable structure is
more difficult to understand, and updating the model takes longer.

Fig. 2: Allowed order of parent elements Fig. 3: Not allowed order of parent elements

Dassault Systèmes 803 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Allowed path of parent elements Fig. 5: Not allowed path of parent elements

Suggested solution
• Elements created in the “Part Design” workbench can be moved to a different path.
Right-click the element, then select “Object” > “Reorder”.
• Elements created in the “Surface Design” workbench can be moved to a different
path. Right-click the element, then select “Object” > “Change Geometrical Set”.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Ignore datum-feature parents” check box If this check box is activated, parent features
are ignored if they are datum features.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• For more specific check results, you can define an appropriate element selection.
• To display the parent elements, right-click an element and choose “Parents/
Children” on the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 804 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.27 Non-Allowed Component Formula in Part

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedComponentFormulaInCATPart (1427)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains component formulas. An error is
reported if the specification tree contains a formula that has been created as a property
of the root feature.
A formula is incorrect if
• the formula is in the [partname]/Relations branch
• the first part of the formula contains the name of the root feature

Example: If the formula has an incorrect path, it is displayed twice, both in root-feature
properties and in the specification tree. No error is reported if the formula is embedded
only in the properties of the root feature and is displayed only there.
• Incorrect path
[root-feature name]/Properties/[parameter]=[value]

for example Part1/Properties/Boolean.1=[value]

• Correct path
Properties/[Parameter]=[root-feature name]/[value]

for example Properties/Boolean.1=Part1/[value]

In the example, the formula contains the keyword Properties. This keyword corresponds
to the “Properties” menu entry of the context menu and depends on the language of the
CATIA session. For example, when using the French language setting, the keyword is
“Propriétés”.

Background
User defined properties can be added to the predefined standard properties of compo-
nents. If a formula is used to assign a value to these user properties, the relation is
shown in a product in the [Instance]/Relations branch of the specification tree. If the
formula is added incorrectly, the formula is not shown in the product structure, which
can cause problems when exchanging data.

Dassault Systèmes 805 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Formulas in the model properties

Fig. 2: Allowed formula Fig. 3: Not allowed formula

Fig. 4: Formulas in product context The position of the formula marked in red is not allowed; the position
of the formula marked in green is allowed.

Suggested solution
Create new formulas according to the specifications.

Dassault Systèmes 806 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Language-dependent keyword” value list This list contains the keyword “Properties” in
different languages. If required, you can add the keyword in further languages. Errors
can be found only if the list contains the keyword in the required language.

Healing settings
“Modify Formula” The healing function changes the path of the formula so that the
formula is only displayed in the part but not in product context.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 807 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.28 Join Definition

Criteria manual

StdJoinDefinition (1432)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the following parameter values of the “Join” definition
correspond to the specification:
• “Check connexity”
• “Merging Distance”
• “Angular threshold” and activation state
Join features with incorrect parameter values are rated as incorrect.

Background
The “Join” function creates a topology by assembling faces or curves if their merging
distance and tangent discontinuity (optional) are less than the specified values. A
topology that fulfills the requirements for merging distance and tangent continuity is
topologically closed, while it is not geometrically closed.
Topologies that do not fulfill the requirements may cause problems in subsequent
processes.

Fig. 1: “Join Definition” dialog The parameters that can be checked in Q-Checker are highlighted.

Suggested solution
Adjust the parameters of the “Join” definition according to the specifications.

Dassault Systèmes 808 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Connexity check” box with list box If this option is selected, the “Check connexity”
parameter must have the required value. In the list, specify the required value, “Check”
(selected) or “Do not check” (not selected).

“Merging distance” check box with spin box If this option is selected, the “Merging
distance” parameter must be within the required value range. Specify the allowed value
range in the spin boxes.

“Angular tolerance” check box If this option is selected, the angular threshold value is
checked, provided that the angular threshold option is selected in the Join Definition.
Specify the allowed value range in the spin boxes.

“Angular threshold must be selected” check box with spin box If this option is
selected, the angular threshold option must be selected in the Join Definition.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
The input geometry remains unchanged when creating a topology. The elements are
assembled into a topology, and gaps are filled in. When splitting up or exporting a
topology, the gaps become visible again. Gaps in a topology can also become apparent
when performing certain analyses.

Fig. 2: Gap between faces Fig. 3: Hidden gap after applying a Join oper-
ation

Dassault Systèmes 809 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.29 Coordinates-Point Definition

Criteria manual

StdCoordinatePointDefinition (1446)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether points of the “Coordinates” type use the specified refer-
ence point. If that does not apply, the affected points are rated as incorrect.

Background
Parts can be positioned easily if they refer to a common origin. Substructures have their
own origin, which in turn refers to the common part origin. To put a model in a partic-
ular position, it is sufficient to change the part origin. If the origin of a substructure
does not refer to the part origin, the substructure remains in its position.

Fig. 1: Point definition without reference to the part Fig. 2: Point definition with reference to the part
origin origin

Suggested solution
Define the points according to the requirements.

Dassault Systèmes 810 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed reference point” check box with list box Specify the allowed reference point,
“Standard (origin)” or “Any other point”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To determine the origin of a part, right-click the root element and choose “Parents/Chil-
dren”.

Fig. 3: Analyzing element relations

Dassault Systèmes 811 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.30 Thread Definition

Criteria manual

StdThreadDefinition (1451)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether thread type and thread description of thread definition
correspond to the specifications. If that does not apply, the thread element is rated as
incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
You can define thread elements based on a cylindrical and conical support using the
“Thread/Tap” function. This data can be used to manufacture threads. When defining
threads, make sure that the required tools are available.

Fig. 1: Definition of an external thread

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed thread definitions.

Dassault Systèmes 812 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Standard type ... is not allowed” check boxes Activate the options if the respective
thread types are not allowed.

“Not allowed type names” value list Specify further non-allowed thread types. Give the
names of the non-allowed thread types. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Thread description” text box Specify the allowed thread descriptions. You can use
Regular Expressions.
If this list is empty, all thread definitions are allowed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To identify thread elements more easily, assign a specific color in CATIA.

Dassault Systèmes 813 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.31 Feature Must Exist in Specific Bodies

Criteria manual

StdFeatureMustExistInBody (1459)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain types of bodies contain certain types of elements.
If that does not apply, the affected bodies are rated as incorrect.

Background
Design rules may require that certain bodies must contain a certain component.

Example A published body must contain a “Technological Results” element. This allows
technological parameters of holes and threads to be used in subsequent applications
(drawing generation, NC). If these design rules are not observed, the process is delayed
and causes additional cost.

Fig. 1: Example: Technological parameters of a hole with thread

Suggested solution
If a required element exists, move it into the required body. Create missing elements.

Related criteria
 Elements in Specific Bodies Must Be Published, page 468

Dassault Systèmes 814 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Bodies” value list Specify the types of bodies to be checked.

“Check only published bodies” check box If this option is activated, only published
bodies are checked.

“Feature must exist in body” value list Specify the types of elements that must exist in
bodies.

“Search in the bodies recursively” check box If this option is activated, bodies within
bodies are recursively searched for the required elements.
If this option is not selected, only bodies on first level are searched.

 NOTE: To check elements of the “Boolean Body” type, this option must be activated.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 815 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.32 Offset Capability of Surface

Criteria manual

StdOffsetCapabilityOfSurface (1466)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether surfaces in specified bodies can be transformed into an
offset feature of a specified type. If that does not apply, the affected bodies are rated as
incorrect.

Background
To use surface-based parts without problems, they must be a suitable basis for offset
features.

Fig. 1: Thick Surface in preview

Suggested solution
If a surface is not capable of being used in an offset feature, inspect the surface for
possible causes (see Application Tip). Offset capability depends on properties of the
original surface.
• The smallest curvature radius must not be less than the offset value, except certain
fillet elements.
• Point and normal continuity of the surface

Related criteria
 Thin Part Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation, page 764
 Surface Must Have Thin Part Attribute in Specific Bodies, page 785
 Offset Capability (Thick Surface) of Thin Parts, page 788

Dassault Systèmes 816 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“First offset value (normal direction)” and “Second offset value (reverse direction)” spin
boxes Specify the maximum required offset in normal and reverse direction. A surface
is rated as incorrect if CATIA cannot create an offset feature based on the surface with
the specified values.

“Thick Surface created as” list box Specify the type of offset feature to be created based
on the surface.
• “Solid”: Thick Solid
• “Volume”: Thick Volume
• “Surface”: Two offset surfaces

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• The offset capability of thin parts refers to the following features:

Type Icon

Thick Solid

Thick Volume

Offset surface – two offset elements

• We recommend combining this check with the following criterion:

 Thin Part Orientation corresponds to Surface Orientation, page 764
• Check the smallest curvature radius of the surface using criterion Small Curvature
Radius in Surface [G-SU-CR], page 1070. Set the material thickness as the minimum
allowed curvature radius.

Dassault Systèmes 817 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Alternatively, you can use the “Surfacic curvature analysis” function in the CATIA
Criteria manual

“Part Design” workbench. To display the results of the analysis, the “Shading with
material” view mode must be used.

Dassault Systèmes 818 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.33 Construction Order of Solid Features in Bodies

Criteria manual

StdConstructionOrderOfSolidFeat (1468)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the construction order solid features in bodies corre-
sponds to the specification. If that does not apply, solid features in non-allowed posi-
tions are marked as incorrect.
You can specify the required order of all solid features in a solid, or a repeating pattern
within a solid.

Background
The construction order of a model can affect its appearance and ease of use.

Example If draft features are applied before fillets, the solid without fillets can be made
available by deactivating the fillets. If the construction order is different, errors may
occur when deactivating the fillets, as draft features have an impact on the fillets
created earlier.

Fig. 1: Example of a construction order defined as Fig. 2: Example of a construction order defined as
not allowed: allowed: Create Drafts before creating Fillets.

Suggested solution
• Change the construction order according to the requirements.
• To a limited extent, solid elements can be moved within the specification tree. Right-
click the element, then choose “Object” > “Reorder”.

Dassault Systèmes 819 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Upper Solid Features” and “Lower Solid Features” value lists Specify the types of
solid elements that must be arranged in upper or lower position, respectively. At least
one type must be selected in order to check a model.

Example The screenshot shows a configuration that requires Pads and MultiPads to be
created first (in an upper position), while fillets and chamfers must be created later (in a
lower position).

“Begin new partial structure check after these solid features” value list Use this setting
to check for a repeating element pattern within a solid. Specify the types of element
types that conclude such a pattern.

Example The screenshot shows a configuration where an allowed element pattern

within a solid comprises a Pad or MultiPad, followed by a Chamfer or Fillet and
concluded by a Draft, after which the pattern can repeat itself.

Dassault Systèmes 820 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip
To insert an element at a particular position in the specification tree, define the element
above as In Work Object.

Dassault Systèmes 821 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.34 Non-Allowed MML (Multi-Model-Link)

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedExtLinksCATPart (1482)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model has components with external links. Elements
with external references are rated as incorrect.

Background
Components with external links can be created in product context (Fig. 1) or using
copy-and-paste (Fig. 2).
A component with external link is a copy of the referenced element. These features are
linked to their respective reference elements and have no own parameters. If the
external reference changes, the feature changes as well.
Problems with external references may occur if the referenced model is not available
anymore, or if the model database does not support external links.

Fig. 1: External link with published reference (Icon: Fig. 2: External link created by copy and paste
“P”) (Icon: green rhombus)

Suggested solution
To isolate components with external links from their source, mark the component and
choose “Edit” > “Object” > “Isolate” or the corresponding context menu command.
Isolating only removes the link; the geometry is retained.

Related criteria
 Product Component with Non-Allowed MML (Multi-Model Link), page 881

Dassault Systèmes 822 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignored link types” value list Specify the types of links to be ignored.
The following link types can be selected:

Link type Specification tree Description

icon

Reference not found or not loaded Broken link

Reference not found or not loaded Reference document not found.

MML synchronized Geometry copied from other part,

synchronized

MML not synchronized Not synchronized geometry

Published element synchronized Referenced published element, synchro-

nized

Published element not synchronized Referenced published element, not

synchronized

Dassault Systèmes 823 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

 NOTE: If the source document of an external link is not loaded in the CATIA session,
the link type is always “Reference not found or not loaded”.
During a batch check, only the currently checked model is loaded. Therefore, the type of
external links is always “Reference not found or not loaded”.
Link types “MML synchronized”, “MML not synchronized”, “Published element
synchronized” and “Published element not synchronized” can occur only if the corre-
sponding source document is loaded in the CATIA session while a particular model is
being checked in interactive mode.

This criterion does not distinguish between external links created in product context
(Context or Import type) and external links created between parts (CCP type).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Handling of external objects can be controlled in the CATIA application settings:
“Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” > “Allgemein”(Fig. 3):
• If the “Keep link with selected object” option is activated, a copy with link to the
reference feature is created; otherwise an isolated datum feature is created.
• If the “Confirm when creating a link with selected object” option is selected, the
creation of every link has to be confirmed separately.

Fig. 3: Settings for external objects in product context

Dassault Systèmes 824 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.35 Non-allowed Reference to Vertex/Edge/Face as Input for Feature

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedInputReference (1493)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether features have non-allowed references to internal topology
elements. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.
Internal topology elements are vertexes, edges and faces that result from the construc-
tion and do not exist as elements on their own.

Background
When creating an element (for example a block, a fillet or tangent alignment faces),
existing elements are used as reference. If a referenced element is changed, elements
based on this element have to be adjusted to the new conditions. Links to internal
elements may cause problems.

Fig. 1: Sketch with reference to an internal face of Fig. 2: Line with reference to internal elements to
“Pad.5” “EdgeFillet.8”

Suggested solution
Replace internal elements with other elements.

Dassault Systèmes 825 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check vertex/edge/face” check boxes with list boxes If these options are activated,
the respective internal topology elements are not allowed as reference. Use the list
boxes to refine the selection:
“All ... types” References to vertexes/edges/faces are not allowed.
“Except ...” References to vertexes/edges/faces are not allowed. As an exception,
references to the origin, coordinate axes or coordinate planes are allowed,
respectively.

“Ignore elements without valid topology information” check box If this option is
selected, elements without valid topology information are ignored. If this option is not
selected, a general error is reported for elements without valid topology information.

“Ignore published input elements” check box If this option is selected, published
elements will not be checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Internal elements and components are not shown when using “Parents/
Children”(Fig. 3). Internal elements become visible only when editing an element
(Fig. 1)(Fig. 2).

Fig. 3: Viewing Parent/Children relations using “Parents/Children” The referenced internal element
“Pad.5” is not displayed.

Dassault Systèmes 826 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.36 Edge/Variable-Radius/Chordal Fillets Definition

Criteria manual

StdEdgeFilletDefinition (1520)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of edges in the definition of an edge fillet,
variable-radius fillet or chordal fillet is within the specified range. If that does not apply,
the fillet element is rated as incorrect.

Background
With an increasing number of edges selected in a fillet definition, changing its definition
and resolving update errors becomes more complex.

Fig. 1: Edge fillet definition over 21 edges

Fig. 2: Edge fillet with limiting elements

Suggested solution
Remove or replace edges in the element definition (Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 827 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Removing selected edges from a fillet definition

Criterion definition

Check settings

“Allowed number of selected edges/objects to fillet” check box with spin boxes
• To allow exactly one edge per fillet, deselect this option.
• To allow a specified number of edges per fillet, activate this option. In the boxes,
specify the minimum (“min”) and maximum (“max”) allowed number of edges per
fillet.

“List of allowed limiting elements” Specify the CAA types valid as limiting elements
(see Fig. 2).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 828 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• The “Manual Update” option helps to control the creation of complex geometry.
To activate this option in the “Part Design” or “Functional Modeling Part” workbench,
click the “Manual Update mode” button on the “Tools” toolbar.
• To insert a new fillet, define the fillet to be changed as In Work Object, and activate
the “Associate stop update” option the element properties (Fig. 4, Fig. 5).

Fig. 4: Edge fillet as In Work Object with Stop Fig. 5: “Stop Update setting”
Update

Dassault Systèmes 829 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.37 Shell Definition

Criteria manual

StdShellFeatureDefinition (1521)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of other thickness faces in a shell is in the
specified range. If that does not apply, the affected shell elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Shell elements containing many other thickness faces are difficult to modify and to
update.

Fig. 1: Shell element containing four other thickness faces

Suggested solution
Edit the shell definition and reduce the number of other thickness faces (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 830 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Removing other thickness faces from the shell definition

Criterion definition

Check settings

“Allowed number of other thickness faces” check box with spin boxes
• To allow no other thickness faces, deselect this option.
• To allow a specified range for the number of other thickness faces, select this option
and specify the allowed minimum (“min”) and maximum (“max”) number.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• The “Manual Update” option helps to control the creation of complex geometry.
To activate this option in the “Part Design” or “Functional Modeling Part” workbench,
click the “Manual Update mode” button on the “Tools” toolbar.
• Set the shell element to be edited as the In Work Object. To allow the insertion of a
new shell element after the corrected shell element, enable the Stop Update function

Dassault Systèmes 831 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

for this element (Fig. 3, Fig. 4).

Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Shell element as In Work Object with Stop Fig. 4: “Stop Update” setting in the element prop-
Update erties

Dassault Systèmes 832 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.38 Healing Definition

Criteria manual

StdHealingDefinition (1527)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the parameter values for the healing of faces in CATIA
correspond to the requirements. If that does not apply, the healing surface is rated as
incorrect.

Background
Topologies that do not fulfill the requirements may cause problems in subsequent
processes.

Fig. 1: Surface healing parameters

Suggested solution
Adjust the healing parameters according to the specifications.

Fig. 2: “Healing Definition” dialog in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 833 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• Elements are not processed if their distance is greater than the specified “Merging
Distance”.
• Elements are healed up to the maximum allowed “Distance objective”. The preset
value is 0.001 mm, which can be increased to a maximum of 0.1 mm.

 NOTE: In the CATIA “Wireframe and Surface Design” workbench, surface healing and
its parameters can be found in “Insert” > “Operations” > “Healing” > “Parameter”.

Criterion definition

Check settings
Check boxes with list boxes/spin boxes Specify the allowed parameter values for the
healing definition of surfaces.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 834 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.39 Non-Allowed Direction of Offset Surface Feature

Criteria manual

StdOffsetSurfaceFeatOrientation (1572)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the offset direction of offset surface features (normal or
inverted) corresponds to the specification. If that does not apply, the affected elements
are rated as incorrect.

Background
Some application do not support the “Reverse Direction” setting and use an offset
surface with normal orientation instead.

Fig. 1: Variable offset definition with the “Reverse Direction” option

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Double-click the surface in the specification tree. In the “Vari-
able Offset Definition” dialog, change the “Reverse Direction” setting (Fig. 1).
The healing may affect features with reference to the modified surface. Therefore make
sure to update the model after the healing.

Dassault Systèmes 835 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed orientation” list box Specify the allowed orientation for the definition of offset
surfaces:
“Normal on the surface” The “Reverse Direction” option in the offset definition must
not be activated.
“Inverted” The “Reverse Direction” option in the offset definition must be activated.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
When an offset surface has been created, the orientation (perpendicular to the refer-
ence surface) is not obvious. To view the original orientation, mark the reference
surface and invoke the offset function. An arrow is shown that indicates the original
orientation (Fig. 2). Click “Cancel” to leave the dialog.

Fig. 2: Viewing the orientation by temporarily creating an offset surface

Dassault Systèmes 836 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.40 Non-Allowed Isolated External References Set

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedIsolatedExtRefGeometricalSet (1573)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains a special geometrical set for isolated
external references. If that does apply, this geometrical set is rated as incorrect.
The geometrical set for isolated external references is recognized by a certain attribute,
not by its name.

Fig. 1: Geometrical set containing one isolated external reference

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA:
• Delete isolated elements that are no longer required.
• Move isolated elements to a different geometrical set, according to the requirements.
Right-click the element, then select “Object” > “Change Geometrical Set”.

Fig. 2: Moving elements using the “Change geometrical set” function

Dassault Systèmes 837 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore isolated external references set if empty” check box If this option is selected,
an empty geometrical set for isolated external references is ignored.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can use the “Parents/Children…” function to identify whether isolated
external references are in use in the current model (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Context menu command for the “Parents/Children” anal- Fig. 4: “Parents/Children” dialog
ysis

Dassault Systèmes 838 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.41 NC Machining Operation Drill Points

Criteria manual

StdNCMachiningOperationDrillingPoints (1598)

Applicable to CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of drill points in an NC machining pattern is
within the specified range. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Criterion definition

Check parameters
“Allowed number of points” spin boxes Minimum and maximum allowed number of
drill points in an NC machining pattern.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 839 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.42 Draft Definition

Criteria manual

StdMethDraftDefinition (1604)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the pulling direction for a draft uses the required
“Controlled by reference” setting (Fig. 1). If not, an error will be reported.

Fig. 1: “Controlled by reference” setting for the pulling direction of a draft

Criterion definition

Dassault Systèmes 840 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

Check parameters
Criteria manual

“Pulling direction” check box with list box Select this option to check the “Controlled
by reference” setting. Choose from the list box whether the setting must be selected
(“Controlled by reference”) or must not be selected (“Not controlled by reference”).

“Pulling direction selection” check box with value list Activate this option to check the
CAA element type of the pulling direction reference element.
Add the CAA element types of allowed reference elements to the value list.
This parameter is only in effect if the pulling direction is controlled by reference.
If a sub-element is selected as pulling direction reference, the CAA type of its parent
element is relevant (Fig. 3). For example, if Pad.1\Face.1 is selected, the corre-
sponding CAA element type is the type of Pad.1.

Fig. 2: The pulling direction reference is a line Fig. 3: The pulling direction reference is a face
(Line.1). (Face.1) of a pad. The CAA element type of the
pad is relevant.

 How to determine CAA element types and Q-Checker Element Types, page 219
 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 841 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Part

2.4.3.43 Sketch element used in multiple output profiles

Criteria manual

MethSketchUsedInMoreProfiles (1607)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the same sketch elements are used in multiple profile
features of solids. Sketch elements used in multiple profile features are marked as
faulty.
The following are not considered:
• Sketch elements used in multiple profile features, but not in more than one solid
• Sketch elements outside of profile features

Fig. 1: Solid features Pad.1 and Pad.2 are based on profile features Profile.2 (highlighted) and Profile.3,
respectively. One line is used in both profile features.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 842 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4 Product
Criteria manual

2.4.4.1 Structure of Product Specification Tree

StdStructureOfCATProductSpecificationTree (1316)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the specification tree structure of a Product matches a
given reference product structure. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
The following characteristics of the model structure are checked:
• Hierarchical structure and existence of elements in the specification tree
• Position of elements on the top level of the specification tree
• Feature names
• Element types of components
In addition, the following characteristics can be checked:
• Position of components within a sub-product
• Layers of elements
• Visibility (Show/NoShow) of components
Parameters, axis systems, relations and annotations are ignored.

Background
Using a defined construction method helps to retrieve information from models more
easily.
The application of a standardized construction method can be supported by a start
model that already contains essential components required for the method.

Example Every sub-product of the reference model in Fig. 1 contains a skeleton model.
The skeleton model is used both to control the position of the models and to define
components that are used across different models. It is therefore possible to control
the position and geometry with the primary skeleton model.

Dassault Systèmes 843 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Sample Reference Model

Suggested solution
• To change the name and properties of a part, right-click the root element and choose
“Properties”.
• To change the order within an assembly, right-click the superordinate element and
choose “Object” > “Reorder children”.

Related criteria
 Structure of Part Specification Tree, page 729

Dassault Systèmes 844 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“XML reference” text box Insert the XML reference structure.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Defining the reference structure

To define a reference structure, create a model with the required structure. Next, create
an XML description of the model structure using the “Specification tree to XML” func-
tion .
Optionally, you can edit the XML description of the reference structure directly.
 Deriving the reference structure from a product, page 845
 Editing the XML description of the reference structure, page 846

Deriving the reference structure from a product

Create a product with the required reference structure. The reference takes into account
the following characteristics of the model:
• Hierarchical structure and existence of elements in the specification tree
• Position of elements on the top level of the specification tree
• Feature names
• Q-Checker types of the components
Initially, no further characteristics are included.
You can define additional characteristics in the description of the respective component
(“Edit” > “Properties” > “Product” > “Component” > “Description”).

Dassault Systèmes 845 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

 Keywords for structure characteristics, page 847

Criteria manual

To create an XML description of the reference model structure, click the “Specification
tree to XML” button on the Q-Checker toolbar in CATIA.
If this button is not available, set the CATIA environment variable TCAQC_SHOW_TOOLS
with value SPECTREETOXML.
To insert the XML reference into the criterion definition, open the XML document in a
text editor, then copy the entire content from the XML document to the “XML refer-
ence” text box.

Example

Fig. 2: Reference specification tree with additional characteristics defined in the component description.

The description of component “Part2.1” defines additional characteristics:

• The component may have any name (QC_NAME=".*).
• The component may have the alternative Q-Checker element type “Structure
Component”.
• The component must be visible (QC_SHOW=true).

Editing the XML description of the reference structure

The XML description of the reference structure defines the characteristics to be
checked.
The XML root node can have any valid name. In the XML file created by Q-Checker, the
root node is named “QChecker”.

<QChecker>
...
</QChecker>

The reference structure is defined inside the root node. Each XML element corresponds
to an element of the model.

Dassault Systèmes 846 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

The XML element name corresponds to the Q-Checker element type of the respective
Criteria manual

element. Each XML element requires the attributes AliasName for the element name
and caaType for the CAA element type.

Example Definition of an element with Q-Checker element type “RootProduct”, CAA

type “ASMPRODUCT” and element name “Product1”,

<QChecker>
<RootProduct AliasName="Product" caaType="ASMPRODUCT">
...
</RootProduct>
</QChecker>

You can define additional characteristics in optional XML attributes.

 XML attributes see Keywords for structure characteristics, page 847

Example
• Attribute QC_NAME defines that the Part component name must match the Regular
Expression ^Part[0-9]+ or the attribute value of AliasName.
• Attribute QC_SHOW with value true defines that the part component must be visible.
• The QC_AMOUNT attribute with value 1-30 defines that between 1 and 30 of the
specified part components may exist.

<QChecker>
<RootProduct AliasName="Product" caaType="ASMPRODUCT">
...
<Part AliasName="Part1.1"
caaType="MechanicalPart"
QC_NAME="^Part[0-9]+"
QC_SHOW="true"
QC_AMOUNT="1-30">
...
</Part>
...
</RootProduct>
</QChecker>

Keywords for structure characteristics

Use the following keywords as parameter names in the reference model or as attribute
names in the XML reference structure.
These parameters are optional.

Dassault Systèmes 847 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product
Criteria manual

Keywords for structure characteristics

Keyword Parameter values XML attribute values Description

QC_NAME Regular expression in Regular Expression The element name to be

QC_PARENT_NAME double quotes checked must match the
reference element name
or the given Regular
Expression.

QC_TYPE • “ALL” for any Q-Checker element type The element type to be
QC_PARENT_TYPE checked must match the
• Q-Checker element types (no element groups except
reference element type or
“ALL”)
the given parameter value.
 Administration manual, Q-Checker Features
Types and Feature Groups

QC_LAYER Layer number. Layer 1000 corresponds to layer “None” The layer of the checked
QC_PARENT_LAYER in CATIA. element must match the
parameter value.
If this characteristic is not
defined, any layer is
allowed.

QC_SHOW “true”: Show “1”: Show The element must have

QC_PARENT_SHOW “false”: NoShow “0”: NoShow the specified visibility.
If this characteristic is not
defined, the element may
have any visibility.

QC_ORDER “true”: Same position “1”: Same position The checked element and
QC_PARENT_ORDER “false”: Any position “0”: Any position the reference element
must have the same posi-
tion within the specifica-
tion tree branch.

QC_LAST Integer number The checked element

must have the specified
position within the specifi-
cation tree branch.
Counting starts with 1 at
the last element of the
branch.

Dassault Systèmes 848 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Keywords for structure characteristics(continued)

Criteria manual

Keyword Parameter values XML attribute values Description

Parameter name “true”: CAA type must “1”: CAA type must match The CAA element types of
QC_CAA_TYPE match “0”: Any CAA type is the checked element and
XML attribute “false”: Any CAA type is allowed the reference element
name allowed must match.
QC_CAATYPE If this characteristic is not
defined, the checked
element may have any
CAA type.

QC_AMOUNT Number or numeric range The checked element

QC_PARENT_AMOUNT must exist in the specified
Example If the specificied element must exist three number.
times, set QC_AMOUNT with value 3. If this characteristic is not
If the specified element must exist at least once and no defined, the element must
more than five times, set QC_AMOUNT with value 1-5. exist once.

QC_AMOUNT_ Number or numeric range For the feature and all its
STRUCTURE sub-elements, the speci-
QC_PAREMT_ fied number of instances
AMOUNT_STRUCTURE is allowed.
If this characteristic is not
defined, the element and
its sub-structure must
exist once.

Dassault Systèmes 849 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.2 Product component with broken link to CATPart/CATProduct

Criteria manual

StdProductComponentWithBrokenLink (1244)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether a CATProduct contains broken links to components or
components that are not loaded. If so, the model will be rated as incorrect.

Background
If a link within a product is broken, the affected components cannot be found and there-
fore cannot be loaded.
Broken links are often caused by moving, deleting or renaming files outside CATIA.

INFO: In the CATIA specification tree, broken links are marked with the shown
icon.

Suggested solution
To redefine broken links, go to “Edit” > “Links” or “File” > “Desk”.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 850 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.3 The Same Feature Registered in More Than One DMU-Group

Criteria manual

[O-GL-IG]
StdTheSameFeatureRegisteredInMoreThanOneGroup (1416)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the same feature is used in more than one DMU group of
the checked model. If so, an error will be reported.

Background
Features (parts, sub-assemblies, ...) can be assigned to DMU groups in the “DMU
Navigator”.
Some DMU applications (kinetics, space analysis, fitting) may fail If the same feature is
used in more than one group.

Fig. 1: Feature UBG_Bolzen is used both in DMU Fig. 2: Feature UBG_Bolzen is used both in DMU
group Hebel and in Bolzen group Hebel and in Bolzen

Suggested solution
To edit a DMU group, double-click its specification tree entry. The DMU group defini-
tion dialog is displayed. Here you can add or remove features.

Dassault Systèmes 851 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 852 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.4 User Defined Properties Not Applied to Part Component

Criteria manual

StdUserDefinedPropertiesToPart (1321)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether certain parts in a product have the required user-defined
properties. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
You can assign user-defined properties to a root part or root product, for example
length, width, or weight. These properties can be read out automatically and processed,
for example to generate a bill of materials.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root part in the specification tree, and edit its user-
defined properties in “Edit” > “Properties” > “Product” > “Define other properties”.

Related criteria
 User-Defined Properties Not Applied to Root-Product/Part, page 983

Dassault Systèmes 853 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Part components loaded in visualization mode” list box If a part component is in visu-
alization mode, its user-defined properties are unavailable and cannot be checked.
Specify how to handle part components in visualization mode:
“Load component in background” When loading a document in the background, its
properties become available. The check can be performed without restrictions.
“Ignore component” Part components in visualization mode will not be checked and
never rated as incorrect.
“Mark component as failed” Part components in visualization mode will not be checked
and always rated as incorrect.

“Check component” text box Specify paths and names of the part components to be
checked. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Property must exist” text box Specify the properties that are required in all CATParts.
Enter name, type and value for every required property.
You can find a list of CATIA property types in the current CATIA session language when
creating a new user-defined property.

Dassault Systèmes 854 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

If the check profile will be used in CATIA sessions with different language settings, use
Criteria manual

only the English uppercase type identifiers, for example “LENGTH” instead of “Länge”
in German.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can import properties from a text file or Excel spreadsheet. In a text file,
entries must be separated by tab characters.

Example

Länge» 58,256» Length

Breite» 100» Length
Höhe» 50» Length
Material» 1.0037» String
Benennung» Kulissenstein» String

Dassault Systèmes 855 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.5 At least one Constraint per Product

Criteria manual

StdAtLeastOneConstrainPerShapeComponent (1319)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the root product and every included CATProduct have at
least one constraint. If that does not apply, the component is rated as incorrect.

Background
In an assembly, components are linked to a functional unit. There are different methods
for positioning components:
• Positioning with constraints
The relative position of the components is defined by constraints (contact, offset,
coincidence, angle). Components are unambiguously positioned in 3D space if
assembly constraints have been applied to all six degrees of freedom. If all degrees of
freedom are replaced by position constraints, the component cannot be moved
anymore. A component is also unambiguously positioned when it has been fixated.
• Construction in fitting position
The components are designed in relation to the assembly origin. No further position
constraints are required, as the component is already positioned correctly.

Fig. 1: Assembly with position constraints

Suggested solution
Define at least one position constraint for every component.

Dassault Systèmes 856 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore Deactivated Features” check box If this option is activated, deactivate
elements will be ignored.

 NOTE
• If not defined otherwise in the criterion's element selection, the root component and
sub-products on all levels of the specification tree are checked.
• To check only the root component, apply an appropriate element selection to the
criterion. Use this multi-select expression to define the element selection:

TYPE = "RootProduct"

• If the “Include only the root component of CATProducts” option is selected in the
element selection definition, the root component and sub-products on the first level
of the specification tree will be checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

Analysis of degrees of freedom and dependencies

In the “Assembly Design” workbench, you can analyze degrees of freedom of compo-
nents and dependencies between components.

Dassault Systèmes 857 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

To inspect position constraints and the number of degrees of freedom, go to

Criteria manual

“Analyze” > “Constraints”(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Position constraints status Fig. 3: Degrees of freedom

To inspect dependencies within an assembly, go to “Analyze” > “Dependencies”.

Fig. 4: Assembly dependencies

Dassault Systèmes 858 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.6 Non-Allowed Path for Product Components

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedPathForLinkedDoc (1360)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the links of product and part components within a
product use non-allowed paths. If so, an error will be reported.

INFO: This criterion has been renamed in Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.1. The former
criterion name is “Non-Allowed Path for Linked Document”. The former criterion name
is now used for a different criterion.

Background
Models, assemblies and embedded documents (such as tables or images) can be
stored using one of the following infrastructures:
• Storing in a database
Document management relies on a database.
• Storing in a filesystem
Document management relies on a file system.
When exchanging data, it is important to include all linked documents.

Fig. 1: List of unavailable linked documents when opening an assembly in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 859 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed path name” value list Specify the allowed path names for linked documents.
The subdirectories of the allowed paths are also allowed. You can use Regular Expres-
sions.

Dassault Systèmes 860 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

“Allowed relative path name” value list Specify the allowed relative path names for
Criteria manual

linked elements. The subdirectories of the allowed paths are also allowed. You can use
Regular Expressions.

“Allowed DLNames” value list Specify the allowed DLNames for linked elements.
DLNames must be specified exactly; placeholders and Regular Expressions cannot be
used.

“Allow linked documents in root-product directory” check box Activate this option to
allow components in the same directory as the root product.

“Allow linked documents in subdirectories of root product” check box Activate this
option to allow components in the subdirectories of the root product directory.

“Path entries are not case sensitive” check box Activate this check box to ignore differ-
ences between uppercase and lowercase characters in absolute and relative path
names.

“Ignore linked document types” value list Specify the types of linked documents to be
ignored.

 NOTE: If no components are defined as allowed, all linked documents are rated as
incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Documents should not be renamed or moved in the filesystem. Otherwise existing
links become unresolved.
• Save documents only in the specified directories. To save documents in a different
directory or with a different name, select “File” > “Save Management”.

Dassault Systèmes 861 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.7 Non-Identity Positioning Matrix

Criteria manual

StdNonIdentityPosMatrix (1359)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether a components is rotated or translated within the superor-
dinate product. If so, the affected component is rated as incorrect.

INFO: This check evaluates the transformation matrices of components in a product. If

a component is rotated or translated, its transformation matrix is no identity matrix.

Background
In an assembly, components are linked to a functional unit. There are different methods
for positioning components:
• Positioning with constraints
The relative position of the components is defined by constraints (contact, offset,
coincidence, angle). Components are unambiguously positioned in 3D space if
assembly constraints have been applied to all six degrees of freedom. If all degrees of
freedom are replaced by position constraints, the component cannot be moved
anymore. A component is also unambiguously positioned when it has been fixated.
• Construction in fitting position
The components are designed in relation to the assembly origin. No further position
constraints are required, as the component is already positioned correctly.
If components must be designed in mounting position, they must not be repositioned
in the assembly context. These changes may have unintentional results if there are links
between components.

Fig. 1: Component translated within a product

Dassault Systèmes 862 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check only electrical components of these types” value list Specify the types of
elements to be checked. If nothing is selected, all types of component are checked.

“Check components in” value list Specify the paths of elements to be checked;
elements in all other paths are not checked. To check elements with any path, use place-
holder * (default value).
If the value list is empty, no check is performed.

“Check electrical components only” check box If this option is selected, only electrical
components are checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
The origin of the root product can be identified by the reference places of a newly
inserted, empty component (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 863 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Identifying the assembly origin by temporarily inserting a component

Dassault Systèmes 864 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.8 Non-Isometric Positioning Matrix

Criteria manual

StdNonIsometricPositioningMatrix (1389)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether a component has been mirrored within the superordinate
assembly. If so, an error will be reported.

INFO: This check evaluates the transformation matrices of components in a product. If

a component has been mirrored, its position matrix is non-isometrical, i.e. its determi-
nant is not equal to 1.

Background
If inside an assembly a model is mirrored, a new component with a mirrored posi-
tioning matrix is created.
The mirrored component is no stand-alone data set but has a reference to the original.
A model in this state may fail to be manufactured.

Fig. 1: Assembly with original and mirrored component

Suggested solution
If possible, use combined translation and rotation instead of a mirror operation.

Dassault Systèmes 865 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance for matrix determinant” spin box Specify the tolerance by which the matrix
determinant may differ from 1 in both positive and negative directions.

“Ignore matrices for reflections” check box Activate this option to allow mirroring
matrices (allowed determinant –1 ± tolerance).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 866 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.9 Degree of Freedom of Product Components

Criteria manual

StdDegreeOfFreedomOfProductComponent (1390)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of degrees of freedom of product compo-
nents is within the specified range. If that does not apply, the affected components are
rated as incorrect.
Optionally, product components can be marked as incorrect if their constraint network
is not up-to-date.

Background
In an assembly, components are linked to a functional unit. The relative position of the
components is defined by constraints (contact, offset, coincidence, angle).
Components are unambiguously positioned in 3D space if assembly constraints have
been applied to all six degrees of freedom. If a component's degree of freedom is zero,
it cannot be moved anymore. A component is also unambiguously positioned when it
has been fixated.
If a component's degree of freedom within an assembly is not zero, the position of the
component may be changed unintentionally.

Fig. 1: Assembly with position constraints

Dassault Systèmes 867 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Mark components that have a non-updated constraint network” check box Specify
how to handle components whose degree of freedom cannot be detected by CATIA:
• Activate this option to mark these components are incorrect.
• Deactivate this option to ignore these components.
If CATIA fails to compute the number of degrees of freedom, this is normally due to one
or more non-up-to-date constraints within the product component. Note that an error
affects all components within the same product context that have at least one
constraint, regardless of whether the constraint is up-to-date.

“Allowed number of degrees of freedom” spin box Specify the alllowed number of
degrees of freedom.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In the “Assembly Design” workbench, you can analyze degrees of freedom of compo-
nents and dependencies between components.

Dassault Systèmes 868 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

To inspect position constraints and the number of degrees of freedom, go to

Criteria manual

“Analyze” > “Constraints” (Fig. 2, Fig. 3).

Fig. 2: Position constraints status Fig. 3: Degrees of freedom

To inspect dependencies within an assembly, go to “Analyze” >

“Dependencies”(Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Assembly dependencies

Dassault Systèmes 869 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.10 Non-Allowed Shape Component Type

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedShapeCompType (1365)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether products contain non-allowed types of products. If so, the
affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
You can add components of different formats to an assembly, including CATIA V4
models or formats wrl, cgr or stl. Problems and delays in the process may occur if
components of a non-supported format have been inserted into the assembly.

Suggested solution
Delete components with non-allowed formats from the product.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Load in background” check box If this option is activated, part components loaded in
visualization mode are loaded in design mode in the background.

“Not allowed types” value list Specify the types of part components that are not
allowed in the checked assemblies.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 870 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Application Tip
Criteria manual

To inspect file formats, you can do one of the following:

• On the Desk, assemblies are displayed with their components. The formats of
components can be identified by their extensions (“model”, “stl”,...).

Fig. 1: Assembly displayed on the Desk

• To view component links and product links, choose “Edit” > “Links”. The inserted
document types are shown also here.

Fig. 2: Component links

Dassault Systèmes 871 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.11 Kinematics Degree of Freedom of Mechanism Equals Zero

Criteria manual

StdMechanismDegreeOfFreedomZero (1239)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the kinematic degree of freedom of mechanisms is zero.
If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
A mechanism is not fully defined unless its kinematic degree of freedom is zero. Kine-
matic degrees of freedom are restrained by joints and commands.

Fig. 1: Degree of freedom is 1. One command is Fig. 2: Degree of freedom is 0. The kinematic can
missing. be simulated.

Suggested solution
Define all required commands and inspect the joints.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
A kinematic may restrained by joints only to degree of freedom 1. At least one
command must be used.

Dassault Systèmes 872 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.12 Flexible Product/Structure Component

Criteria manual

StdFlexibleSubAssemblies (1385)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether a CATProduct contains flexible product or structure
components. If so, the affected components are rated as incorrect.

Background
An assembly may contain several instances of the same sub-assembly. When changing
the position within the sub-assembly, all instances of the sub-assembly will change. For
some applications, such as analysis or simulations, it is necessary to change the posi-
tion of instances individually. This is possible by defining the instance as a flexible
product or structure component. If a flexible instance has not been reverted to a rigid
instance, errors may occur and users may be confused.

Fig. 1: Assembly with two instances

Fig. 2: Assembly with two instances, where instance “chain.2” is flexible.

INFO: In CATIA, flexible sub-assemblies are marked with a gear icon in

magenta.

Dassault Systèmes 873 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

To revert flexible sub-assemblies to rigid sub-assemblies, mark the sub-assembly and

choose “Edit” > “Object” > “Flexible/Rigid Sub-Assembly”.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 874 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.13 Product Clash Detection

Criteria manual

StdProductClashDetection (1448)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether part components of a CATProduct interfere with each
other. An error is reported if the distance between part components is not within the
specified range.

INFO: This check is identical to the CATIA collision check in the “Assembly Design”
workbench, menu “Analyse” > “Clash”.

Background
To avoid obstructions between parts, digital assembly can be checked for collisions
prior to manufacturing and mounting an assembly. If parts of an assembly collide with
each other, the problems have to be evaluated, and the parts have to be modified
accordingly. Otherwise, it may not be possible to assembly the parts.

Fig. 1: Assembly with clash Fig. 2: Detail view for clash detection

Suggested solution
Change the position or geometry of the affected parts.

Dassault Systèmes 875 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Type” list box Choose one of the following collision checks:
“Clash” An error is reported for intersecting parts
“Contact” An error is reported for parts in contact
“Clearance” An error is reported if the clearance between parts is less than the specified
value.
“Authorized penetration” An error is reported if the penetration depth is greater than the
specified value.

“Limit value for clearance or penetration” spin box Specify here the limit value for
clearance and for authorized penetration. The value is internally rounded to three
decimal places.
• When checking the clearance, this value specifies the minimum clearance between
components.
• When checking the penetration of components, this value specifies the maximum
allowed penetration depth.

“Component Name to be checked:” list box Select the components to be checked:

“Between all components” Check all components of the model against each other.
“Inside selection” Check only components elements against each other which are part of
the element selection.
“Selection vs all” Check the component that are part of the element selection against
the components that are not part of the element selection. Components which are
part of the element selection are not checked against each other.

“Part components loaded in visualization mode” list box If part components are
loaded in visualization mode, certain properties are not available. Choose an action to
perform in this case:

Dassault Systèmes 876 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

“Load component in background” Load and check components in the background.

Criteria manual

“Ignore component” Parts in visualization mode will not be checked and never rated as
incorrect.
“Mark component as failed” Parts in visualization mode will not be checked and will
always be rated as incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: The result depends on CATIA application settings.

Display accuracy of the check part components has an impact on the computed
distances. Depending on display accuracy, the utilized CATIA analysis function returns
different results (clearance, contact or penetration), which in turn lead to different
check results in Q-Checker.

Example If the distance between part components is near or below the display accu-
racy, the analysis result is a contact between these components. Using a higher display
accuracy, the analysis may detect a distance between the components.

• For components in design mode or with the cache system disabled, the CATIA display
accuracy is relevant – see “Tools” > “Options” > “General” > “Display” >
“Performance”.
• For components in visualization mode, the display accuracy used to create the CGR is
relevant. The cache system is activated, see “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” >
“Product Structure” > “Cache Management”.
 Checking 3D display accuracy in see criterion Display Performance, page 75

Application Tip
Use CATIA clash analysis to inspect the error location in detail (Fig. 2), Choose
“Analyse” > “Clash”.

Dassault Systèmes 877 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.14 Assembly Constraints Reference

Criteria manual

StdPrdConstraintsToPublishedRefs (1460)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks certain properties of elements referenced by assembly constraints:
• Element is published
• Element is a BRep element / not a BRep element

Background
If a referenced component is lost, assembly constraints cannot be calculated anymore.
To minimize the efforts for modifications, assembly constraints should contain only
link to published components.

Fig. 1: Offset constraint “Offset.5” references published components

Suggested solution
To edit an assembly constraint, double-click its entry in the specification tree. In the
“Constraint Definition” dialog, choose “Reconnect”-

Dassault Systèmes 878 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Referenced element must be published” check box Select this option if referenced
elements of the assembly constraint must be published. Deselect this option to ignore
the publication of referenced elements.

“Reference element must be” check box Select this check box to check the element
type of referenced elements. Select the required type from the list box:
• “BRep feature” if only references to BRep features are allowed
• “not a BRep feature” if references to BRep features are not allowed
Deselect the check box to ignore the element type of referenced elements.

“Ignore construction axes of rotation features as referenced elements” check box

Select this option to ignore construction axes of rotation features when checking refer-
enced elements (Fig. 2).
In CATIA, such axes cannot be published. If this option is not active, construction axes
referenced in assembly constraints are marked as incorrect.

Fig. 2: The dash-dot line represents the construction axis of a rotation feature. The construction axis
cannot be published.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 879 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Application Tip
Criteria manual

When creating constraints, the order of creation is important: Publish the elements
first, then create the constraints.

Dassault Systèmes 880 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.15 Product Component with Non-Allowed MML (Multi-Model Link)

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedExternalLinks (1481)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether part components of a product contain external links. The
affected components are marked as incorrect. Certain link types can be allowed as
exceptions.

Background
Components with external links can be created by editing CATParts in a product
context, or by copying and pasting components. Components with external references
are copies of the referenced elements: These features are linked to their respective refer-
ence elements and have no own parameters. If the external reference changes, the refer-
enced component changes, too.
Design rules may not allow external references to avoid problems with data manage-
ment and further processing.

Fig. 1: External link created by copy and paste Fig. 2: External link with published reference

Suggested solution
To split external references, mark the component and choose “Edit” > “Components” >
“Isolate” or the corresponding context menu entry.

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed MML (Multi-Model-Link), page 822

Dassault Systèmes 881 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignored link types” value list Specify the types and states to be ignored. All other
external references are rated as incorrect.
The following link types can be selected:

Link type Specification tree Description

icon

Reference not found or not loaded Broken link

Reference not found or not loaded Reference document not found.

MML synchronized Geometry copied from other part,

synchronized

MML not synchronized Not synchronized geometry

Published element synchronized Referenced published element, synchro-

nized

Published element not synchronized Referenced published element, not

synchronized

Dassault Systèmes 882 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product
Criteria manual

 NOTE: If the source document of an external link is not loaded in the CATIA session,
the link type is always “Reference not found or not loaded”.
During a batch check, only the currently checked model is loaded. Therefore, the type of
external links is always “Reference not found or not loaded”.
Link types “MML synchronized”, “MML not synchronized”, “Published element
synchronized” and “Published element not synchronized” can occur only if the corre-
sponding source document is loaded in the CATIA session while a particular model is
being checked in interactive mode.

This criterion does not distinguish between external links created in product context
(Context or Import type) and external links created between parts (CCP type).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: During the check, CATPart components within the CATProduct are loaded in
CATIA. This may take some time.

Application Tip
• External references can be identified by their specification tree icon.
For a description of these icons see the CATIA online
documentation, “Product Structure” environment.
• The handling of external objects can be controlled with the settings in the CATIA
settings. To do this, choose “Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part
Infrastructure” > “General”.

Fig. 3: Settings for external objects in product context

If the “Keep link with selected object” option is activated, a copy with link to the
reference feature is created. If the option is not selected, an isolated datum feature is
created.
If the “Confirm when creating a link with selected object” option is selected, the
creation of every link has to be confirmed separately.

Dassault Systèmes 883 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.16 Non-allowed Link Target

Criteria manual

StdNonPermittedLinkTarget (1490)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the part components of a product point only to defined
link targets.
Q-Checker scans the product and all its sub-products for defined link targets according
to the defined properties. The check product structure must contain at least one
defined link target. Every product and sub-product must not contain more than one link
target. If a product contains more than one defined link target, an error is reported
(Fig. 1).

Root Product OK Root Product

Target Target1

Part Target2

Part Part

Product Part

Part

Part

Product

Target

Part

Part

Fig. 1: Inside every product, no more than one defined link target is allowed. The structure shown on the
right is invalid.

If a product contains a defined link target, part components with links must point to
this link target. If a sub-product contains no link target, linked part components in the
sub-product must point to the link target in the superordinate product. The same
applies to multiple structure levels (Fig. 2).
Any unresolved links are ignored.

Dassault Systèmes 884 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product
Criteria manual

Root Product OK Root Product

Target1 Target1

Part1 Part1

Product Product

Part2 Part2

Product Product

Part3 Target2

Product Part3

Part4

Fig. 2: Links across one or more structure levels. The structure on the right contains an invalid link from
“Part3” to “Target1”.

Background
Components that are complex can be distributed between several parts using external
links. For instance, so-called skeleton parts can be used to control the position and the
size of different development states (raw part, processing state, finished part). When
designing such components, it is important to use the prescribed method. External link
targets may cause problems when changing the model.

Suggested solution
Where possible, use defined link targets. Otherwise, isolate links to non-allowed link
targets.

Dassault Systèmes 885 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Properties of the target” value list Specify allowed link targets by their properties.
Specify the required properties and property values of allowed link targets.
The following properties can be defined:
• Default properties: InstanceName, PartNumber, Definition, DescriptionRef,
Nomenclature, Revision
• User-defined properties: UserProp
You can use Regular Expressions to specify allowed property values.
If this value list contains no property names and values, the link target is not uniquely
defined, and the check result is not meaningful.

“Target must match all requested properties” check box If this option is selected, every
link target must match all of the specified properties and values in the “Properties of
the target” value list.
If this option is not selected, every link target must match at least one of the properties
specified in the “Properties of the target” value list.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To view and edit links, choose “Edit” > “Links”(Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 886 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Analyzing external links in CATIA

Dassault Systèmes 887 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.17 Non-Allowed Positioning Matrix

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedPositioningMatrix (1583)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains components whose translation vector
and rotation matrix have non-allowed entries. Such components are rated as incorrect.

Fig. 1: Component not positioned in the assembly origin

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Use the tools of the “Assembly Design” workbench to posi-
tion components according to the requirements.

Dassault Systèmes 888 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“u1”/“u2”/“u3” check box and “min”/“max” spin boxes If the respective option is
selected, the vector entry must be within the specified value range. In the “min”/“max”
spin boxes, set the lower and upper limit of the allowed value range.
If an option is not selected, the respective entry is ignored.

“a11” ... “a33” check boxes and “min”/“max” spin boxes If the respective option is
selected, the matrix entry must be within the specified value range. Matrix entries are
named after their row (first number) and column (second number).

Example “a23” is the matrix entry in row 2, column 3.

In the “min”/“max” spin boxes, set the lower and upper limit of the allowed value
range.
If an option is not selected, the respective entry is ignored.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 889 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.18 Product Component Seal

Criteria manual

StdProductComponentSeal (1585)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether each component of a product has a root-feature check
seal with the specified content (check profile name and model assessment). If that does
not apply, the affected components are rated as incorrect.

Fig. 1: Component “Part2.1” has no valid check seal

Suggested solution
Check components without check seal again, using the required check profile.
Using product component selection, you can check the components from within the
assembly. That way, it is not necessary to check the components separately.

Dassault Systèmes 890 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed profiles” value list Specify which check profiles are allowed in component
check seals:
“Only current profile” Only the current profile
“List” All check profiles matching the “Allowed profiles” list
“Current Profile + List” The current profile and all profiles matching the “Allowed
profiles” list
“All” Check profiles with any name

“List of permitted bodies” value list This list is considered only if “List” or “Current
Profile + List” is selected in the “Allowed Profiles” list box.
Specify which check profiles are allowed in component check seals. You can use Regular
Expressions.
The notation of check profiles corresponds to the one in the check seal and is
composed as follows:
• ADMIN for admin check environments, or USR for user-defined check environments.

Dassault Systèmes 891 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

• a blank, a slash, and a blank,

Criteria manual

• the check environment name,

• a blank, a slash, and a blank,
• the profile name,
• if the profile contains more than one model type: a blank and the model type name in
square brackets

Examples

ADMIN / Umgebung_Firmenstandard / Elektrik ab 2010-06

ADMIN / Env / Drehteile extern [3D-Modelle]
ADMIN / Umgebung / Standardprofil [Standard-Einstellungen]
USR / Test / 20110801

“Allowed Assessments” value list Specify the allowed model assessments. You can use
Regular Expressions. If this list is empty, no model assessment is allowed.

“Mark components without check seal” check box If this option is activated, compo-
nents without check seal are rated as incorrect. If this option is not selected, compo-
nents without check seal are ignored.

“Part components loaded in visualization mode” list box If parts of the checked
product are loaded in visualization mode, the content of their check seals is not avail-
able. Choose an action to perform in this case:
“Load component in background” To make all properties available, parts are switched to
design mode in the background.
Restriction: Parts are not switched to design mode if the element selection is
restricted to the root component of products. In this case, the present setting does
not apply.
“Load component in background” Parts in visualization mode will not be checked and
never rated as incorrect.
“Mark component as failed” Parts in visualization mode will not be checked and will
always be rated as incorrect.
“Load component temporarily” Parts loaded in visualization mode are loaded in design
mode for the check, and unloaded again after the check.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: This criterion evaluates the current check seals at the time of running a check.
When product component selection is active or when in batch mode, new check seals
may have been created during the same check or batch check.

Dassault Systèmes 892 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

When checking in interactive mode with product component selection active, part
Criteria manual

components and sub-products are checked first. When checking superordinate prod-
ucts, new check seals (if applicable) will be evaluated.
When checking in batch mode, the sequence is as follows:
1. CATParts and CATShapes in the selected order
2. CATProducts in the selected order
3. All other types of models (CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis) in the selected
order.
In the “Batch Settings” dialog, select the sub-products to be checked before selecting
their superordinate products, thus allowing to evaluate the new check seals when
checking superordinate products.

Dassault Systèmes 893 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Product

2.4.4.19 Part component fixed in Product

Criteria manual

MethPartComponentFixedInProduct (1609)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether every CATPart component in a product has a fix
constraint, the coordinates and rotation angles of which are all zero.

Fig. 1: Definition of fix constraint in CATIA V5 with coordinates (X, Y, Z) and rotation angles (RotX, RotY,
RotZ)

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Add fix constraints to the components inside the product. For
instructions, see “Assembly Design – Fixing a Component” in the CATIA user assis-
tance.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 894 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

2.4.5 Sheet Metal

Criteria manual

2.4.5.1 Cylindrical Bend Definition

StdBendDefinition (1434)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether angles and radiuses of cylindrical bends are within the
specified value range. If that does not apply, the affected element is rated as incorrect.

 NOTE: This criterion checks only cylindrical bends created in the CATIA
“Generative Sheet Metal Design” workbench, using the “Bend” function.

Background
Bend radiuses must not be less than a certain minimum. If the bend radius is too small,
fissures may appear, and the stability in the bent area is reduced.

Fig. 1: Non-allowed bend radiuses

Suggested solution
Change bend radius and angle according to the specification.

Dassault Systèmes 895 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle” and “Radius” spin boxes Specify the allowed value ranges for angle and radius.
In the spin boxes, specify the allowed minimum and maximum values, respectively.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 896 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

2.4.5.2 Conical Bend Definition

Criteria manual

StdConicalBendDefinition (1435)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether angles and radiuses of conical bends are within the speci-
fied value range. If that does not apply, the affected element is rated as incorrect.

Background
Bend radiuses must not be less than a certain minimum. If the bend radius is too small,
fissures may appear, and the stability in the bent area is reduced.

Fig. 1: Non-allowed bend radiuses

Suggested solution
Change bend radius and angle according to the specification.

Dassault Systèmes 897 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle”, “First Radius” and “Second Radius” spin boxes Specify the allowed value
ranges for angle, first and second radius. In the spin boxes, specify the allowed
minimum and maximum values, respectively.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 898 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

2.4.5.3 Fold/Unfold — Sheet Metal Visualization

Criteria manual

StdSheetMetalView (1444)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the visualization state of bent sheets (folded or unfolded)
corresponds to the specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Starting from an unfolded sheet metal part (plate), the final shape is made by bending.
Sheet metal parts can be shown in unfolded state, e.g. for creating drawings of the
plate, and in folded state, e.g. for collision checking.
If a part is displayed in the wrong state, problems may occur in subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: Folded representation of a sheet metal part Fig. 2: Unfolded representation of a sheet metal
part

Suggested solution
Set the visualization state of sheet metal parts according to the specification.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Visualization must be” list box In the list box, select the allowed sheet metal visualiza-
tion, “Folded” or “Unfolded”.

Dassault Systèmes 899 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

INFO: In the CATIA “Generative Sheet Metal Design” workbench, you can
switch between folded and unfolded view with the “Fold/ Unfold” function.

Dassault Systèmes 900 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

2.4.5.4 Sheet Metal Parameters

Criteria manual

StdSheetMetalParameters (1505)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the K factor of bends corresponds to one of the specified
values. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background

Starting from an unfolded sheet metal part (plate), the final shape is made by bending.
If the unfolded state is calculated using an incorrect K factor, the plate size becomes
incorrect, and thus the dimensions of the final part do not match the specifications.

Fig. 1: Folded representation of a sheet metal part Fig. 2: Unfolded representation of a sheet metal
part

Suggested solution
Set a correct K factor according the specification (Fig. 3) . In the CATIA “Sheet
metal design” workbench, click the “Sheet Metal Parameters” icon.

Fig. 3: Setting the K factor in the sheet metal parameters

Dassault Systèmes 901 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“K-Factor” value list Specify the allowed K Factors for bends.

“Tolerance” spin box Specify the allowed tolerance for K factors.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To revert to the K factor defined by DIN, click the “Apply DIN” button (Fig. 3).

Dassault Systèmes 902 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Sheet Metal

2.4.5.5 Surfacic Flange Definition

Criteria manual

StdSheetMetalSurfacicFlangeDefinition (1597)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether each bend radius in a surfacic flange is equal to the
default bend radius. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

 NOTE: To use this criterion, a CATIA SL3 license must be available.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 903 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

2.4.6 Composite
Criteria manual

2.4.6.1 Composite Material Catalog Path

StdCompositeDesignMaterial (1433)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether composite material catalogs are in the correct paths. If
that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Composite material catalogs contain definitions of composite materials including their
mechanical properties. To ensure that the correct definitions are used, only the speci-
fied catalogs in specified file paths must be used.

Fig. 1: “Composites Parameters” dialog

Suggested solution
In the specification tree, double-click the “Composites Parameters” element and insert
the path to the correct composites material catalog.

Dassault Systèmes 904 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Allowed path name”, “Allowed relative path name” and “Allowed DLNames” value
lists Specify the absolute paths, relative paths, or DLNames for the allowed locations of
composite material catalogs. At least one entry (absolute or relative path, or DLName)
in one of the value lists has to be specified. You can use Windows and CATIA environ-
ment variables.
The notation for environment variables is ${VARNAME}, where VARNAME is the variable
name.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 905 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

2.4.6.2 Ply Surface Must Match Ply Group Surface

Criteria manual

StdPlySurfaceMustMatchPlyGroupSurface (1436)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the plies of a plies group and the plies group itself are
located on the same surface. If that does not apply, the affected plies are rated as incor-
rect.

Background
All plies of a plies group must be located on the same surface. Otherwise problems may
occur that affect anything from data reuse up fabrication.

Fig. 1: Surface of a plies group Fig. 2: Surface of a ply

Suggested solution
To assign a different surface to a ply or plies group, proceed as follows:
1 In CATIA, activate the “Composite Design” workbench.
2 On the “Manufacturing” toolbar, click the “Skin Swapping” button.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 906 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

2.4.6.3 Ply and Core Definition

Criteria manual

StdPlyDefinition (1437)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain properties of plies and core definitions for
composites correspond to the requirements. Q-Checker reports an error if required
parameters are missing or values do not match the specification.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
A ply definition requires a material, rosette, and the direction (angle) of fibers (Fig. 1). If
attributes are missing, the ply definition is not complete, resulting in problems and
delays in subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: The definition of “Ply.1” is complete. The definition of “Ply.0” is incomplete because a rosette is
missing.

Suggested solution
Modify incorrect ply definitions.

Dassault Systèmes 907 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check material by specification tree evaluation” check box If this option is activated,
all material names in the specification tree are checked. This check is performed irre-
spective of whether material links are broken or can be resolved.
If this option is not selected, only the names of materials are checked whose links can
be resolved. In this case, broken material links are ignored.

“Material name” value list Specify the allowed material names for plies and cores. You
can use Regular Expressions. If this value list is empty, material names are not checked.

Dassault Systèmes 908 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

“Direction” value list Specify the allowed directions of plies and cores.
Criteria manual

• In the “from” column, specify the minimum allowed value.

• In the “to” column, specify the maximum allowed value.
• In the “Direction name” column, specify a Regular Expression for the allowed
parameter name of the respective direction.
If this value list is empty, the direction is not checked.

“Rosette must be selected” check box If this option is selected, a rosette or axis system
must be selected in the plies and core definition. If this option is not selected, these
elements are not required.

“Axis system name” value list Only relevant if “Rosette must be selected” is selected.
Specify the name of the rosette or axis system that must be selected. You can use
Regular Expressions. If this field is empty, any name is allowed.

“Ply/Core uses axis system as rosette” check box

• Select this option if the ply/core definition uses an axis system (Fig. 2). The selected
checks in this criterion are applied to axis systems.
Ply/Core definitions using an axis system exist in models which were created with an
older CATIA release and have not been upgraded to new rosettes as composite
parameters.
 See also Application tip, page 910
• Deselect this option if the ply/core definition uses a rosette (Fig. 3). The selected
checks in this criterion are applied to rosettes.

Fig. 2: Ply/Core definition with axis system Fig. 3: Ply/Core definition with rosette

If the type of Ply/Core definition in the model does not match this setting, an error is
reported.

“Rosette name must match correspondent plies group rosette name” check box If this
option is selected, the rosette name of the ply or core must correspond to the rosette
name of the ply group.

Dassault Systèmes 909 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

“Contour must be selected” check box If this option is selected, a contour must be
Criteria manual

selected in the “Features of Composites Geometry” field of the ply definition. If this
option is not selected, no contour needs to be selected.

“Surface must be selected” check box If this option is selected, a surface must be
selected in the “Surface” field of the ply definition. If this option is not selected, no
surface needs to be selected.

“Plies and cores to be checked” list box Specify which objects to check:
“Structural” Ply and core definition in ply groups with deselected option “For non
structural plies”
“Non-structural” Definition of plies and cores in ply groups with selected option “For
non structural plies”
“Structural and non-structural” Definition of plies and cores in ply groups with selected
option with any setting of the “For non structural plies” option

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application tip
If the “Ply/Core uses axis system as rosette” option is selected and the model uses ply/
core definitions with rosette, not the rosette will be checked but the referenced axis
system in the rosette definition (Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Ply definition with rosette as composite parameter and referenced axis system

Dassault Systèmes 910 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

2.4.6.4 Ply with Invalid or not up-to-date Contour

Criteria manual

StdCompositePlyOpenContour (1500)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the contours of plies are valid, that is whether the
contours are geometrically closed and up-to-date. If that does not apply, the ply element
is rated as incorrect.

Background
Modifications to a composite part may cause errors, e.g. a ply no longer situated on its
reference plane, or gaps in the ply contour. As a result, the part may fail to be processed
in subsequent steps.

Fig. 1: Closed, valid contour

Suggested solution
Delete invalid reference planes, and close any gaps in the ply contour.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can check whether single plies are valid:

Dassault Systèmes 911 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

1 Double-click the ply element in the specification tree.

Criteria manual

 The “Ply Definition” dialog is displayed.

2 Click the “Modify” button.
 The “Contour” dialog appears. If the contour is valid, a green check mark is shown
(Fig. 2), otherwise a red cross (Fig. 3).

Fig. 2: Valid contour, indicated by the green check Fig. 3: Invalid contour, indicated by the red cross
mark

Dassault Systèmes 912 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite

2.4.6.5 Composite Material Parameter State

Criteria manual

StdCompMaterialParamStatus (1502)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether composite material features are synchronized with the
material catalog. If that does not apply, the affected composite material elements are
rated as incorrect.

Background
Composite material catalogs contain the definitions and mechanical properties of
composite materials. To ensure that the correct definitions are used, only the specified
catalogs in specified file paths must be used.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: To change the catalog path, click the “File selection” button
in the “Composites Parameters” dialog.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Define the catalog paths in CATIA environment variables to make them available from
the beginning.

INFO: In the specification tree, the respective composite material features are
displayed with the following additional icons.

Dassault Systèmes 913 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Composite
Criteria manual

Icon Status Status

Green rhombus Synchronized Correct

Red lightning Isolated Incorrect

Red question mark Unknown, the state cannot Incorrect

be read

Red cross Not synchronized Incorrect

Dassault Systèmes 914 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment

2.4.7 Equipment
Criteria manual

2.4.7.1 Electrical

2.4.7.1.1 Lost Electrical Properties of Curve

StdNonFlexibleElecCurve (1450)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether curves of the “flexible curve” type that have lost some of
their electrical properties and have degenerated to splines. If not, the affected elements
will be rated as incorrect.

Background
A flexible curve defines the path of a bundle segment. Flexible curves not only have
geometrical parameters but also technological parameters such as minimum allowed
bend radius, sagging and routing mode (Fig. 1) . When editing, it may occur that some
requirements based on these parameters cannot be observed any further. As a result,
the branch curve becomes a spline that does not fulfill the technological parameters.

Fig. 1: Flexible curve with valid parameters Fig. 2: Flexible curve with some invalid parameters

Dassault Systèmes 915 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

Modify the technological parameters in such a way that all parameters can be adhered
to for the calculation of a flexible curve.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
If it is not possible to take into account all parameters, CATIA notifies the user that an
ordinary spline is used instead (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 916 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.2 Support Plane must be Parallel to Reference Plane

Criteria manual

StdSupportPlaneParallelToRefPlane (1449)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain support planes are parallel to the “zx” plane. If
that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Bundle segments are defined by an entry point and two reference planes (EHISUP-
PORT-RefPlane). Bundle segments are straight between reference planes. If the two
reference planes are not parallel, the bundle segment is not aligned correctly to the
supports.
Design rules may require that all reference planes are aligned uniformly in parallel to
the “zx” plane.

Fig. 1: Parallel reference planes Fig. 2: No parallel reference planes

Suggested solution
Align incorrect reference planes in parallel to the “zx” reference plane.

Dassault Systèmes 917 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Publications” value list Specify the names of published support planes to be checked
for being in parallel to the “zx” plane. You can use Regular Expressions.
Unpublished support planes are not checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To identify planes in the specification tree more easily, published name and
component name should correspond to each other.
• The published names of reference planes must not be changed, otherwise they are
not recognized when integrating them into the path of a bundle segment.

Dassault Systèmes 918 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.3 Consistency of Bundle Segments in Multi-Branchable

Criteria manual

StdUnusedElectricalElements (1453)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether bundle segments are based on a flexible curve or an
external curve in the branchable definition. Additionally, it can be checked whether every
bundle segment contains both a body of MechanicalTool type and a body of ElecRout-
Body type.
If these requirements are not fulfilled, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

 NOTE: This criterion checks only multi-branchable documents.

Suggested solution
If the graphical representation of a bundle segment is missing (Fig. 1), double-click the
bundle segment to open the definition dialog, then click “OK”. This creates a new
graphical representation. To resolve other errors, delete the incorrect bundle segment
and create a new bundle segment.

Fig. 1: Bundle segment with missing graphical representation

Dassault Systèmes 919 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“All bundle-segment bodies must exist” check box Activate this option to check addi-
tionally whether every bundle segment contains one body of the MechanicalTool type
and one body of the ElecRouteBody type.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.
• To delete an incorrect segment, mark the element, then choose “Tools” > “Delete
Special”.

Dassault Systèmes 920 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.4 Unused Electrical Elements in Part

Criteria manual

StdUnusedElectricalElementsInCATPart (1456)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains elements that have electrical proper-
ties but are not used in the definition of any electrical bundle segment or multi-branch-
able. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
After editing a harness, unused elements may be left behind.

Fig. 1: Element “Multi-Branchable1” contains unused elements

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to delete unused elements with electrical properties.

Dassault Systèmes 921 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Open bodies, in which unused elements are allowed” value list Specify the names of
geometrical sets in which unused electrical components are allowed. You can use
Regular Expressions.

Healing settings
“Remove unused elements” The healing function deletes unused electrical elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.
• Only parts created for bundle segments or multi-branchables are checked. They can
be recognized by the symbols shown in Fig. 2.
• In CATIA, to analyze whether certain elements are used in bundle segments, select
“Tools” > “Parents/Children”.

Fig. 2: Specification tree icons for “Multi branchables” and “Bundle segments”

Dassault Systèmes 922 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.5 Electrical Topology

Criteria manual

StdElectricalTopoCheck (1455)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the following types of elements have correct electrical and
topological connections:
• bundle segments
• multi-branchables
• single insert connectors
The criterion can additionally check whether bundle segments have at least the speci-
fied minimum length.
Elements that do not meet the requirements are rated as incorrect.

INFO: This criterion consists of several partial checks. Most partial checks are also
available as standalone criteria. We recommed using the standalone criteria where
possible instead of the Electrical Toplogy criterion.

Option Corresponding criterion

Check bundle segments for not  Open Electrical Segment End, page 960
connected extremities

• Check geometrically connected  Electrical Segment Topology, page 966

elements for electrical
connections
• Check electrically connected
elements for point continuity

Check connectors for existence of  Unused Devices, page 953.

electrical connections

Check for electrical loops  Closed Electrical Conductor Loop, page 963

Check bundle segments for zero  Bundle-Segment Properties, page 947

length

Background
When constructing a harness, it is crucial that all components are correctly connected,
both electrically and geometrically. The model cannot be used as intended if the

Dassault Systèmes 923 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

harness contains loops or unconnected extremities, or if the product contains connec-

Criteria manual

tors and supports which are not connected to the harness.

Fig. 1: Harness with incorrectly connected components

Suggested solution
To resolve geometrical problems, rearrange the existing components, or extend bundle
segments to the required connection points.

Dassault Systèmes 924 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check bundle segments for not connected extremities” check box If this option is
activated, bundle segments must be connected electrically at both ends.
If this option is not selected, no electrical connections are required.

“Check geometrically connected elements for electrical connections” check box If this
option is activated, geometrically connected bundle segments must also be connected
electrically.
If this option is not selected, electrical connections are not required.

“Ignore connection points with the names” value list Specify the points in which an
open segment end or a missing electrical connection is allowed. You can use Regular
Expressions.

“Check connectors for existence of electrical connections” check box with list box If
this option is activated, every connector must be connected electrically. In the list box,
select whether the connector must be connected to exactly one bundle segment (“only 1
link allowed”) or at least one bundle segment (“1 or more allowed”).

Dassault Systèmes 925 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

If this option is not selected, electrical connections are not required.

Criteria manual

“Check electrically connected elements for point continuity” check box If this option is
activated, bundle segments and connectors with electrical connection must have a
geometrical connection. The connection is point-continuous if the distance does not
exceed the specified “Maximum allowed distance”.
If this option is not selected, no geometrical connection is required.

“Check for electrical loops” check box If this option is selected, electrical loops are not
allowed, that is the ends of a bundle segment must not be connected to each other,
neither directly nor across other bundle segments.
If this option is not selected, electrical loops are allowed.

“Check bundle segments for zero length” check box If this option is activated, the
length of bundle segments must be at least the minimum length specified in “Min.
length of bundle segments”. Shorter lengths are considered “zero-length” and rated as
incorrect.
If this option is not selected, bundle segments with zero-length are allowed.

“Maximum allowed distance” spin box Specify the maximum allowed distance
between the extremities of two bundle segments. If the distance is greater than speci-
fied, bundle segments are not considered to be geometrically connected.

“Min. length of bundle segments” spin box Specify the allowed minimum length of
bundle segments. Shorter bundle segments are considered too short, i.e. to have “zero-
length”.

Healing settings
“Adjust electrical links” Activate individual healing to heal the following errors interac-
tively from the analysis window:
• Geometrical connection without electrical connection (“No electrical connection to
feature ...”).
Healing: The electrical connection will be established.
• No electrical connection to feature (“Check for geometrical connection … was not
successful”).
Healing: The electrical connection will be deleted.
For other errors, no Q-Checker healing is available.

 NOTE
• This Q-Checker healing function is only available for individual healing.
• An individual healing will apply all available healings to the selected connection point;
errors cannot be healed separately.

Dassault Systèmes 926 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

 NOTE
• To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.
• A check with this criterion may return the following error message: “Retrieval for
bundle segment extremity failed. All geometrical checks for this point can not be executed.”
In this case, choose “Tools” > “Recompute All Bundle Segments” in CATIA, then
repeat the check.
• At present, it is not possible to check the extremities of bundle segments if no tangent
constraint for the connector is defined. If no tangent constraint is defined, Q-Checker
returns a general error.

Fig. 2: Connector without tangent constraint Fig. 3: Connector with tangent constraint

Application Tip
• To prevent unwanted gaps, activate the following CATIA application setting: “Tools” >
“Options” > “Equipment & Systems” > “Electrical Harness Installation” > “Harness
Management” > “Bundle Segment Connection” > “Geometrical link”(Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Application setting for creating geometrical connections

• You can use search to find bundle segments with unconnected extremities (Fig. 5).
Loops and gaps cannot be found that way.

Dassault Systèmes 927 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 5: Using CATIA search to find bundle segments with unconnected extremities

• Electrical properties of parts are shown on an additional tab of the “Properties” dialog
(Fig. 6). Click “More” to show the “Electrical” tab.

Fig. 6: Properties dialog with an “Electrical” tab for the electrical properties of a part

Dassault Systèmes 928 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.6 Non-allowed Electrical Root/Components Type

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedElectricDoc (1469)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether electrical components or the root feature of the model
have a non-allowed type. If so, the affected components are rated as incorrect.

Background
A harness consists of electrical components, such as bundle segments, connectors,
supports and boots. Some element types are not supported in subsequent processes
and may cause problems.

Example Problems in subsequent processes may occur if only Single Insert Connectors
are supported, but Terminal Blocks are used (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Example: “Terminal Block” is an electrical component of a non-allowed type

Suggested solution
Replace non-allowed components with other suitable components of an allowed type.

Dassault Systèmes 929 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of non-allowed types” value list Specify the types of elements that are not allowed
in the model. If the list is empty, any type of element is allowed.

“Check also root feature” check box If this option is selected, the type of the root-
feature is also checked. If this option is not selected, the type of the root-feature is not
checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
For electrical components (except electrical supports), the “Properties” dialog has an
additional tab with electrical properties (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 930 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Electrical properties of a connector

Dassault Systèmes 931 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.7 Electrical Protective Coverings

Criteria manual

StdElectricalProtections (1472)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of electrical protective coverings corresponds
to the specification. If that does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.
In particular, the following is checked:
• Required minimum length
• No overlength (protective covering must not cover more than one bundle segment)

Background
In CATIA, coverings that protect against damages can be created in a part that has addi-
tional properties. To ensure that the coverings can be fabricated, they must not be
shorter than a specified length and must not be longer than the bundle segment.

Fig. 1: The marked protective covering cannot be fabricated, as it is longer than the bundle segment

Related criteria
 Light Electrical Protective Coverings, page 934

Dassault Systèmes 932 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check for protective coverings over several bundle segments” check box If this option
is selected, protective coverings must not be longer than the bundle segment itself, that
is not cover another segment.

“Check bundle segments for zero length” check box If this option is selected, the
length of protective covering must be at least the value specified in “Min. length of
protective coverings”.

“Min. length of protective coverings” spin box Specify the minimum allowed length of
protective coverings. This option applies only if the “Check protective coverings for
zero length” option is selected.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.
• Electrical properties of parts are shown on an additional tab of the “Properties”
dialog. Click “More” to show the “Electrical” tab.

Dassault Systèmes 933 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.8 Light Electrical Protective Coverings

Criteria manual

StdElectricalLightProtections (1501)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of light electrical protective coverings corre-
sponds to the specification. If that does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.

Background
Light protective coverings can be created directly inside the Multi-Branchable (Fig. 1).
To ensure that light protective coverings can be fabricated, they must be longer than the
specified minimum length and must not cover more than one bundle segment.

Fig. 1: Multi-branchable containing a geometrical set with light electrical protective coverings

Related criteria
 Electrical Protective Coverings, page 932

Dassault Systèmes 934 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check for protective coverings over several bundle segments” check box If this option
is selected, protective coverings must not cover more than one bundle segment.

“Check bundle segments for zero length” check box If this option is selected, protec-
tive coverings must be longer than the specified minimum length.

“Min. length of protective coverings” spin box Min. length of protective coverings.
This option applies only if the “Check protective coverings for zero length” option is
selected.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.
• Electrical properties of parts are shown on an additional tab of the “Properties”
dialog. Click “More” to show the “Electrical” tab.

Dassault Systèmes 935 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.9 Empty Multi-Branchable/Bundle Segment Part

Criteria manual

StdElectricalMultiBranchable (1474)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the product contains empty multi-branchable documents
(Multi-branchable) or electrical bundle segments (ElecBundleSegment) . If so, these
components are rated as incorrect.

Background
In the “Electrical Harness Assembly” workbench, a multi-branchable part is created
whenever the “Multi-Branchable Document” is invoked. If the function is cancelled, the
empty multi-branchable part remains.

Fig. 1: “Multi-branchable2” is empty

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to delete empty bundle segments from the product.

Dassault Systèmes 936 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check for empty multi-branchable part” check box If this option is selected, empty
multi-branchables parts are not allowed. (This option is selected by default.)

“Check for empty Bundle Segment part” check box If this option is selected, empty
bundle-segment parts are not allowed.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes non-allowed empty components (multi-branch-
able parts and/or bundle segment parts, according to the check parameters).

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To perform the check correctly, the entire electrical physical system has to be loaded
in design mode.
• Electrical properties of models are shown on an additional tab of the “Properties”
dialog. Click “More” to show the “Electrical” tab.

Dassault Systèmes 937 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.10 Electrical Reference Designator

Criteria manual

StdElectricalRefDesignator (1480)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether the instances of single insert connectors have a “Refer-
ence Designator” that corresponds to the specifications. If that does not apply, the
connector is rated as incorrect.
The following checks can be performed:
• Compare the model name with a list of Regular Expressions
• Compare the name with a combination of strings. This combination of strings can
consist of fixed character strings and standard model properties (definition,
nomenclature, part number, revision, description).

 NOTE: This criterion only checks for formal correctness, not for correctness of the
contained information.

Background
To identify a particular single insert connector within a product structure, a unique
value has to be assigned to the “Reference Designator” property (Fig. 1). The default
property value is a blank, which can cause problems in subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: “Reference designator” field of a connector

Dassault Systèmes 938 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Definition of Drafting Standard” list box The electrical reference designator (“text to
be checked”) is checked for conformance with naming rules.

BEGIN_BLOCK [NOTALLOWED] [NOTCASESENSITIVE]

[{COLUMN col | KEYWORD "string"}]
"Expression"
...
[ERROR_MSG_XY
"string"
... ]
[ERROR_MSG
"string"
... ]
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 939 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

NOTALLOWED Optional. Specifies that the none of the expressions in this block must
Criteria manual

match the text to be checked.

NOTCASESENSITIVE Optional. Specifies that the text comparison is not case-sensitive.
COLUMN col Optional. Character position where the text comparison starts.
KEYWORD "string" Optional. Fixed string string, after the first occurrence of which
the text comparison starts. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.
If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the entire text is compared.
Expression Expression with which the text to be checked is compared. You can add
further expressions, each in a new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions
are logically combined by "OR".
See Expressions for comparing text, page 941
ERROR_MSG_XY Optional. Language-specific error message for the language defined in
the check environment with identifier XY (DE, EN, FR, JP, CN).
ERROR_MSG Error message to be used when no language-specific error message has
been defined for the current language.
If neither ERROR_MSG nor ERROR_MSG_XY is specified, Q-Checker shows its own error
message.
 Creating naming rules, page 940

INFO: As long as no value is specified the “Reference designator” field contains a

blank space. In more recent CATIA versions, “unset” is shown instead of the blank.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Electrical properties of connectors are shown on an additional tab of the “Properties”
dialog (Fig. 1). Click “More” to show the “Electrical” tab.

Creating naming rules

Naming rules
Every naming rule is defined in a block BEGIN_BLOCK / END_BLOCK.

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
END_BLOCK

A naming rule is fulfilled if the checked text corresponds to the naming rule.
NOTALLOWED defines an exclusion rule. An exclusion rule is fulfilled if the checked text
does not correspond to the rule.

Dassault Systèmes 940 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
...
END_BLOCK

You can specify one or more blocks of naming rules. All naming rules are logically
combined by AND. The criterion is fulfilled if all naming rules are fulfilled.

Case sensitivity
Text comparisons are case-sensitive by default. To make a block not case-sensitive, use
NOTCASESENSITIVE:

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTCASESENSITIVE
...
END_BLOCK

Starting position
The text to be checked can be compared in its entirety or starting at a certain character
position. The starting position is defined as follows:
• Start of the text comparison at a fixed character position in the text to be checked.

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
...
END_BLOCK

Replace col with the character position.

• Start of the text comparison after the first occurrence of a string in the text to be
checked. If the string is not found, the entire text is compared.

BEGIN_BLOCK
KEYWORD "string"
...
END_BLOCK

Replace string with the character position.

• If neither COLUMN nor KEYWORD is specified, the text to be checked is compared in its
entirety.

Expressions for comparing text

The text to be checked is compared to a list of expressions. A new expression starts with
every new line. All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by
OR. The naming rule is not fulfilled if the name matches none of the expressions.
The list of expressions can contain one or more of the following expressions:

Dassault Systèmes 941 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

• Regular expressions in quotation marks:

Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
"Regular Expression"
...
END_BLOCK

• Combination of text and values of certain model default properties

BEGIN_BLOCK
COLUMN col
PARTNUMBER(3,10) + STRING("_") + REVISION(2)
...
END_BLOCK

Keywords for model properties and text

Keyword Value

DEFINITION(pos) Model Definition

NOMENCLATURE(pos) Model Nomenclature

PARTNUMBER(pos) Part number

REVISION(pos) Version

STRING("...") Text

Keywords can be concatenated using the “+” operator.

Specify after the keywords which part of the property value to use:
• ...(1) returns the entire value of the named property.
• ...(pos) returns part of the value of the named property from character position
pos until the end.

• ...(pos1,pos2) returns part of the value of the named property from character
position pos1 to pos2.

 NOTE: CATIA uses the following default values for the electrical reference designator:
• Before the electrical environment is initialized, the default value is a blank space
(Regular Expression "^ $").
• After the electrical environment has been initialized, the default value is Unset
(Regular Expression "^Unset$")

Dassault Systèmes 942 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Error messages
Criteria manual

If the text does not correspond to the specification, Q-Checker displays a default error
message in the analysis window. You can also specify user-defined error messages.
Error messages may have more than one line. Each line must be set in quotation marks.

ERROR_MSG Error message in one language. This message is used if no user-

defined error message has been defined in the current language.
ERROR_MSG_CN Chinese error message
ERROR_MSG_DE German error message
ERROR_MSG_EN English error message
ERROR_MSG_FR French error message
ERROR_MSG_JP Japanese error message

BEGIN_BLOCK
...
ERROR_MSG_DE # Deutsch
"Fehler: ..."
"Korrekturvorschlag: ..."
ERROR_MSG_FR # Français
"Erreur: ..."
"Correction proposée: ..."
ERROR_MSG # English and other languages
"Error: ..."
"Suggested solution: ..."
END_BLOCK

General requirements
• Regular Expressions and strings must be set in quotation marks ("").
• In a list of expressions, a new expression starts with every new line.
• All entries of a list of strings and expressions are logically combined by OR.
• Logical AND is evaluated before logical OR.
• Comments start at the number sign (#) and reach until the end of the line.
• A number sign (#) inside an expression or inside a string is not considered as begin of
a comment.

Examples
1. The electrical environment must be initialized, and the reference designator must
not be “Unset”.

Dassault Systèmes 943 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

BEGIN_BLOCK NOTALLOWED
"^ $"
"^Unset$"
END_BLOCK

2. The electrical reference designator must be composed of three groups of letters of

defined lengths, separated by hyphens.

BEGIN_BLOCK
"^[A-Z]-[A-Z]{2}-[A-Z]{2}$"
END_BLOCK

Dassault Systèmes 944 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.11 Electrical Data Availability

Criteria manual

StdElectricalDataAvailability (1487)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether electrical data are available for being checked. If that does
not apply, an error is reported.
Electrical data are available if the following requirements are fulfilled:
• for the model, an electrical environment must be active
• electrical components must be loaded in design mode
• To use the electrical environment, an appropriate CATIA license is required.
If the model contains no electrical data, this criterion checks nothing (the result is
“Check not called”).

Background
Electrical data of electrical components are stored in a dedicated container within the
document. Before electrical components can be checked in Q-Checker, an electrical
environment has to be activated. By activating an electrical environment, electrical data
are initialized and become ready to be checked. If electrical data are unavailable, the
check result will be incorrect.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to initialize the electrical environment.
• To initialize the electrical environment automatically when running a check with a
certain profile, go to the profile options and select the “Switch all electrical
components to design mode and initialize electrical environment” option.
• To initialize the electrical environment automatically when running a check with a
certain profile and model type, go to the model type manager of the profile and select
the “Switch to design mode and initialize electrical environment” option for the
respective model type.
• Load an electrical workbench in CATIA, for example “Electrical Harness Assembly”.

Dassault Systèmes 945 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Initialize electrical environment” The healing function activates the electrical environ-
ment and loads all product components into design mode.
The healing requires a CATIA license for the electrical environment.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
This check is particularly useful as a precondition for other Q-Checker electrical checks.
If this check does return errors, other electrical checks can follow immediately. If an
error is reported, stop the check and make sure all electrical data are available.

Dassault Systèmes 946 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.12 Bundle-Segment Properties

Criteria manual

StdElectricalBSProperties (1488)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether length, reference designator and separation code of
bundle segments correspond to the specifications. If that does not apply, the affected
bundle segments elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Some electrical properties are particularly important in subsequent processes, for
example routing. If the required properties have not been defined, problems may occur
in subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: Electrical properties of a connector

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root component and change its properties in
“Edit” > “Properties” > “Electrical”. If the “Electrical” tab is not shown, click the “More”
button.

Dassault Systèmes 947 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Length” check box with “min” and “max” spin boxes Specify the allowed minimum
and maximum length of bundle segments.

“Length attribute value up-to-date” check box If this option is selected, the Length attri-
bute value shown in CATIA must correspond to the actual length of the bundle
segment.

“Reference designator” and “Separation code” text boxes Specify the allowed character
strings for reference designator and separation code, respectively. You can use Regular
Expressions. If these fields are left blank, reference designator and separation code are
not checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 948 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.13 Consistency of Branchables in Multi-Branchable

Criteria manual

StdElectricalBranchable (1489)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether every branchable contains at least one subordinate
bundle segment. If that does not apply, the affected branchable is rated as incorrect.

 NOTE: This criterion checks only multi-branchable documents.

Background
When editing a harness, an empty branchable may remain after deleting all its bundle
segments. An empty branchable cannot be edited any more. When trying to create add
a new bundle segment to the branchable, an error message will be issued, as shown in
Fig. 1.

Fig. 1: Error message when trying to edit a corrupted branchable

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to delete empty branchables.

Dassault Systèmes 949 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes branchables that do not contain any bundle
segments.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.

Dassault Systèmes 950 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.14 Multipart Bundle Segment

Criteria manual

StdElectricalBSSegmentation (1508)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether more than two bundle segments are connected in one
connection point. If so, an error will be reported.

Background
A harness requires branchables to connect the single conductors to the respective
connectors.
When bundle segments are removed from a harness layout, unused branchables
remain. The branchables are unused, as they are not required to connect two bundle
segments. Unused branchables compromise structural clarity and require additional
memory.

Fig. 1: Branchable comprising two bundle segments. No further element is connected to the branch point.

Fig. 2: Connected bundle segments of two branchables. No further element is connected to the branch
point.

Suggested solution
Delete one of the bundle segments, and adjust the other so that the geometrical bundle
is topologically and electrically closed.

Dassault Systèmes 951 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore connection points with the names” value list Specify the branch points in
which a series connection without a branch is allowed.

“Maximum allowed distance” spin box Specify the maximum allowed distance
between the extremities of two bundle segments. If the distance is greater than speci-
fied, bundle segments are considered to be not geometrically connected.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To delete an entire bundle segment in CATIA, select “Tools” > “Delete Special”.
• To remove a branch point from a bundle segment, use the “Remove Branch Point”
function.

Dassault Systèmes 952 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.15 Unused Devices

Criteria manual

StdElecUnusedDevices (1538)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether a device is connected to any other device or segment. If
that does not apply, the affected devices are rated as incorrect.

Background
The route of a segment can be defined by points, connectors, supports and given
curves and surfaces. After the modification of components, the route of the harness is
recalculated. However, if a device is not linked to a bundle segment, it is not taken into
account when recalculating the route. This can cause problems in downstream
processes, as the calculated length and resistance values will be wrong.

Suggested solution
Connect electrical devices to the segments, or delete them from the product.

Fig. 1: Connecting a connector to a segment

Dassault Systèmes 953 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of electrical devices to be checked” value list Specify the types of electrical devices
to be checked.

“Check for unused device group” check box If this option is selected, devices must be
connected to a segment either directly or across other devices. Devices not connected
to any segment are rated as incorrect.
If this option is not selected, devices must be connected to another device or segment.
Only devices without any electrical connection are rated as incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.
• The “Route Definition” dialog lists the instance names of all supports and devices
that are connected to the respective segment.

Dassault Systèmes 954 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Instance names of electrical supports and devices connected to the segment

• For associativity between segments and branch points, supports or devices, the
“Keep link with selected object” option has to be selected in the CATIA application
settings.
“Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” > “General” >
“External References”

Dassault Systèmes 955 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.16 Segment Extremity Name

Criteria manual

StdElecSegmentExtremityName (1559)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the names of segment extremities correspond to the
specification. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
If the external reference of a segment extremity point is missing, the original path of the
segment extremity point is no longer shown.
The correction of missing external references becomes easier if the naming rule for
segment extremity names includes the path of the external reference. This criterion can
check such naming rules.

Fig. 1: Segment with correctly named extremity points

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to change incorrect names of segment extremity points
according to the naming rule.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Right-click the extremity point, and choose “Properties”.
Correct the name on the “Component Properties” tab.
Make sure to use the applicable naming rule for manual corrections.

Dassault Systèmes 956 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore segment ends with the names” value list Specify the names of segment
extremities that are excluded from the check You can use Regular Expressions.

“Segment extremity name definition” Specify the allowed names for segment extremi-
ties. You can use Regular Expressions.

Healing parameters
“Extend segment extremity names by the part number” option This healing function
changes non-allowed names of segment extremity points. The part name of the model,
followed by a slash “/”, is added as a prefix to the existing name.

Example The name “Point.1” is not allowed. After Q-Checker healing, the name is
“Part3/Point.1”, where “Part3” is the part number of the model.

“Extend segment extremity names by the instance name” option This healing function
changes non-allowed names of segment extremity points using the following pattern:
• For external reference points, the existing name is replaced with the instance name of
the referenced component and the name of the external reference point.

Dassault Systèmes 957 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Example The name “Point.2” is not allowed. After Q-Checker healing, the name is
“Inst4.1/Point.5”. “Inst4.1” is the instance name of the referenced component, and
“Point.5” is the name of the external reference point.

• For all other points, the instance name of the model, followed by a slash “/”, is added
as a prefix to the existing name.

Example The name “Point.3” is not allowed. After Q-Checker healing, the name is
“Part1.1/Point.3”. “Part1.1” is the instance name of the component.

“Replace” This healing function replaces non-allowed segment extremity names with a
user-defined string. Specify this string in the analysis window.
This Q-Checker healing function is only available for individual healing.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In the “Bundle Segment Definition” dialog, you can find a list of segment extremity
points of the bundle segment.

Fig. 2: Bundle segment definition with segment extremity points

Dassault Systèmes 958 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.17 Segment name

Criteria manual

StdElecSegmentName (1575)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion check whether the segment name is composed of the names of both its
segment extremities. The order of segment extremities in the name must correspond to
the element definition. Segments with different names are rated as incorrect.

Example The name of the first segment extremity is “P25”, the name of the second
segment extremity is “P23”. The segment name must be “P25P23”. The inverse order
“P23P25” and all other names are not allowed.

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to apply the required segment names.

Criterion definition

Healing parameters
“Replace” The healing function replaces non-allowed segment names with a string that
is composed of the segment extremity names in the required order.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 959 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.18 Open Electrical Segment End

Criteria manual

StdElecOpenedSegments (1547)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether all bundle segments in the model have an electric connec-
tion at both ends. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Fig. 1: Unconnected Segment end and electrical device, having neither an electrical nor a geometrical
connection

Suggested solution
To connect open electrical segment ends in CATIA, use the “Connect Segments” func-
tion.

Fig. 2: Creating an electrical connection between a segment extremity and electrical device

Dassault Systèmes 960 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ignore segment ends with the names” value list Specify the points in which an open
segment end is allowed. You can use Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To establish an electrical connection between a segment extremity and an electrical
device, the electrical device must contain a segment position point.
• To create both geometrical and electrical connections when connecting segments or
devices, the following CATIA application setting must be selected: “Equipment &
Systems” > “Wire Harness Discipline” > “Wire Harness Assembly Design” >
“Harness Management” > “Geometrical link”(Fig. 3).
If required, segments are extended to form a geometrical connection.

Fig. 3: Setting to add an electrical connections when creating geometrical connections.

• To analyze connectivity problems (for example due to layout errors), you can use the
“Analyze Network” function in CATIA.
To do this, choose “Tools” > “Analyze Network”.

Dassault Systèmes 961 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Result of “Analyze network”

• You can analyze connects between objects with the “Link Review” function in CATIA.
This analysis can analyze how segments are connected, which conductors belong to
which segment, or which device connection point a conductor is using.
To do this, choose “Tools” > “Link Review”.

Fig. 5: “Link review”

Dassault Systèmes 962 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.19 Closed Electrical Conductor Loop

Criteria manual

StdElecSegmentLoop (1549)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether a harness has closed electrical conductor loops. If so, the
affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
If conductor loops are not defined in the connection logic, they may cause routing prob-
lems.

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: To delete an incorrect segment, mark the element, then
choose “Tools” > “Delete Special” (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Deleting a segment with “Delete Special”

Dassault Systèmes 963 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To establish an electrical connection between a segment extremity and an electrical
device, the electrical device must contain a segment position point.
• To create both geometrical and electrical connections when connecting segments or
devices, the “Geometrical link” option must be selected in the CATIA application
settings (Fig. 3). In V5-6R2014, this option can be found in “Equipment & Systems” >
“Electrical Harness Installation” > “Harness Management”.
If required, segments are extended to form a geometrical connection.

Fig. 2: Setting to add an electrical connections when creating geometrical connections.

• To analyze connectivity problems (for example due to layout errors), you can use the
“Analyze Network” function in CATIA.
To do this, choose “Tools” > “Analyze Network”.

Fig. 3: Result of “Analyze network”

• You can analyze connects between objects with the “Link Review” function in CATIA.
This analysis can analyze how segments are connected, which conductors belong to
which segment, or which device connection point a conductor is using.
To do this, choose “Tools” > “Link Review”.

Dassault Systèmes 964 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: “Link review”

Dassault Systèmes 965 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.20 Electrical Segment Topology

Criteria manual

StdElecSegmentTopology (1550)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks the topology of electrical segments. In particular, the following is
checked:
• whether all electrically connected segments and devices are also geometrically
connected
• whether all geometrically connected segments and devices are also electrically
connected
If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Fig. 1: Electrical connection between segment and Fig. 2: Geometrical and electrical connection
device without geometrical connection between segments

Suggested solution

Correcting an electrical connection that has no geometrical connection

The branch must consist of more than two elements.
1 In the incorrect segment extremity, delete the electrical connection using “Disconnect
Segments”.
2 Use “Connect Segments” to create a new connection to a segment extremity or device
(Fig. 3). The length of the segment is adjusted automatically.

Correcting a geometrical connection that has no electrical connection

1 Disconnect the geometrical connection:
 If the branch consists of more than two elements, delete the segment extremity.
 If the branch consists of only two elements, replace the segment extremity with
another point to create a gap.

Dassault Systèmes 966 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2 Use “Connect Segments” to create a new connection to a segment extremity or device

Criteria manual

(Fig. 3). The length of the segment is adjusted automatically.

Fig. 3: Connecting a segment extremity to an electrical device.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Check electrically connected elements for point continuity” check box If this option is
activated, electrically connected segments and/or devices must be point-continuous,
that is, they must have a geometrical connection.
If this option is not selected, no geometrical connection or point continuity is required.

“Check geometrically connected elements for electrical connections” check box If this
option is activated, geometrically connected segments and devices must also be
connected electrically.
If this option is not selected, electrical connections are not required.

“Maximum distance for point continuity” spin box Maximum distance in which
elements are still considered to be geometrically connected (point-continuous).

Dassault Systèmes 967 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Healing settings
Criteria manual

“Adjust electrical links” Individual healing can correct the following errors:

Errors Healing

Geometrical connection without elec- The electrical connection will be estab-

trical connection (“No electrical connec- lished.
tion to feature…”)

No electrical connection to feature The electrical connection will be deleted.

(“Check for geometrical connection …
was not successful”)

For other errors, no Q-Checker healing is available.

 NOTE
• This healing function is only available as individual healing from within the analysis
window. Healing according to the check profile is not supported.
• The healing function will perform all available healings for the connection point
selected in the analysis tree.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To establish an electrical connection between a segment extremity and an electrical
device, the electrical device must contain a segment position point.
• To create both geometrical and electrical connections when connecting segments or
devices, the “Geometrical link” option must be selected in the CATIA application
settings (Fig. 3). In V5-6R2014, this option can be found in “Equipment & Systems” >
“Electrical Harness Installation” > “Harness Management”.
If required, segments are extended to form a geometrical connection.

Fig. 4: Setting to add an electrical connections when creating geometrical connections.

• To analyze connectivity problems (for example due to layout errors), you can use the
“Analyze Network” function in CATIA.
To do this, choose “Tools” > “Analyze Network”.

Dassault Systèmes 968 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 5: Result of “Analyze network”

• You can analyze connects between objects with the “Link Review” function in CATIA.
This analysis can analyze how segments are connected, which conductors belong to
which segment, or which device connection point a conductor is using.
To do this, choose “Tools” > “Link Review”.

Fig. 6: “Link review”

Dassault Systèmes 969 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.21 Only One Electrical Network per Harness

Criteria manual

StdElecNetworkUnicity (1551)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether a single harness contains several electrical networks that
are not interconnected. If not, the affected harness is rated as incorrect.

Background
A geometrical harness containing two or more separate networks can cause problems
in subsequent processes (for example in manufacturing).

Fig. 1: Geometrical harness containing two separate networks

Suggested solution
To correct the error, divide the harness into separate harnesses. First, create a copy of
the model that contains the geometrical harness, then delete the redundant networks
from each model.

Dassault Systèmes 970 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Geometrical harness containing only one network

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To establish an electrical connection between a segment extremity and an electrical
device, the electrical device must contain a segment position point.
• To create both geometrical and electrical connections when connecting segments or
devices, the “Geometrical link” option must be selected in the CATIA application
settings (Fig. 3). In V5-6R2014, this option can be found in “Equipment & Systems” >
“Electrical Harness Installation” > “Harness Management”.
If required, segments are extended to form a geometrical connection.

Fig. 3: Setting to add an electrical connections when creating geometrical connections.

• To analyze connectivity problems (for example due to layout errors), you can use the
“Analyze Network” function in CATIA.
To do this, choose “Tools” > “Analyze Network”.

Dassault Systèmes 971 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical
Criteria manual

Fig. 4: Result of “Analyze network”

Dassault Systèmes 972 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.22 Electrical Support Points Must Lie on Electrical Support Planes

Criteria manual

StdPointsMustLieOnPlanes (1570)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether certain electrical points lie on certain electrical support
planes. If such a point does not lie on its associated support plane or the associated
support plane does not exist, the points are marked as incorrect.
The points to be checked are specified by a fixed naming rule for their publication
names:
• Points with publication names (Reg. Ex.):
EHISUPPORT-RefPoint[0-9]+

• Planes with publication names (Reg. Ex.):

^EHISUPPORT-RefPlane1\.[0-9]+

Criterion definition

“Tolerance” spin box Specify the maximum allowed distance between points and
support plane. If the distance is less than specified, a point is considered to be located
on the support plane.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 973 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.23 Allowed Distance Between Segment and Support

Criteria manual

ChkStdElectricalSegmentDistanceSupport (1594)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether connection points of interconnected segments and
support elements keep the required distance to each other. If that does not apply, an
error is reported.
Q-Checker measures the distance between connection points along a straight line, not
along the segment support curve.

Fig. 1: Insufficient distance between segment end and support connection point

Background
Insufficient distances may cause problems during assembly or damage during opera-
tion.

Suggested solution
In CATIA, you can adjust the distance between segment and support as follows:
• Changing the segment route (Fig. 2)

Dassault Systèmes 974 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

• Changing the segment length (Fig. 3)

Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Changing the segment route in the “Route Defini- Fig. 3: Changing the segment length in the
tion” dialog “Segments Definition” dialog

Criterion definition

“Minimum allowed distance” spin box Minimum allowed distance between connec-
tion points of interconnected segments and supports.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 975 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.24 Consistency of Segments in Branchable

Criteria manual

StdElectricalSegmentsConsistencyInBranchable (1595)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether in a bundle segment definition, the end point name of a
segment and the start point name of the next segment are identical. If that does not
apply, an error is reported.

Fig. 1: Correct order of connection points Fig. 2: Incorrect order of connection points

Background
When trying to delete an FT/A view that is not empty, CATIA displays a message
(Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Error message when trying to edit the connection points of an incorrect element

Suggested solution
An incorrect bundle segment has to be deleted and rebuilt. Healing with CATDUA is not
possible.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 976 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Application Tip
Criteria manual

You can produce this error message by opening the bundle segment definition of an
incorrect bundle:
1. Select the bundle.
2. Select the “Branch Definition” tool.

Fig. 4: Editing the “branch definition”

3. In the “Branch Definition” dialog, click the “Bundle Segment Definition” button
(Fig. 5). An error message is displayed as in Fig. 3.

Fig. 5: Opening the “Bundle Segment Definition” in the “Branch Definition” dialog

4. When you dismiss the error message, the “Bundle Segment Definition” dialog is
shown.
The incorrect definition becomes apparent when comparing start and end points of
bundle segments (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 977 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

2.4.7.1.25 Bundle Segments Color

Criteria manual

ChkStdElectricalSegmentsColor (1596)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether bundle segments with a certain color have the required
separation code. If that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
The routing of a harness can be made more clear by using different colors for bundle
segments. When using a wrong separation code, colors in the 3D model may indicate a
routing which is different to the calculated routing.

Fig. 1: Bundle segment color definition in the “Segments Definition” dialog

Suggested solution
To change the separation code, mark the bundle segment, then select “Edit” >
“Properties” > “Electrical”(Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Separation code field in the segment properties

Dassault Systèmes 978 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check parameters

“Table: Mapping of separation codes and colors” value list

• In the “Separation code” column, specify the separation code that is required for
bundle segments with a certain color.
• In the “Color” column, specify the RGB code of the respective color. The RGB code
must be enclosed in parentheses and consists of three number 0 to 255 separated by
comma and without spaces.

Example For red color, add the following value: (255,0,0) (255,0,0)

“Check color of” list box

• “Feature”: Check the segment's own color.
• “Faces”: Check the color of the BRep faces of the segment.
If two or more BRep faces of a segment have different colors, an error is reported. If
no color has been assigned to BRep faces of a segment, the segment will be ignored.
• “Feature and faces”: Check both the segment‘s own color and the color of the
segment‘s BRep faces. If two or more BRep faces of a segment have different colors,
an error is reported. If no color has been assigned to BRep faces of a segment, only
the segment's own color will be checked.

Dassault Systèmes 979 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – Electrical

“Ignore segments if their color is not listed in the table” check box If this option is
Criteria manual

selected, segments segments will be ignored if their color is not specified in the
“Table: Mapping of separation codes and colors value list”.
If this option is selected, segments will be ignored if their color is not specified in the
“Table: Mapping of separation codes and colors value list”.

Healing parameters
“Change the separation code to the required value” The healing function applies the
required separation code to incorrect segments according to the “Table: Mapping of
separation codes and colors” value list.
This healing only works in interactive mode; it has no effect in batch mode.
This healing is not possible if the respective color is listed more than once in the value
list.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

INFO
• The own color of a segment is defined in the object definition (“Edit” > “[Object
name]” > “Definition”).
• The color of BRep faces of a segment is defined in the properties of the respective face
(“Edit” > “Properties”).

Dassault Systèmes 980 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – General

2.4.7.2 General
Criteria manual

2.4.7.2.1 Unlinked Supports in GBN

StdElectricalSupports (1476)

Applicable to CATProduct

Description
This criterion checks whether each support has a link to a bundle segment, which is a
component of a geometrical bundle (GBN). Unlinked supports are rated as incorrect.

Background
The route of a bundle segment can be defined by points, connectors, supports and
given curves and surfaces. After the modification of components, the route of the
harness is recalculated. However, if a support is not linked to a bundle segment, the
support is not taken into account when recalculating the route. This can cause prob-
lems in downstream processes, as the calculated length and resistance values will be
wrong.

Suggested solution
Connect electrical devices to the bundle segment, or delete them from the product.

Fig. 1: Connecting a connector to a segment

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To perform the check correctly, the entire harness has to be loaded in design mode.

Dassault Systèmes 981 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Equipment – General

• Whether a support is integrated into the route of a bundle segment can be recognized
Criteria manual

in the “Route Definition” dialog.

Fig. 2: Instance names of supports and devices that are integrated into the route

• For associativity between segments and branch points, supports or devices, the
“Keep link with selected object” option has to be selected in the CATIA application
settings.
“Tools” > “Options” > “Infrastructure” > “Part Infrastructure” > “General” >
“External References”

Dassault Systèmes 982 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General – General

2.4.8 General
Criteria manual

2.4.8.1 User-Defined Properties Not Applied to Root-Product/Part

StdUserDefPropNotAppliedToCATPart (1358)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether user-defined properties exist in a model, and whether they
have the required property values. If that does not apply, the model is rated as incorrect.

Background
You can assign user-defined properties to a root part or root product, for example
length, width, or weight. These properties can be read out automatically and processed,
for example to generate a bill of materials.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to create missing user-defined properties.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root part or root product, and edit its user-defined
properties in “Edit” > “Properties” > “Product” > “Define other properties”.

Related criteria:
 User Defined Properties Not Applied to Part Component, page 853
 Non-Allowed User-Defined Properties of Root-Product/Part, page 986

Dassault Systèmes 983 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Required properties” value list Specify the required user-defined properties. Specify
name, type and value for every property. You can use Regular Expressions for names
and values.

 NOTE: If the check profile will be used in CATIA sessions with different language
settings, use only the English uppercase type identifiers, for example “LENGTH”
instead of “Länge” in German.

“Required properties mirrored from parameters” value list Specify the names or paths

Dassault Systèmes 984 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

of parameters for which corresponding user-defined properties with the same name,
Criteria manual

type, and value must exist. You can use Regular Expressions. Parameter paths must be
given as Regular Expressions.

Healing settings
“Create” The healing function creates missing properties according to the “Required
properties” value list. Only the following property types can be set: “Integer”, “Real”,
“Boolean”, or “String”.
The healing function also creates missing properties for all parameters that are
mentioned in the “Required properties mirrored from parameters” list and exist in the
checked model.

 NOTE: This healing function is also available for an individually applied healing in the
analysis window. In the analysis window, you can perform further healings.
Note that the replacement values used for the healing function must correspond to the
specified check parameters.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can import properties from a text file or Excel spreadsheet. In a text file,
entries must be separated by tab characters.

Example

Länge» 58,256» Length

Breite» 100» Length
Höhe» 50» Length
Material» 1.0037» String
Benennung» Kulissenstein» String

Dassault Systèmes 985 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.2 Non-Allowed User-Defined Properties of Root-Product/Part

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedUserDefProp (1484)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains user-defined properties with not
allowed names. If so, an error will be reported.

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete not allowed user-defined properties.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Mark the root part or root product, and delete the not
allowed user-defined properties in “Edit” > “Properties” > “Product” > “Define other
properties”.

Related criteria
 User Defined Properties Not Applied to Part Component, page 853
 User-Defined Properties Not Applied to Root-Product/Part, page 983

Dassault Systèmes 986 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Names and values in the list are allowed/not allowed” list box Choose whether the
defined names in the list are allowed or not allowed names.
• If “not allowed” is selected, a checked name must not match any of the expression in
the value list.
• If “allowed” is selected, a checked name must match at least one expression in the
value list.

“Names for user-defined properties” value list List of names for user-defined proper-
ties. The specifications are considered allowed or not allowed, according to the setting
of the “Names in the list are allowed/not allowed” option. You can use Regular Expres-
sions.

“Mark also duplicated user-defined properties” check box If this option is activated,
properties are rated as incorrect if their names are used more than once.

Dassault Systèmes 987 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

“Values for user-defined properties” value list List of values for user-defined proper-
Criteria manual

ties. The specifications are considered allowed or not allowed, according to the setting
of the “Names and values in the list are allowed/not allowed” option. You can use
Regular Expressions.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes any user-defined properties with non-allowed
names or values.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 988 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.3 Deactivated Knowledgeware Relation

Criteria manual

StdInactivatedKweRelations (1303)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether models contain deactivated knowlegdeware relations. If
so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Knowledgeware can be used to integrate checks into the specification tree. These checks
can be started manually or as a background process.

Fig. 1: Knowledgeware Relations in Fig. 2: a. Unresolved Knowledgeware relations, b. deactivated

the specification tree Knowledgeware relations

Suggested solution
Knowledgeware relations can be activated and deactivated on the context menu.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 989 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

Application Tip
Criteria manual

If the Rule Base is deactivated, all following checks are also deactivated.

INFO: Elements with deactivated Knowledgeware relations are marked in the

specification tree with red parentheses on a white circle.

Dassault Systèmes 990 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.4 Unresolved (Non-Synchronized) Knowledgeware Relation

Criteria manual

StdNonSynchronizedKweRelations (1304)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contain unresolved (non-synchronized) knowl-
edgeware relations. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Knowledgeware can be used to integrate checks into the specification tree.
Certain prerequisites must be fulfilled to perform Knowledgeware checks; among
others, the path to the program library must be known, and the keywords must valid. If
not all prerequisites are fulfilled, Knowledgeware checks cannot be performed, and
Knowledgeware relations become unresolved.

Fig. 1: Knowledgeware Relations in Fig. 2: a. Unresolved Knowledgeware relations, b. deactivated

the specification tree Knowledgeware relations

INFO: Elements with unresolved Knowledgeware relations are marked in the

specification tree with an exclamation mark on a yellow circle.

Suggested solution
Inspect the knowledgeware relations and adjust them where needed.

Dassault Systèmes 991 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 992 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.5 Non-Allowed Infinite Lines

Criteria manual

StdNotAllowedInfiniteLines (1471)

Applicable to CATPart, CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether a model or drawing contains infinite lines. Infinite lines
are rated as incorrect.

Background
Infinite lines compromise the handling of models.
• When trying to fit a model with infinite lines to the screen, the geometry will be
displayed at an extremely small scale.
• When exporting data to other CAD systems, it may occur that the geometry cannot be
transferred completely if the receiving system is not able to process infinite lines.

Fig. 1: Display of a model with infinite lines after applying the “Fit All In” function.

Suggested solution
• Replace infinite lines with delimited lines.
• To avoid the problem, make sure that no infinite lines are created, for example as the
result of an intersection between two layers.
• For some components (lines, axes of circles, elongated holes, spheres) it is possible
to set whether infinite lines are to be created (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 993 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Options for creating delimited and infinite lines

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Ignore CAA types” value list Specify the CAA types of elements in which infinite lines
are allowed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip

How to determine CAA element types and Q-Checker Element Types

You can use Q-Checker functions to determine element types:

Dassault Systèmes 994 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

• Read element types in Q-Checker check result (for all document types):
Criteria manual

Perform a check using criterion Permitted Element Types in Model, page 442, for which
the “Allowed types” value list remains empty.
In the analysis window, all elements are listed as incorrect.
Click the “Element info” button, then select an element in the analysis tree. The
“Element info” dialog shows Q-Checker and CAA element types for the selected
element.
• Write element types to an XML file (CATProduct and CATPart):
Prerequisite: The CATIA environment variable TCAQC_SHOW_TOOLS with value
SPECTREETOXML must be set.
In CATIA, click the “Specification tree to XML” button, and select the save location for
the XML file.
Open the XML file in a text editor. XML element names correspond to Q-Checker
element types, and the caaType attribute value corresponds to the CAA element type.

Example The element named “Body.2” has the Q-Checker element type
“BooleanBody”, and its CAA element type is “MechanicalTool”.

...
<BooleanBody AliasName="Body.2" caaType="MechanicalTool">
...

Restoring the original order of creation within a geometrical set

In the CATIA specification tree, right-click the geometrical set and choose “AutoSort”
from the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 995 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.6 Non-Allowed Geometry Scale

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedModelsize (1504)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model has been created with the same geometry scale
setting as in the current CATIA session. If that does not apply, the model is rated as
incorrect.

Background
CATIA provides presets with different geometry scales and tolerance settings for
designing very small and very large parts. Within a CATIA session, existing parts can
only be loaded if their geometry scale matches the current geometry scale setting.
Likewise, it is only possible to add parts to an assembly if both use the same geometry
scale setting. Parts accidentally created using a non-allowed geometry scale cannot be
processed any further and must be created again using the correct geometry scale
setting.

TIP: This criterion is intended for use in batch mode. When models are opened interac-
tively, CATIA checks on opening the model whether the geometry scale settings are
consistent. If they are not consistent, the model cannot be opened (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Error message on opening a model with a different geometry scale

Suggested solution
To avoid the problem, make sure that the CATIA session uses the correct geometry
scale setting before starting a new design. To do this, choose “Tools” > “Options” >
“General” > “Parameters and Measurement” > “Scale”(Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 996 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: CATIA geometry scale setting

Related criteria
 Geometry Scale, page 73

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Changing the geometry scale should be restricted using administrative settings.
• For a changed geometry scale setting to take effect, quit and restart the CATIA
session.

Dassault Systèmes 997 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.7 Non-Allowed Knowledgeware Relation Check Status

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedKnowledgeStatus (1542)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether the status of Knowledgeware relation checks is invalid. If
so, an error will be reported.

Background

Fig. 1: Valid expert checks (green light) and invalid Fig. 2: Unresolved expert checks (curl symbol)
expert checks (red light)

Suggested solution
• Use the Check Analysis tool to identify components that cause an error (Fig. 3). Click
“Check Analysis” on the “Knowledge” toolbar.

Dassault Systèmes 998 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Identifying a component that does not conform to an expert rule

• Modified expert rules (“black” state) or have been imported from another model
(“NotSolved” state), the rule base has to be updated.
To resolve the rule base regardless of its state, mark the rulebase and choose “Edit” >
“Object” > “Manual Complete Solve” or the corresponding command on the context
menu (Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Resolving expert checks

Dassault Systèmes 999 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Red” / “Black” / “NotSolved” / “InteropValidity” check boxes If these options are acti-
vated, the respective states of Knowledgeware relation checks are not allowed. To allow
a certain state, deselect the respective option.
The “green”/“valid state” is always allowed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1000 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.8 Non-Allowed Models/Catalogs/... in Session

Criteria manual

StdNonAllowedDocInSession (1560)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess

Description
This criterion checks whether there are models, catalogs and other documents in the
current CATIA session which must not be used. If so, an error will be reported.

Background

Example Filenames are converted to converted to uppercase characters when saving

documents if the “Uppercase for document names” is activated in “Tools” >
“Options” > “General” > “Document”. References to catalogs and to other documents
are also converted to uppercase characters. This setting may cause problems, as
Windows and UNIX operating systems and application software do not handle upper-
case characters in the same way.

Fig. 1: Model names in uppercase characters in a CATIA session

Suggested solution
Closed any non-allowed models, catalogs etc. in the session.
Referenced catalogs are not automatically unloaded when closing a model. It may be
necessary to quit and restart the current CATIA session.

Dassault Systèmes 1001 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Non-allowed model names” value list Specify the names of models, catalogs and
other documents that must not be loaded in a session. Specify filenames with their
extensions. You can use Regular Expressions.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1002 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General

2.4.8.9 Non-Allowed Path for Linked Document

Criteria manual

StdMethNonAllowedLinkedDocuments (1599)

Applicable to CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATProcess, CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether document links point to an allowed path and file name. If
that does not apply, an error is reported.

 NOTE: A CATIA PX1 license is required to use this criterion.

If no PX1 license is available, a general error is reported.

Related criteria
In Q-Checker for V5 2.x, the name of this criterion had been used for a different crite-
rion. The other criterion has been renamed in Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.1:
 Non-Allowed Path for Product Components, page 859

Criterion definition

Check parameters
“Ignore links in linked documents” check box If this option is selected, links in linked
documents are ignored.
If this option is not selected, links in linked documents will be checked.

Dassault Systèmes 1003 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – General
Criteria manual

Example Links between models are visualized on the CATIA Desk:

If option “Ignore links in linked documents” is selected, a check of Part3 includes only
the link from Part3 to Part2. If this option is not selected, a check of Part3 also includes
the links from Part2 to Part1a, and from Part1a to Part0.

“Ignore links to missing documents” check box If this option is selected, links are
ignored if the respective linked document is missing. If this option is selected, links are
ignored if the respective linked document is missing.

“Allowed path name for linked documents” value list Specify allowed paths for linked
documents. You can use Regular Expressions.

“Check also file names” check box If this option is selected, the expressions in
“Allowed path name for linked documents” are treated as path with file names. If this
option is not selected, the expressions are treated as paths without file names.

“Allowed relative path name for linked documents” check box with list box If this
option is selected, linked documents must be located in specific directories, depending
on the setting in the list box:
• “Base directory”: The checked model and the linked models must be located in the
same directory.
• “Base directory and subdirectories (all levels)”: The linked models must be located in the
same directory as the checked model, or in any subdirectory of this directory.
If this option is selected, the expressions in “Allowed relative path for linked docu-
ments” apply to the base directory and its subdirectories.

“Allowed number of linked documents” check box with spin boxes If this option is
selected, the number of linked documents must be in the specified value range. Specify
the minimum (“min”) and maximum (“max”) allowed number of linked documents.
Links in child documents are counted, too.
If this option is not selected, any number of linked documents is allowed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1004 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Analysis

2.4.9 Analysis
Criteria manual

2.4.9.1 Non-Allowed OCTREE Tetrahedron Mesh Element Type

StdNonAllowedOCTREEElmType (1388)

Applicable to CATAnalysis

Description
This criterion checks whether the elements of the OCTREE tetrahedron meshes are of
the required type (linear or parabolic). If that does not apply, the affected elements are
rated as incorrect.

Background
For meshing parts in a FEM-analysis, there are two types of tetrahedron-elements,
linear and parabolic.
For linear tetrahedron elements, the tension within an element is constant (Fig. 1). This
means, tension is distributed equally across the element. If the tension in a neigh-
bouring element is different, analysis results may be incorrect, especially for parts with
thin walls.
For parabolic tetrahedron elements, the tension within an element is linear (Fig. 2). The
calculated deformation between adjacent nodes is linear. The deformation between
adjacent nodes of an element is calculated as a parabola. Using parabolic tetrahedron
elements, the tension can be quantified with a global error of less than 10%.

Fig. 1: Meshing with linear tetrahedron elements

Fig. 2: Meshing with parabolic tetrahedron elements

Dassault Systèmes 1005 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Methodology – Analysis

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

Set the required meshing type.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Not allowed element type” list box Specify the not allowed element type.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Linear tetrahedron elements are mainly used for checking restraints and loads. In this
case, no tension or deformation analysis is possible. To get quantitative information on
tension and deformation, change to parabolic tetrahedron elements.

 NOTE: To show the element type of an OCTREE tetrahedron mesh in CATIA, right-click
the element and choose “Name” > “Definition” > “Global” from the context menu.

Dassault Systèmes 1006 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features

2.5 Geometry
Criteria manual

2.5.1 Curve Features

Checking curves and wires

In the specification tree of a CATIA model, curve features are displayed, but not their
components (wires, curves and segments). Q-Checker has access to these components
in CATIA and can check their properties.
The two criteria groups within the curve features criteria group contain criteria with
similar functions, but for different elements:
“Curves” folder: Criteria for checking the internal properties and components of single
curves, each of which is described by a single formula (that is spline, circle, line).
“Wires” folder: Criteria for checking the properties of multiple curves as a whole, which
are connected to each other (polylines, polycurves)

Examples
• Criteria “Tiny Curve” and “Tiny Curve Segment” in the “Curves” folder check whether
a curve is a tiny curve itself or whether the curve contains tiny segments, respectively.
Criterion “Tiny Wire” in the “Wires” folder checks whether a wire as a whole is too
small.
• The continuity criteria in the “Curves” folder check whether curves are internally
continuous.
The continuity criteria in the “Wires” folder check whether the transitions between
curves in a wire are continuous.

Dassault Systèmes 1007 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features
Criteria manual

Structure of wires
In CATIA, wires are structured as follows (Fig. 1):
• A wire element consists of multiple domains if it has gaps that are larger than the
merging distance.
• A domain can consist of one or more curves.
• A curve can consist of one or more segments.

Fig. 1: Internal structure of a wire

Dassault Systèmes 1008 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features

2.5.1.1 Curves
Criteria manual

2.5.1.1.1 Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG]

GeoTopWireCurveContPoint (1256)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a wireframe curve, consisting of several segments, is
continuous in point, that is does not contain gaps or overlaps. The existence of discon-
tinuities in points is rated as fault.

Background
In CATIA, large curve segment gaps cannot be created. They occur only when imported
from other CAD systems.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Distance greater than” spin box Specify the maximum allowed distance between adja-
cent end points of curves. There is a large curve segment gap if the distance between
end adjacent points is greater than specified.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible,
apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this
criterion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1009 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features

2.5.1.1.2 Non-Tangent Curve Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NT]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveContTangent (1259)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the transitions between curve segments of a curve are
continuous in tangent. If that does not apply, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Angle greater than” spin box Maximum allowed angle between the tangents of adja-
cent curve segments. If the angle is greater than specified, the transition between
segments is considered tangent-discontinuous.

“Angle less than” spin box Angle between the tangents of adjacent curve segments
above which a tangent discontinuity is considered to be intended by design and not
rated as incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are
possible, apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the
relevance of this criterion and the assessment of its results.
• To allow for a selective check result, angles should be limited to a practical range.

Dassault Systèmes 1010 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.3 Non-Smooth Curve Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NS]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveContCurvature (1260)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the transitions between the segments of a curve are
curvature-continuous. If that does not apply, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.

Background
Given both point and tangent continuity, curvature continuity means equal curvature
radiuses at the intersection of curve segments (where point/tangent continuity are
given) and therefore the harmonious transition between two curve segments.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Curvature ratio greater than” spin box Maximum allowed curvature ratio between
adjacent curve segments. If the ratio is greater than specified, the transition is consid-
ered curvature-discontinuous.
Definition of the curvature ratio f depending on curvature radiuses R1 and R2 of the
curve segments:
2 ⋅ R1 – R2
f = ----------------------------
-
R1 + R2

“Curvature ratio less than” spin box Curvature ratio between adjacent curve segments
above which a curvature discontinuity is considered to be intended by design and not
rated as incorrect.

“Limit value for infinite curvature radius” spin box Threshold above which a curvature
radius is considered infinite and a curve segment is considered straight.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1011 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Application Tip
Criteria manual

In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible,
apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this
criterion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1012 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.4 Tiny Curve [G-CU-TI]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveMiniElement (1258)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of curves is within the specified non-allowed
value range. If so, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.
This check is intended to identify tiny curve elements. Using an optional parameter, you
can also define a value range that does not begin at zero.

Background
Topological curves (wires) can consist of multiple curves. Elements whose size is below
the specified minimum may become invalid, may degenerate or cause gaps after opera-
tions such as scaling or offset, after data transfer into a less precise system or after
further processing (NC). Reworking such elements means a substantial effort. These
elements often occur involuntarily, not only through filleting but also through closing
mechanisms during bridging of small gaps or by overlapping features or entities (Fig. 1,
Fig. 2). (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)
These elements may also occur when intersecting faces that are badly partitioned.

Fig. 1: Tiny curve at a gap Fig. 2: Tiny curve at an overlap

Suggested solution
Replace curves containing mini-elements with approximated curves that have a
different number of segments or a different partitioning. If possible, you can also relimit
adjacent curves as another remedy.

Dassault Systèmes 1013 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Length greater than” check box with spin box Curves are considered incorrect if their
length is not within the allowed value range.
• If the lower limit of the value range is zero, deselect this option.
• If the lower limit is not zero, select this option and specify its value in the spin box.

“Length less than” spin box Minimum allowed length of curves. Elements shorter than
specified are rated as incorrect, except those elements which are allowed due to an acti-
vated “Length greater than” option.
A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CAD system tolerance.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1014 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To check for mini-elements, deselect option “Length greater than” option, and specify
in the “Length less than” spin box the length below which elements are considered as
mini-elements.
• To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances of
this criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every instance.
 Multiple criterion instances: Administration manual, 2.2.2 Criterion instances –
Using criteria more than once
• As elements cannot be smaller than the straight line between its end points, two
measurement points are sufficient, one at each end. A too large number increases
computing time.

Dassault Systèmes 1015 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.5 Tiny Curve Segment [G-CU-TI]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveMiniSegment (1257)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of curve segments is within the specified non-
allowed value range. If so, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.
This check is intended to identify tiny curve segments.

Dassault Systèmes 1016 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Length greater than” check box with spin box Curves are considered incorrect if the
length of one or more curve segments is not within the allowed value range.
Deselect this option if the non-allowed value range begins at zero.
Select this option if the lower limit of the non-allowed value range is not zero. Specify
the desired value in the spin box.

“Length less than” spin box Minimum allowed length of curve segments. As an excep-
tion, elements can be allowed by parameter “Length greater than”.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment with respect to properties such as curvature and size of the element. The
number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1017 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are

possible, apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the
relevance of this criterion and the assessment of its results.
• To check for mini-elements, deselect option “Length greater than” option, and specify
in the “Length less than” spin box the length below which elements are considered as
mini-elements.
• To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances
(clones) of this criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every
instance. Select the “Length greater than” option if the lower limit of the non-allowed
value range is not zero.
• To determine the length of a segment, two measurement points (one at each end) are
sufficient, as elements cannot be smaller than the straight line between its end points.
A too large number of measurement points increases computing time.

Dassault Systèmes 1018 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.6 Fragmented Curve [G-CU-FG]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveSegmentNumber (1276)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of segments in curves is greater than speci-
fied. If so, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.

Background
An unreasonably high number of segments within a curve is generally a sign of unfavor-
able complexity of a curve (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline).

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Number of segments greater than” spin box Number of segments above which a
curve is considered highly fragmented and therefore incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are
possible, apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the
relevance of this criterion and the assessment of its results.
• The allowed number of segments in a curve depends on its complexity and size. Note
the requirements or restriction for further processing with other software.

Dassault Systèmes 1019 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.7 Small Curve Radius of Curvature [G-CU-CR]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveMiniCurvatureRadius (1298)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the curvature radius of curves in curve features is less
than the specified value. If so, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.

Background
Surfaces are often based on curves. Small radiuses of creation curves appear once
again in the resulting surfaces (Fig. 1).
Small curvature radiuses may cause problems with applications such as:
• Creating offset curves or offset surfaces
• Generating FEM meshes
• NC machining (Fig. 2). Even if the milling software can avoid the violation of faces,
form fit cannot be guaranteed, e.g. for deep drawing tools.
Problems may occur when creating an offset curve or offset surface from this curve.

Fig. 1: Small curvature radius Fig. 2: Surface region that cannot be milled,
marked in red

Suggested solution
Change or replace curves with too small curvature radiuses.

Dassault Systèmes 1020 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Curvature radius less than” spin box Specify the smallest allowed curvature radius.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment with respect to properties such as curvature and size of the element. The
number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, you can analyze the curvature of curves, faces and solids in various ways:
• Curves: “Curvature analysis (Porcupine analysis)”
• Faces and Solids: “Surfacic Curvature Analysis”

Dassault Systèmes 1021 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Both functions are available in the workbenches “Generative Shape Design 2” and
Criteria manual

“FreeStyle Shaper” on the “Shape Analysis” toolbar.

Dassault Systèmes 1022 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.8 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-CU-IK]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveMultiNodeInNurbs (1299)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a curve has knots that are too close to each other. If so,
the affected curves are rated as incorrect.

Background
NURBS and B-Spline curves are defined as knot vectors. The knot vector defines,
among other things, the number of curve segments and the continuity at the intersec-
tions between curve segments. The knot vector is a sequence of real numbers. Knots
can coincide, which is called multiple weighting of knots or multiple knots. When trans-
ferred to a system with larger tolerances, knots that are too close to each other can
become “multiple knots”, which can result in undesirable changes to the continuity of
the curve. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)

Fig. 1: Example of multiple knots

Suggested solution
Create a new curve with a suitable distance between knots.

Dassault Systèmes 1023 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance between internal knots greater than” spin box Maximum distance in which
knots are considered as multiple knots and therefore allowed.
NURBS curves are considered incorrect if the distance between knots is in the value
range above this value.

“Distance between internal knots less than” spin box Minimum allowed distance
between adjacent knots of a NURBS curve.
NURBS curves are considered incorrect if the distance between internal knots is in the
value range below this value. Knots in the tolerance range for multiple knots are
exempt.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1024 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.9 Wavy Planar Curve [G-CU-WV]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurveWaviness (1327)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether curve segments of planar curves have more inflection
points than specified. If so, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.

INFO: This criterion has been adopted from VDA 4955 Version 1 for upward compati-
bility, but has become less important in practice.

Background
The waviness of a curve is characterized by the number of sign changes (inflection
points) of the curve's curvature. Wavy curves are often unintentional and often critical
for following operation, e.g. offset creation (cf. SASIG PDQ Guidelines). A wavy curve
extracted from a surface indicates that the surface itself is faulty (wavy, too many
segments).

Fig. 1: Curve with inflection points

Suggested solution
Analyze the tangential and base point conditions of the curve, and correct or replace
them. In case of intersection curves, review the original surfaces.

Dassault Systèmes 1025 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Number of turning points per segment greater than” spin box Maximum allowed
number of turning points per segment. If the number of turning points is greater than
this value, the curve is considered wavy and rated as incorrect.

“Number of turning points per N segment greater than” spin box Maximum number
of turning points in a segment chain. If the number of turning points is greater than this
value, the curve is considered wavy and rated as incorrect.

“with N equal to” spin box Number of segments in a chain of segments.

“Limit value for infinite curvature radius” spin box Threshold above which a curvature
radius is considered infinite and a curve segment is considered straight.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.

Dassault Systèmes 1026 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1027 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.10 High-Degree Curve [G-CU-HD]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurvePolyDegree (1343)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the polynomial degree of curve segments is greater than
specified. If so, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.

Background
The polynomial degree of curve segments determines a curve's number of degrees of
freedom The higher the polynomial degree, the more complex is a curve. Curves with a
high polynomial degree are susceptible to undesirable curvature and must be approxi-
mated before being transferred to another system. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)

Fig. 1: Curve segment with a polynomial degree of Fig. 2: Curve segment with a polynomial degree of
3 15

Suggested solution
• Replace faulty curves with an approximated or newly constructed curve.
• To avoid the problem, create complex curves using separate curves of a lower
polynomial degree.

Dassault Systèmes 1028 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Polynomial degree greater than” spin box Specify the maximum allowed polynomial
degree.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1029 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

2.5.1.1.11 Linear Curves with Polynomial Degree Greater than 1 [G-CU-ID]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireCurvePolynomialDegree1 (1376)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the polynomial degree of linear curve segments is greater
than one. If so, the affected curves are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
If curves and curve segments with a polynomial degree greater than 1 are within a spec-
ified tolerance, they can be represented by a line or by a curve with a polynomial degree
of 1.
Polynomial curves with a too high polynomial degree may cause errors when used by
adjacent elements or when being translated for other systems. After translation, the
resulting curve may expose strong curvature or self-intersection. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guide-
line)

Suggested solution
Replace the curve or curve segment with a straight line, or reduce its polynomial degree
to one.

Dassault Systèmes 1030 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance for linear segments” spin box Maximum allowed deviation of a curve from
its best fit straight line, at which the curve is still considered a straight line.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• Polynomial degree = order of the element – 1

Dassault Systèmes 1031 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Curves
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Polynomial degree of a curve

• To analyze the polynomial degree of a curve in , click “Geometric Analysis” on the

“Analyze” toolbar (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Geometrical analysis of a curve with polynomial degree 6

Dassault Systèmes 1032 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

2.5.1.2 Wires
Criteria manual

2.5.1.2.1 Large Curve Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG]

GeoTopWireContPoint (1261)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the elements of a topological curve are point-continuous,
that is whether the curve has neither gaps nor overlaps. Curves with point discontinu-
ities are rated as incorrect.

Background
The primary type of continuity is point continuity, that is the transition of curves and
curve segments without any gaps or overlaps. A discontinuity endangers follow-up
operations that build upon the unity of curve paths. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)

Fig. 1: Point continuity/discontinuity

Suggested solution
To remove a discontinuity, relimit the curves to one another. Extending or shortening
the existing elements is preferred to inserting an extra element.

Dassault Systèmes 1033 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance greater than” spin box Maximum allowed distance between curves for the
transition to be considered point-continuous.
A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CAD system tolerance.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1034 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

2.5.1.2.2 Non-Tangent Curves (G1 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NT]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireContTangent (1265)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the elements of a topological curve are tangent-contin-
uous, i.e. whether the curve is kink-free. Curves with tangent-discontinuous transitions
are rated as incorrect.

Background
Given point-continuity, tangent continuity or normal continuity means the smooth tran-
sition between curves without a change in the tangential angle. In the resulting product,
tangent discontinuities are generally visible and can be felt. In a fully rounded curve,
this generally occurs unintentionally. However, normal discontinuities can also be used
intentionally, for example with chamfers. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)

Fig. 1: Tangent continuity

Suggested solution
Interactively correct the curves by recreating them with identical tangential conditions,
or round off with an additional curve with suitable tangential specifications. (cf. SASIG
PDQ Guideline)

Dassault Systèmes 1035 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle greater than” spin box Maximum allowed angle between the tangents of adja-
cent curves. If the angle is greater than specified, the transition between curves is
considered tangent-discontinuous.

“Angle less than” spin box Angle between the tangents of adjacent curves above which
a tangent discontinuity is considered to be intended by design and not rated as incor-
rect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To allow for a selective check result, angles should be limited to a practical range.

Dassault Systèmes 1036 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

2.5.1.2.3 Non-Smooth Curves (G2 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NS]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireContCurvature (1266)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the elements of a curve are curvature-continuous. Curves
with curvature-discontinuous transitions are rated as incorrect.

Background
Curvature continuity means equal curvature radiuses at the intersection of curves
(where point/tangent continuity are given) and therefore the harmonious transition
between two curves. Curvature continuity of curves is normally only required by the
contour description of component parts with special function (for example kinematic
translations) or by stylistic elements. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)

Suggested solution
Align the according elements by adjusting the curvature conditions, or edit new connec-
tion elements with consideration for the curvature conditions.

Dassault Systèmes 1037 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Curvature ratio greater than” spin box Maximum allowed curvature ratio between
adjacent curves. If the ratio is greater than specified, the transition is considered curva-
ture-discontinuous.

“Curvature ratio less than” spin box Curvature ratio between adjacent curves above
which a curvature discontinuity is considered to be intended by design and not rated as
incorrect.
If the value for this parameter is chosen too large, the check takes longer and may
detect a large number of discontinuities, many of them being intended.

“Limit value for infinite curvature radius” spin box Threshold above which a curvature
radius is considered infinite and a curve segment is considered straight.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Curvature ratio
Curvature continuity is calculated using the curvature ration in the intersection point of
two segments.
The curvature ratio is calculated as follows:
2 ⋅ R1 – R2
f = ----------------------------
-
R1 + R2

Where f is the curvature ratio, and R1 and R2 are the curvature radiuses.
If the curvatures to the right and to the left of the intersection are equal, the curvature
ratio is zero. Absolute curvature continuity is given for a test value of “0”. Because a
certain degree of tolerance is necessary for this calculation, a curvature ratio between
“0” and “1” can preliminarily be considered curvature-continuous. If necessary, the
value has to be adjusted towards a lower value.

Dassault Systèmes 1038 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

2.5.1.2.4 Tiny Wire [G-CU-TI]

Criteria manual

ChkGeoTopWireMiniElement (1273)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of wires/curve paths is less than the specified
value. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Elements whose size is below the specified minimum may become invalid, may degen-
erate or cause gaps after operations such as scaling or offset, after data transfer into a
less precise system or after further processing (NC). Reworking such elements means a
substantial effort. These elements often occur involuntarily, due to filleting or due to
“closing mechanisms” when bridging small gaps or overlapping features. (cf. SASIG
PDQ Guideline)

Fig. 1: Wire (curve path)

Suggested solution
Replace mini-elements by relimiting or extrapolating the base geometry.

Dassault Systèmes 1039 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Length greater than” check box with spin box Curves are considered incorrect if their
length is not within the allowed value range.
Deselect this option if the non-allowed value range begins at zero.
Select this option if the lower limit of the non-allowed value range is not zero. Specify
the desired value in the spin box.

“Length less than” spin box Minimum allowed length of curves. As an exception,
elements can be allowed by parameter “Length greater than”.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Dassault Systèmes 1040 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip
• To check for mini-elements, deselect the “Length greater than” option, and specify in
the “Length less than” spin box the length below which elements are considered as
mini-elements.
• To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances
(clones) of this criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every
instance. Select the “Length greater than” option if the lower limit of the non-allowed
value range is not zero.
• Two measurement points are sufficient to determine mini-elements (start and end
point). If the straight distance between the end points is less than the specified value,
a bounding box around the element is created and compared with the value.
A substantial increase in the number of measurement points will increase processing
time.

Dassault Systèmes 1041 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

2.5.1.2.5 Embedded Wires and Points [G-CU-EM]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireIdenticalElement (1282)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a curve completely overlaps with another curve. If so, the
affected curve is rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
A model may contain identical or almost identical elements after performing certain
geometrical operations or copying external geometries into the model, thus increasing
memory usage and cancelling out the validity of the affected elements (Fig. 1). Identical
elements may prevent the automatic recognition of continuous curve paths and cause
NC and FEM operations to fail. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)
Elements are partly identical if they completely overlap with part of a larger element
(Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Identical elements Fig. 2: Partly identical elements

Suggested solution
Delete or replace redundant elements. You may need to distinguish between elements
in use and redundant elements.

Dassault Systèmes 1042 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance less than or equal to” spin box Maximum distance between corresponding
points on two separate wires within which the two curves are considered identical.
If this tolerance is exceeded in at least one point, the wires are considered not identical.
A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CAD system tolerance.

“Check also for partially identical” check box If this option is selected, wires are also
rated as incorrect if they overlap partly.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1043 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

Application Tip
Criteria manual

The number of measurement point should be higher than for the detection of mini-
elements, as two measurement point are not sufficient to describe the actual shape.

INFO
• Elements are considered identical if the corresponding points on both elements are
within the given tolerance from each other.

Toleranz

• Elements are partially identical if one element is situated completely within a larger
element. All points on one element must coincide with the corresponding points on
the other element within the given tolerance.

• Elements are not identical if none of the two elements is situated completely within
the other. Each element has at least one point without a corresponding point on the
other element within the tolerance.

Dassault Systèmes 1044 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

2.5.1.2.6 Self-Intersecting Wire [G-CU-IS]

Criteria manual

GeoTopWireSelfIntersection (1271)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether wires intersect with themselves. If so, the affected
elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Self-intersection means that a curve has at least one intersection or tangent point with
itself (Fig. 1). Self-intersection can cause problems for geometrical follow-up operations
such as offset creation, surface creation or NC programming.
Typical sources:
• Intersection of a wire and a 3D surface element that has very small radiuses or self-
intersections.
• Projection errors

Fig. 1: Offset curve with self-intersection

Suggested solution
Replace any incorrect curves.

Dassault Systèmes 1045 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance for intersection point” spin box Minimum allowed distance between two
points of a twisting wire that is not yet a self-intersection.
A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CAD system tolerance.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Ignore intersection points in narrow regions” check box If this option is selected,
regions are ignored if they are separated by an intersection point and their overall width
is less than the value given in the “Distance less than” field (Fig. 2).

Dassault Systèmes 1046 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – Wires
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: a. The width of the region is less than the tolerance for narrow regions; b. The width of the region is
greater than the tolerance

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
A self-intersecting wire has been extracted from a surface indicates that the surface
itself is faulty or contains a projection error.

Dassault Systèmes 1047 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – General

2.5.1.3 General
Criteria manual

2.5.1.3.1 Multi-Domain Curve [G-CU-MU]

GeoWireMultiDomain (1255)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether curves consist of multiple domains. If so, the affected
elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
A Multi-Domain element is a geometry element consisting of multiple separate regions.
The element has only one common name.
Multi-domain elements are created if a gap or an overlapping is larger than a certain
value. This value either is the system tolerance or has been specified by the designer.
After operations such as intersections or joins, the topology may have large gaps and
therefore consist of more than one domain. Not all functions can handle multi domain
elements. Subsequent design changes may have unexpected results.

Fig. 1: Check connexity during the join operation Fig. 2: Extruding a curve with two domains

Suggested solution
• Change the input elements so that the result is unambiguous.
• To avoid the problem when creating intersection, use faces instead of planes. For
joins the system tolerance should be used.

Dassault Systèmes 1048 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Curve Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
When an operation results in a multi-domain segment, the “Multi-Result Management”
dialog is displayed (Fig. 3).
Choose one of the following actions to proceed:
• “Yes”: Filter one element
• “No”: Leave the result unchanged

Fig. 3: “Multi-Result Management” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 1049 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2 Solid/Surface Features

Criteria manual

When exporting solids using a neutral interface such as STEP, a so-called BRep
(Boundary Representation) is transferred. A BRep is the representation of a solid using
the faces describing its surface. These faces are based on surfaces and boundary
curves. Therefore the quality criteria of volumes also must be considered for solids.

2.5.2.1 Surfaces
Surfaces are the base elements of models and limited using simple boundary curves.
Surfaces are usually the base element for faces with more complex boundary curves.
The contours of surfaces may exceed the contour of the actual face or model. Surfaces
may consist of several segments, which are called Patches.

2.5.2.1.1 Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG]

GeoSolidSurfaceContPoint (1167)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether surface segments are point-continuous within the speci-
fied tolerance. If that does not apply, an error is reported.
This criterion checks only borders of segments within surfaces.
 To check the continuity between different surfaces see Large Face Gaps (G0
Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG], page 1166

Background
Adjacent segments of a surface are point-continuous if their border intersect at a border
without any gaps or overlaps (Fig. 1). The point-continuity of surfaces is important, as
they form the base geometry for faces and intersection curves.

Fig. 1: Surface consisting of 4 segments

Dassault Systèmes 1050 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance greater than” spin box Maximum allowed distance between adjacent
segment borders for which segments are considered point-continuous.
This value should not exceed the CAD system tolerance, as segments with larger
distances form no valid surface.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Check for parameter deviation” check box If this option is selected, the deviation of
geometrical parameters is checked additionally.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1051 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Application Tip
In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible,
apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this
criterion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1052 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.2 Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NT]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceContTangent (1168)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether adjoining segments of a surface are not normal-contin-
uous. If so, an error will be reported.

Background
Normal-continuity or tangent continuity means the smooth transitions between surface
segments (patches) without a change in the tangential angle. Surfaces that have not
been canonically described are subject to calculations tolerances of the CAD system,
and therefore normal discontinuities are not uncommon.

Fig. 1: Normal continuity

Related criteria
 To detect normal deviations between adjacent surfaces, a topology has to be checked.
See criterion Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT], page 1170

Dassault Systèmes 1053 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle greater than” spin box Surface segments are not tangent-continuous if the
angle between surface normals at a common edge of two segments is greater than the
specified value.

“Angle less than” spin box Surface segments are not tangent-continuous if the angle
between surface normals at a common edge of two segments is less than the specified
value.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Dassault Systèmes 1054 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

“Check for isoparameter tangency deviation” check box If this option is selected, the
Criteria manual

tangent deviation in a measurement point (and the projected measurement point of the
adjacent patch) with respect to the direction of the isoparametrical curves is addition-
ally checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Application Tip
• In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are
possible, apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the
relevance of this criterion and the assessment of its results.
• As defined in SASIG PDQ/VDA 4955 V2, a calculation error of 1° is allowed for Class B
CAD systems, and 0.1° for Class A CAD systems. A smaller test value makes no sense,
because the most CAD Systems have no higher precision. When demanding a higher
resolution than a CAD system is capable of, additional expenses may be claimed for
the construction.

Dassault Systèmes 1055 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.3 Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NS]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceContCurvature (1169)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether adjoining surface segments are curvature-continuous. If
that does not apply, an error is reported.

Background
Curvature continuity of surface segments means identical curvature radiuses for both
segments at segment borders, and therefore the smooth transition between segments.
Point-continuity of surfaces is important especially for visual appearance, as surfaces
form the base geometry for faces.
If no curvature continuity is given (only normal continuity), a light reflection line is
formed at the segment border. The resulting reflections have an impact on the visual
impression of the face. Curvature continuity results in uniform reflections of a surface.
This criterion checks only borders of segments within surfaces.
 To check the continuity between different surfaces see Non-Smooth Faces (G2
Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS], page 1174.
Note that contour edges can also be designed intentionally to have a desired effect.

Fig. 1: Curvature continuity with light reflection line Fig. 2: Curvature continuity

Dassault Systèmes 1056 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Curvature ratio greater than” spin box Maximum allowed curvature ratio between
adjacent curves. If the ratio is greater than specified, the transition is considered curva-
ture-discontinuous.
Definition of the curvature ratio f depending on curvature radiuses R1 and R2 of the
curve segments:
2 ⋅ R1 – R2
f = ----------------------------
-
R1 + R2

Dassault Systèmes 1057 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

“Curvature ratio less than” spin box Curvature ratio between adjacent curve segments
Criteria manual

above which a curvature discontinuity is considered to be intended by design and not

rated as incorrect.

“Limit value for infinite curvature radius” spin box Threshold above which a curvature
radius is considered infinite and a curve segment is considered straight.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Dassault Systèmes 1058 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are

possible, apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the
relevance of this criterion and the assessment of its results.
• Curvature continuity is calculated using the curvature ration in the intersection point
of two segments. The curvature ratio is calculated in a number of measurement
points using the following formula:
2 ⋅ R1 – R2
f = ----------------------------
-
R1 + R2

Where f is the curvature ratio, and R1 and R2 are the curvature radiuses.
If the curvatures to the right and to the left of the intersection are equal, the curvature
ratio is zero. Absolute curvature continuity is given for a test value of 0. Because a
certain degree of tolerance is necessary for this calculation, a curvature ratio between
0 and 1 can preliminarily be considered curvature-continuous. If necessary, the value
has to be adjusted towards a lower value.

Dassault Systèmes 1059 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.4 Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceMiniElement (1163)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the size of surface segments is in a non-allowed range. If
so, an error will be reported.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Surface segments are mini-elements if their extension in both parameter directions is
less than specified Surface segments are narrow segments if their extension is less than
specified in only one parameter direction.
Surfaces whose size is below the specified minimum may become invalid, may degen-
erate or cause gaps after operations such as scaling or offset, after data transfer into a
less precise system or after further processing. Reworking such elements means a
substantial effort. Furthermore, mini-elements increase memory consumption and the
risk of discontinuities. Tiny elements are often created by automatisms of the system,
unnoticed by the user. One of these automatisms is the automatic closing of gaps
during data transfer from external systems.

Fig. 1: Mini-element in a surface

Suggested solution
Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.

Dassault Systèmes 1060 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Compute size with” list box Select the measure for determining the size:
• “Area of face:”
• “Boundary length”
Corresponding to this setting, the values in spin boxes “Size greater than” and “Size
less than” are interpreted as area or length values.

“Size greater than” and “Size less than” spin boxes Specify the non-allowed value
range for the surface size.

Example: Checking for tiny elements

• Set the “Size greater than” value to 0. In the “Size less than” field, set the upper limit
above which elements are not considered as tiny elements. Tiny elements, whose size
is below the value in the “Size less than” field, are rated as incorrect.
• To perform an additional check on (less critical) mini-elements, specify a range that
adjoins the upper limit of the range for very critical mini-elements.
To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances
(clones) of this criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every
instance.

“Mark also if extension in one parameter direction is within the specified size range
(narrow surface)” check box If this option is selected, narrow surface segments, which

Dassault Systèmes 1061 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

are smaller than the specified in only one dimension (u or v), are also rated as incorrect.
Criteria manual

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Healing parameters
Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
Select this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window. The healing
function deletes mini-elements and closes the gap by extrapolation.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1062 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.5 Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA], [G-SU-RN]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceMiniSegment (1164)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model geometry contains narrow surface segments. If
so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
The criterion detects the following types of narrow surface segments:
• Narrow surface segments [G-SU-NA] are too narrow in either direction compared to
the specified value.
• Relative narrow surface segments [G-SU-RN] are too narrow compared to a
neighboring segment, because the length ratio in either direction is smaller than the
specified ratio.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
• Narrow surface segments [G-SU-NA]:
Mini-elements of surfaces are patches that are smaller than specified in at least one
parameter direction. After transferring a model to a less precise system, these
elements may become invalid, may degenerate and become invalid, or cause gaps in
the topology when they are suppressed or deleted. Reworking such elements means a
substantial effort.
Furthermore, mini-elements increase memory consumption and the risk of
discontinuities. Tiny elements are often created by automatisms of the system,
unnoticed by the user. One of these automatisms is the automatic closing of gaps
during data transfer from external systems. Mini segments usually lead to mini
patches during surface operations in the processing wireframe.
• Relative narrow neighboring segments [G-SU-RN]:
The length ratio of neighboring segment borders (in the same parameter direction
and in the same surface) should not be too small, for example not less than 1:100.
Such ratios indicate poor segmentation and increase the effort when reworking the
model (Fig. 1).

Dassault Systèmes 1063 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Relative patch size

Suggested solution
Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.

Dassault Systèmes 1064 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Size less than” spin box Minimum allowed segment width Patches will be considered
faulty if they are smaller than the specified value. This value is only relevant if option
“Check absolute size” option is selected.

“Check absolute size” check box If this option is selected, the geometry is checked for
narrow surface segments [G-SU-NA].

“Relation to neighbour segment less than 1 to” spin box Minimum allowed length
ratio between neighbouring patches. The ratio of a narrow to a wider segment must not
be less than 1 to n. In the spin box, specify an integer for n.
Lengths are measured in the same parameter direction within the same surface.
This setting is relevant only if the “Check absolute size” option is selected.

“Check ratio to neighbor segment” check box If this option is selected, the geometry is
checked for relative narrow surface segments [G-SU-RN].

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the

Dassault Systèmes 1065 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

element.
Criteria manual

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Healing parameters
Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
Select this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window.
Q-Doctor geometrical healing is available for narrow faces and segments [G-SU-NA].
For relative narrow surfaces and segments [G-SU-RN], no Q-Doctor healing is available.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1066 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.6 Embedded Surfaces [G-SU-EM]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceIdenticalElement (1166)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a surface overlaps completely with another surface. If so,
an error will be reported.
All surfaces that are part of the same topology or solid will be compared.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Identical elements surfaces are duplicated surfaces. Surfaces that overlap completely
with an area of a larger surface are called partially identical surfaces.
Identical elements require additional memory and cancel out the consistency and
validity of the original. They obstruct the handling of models, for example the automatic
creation of topology (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline).

Fig. 1: Embedded Surfaces Fig. 2: Partially identical surfaces

Dassault Systèmes 1067 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance less than or equal to” spin box Enter the numeric value of the maximum
separation which may exist between elements for them to still be considered identical.
A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CAD system tolerance.

“Check also for partially identical” check box If this option is activated, partly identical
elements are rated as incorrect.
If this option is not selected, partly identical elements are not rated as incorrect.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1068 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Application Tip
Criteria manual

In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible,
apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this
criterion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1069 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.7 Small Curvature Radius in Surface [G-SU-CR]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceMiniCurvatureRadius (1172)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether a curvature radius in a surface is smaller than a specified
value. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
To assure the millability of surfaces, the curve radius of a surface may not be less than
the specified minimum at any single point. Even if the milling software can avoid the
violation of faces, form fit cannot be guaranteed, for example for deep drawing tools.
The minimum curvature radius of a surface limits the maximum distance of an offset
surface.

Fig. 1: Minimum curvature radius

Dassault Systèmes 1070 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Curvature radius less than” spin box Specify here the minimum allowed curvature
radius.

“Tolerance” spin box Minimum length of surface normals for which the curvature
radius is calculated.
A suitable minimum length solves a problem with low-quality triangulated surfaces.
When analyzing triangular surfaces, the curvature radius in the tip is often zero if the
length of the isoparametric curve is zero. With this parameter, unrealistic values can be
excluded. If the length of the normal in a point is less than the specified tolerance, the
point is excluded from the calculation.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.
“Order” The number of point per segment is n+1, where n is the polynomial degree of
the analyzed element. This method makes sense only for polynomial curves and
surfaces. For other curves and surfaces, Q-Checker uses the “Internal Discretization
Points” method instead.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than

Dassault Systèmes 1071 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

required.
Criteria manual

For the other methods, “Internal discretisation points” and “Order”, this setting has no
effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Check only surface region covered by faces” check box If this option is selected, a
limited portion of the surface is checked. This portion is limited by the smallest possible
rectangle that encloses all faces on the surface.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1072 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.8 Big Curvature Radius in Surface [G-SU-CR]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceBigCurvatureRadius (1363)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the curvature radius of surfaces is larger than a specified
value. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background

Example Surfaces in vehicle construction are often described as circular surfaces with
very large curvature radiuses. For the fabrication of workshop facilities, planar clamping
surfaces are preferred. Clamping surfaces are usually small, therefore it is possible to
use planar surfaces instead of surfaces with large curvature radiuses. This reduces the
complexity in this section.

Fig. 1: Cylindrical clamping surface with a very big Fig. 2: Planar clamping surface
radius

Suggested solution
Replace incorrect faces with planar faces. If many components are based on the incor-
rect face, healing requires a high effort.

Dassault Systèmes 1073 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Curvature radius greater than” spin box Maximum allowed curvature radius.

“Tolerance for minimum length of normals” spin box Specify the tolerance for the
minimum length of normals.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.
“Order” The number of point per segment is n+1, where n is the polynomial degree of
the analyzed element. This method makes sense only for polynomial curves and
surfaces. For other curves and surfaces, Q-Checker uses the “Internal Discretization
Points” method instead.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the other methods, “Internal discretisation points” and “Order”, this setting has no
effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1074 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Check only surface region covered by faces” check box If this option is selected, a
limited portion of the surface is checked. This portion is limited by the smallest possible
rectangle that encloses all faces on the surface.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1075 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.9 Wavy Surface [G-SU-WV]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceWaviness (1171)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether the number of inflection points in a surface is larger than
a specified value. If so, the affected elements are marked as incorrect.

INFO: This criterion has been adopted from VDA 4955 Version 1 for upward compati-
bility, but has become less important in practice.

A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
An unintentional course of a surface curvature is possibly critical for the quality of a
surface. Further processing of this type of surface often leads to problems. Fillets, offset
surfaces, etc., can no longer be applied because of very small surface radiuses. Surfaces
with double curvature may not be continuous, and their mechanical fabrication may not
be possible.

Fig. 1: Result of a curvature analysis

Suggested solution
Correct or newly create the surface using suitable constraints and parameter (degree,
borders, support points). In some cases, an approximation with a lower number of
faces may help.
In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically.

Dassault Systèmes 1076 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Number of turning points per segment greater than” spin box Maximum allowed
number of inflection points per segment (patch).
If the number of inflection points is greater than this value, the surface is considered
wavy and rated as incorrect. The measurement points are distributed over the patch
along the isoparametric curve.

“Number of turning points per isoparametric curve greater than” spin box Maximum
allowed number of inflection points per isoparametric curve. If the number of inflection
points is greater than this value, the surface is considered wavy and rated as incorrect.
The measurement point are distributed over the entire length of the isoparametric
curve.

“Number of isoparametric curves” spin box Specify the number of isoparametric

curves on which the surface is checked for waviness.

“Limit value for infinite curvature radius” spin box Threshold above which a curvature
radius is considered “infinite” and a curve segment is considered straight. Threshold
above which a curvature radius is considered infinite and a curve segment is considered
straight.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the

Dassault Systèmes 1077 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

element.
Criteria manual

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
The waviness of a surface is defined by the number of inflection points in a curve
(change between positive and negative curvature). You can analyze the number of
inflection points per segment or per isoparametric curve.

Dassault Systèmes 1078 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.10 Folded Surface [G-SU-FO]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceNormalAngle (1174)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the angle between the normals of neighbouring faces is
greater than specified. If so, an error will be reported.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Surface normals usually point either into or out of a construction uniformly. If boundary
curves go beyond the intersection point, surface normals are turned over. Surface
normals are also turned over in case of folded surfaces or surfaces with very small radi-
uses.
Folded surfaces may cause problems for subsequent processing.

Examples
• Applications that use a simplified description of the model geometry (DMU) cannot
distinguish between the inside and outside of a model.
• NC processing also has problems with folded surfaces.

Fig. 1: Turned-down surface normals Fig. 2: Detail: Error location

Dassault Systèmes 1079 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

Fig. 3: Turned-down surface normals Fig. 4: Folded surface

Suggested solution
If the turned-over surface normal is within the used surface area, changing the para-
metric construction may require a considerable effort. In some cases, a parameter
change or a reorder of features is sufficient. Otherwise, the incorrect surface has to be
replaced.
In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. Only those regions are visible
where faces and topologies are situated.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Angle between neighbouring normals greater than” spin box Maximum allowed angle
between face normals.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.

Dassault Systèmes 1080 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
Criteria manual

segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.
“Order” The number of point per segment is n+1, where n is the polynomial degree of
the analyzed element. This method makes sense only for polynomial curves and
surfaces. For other curves and surfaces, Q-Checker uses the “Internal Discretization
Points” method instead.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the other methods, “Internal discretisation points” and “Order”, this setting has no
effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Number of adjacent points to check” spin box Number of adjacent points to be used
for the comparison.
Checking with a small number of points allows to detect reversed normals that occur in
small areas. Checking with a great number of points allows to detect also changes of
normals in larger areas. The recommended number of point is 1, as this check usually is
executed to detect reversed normals in small areas.

“Check neighbouring segments” check box If this option is selected, the normals of
neighbouring patches along the boundaries are evaluated.

“Check only Boundary” check box If this option is selected, only the normals of bound-
aries are evaluated.

“Check only surface region covered by faces” check box If this option is selected, a
limited portion of the surface is checked. This portion is limited by the smallest possible
rectangle that encloses all faces on the surface.
In many cases the surface is much larger than the region covered by topology. Many
error locations are outside the relevant geometry area. Only regions in use have to be
checked, as surface errors outside topologies usually do not affect the model.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1081 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.11 Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary [G-SU-DC]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceMiniSegmentBoundary (1165)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a surface has segment boundary curves that are shorter
than specified. If so, an error will be reported.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
If a patch has a boundary element that is considered a mini-element, this boundary
element is ignored. This results in an undefined normal.

Fig. 1: Tiny segment boundary

Fig. 2: Undefined normal Fig. 3: Tolerance angle undefined normal

Undefined normal A surface is represented by an array of curves in Iso-U and Iso-V

direction. A normal (N) can be constructed in every point of the surface. If an
isoparametrical (Iso-V) becomes 0 (at point PO), then there is only one
isoparametrical (Iso-U) left. A normal can no longer be created at point PO
(undefined normal).

Dassault Systèmes 1082 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Tolerance angle undefined normal The tangent lines (TB) inserted on the boundaries
Criteria manual

at point (PO) describe a plane (P). If a given amount of isoparametric curves (Iso-U)
also receive tangent lines (TI), then the angle error to plane (P) can be measured. The
maximum acceptable faulty angle is the tolerance angle for the undefined normals.
When increasing the angle in the check profile, the number of triangular patches at
the tip decreases.

Suggested solution
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. Normally no modifications are
possible. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this criterion and the
assessment of its results.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Length of a boundary greater than” spin box Minimum length of a boundary curve at
which the respective surface is still a pseudo-triangle patch. If one of the boundary
curves is shorter than specified here, the surface will be not considered a pseudo-
triangle patch, but a normal triangle (that is not considered incorrect).

“Length of a boundary less than” spin box Maximum length of a boundary curve at
which the respective surface is still a pseudo-triangle patch. If one of the boundary
curves is longer than specified here, the surface will be not considered a pseudo-
triangle patch, but a normal surface (that is not considered incorrect).

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.

Dassault Systèmes 1083 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
Criteria manual

segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Mark only if normal is not defined geometrically” check box If this option is selected,
elements are rated as incorrect only if the surface normal is not defined geometrically.

“In case of triangle patch: Number of isoparameter curves” spin box Specify the
number of isoparametric curves to be used temporarily for the check.

“Undefined normal: Tolerance angle” spin box Specify the allowed angle deviation
between the tangent of isoparametric curves and the tangential plane.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1084 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.12 Degenerate Surface Segment Corner [G-SU-DP]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceAngleSegmentBoundary (1173)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the angles between surface segment boundaries are in
the specified range. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
If the angle between neighbouring surface boundary curves is very small or very large,
undefined normals may appear in the corners. The resulting problems are similar to
those with unclean triangular surface, such as waviness and problems with creating
offsets.

Fig. 1: Angle between segment boundary curves

Dassault Systèmes 1085 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check if angle is less than” check box with spin box Minimum allowed angle between
boundary curves. Deselect this option to set no lower limit.

“Check if angle is greater than” check box with spin box Maximum allowed angle
between boundary curves. To set no upper limit, deselect this option.

“Minimal curve length” spin box If the length of one of the boundary curves is less
than specified here, the parameters for segments with 3 boundary curves will be used.

“Check only surface region covered by faces” check box If this option is selected, a
limited portion of the surface is checked. This portion is limited by the smallest possible
rectangle that encloses all faces on the surface.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1086 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.13 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-SU-IK]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceMultiNodeInNurbs (1177)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the angles between internal knots of a NURBS surface are
in the specified range. If that does not apply, the affected element is rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
The definition of NURBS and B-Spline faces requires a knot vector for each parameter
direction. The knot vectors define the number of face segments in the parameter direc-
tions u and v and the continuity of the transitions between them. The knot vector is a
monotone sequence of real numbers.
Knots can coincide, which is called “Multiple weighting of knots” or “multiple knots”.
Multiple knots have an impact on the number and continuity of face segments. When
transferred to a system with larger tolerances, knots that are too close to each other can
become multiple knots, which can result in undesirable changes to the continuity of the
curve. Consequently, the internal continuity within the face can be changed in an unde-
sirable manner. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)

Fig. 1: Knot definition

Dassault Systèmes 1087 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance between internal knots less than” spin box Non-allowed value range for
distances between internal knots. The specified limits do not belong to the non-allowed
value range.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1088 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.14 High-Degree Curve [G-SU-HD]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfacePolyDegree (1170)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the polynomial degree of curve segments is greater than
specified. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
The polynomial degree of curve segments determines a curve's number of degrees of
freedom A too high polynomial degree may cause waviness and poor modifiability of
segments. High-degree curves may not be supported in other systems and can cause
problem when exchanging data. Using approximation to reduce the degree can lead to
major geometrical deviations or discontinuities.

Fig. 1: Surface with low polynomial degree Fig. 2: Surface with high polynomial degree

Suggested solution
Divide complex surface elements into separate surface of a lower degree, according to
their curvature.

Dassault Systèmes 1089 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Polynomial degree greater than” spin box Specify the maximum allowed polynomial
degree. Surfaces with a higher polynomial degree are rated as incorrect.

“Do not check canonical surfaces” check box If this option is activated, canonical
surfaces will be ignored.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1090 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.15 Fragmented Surface [G-SU-FG]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceSegmentNumber (1175)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of segments in a surface is greater than spec-
ified. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
An unreasonably high number of surface patches is generally a sign of unfavorable
complexity or size of a surface. A large number of patches can result from the bad
approximation of a high-degree surface or by joining areas with entirely different curva-
tures. (cf. SASIG PDQ Guideline)
Another reason can be a large number of patches in the generating geometry. Such a
surface tends to be wavy and increases memory usage.

Fig. 1: Poor segmentation

Suggested solution
Approximate a surface with a lower number of segments, or create a new surface. The
source of fragmented surfaces are often models imported from other CAD systems.

Dassault Systèmes 1091 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check number of segment rows” check box with spin box If this option is selected,
the number of segment rows is checked. In the spin box, specify the maximum allowed
number of patches per surface.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this
criterion and the assessment of its results.
• A segment row is a number of segments aligned in one parameter direction (U or V).
The absolute number of segments nU or nV equals the product nU×nV of both
segment rows.
• The allowed number of segments in a curve depends on its complexity and size. Note
the requirements or restriction for further processing with other software.

Dassault Systèmes 1092 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.16 Unused Surface Segment Rows [G-SU-UN]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceUnusedSegment (1176)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether all segments of a surface carry a topology. If that does not
apply, an error is reported.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
The area of a surface occupied by a bounded face can be so small that whole rows of the
underlying surface patches are unoccupied. These unoccupied patch rows use up valu-
able storage space and generally can be erased without any problem.
Using this criterion, the surfaces that do not serve the purpose of defining bounded
surfaces and therefore are most likely to be superfluous will also be found.
In most cases, unused segment rows can be removed without causing a problem.
Sometimes the unoccupied face domains are still required in subsequent process
steps. Their reconstruction is then time-consuming and only approximately possible.
Therefore we do not generally recommend removing unoccupied segment rows.

Fig. 1: Unused segment row

Dassault Systèmes 1093 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Number of discretisation points on edge” spin box Specify the number of discretiza-
tion points distributed on every edge.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1094 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.17 Undefined Surface Normal [G-SU-xx]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceUndefinedNormal (1178)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the model contains surface segments with undefined
normals. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

INFO: The letter code “xx” marks criteria that are not defined yet by SASIG.

Background
A surface segment (patch) has an undefined normal if the cross product of tangents in
the points to be tested equals zero or is approaching zero. An undefined normal usually
appears when one of the four surface boundaries is smaller than the mini-element size.
An undefined normal can also occur if the angle between isoparametric curves U and V
in a given point is zero; in this case, no cross-product can be calculated either.
An undefined normal can cause problems when creating an offset because the direction
of the offset cannot be determined. The creation of an offset can also fail due to the
waviness of the surface, if the tolerance angle value of the undefined normal is
exceeded.

Fig. 1: Undefined normal Fig. 2: Tolerance angle

Undefined normal A surface is represented by an array of curves in Iso-U and Iso-V

direction. A normal (N) can be constructed in every point of the surface. If an
isoparametric curve (Iso-V) is zero (in point PO), only the isoparametric curve (Iso-U)
remains. A normal can no longer be created at point PO (undefined normal).
Tolerance angle undefined normal The tangent lines (TB) inserted on the boundaries
at point (PO) describe a plane (P). If a given amount of isoparametric curves (Iso-U)
also receive tangent lines (TI), then the angle error to plane (P) can be measured. The
maximum acceptable faulty angle is the tolerance angle for the undefined normals.

Dassault Systèmes 1095 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

When increasing the angle in the check profile, the number of triangular patches at
Criteria manual

the tip decreases.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.
“Order” The number of point per segment is n+1, where n is the polynomial degree of
the analyzed element. This method makes sense only for polynomial curves and
surfaces. For other curves and surfaces, Q-Checker uses the “Internal Discretization
Points” method instead.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the other methods, “Internal discretisation points” and “Order”, this setting has no
effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1096 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Normal undefined if length less than” spin box Specify the minimum allowed length
of surface normals. The length of a surface normal equals the absolute value of the
cross-product of the tangent vectors.
The surface normal is considered undefined if the cross product of the tangents in a
measurement point is less than the given value.

“In case of triangle patch: mark only if normal is not defined geometrically” check box
If this option is selected and the check detects a triangle patch, geometrically undefined
normals are rated as incorrect.

“Mini boundary length for triangle patches” spin box A patch is handled as a triangle
patch if it has only three boundaries or if one of its four boundaries is shorter than value
specified in this field.

“In case of triangle patch: Number of isoparameter curves” spin box Specify the
number of isoparametric curves to be used temporarily for the check.

“In case of triangle patch: Number of isoparameter curves” spin box Specify the
allowed angle deviation between the tangent of isoparametric curves and the tangential
plane.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1097 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.18 High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface [G-SU-xx]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceNumCtrlPointsInNurbs (1242)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the total number of control points in a surface segment or
the number of control points in one parameter direction is higher than the specified
value. If so, the model will be rated as incorrect.
The criterion checks all surfaces that contain control point information.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
The mathematical description of a surface or a curve segment (degree of the equation =
N) and the number of segment-internal control points (P) are directly related: P = N+1.
If a surface has too many control points, the degree of the surface is too high. The
higher the polynomial degree, the more complex is a curve.

Example
• Polynomial of 2nd degree: no inflection point (parabola)
• Polynomial of 3rd degree: 1 inflection point
• Polynomial of 4th degree: 2 inflection points, and so on

Surface segment with high polynomial degree are likely to become wavy.
To represent an extreme, wavy curvature at a low polynomial degree, a greater number
of segments has to be used. At low precision, the transitions between segments may
become discontinuous (kinks may appear).

Dassault Systèmes 1098 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

Fig. 1: Surface control points

Suggested solution
CATIA mechanical design relies on solid bodies, the mathematical representation of
which cannot be directly influenced. The quality of solid bodies depends on the base
geometry. When using intersection curves and projection curves, take extra care of
segment boundaries and curvature that appear in the resulting solid.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Total number of control points greater than” spin box Maximum allowed number of
control points on the entire surface. This value equals to the product of the number of
control points in U and V direction.

“Number of control points in U or V greater than” spin box Maximum number of

control points in U or V direction on the surface.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1099 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Application Tip
Criteria manual

In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1100 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.19 Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree greater than 1 [G-SU-xx]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfacePolynomialDegree1 (1326)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the polynomial degree of planar surfaces is greater than 1.
If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
When importing surfaces from other CAD systems, the description of surfaces may be
inconsistent. For example, originally planar surfaces may have been converted to
complex surfaces with a higher polynomial degree.

Suggested solution
Replace or approximate incorrect surfaces with a surface of polynomial degree of 1.

Dassault Systèmes 1101 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance for linear segments” spin box Maximum allowed distance between
measurement points on segments and the mean plane up to which segments are
considered planar.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.
“Order” The number of point per segment is n+1, where n is the polynomial degree of
the analyzed element. This method makes sense only for polynomial curves and
surfaces. For other curves and surfaces, Q-Checker uses the “Internal Discretization
Points” method instead.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the other methods, “Internal discretisation points” and “Order”, this setting has no
effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Dassault Systèmes 1102 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

INFO: In Q-Checker, the planarity of surfaces is calculated as follows:

1. Calculate a mean plane
2. Get distance between measurement points and the mean plane
3. If the distance between each measurement point and the mean plane is within the
tolerance, the surface is considered to be planar.

Dassault Systèmes 1103 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.20 Self-Intersecting Surface [G-SU-IS]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceSelfIntersection (1345)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether surfaces or surface segments intersect with themselves. If
so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Self-intersecting surfaces cannot be fabricated and therefore must not occur in a model.
A self-intersecting surface can result from the extrusion of a self-intersecting contour. In
case of volumes with thin walls, a self-intersecting topology may be formed if the fillet
radius for the outer edge is too large.
Self-intersecting surfaces may cause problems in certain geometrical operations, such
as Offset, and in subsequent processes, such as FEM or NC.

Fig. 1: Self-intersecting surface Fig. 2: No offset is not possible.

Dassault Systèmes 1104 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance” spin box Minimum allowed distance between the boundary curve and a
point in which a face intersects with itself. If the intersection point is too close to the
boundary, this is not considered as self-intersection.

“Tessellation sag” spin box Specify the maximum allowed sag (distance between curve
section and the discretization line) for triangulation.

INFO: A tessellated representation is used to check for self-intersecting surfaces. This

means a faceted approximation is used to represent the surface to be checked. The
Tessellation Sag parameter controls the exactness of the approximation.

“Calculation on” list box

• “Tessellation”: Calculation of the intersection point for the tessellated surface (default
setting)
• “Surface”: Calculation of the intersection point for the exact geometry.
With this option, the result is more exact. Starting from the calculated intersection
point for the tessellated surface, the intersection point for the actual geometry is
closely approximated.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1105 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.21 Small Curvature Radius in Thin-Part Surface

Criteria manual

GeoSolidThinPartSurfaceMiniCurvatureRadius (1349)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether faces with thin-part attribute have a face radius which is
smaller than the thin-part thickness plus an additional value. If so, the affected
elements are rated as incorrect.
Additionally, the criterion can be configured to check only the surface region covered
with faces.

Background

Examples
• Sheet metal parts are often represented using faces for their outside. The sheet metal
thickness is modeled as Thin-Part Attribute/Thickness Feature. The smallest surface
radius must not be less than the thickness of the thin-part attribute.
• For NC machining, a minimum allowed curvature must be set, too.

Fig. 1: Minimum curvature radius

Suggested solution
Surfaces whose curvature radius is too small have to be changed or newly created.

Dassault Systèmes 1106 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance for minimum length of normals” spin box Specify the minimum allowed
length of surface normals.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.
“Order” The number of point per segment is n+1, where n is the polynomial degree of
the analyzed element. This method makes sense only for polynomial curves and
surfaces. For other curves and surfaces, Q-Checker uses the “Internal Discretization
Points” method instead.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the other methods, “Internal discretisation points” and “Order”, this setting has no
effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1107 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Check only surface region covered by faces” check box If this option is selected, a
limited portion of the surface is checked. This portion is limited by the smallest possible
rectangle that encloses all faces on the surface.

“Curvature radius less than thin part + ...” spin box Specify the minimum allowed
difference between the curvature radius and the thickness of the thin-part feature.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Valid surface radiuses are a requirement for the offset capability of surfaces. Further
requirements:
 Point continuity, see criterion Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG],
page 1050
 Tangent continuity, see criterion Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Discontinuity)
[G-SU-NT], page 1053

Dassault Systèmes 1108 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.22 Multi-Face Surface [G-SU-MU]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSurfaceMultiFace (1370)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether more than one face is on the same surface. If so, the
affected elements are rated as incorrect.

 NOTE: Faces defined on a surface of the “Plane” geometry type are ignored.
See also the application tip.

A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Some CAD systems and interface software require a one-to-one relation between
surface and face (cf. SASIG PDQ Guidelines). Otherwise faces might be lost, or there
might be problems with the subsequent use of the models.

Fig. 1: Creating a non-allowed reference by trim- Fig. 2: Error: Two faces situated on the same
ming surface

Suggested solution
Use geometry features to avoid these problems.

Dassault Systèmes 1109 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, surfaces are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible, apart
from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this crite-
rion and the assessment of its results.
Internally, CATIA uses procedural features. Not every face element has its own surface.
Inside CATIA, this is no problem. When exporting CAD data using a standard interface,
the required surfaces are added automatically. Therefore the existence and size of
surfaces may differ between the original model and exported models. This behavior may
be decisive for whether this criterion is necessary or not.

Dassault Systèmes 1110 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces

2.5.2.1.23 Analytical/Procedural (Non-NURBS) Face Support Surface

Criteria manual

[G-FA-AN]
GeoSolidFaceNonNurbsSurface (1383)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether surfaces contain analytical or procedural elements, that is
elements that are not described by NURBS. These elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Analytical surfaces describe a closed face, such as a cylindrical or spherical surface.
When translating analytical surfaces to a NURBS representation, start and end bound-
aries are defined but can differ from the original surface. This may be the cause for
incorrect face boundaries.
During the entire construction process, it is important to be able to derive faces from
solids. These derived faces are often used as the geometrical base for further construc-
tion steps. When a CAD system fails to approximate certain faces, this indicates prob-
lems with the face definition. These problems also affect data exchange. (cf. SASIG
PDQ Guideline)

Fig. 1: Examples of analytical faces

Dassault Systèmes 1111 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Surfaces
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Example of faces described with NURBS

Suggested solution
In the CATIA “Freestyle” environment, analytically described surfaces can be converted
to NURBS using the “Converter Wizard”.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To analyze the mathematical description of a surface, use the “Geometric Analysis”
function in CATIA.

Dassault Systèmes 1112 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

2.5.2.2 Face Edges

Criteria manual

2.5.2.2.1 Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI]

GeoSolidFaceMiniBoundary (1154)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of face edges of is within the specified non-
allowed value range. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
The boundary of a face usually consists of several boundary curves. Boundary curves
below a certain size may become invalid or drop out when transferring the model to a
less precise system. This may cause the loss of a face or a topology.
A boundary curve in turn can consist of several fragments. These elements are unin-
tended by-products when geometry is filleted or limited. Fragments are neglected if they
are smaller than system tolerance, This results also in the aforementioned problems.

Fig. 1: Tiny Face Edge

Dassault Systèmes 1113 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Mini-boundary due to geometrical reasons

Fig. 3: Mini boundary due to fragments

Suggested solution
• Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
• Normally no modifications are possible in solid-based constructions. This should be
reflected in the error assessment for this criterion.
• Manual healing in CATIA: For a new face, sum up the fragments of the boundaries,
and approximate a new continuous element.
You might also consider different partitioning of the face.

Dassault Systèmes 1114 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Length greater than” check box with spin box Curves are considered incorrect if their
length is not within the allowed value range.
Deselect this option if the non-allowed value range begins at zero.
Select this option if the lower limit of the non-allowed value range is not zero. Specify
the desired value in the spin box.

“Length less than” spin box Minimum allowed length of boundary curves. As an excep-
tion, elements can be allowed by parameter “Length greater than”.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1115 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Healing parameters
Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
Select this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• To check for mini-elements, deselect option “Length greater than” option, and specify
in the “Length less than” spin box the length below which elements are considered as
mini-elements.
• To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances
(clones) of this criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every
instance. Select the “Length greater than” option if the lower limit of the non-allowed
value range is not zero.

Dassault Systèmes 1116 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

2.5.2.2.2 Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceMiniBoundarySegment (1155)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of face edge segments is within the specified
non-allowed value range. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
The boundary of a face usually consists of several boundary curves. They are created
e.g. when forming intersections, where the segment boundaries of the patch are trans-
formed to segment boundaries of the arc. Partial segments that exceed a certain expan-
sion can lead to invalid, degenerated segments when they are transferred to a less
accurate system. This can cause a face or topology to become invalid or to get lost.

Fig. 1: Mini-segments in boundaries

Dassault Systèmes 1117 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Length greater than” check box with spin box Boundary curve segments are consid-
ered incorrect if their total length is not within the allowed value range.
Deselect this option if the non-allowed value range begins at zero.
Select this option if the lower limit of the non-allowed value range is not zero. Specify
the desired value in the spin box.

“Length less than” spin box Minimum allowed length of boundary curve segments. As
an exception, elements can be allowed by parameter “Length greater than”.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1118 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Healing parameters
Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
Activate this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are
possible, apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the
relevance of this criterion and the assessment of its results.
• To check for mini-elements, deselect option “Length greater than” option, and specify
in the “Length less than” spin box the length below which elements are considered as
mini-elements.
• To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances
(clones) of this criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every
instance. Select the “Length greater than” option if the lower limit of the non-allowed
value range is not zero.
• The CAD system tolerance is recommended as the basic test value. The criterion can
use a user-defined number of measurement points per segment. Alternatively, the
criterion can use the discretization points of the curve.

Dassault Systèmes 1119 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

2.5.2.2.3 Fragmented Face Edge [G-ED-FG]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceBoundarySegmentNumber (1161)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the number of segments in a boundary curve is greater
than the specified maximum. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
An inappropriately high number of boundary segments increases memory consump-
tion. At the same time, the risk of mini-elements and discontinuities increases, which
can seriously affect modifications and the derivation of new model variants. A large
number of boundary segments may result from a from a low-quality carrier surface
(waviness, discontinuities) which itself comprises a large number of segments.

Suggested solution
• Make sure to use clean boundary elements; if necessary, approximate or create new
boundaries, then re-generate the faces.
• In solid models, it is recommended to check the quality of the parent elements
beforehand.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Number of segments greater than” spin box Specify the maximum allowed number of
segments per boundary curve.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Select the maximum allowed number of segments with respect to shape and size of the
geometry.

Dassault Systèmes 1120 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

2.5.2.2.4 Closed Face Edge [G-ED-CL]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceClosedEdge (1340)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains faces with closed edges. If so, an error
is reported.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Some CAD systems cannot generate and process faces with closed edges, such as
circles or ellipses. This limitation is intended to prevent problems with coinciding edges
and points. If a model still contains closed edges, problems may occur such as incon-
sistent results for the automatic identification of contours.

Fig. 1: Closed face edge

Suggested solution
If required, split face edges manually into separate boundary curves.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Check geometrical” check box If this option is not selected, the criterion checks topo-
logically, that is whether faces have only one boundary curve.

Dassault Systèmes 1121 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

If this option is selected, the criterion checks additionally whether start and end point of
Criteria manual

the face edges coincide. This check analyzes all face edges.

“Tolerance” spin box Maximum distance between start and end point of a face edge,
up to which a face edge is considered to be closed.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1122 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

2.5.2.2.5 Analytical / Procedural (Non-NURBS) Face Edge [G-ED-AN]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceNonNurbsBoundary (1382)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether face edges contain analytical or procedural elements, that
is elements that are not described by NURBS. If so, an error is reported.

Background
Many CAD system process only NURBS geometry. The approximation of analytical face
face edges as NURBS geometry may fail or lead to a result of insufficient accuracy.

Fig. 1: Non-analytical (top) and analytical (bottom) face edges

Fig. 2: Non-analytical (top) and analytical (bottom) face edges

Dassault Systèmes 1123 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Edges

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

In CATIA, analytical curves can be converted to NURBS geometry with the following
functions:
• “Smooth Curve”
• “Converter Wizard” in the “Freestyle” environment

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To analyze the type of a face edge, click “Geometric Analysis” on the “Analyze” toolbar.

Dassault Systèmes 1124 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

2.5.2.3 Face Loops

Criteria manual

2.5.2.3.1 Large Face Edge Gap (G0 Discontinuity) [G-LO-LG]

GeoSolidFaceGapBoundary (1156)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a gap between face edges is larger than the specified
value. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Discontinuities in face edges appear as gaps or overlaps. When transferring faces to a
less precise system, discontinuities can cause the loss of the face element or the entire
topology.

Fig. 1: Gap between boundary curves

Suggested solution
• Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
• The possibilities to change a solid are very limited. In most cases, the affected
elements have to be recreated.
• When using surface features, align the boundaries to each other with respect to the
tolerance for identical points. Make sure to align the curve ends to avoid mini-
elements.

Dassault Systèmes 1125 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance greater than” spin box Maximum allowed distance for gaps and overlaps
between face edge segments.

Healing parameters
Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
Activate this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Large Face Edge Gap (G0 Discontinuity) [G-LO-LG]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
For the test value, the CAD system tolerance is recommended.

Dassault Systèmes 1126 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

2.5.2.3.2 Sharp Face Edge Angle [G-LO-SA]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceSharpEdgeAngle (1293)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the angle between face edge segments is smaller than the
specified value. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
A sharp face edge angle may be used intentionally to avoid a sharp angle between
surfaces, which can be even less favorable for a correct face definition.

Fig. 1: Sharp Face Edge Angle

Suggested solution
Do not change the sharp angle if it is required by the design.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Angle less than” spin box Minimum allowed angle between face edges

Dassault Systèmes 1127 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip
A sharp edge angle should not be interpreted as an unwanted self-approximation within
a loop.

Dassault Systèmes 1128 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

2.5.2.3.3 Self-Intersecting Face Loop [G-LO-IS], [G-FA-IS]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceBoundaryIntersection (1158)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check verifies whether face loops have intersection points or contact points with
themselves or other face loops. If so, the model will be rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
A face loop intersecting with itself forms multiple domains (Fig. 1). The region enclosed
by the intersecting face edge often appears as a narrow face. Most CAD interfaces
support only single-domain elements, while multi-domain face elements and topolo-
gies may be lost.
Intersection and contact points between different face edges can cause the same errors;
note however that contact points between different face may also be used intentionally
(Fig. 2).

Fig. 1: Self-intersection of face edges

Fig. 2: Contact of face edges

Dassault Systèmes 1129 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

Suggested solution
Criteria manual

• Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
• Manual healing in CATIA: Approximate a clean boundary curve.
• A frequent cause for self-intersecting face loops is a faulty projection of curves onto
target surfaces. To avoid the problem, make sure the target surface is of good quality
regarding segmentation and continuity.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Distance less than” spin box Minimum allowed distance between boundary curves. A
smaller distance is considered an intersection or contact point.
A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CAD system tolerance.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

Dassault Systèmes 1130 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
Criteria manual

“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Mark only intersection points” check box If this option is selected, only intersection
points are rated as incorrect, while contact points are allowed.

“Check method for boundary-loops” list box Select the check method for face loops:
“Self-Intersecting Loops [G-LO-IS]” This method checks whether face loops intersect
with themselves.
“Intersecting loops [G-FA-IS]” This method checks whether different face loops intersect
with each other.
“Self-intersecting loops & Intersecting loops [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]” This method checks for
both self-intersecting loops and different loops intersecting with each other.

“Ignore intersection points in narrow regions” check box If this option is selected,
regions are ignored if they are separated by an intersection point and their overall width
is less than the value given in the “Distance less than” field (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: a. The width of the region is less than the tolerance for narrow regions; b. The width of the region is
greater than the tolerance

Dassault Systèmes 1131 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

Healing parameters
Criteria manual

Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional

Q-Doctor software.
Activate this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Self-Intersecting Face Loop (G0 Discontinuity) [G-LO-IS], [G-FA-IS]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CAD system tolerance.
• Note when evaluating the check results that elements with contact points between
face edges are not necessarily incorrect.

Dassault Systèmes 1132 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

2.5.2.3.4 Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop [G-LO-IT]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceBoundaryOrientation (1160)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the edges within a loop are consistently oriented. If not,
the edges with the less frequent orientation are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
In some systems, inconsistently oriented edges can lead to self-intersection and face
degeneration. There are known problems with older processing programs (e.g. for
eroding or milling) that use the edge orientation as processing direction.

Fig. 1: Inconsistent orientation of edges. The orientation marked in red is not allowed.

Fig. 2: Inconsistent orientation of edges.

Suggested solution
Create a face with a clean boundary curve.

Dassault Systèmes 1133 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Face Loops

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
For more recent software applications, this criterion is of minor relevance.

Dassault Systèmes 1134 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4 Faces
Criteria manual

Faces (bounded surfaces) are a region of a surface limited by a closed boundary curve
that is projected onto the surface. Faces may contain holes, cuts or the like.
Many quality criteria apply to both surfaces and faces due to their associativity; these
criteria are not repeated in this group (polynomial degree, curvature, internal conti-
nuity) or can be applied to faces (tiny elements, identical elements). Additional specifi-
cations apply for the boundary curves of faces.

2.5.2.4.1 Tiny Face [G-FA-TI]

GeoSolidFaceMiniElement (1152)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether the square root of the face area is smaller than a specified
value. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
When changing the system tolerance or transferring a model to a less precise system,
faces with dimensions below a certain threshold may degenerate. Some interfaces do
not transfer such elements at all, causing gaps in the topology. Reworking such
elements means a substantial effort.
Tiny Elements often result from system automatisms and unnoticed by the user.

Fig. 1: Tiny Face

Suggested solution
Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.

Dassault Systèmes 1135 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Square root of face area greater than” spin box Faces are rated as incorrect if the
square root of their area is not within the value range specified here. Specify the lower
limit of the non-allowed value range.

Example For an area of 0.0004 (mm2) type 0.02 (mm).

“Square root of face area less than” spin box Specify the upper limit of the non-allowed
value range.

TIP
• To check for mini-elements, set parameter “Square root of face area greater than” to
“0”, and set parameter “Square root of face area less than” to the square root of the
smallest allowed face area.
• To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances
(clones) of this criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every
instance.

Healing parameters
Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
Activate this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window. Geometrical
healing creates a healing feature in the model.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Tiny Face [G-FA-TI]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1136 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Application Tip
Criteria manual

When choosing a criterion assessment, consider that some errors cannot be resolved.
To allow the “In Order” assessment for models with such errors, you can apply a priority
with weight 0.
In some cases, tiny faces can be avoided by a suitable design:
• The base geometry should not have any discontinuities.
• For a more homogeneous curvature, the base geometry can be smoothed.
• Tiny elements should be avoided in the creation geometry already.

Dassault Systèmes 1137 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.2 Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceNarrowElement (1153)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether faces are locally or entirely narrower than the specified
minimum. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Faces that are narrower than specified may cause certain operations to fail, such as
scaling, offset or NC processing.
Reworking such elements means a substantial effort. Such elements are often created
as unwanted by-products when creating fillets or limiting geometries.

Fig. 1: Narrow Face

Fig. 2: Partially narrow element

Suggested solution
• Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.

Dassault Systèmes 1138 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

• Eliminate narrow elements by extending neighbouring elements.

Criteria manual

• Join faces with identical boundary curves on the same surface to one element. Make
sure that the face edges do not include mini-elements or a too large number of
segments.

Related criteria
 Narrow Face Region [G-FA-RN], page 1145
 Relative Narrow Face, page 1148
 Tangent-continuous Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN], page 1142

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Face size in one direction less than” spin box Minimum allowed face size in one
direction If the width of a face is less than this value, the face is classified as narrow
face..
A suitable initial value for this parameter is the CATIA system tolerance. Depending on
further use of the model, this value needs to be adjusted.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:

Dassault Systèmes 1139 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
Criteria manual

number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Mark also partially narrow faces” check box If this option is activated, also faces will
be considered faulty that are partially small (in one ore several subareas).

“Select algorithm” list box Select the algorithm to be used for this check.
We generally recommend using the line-based algorithm. Use the point-based algo-
rithm only if you need to be consistent with results of earlier checks using the same
algorithm.
“Line Based”: This method is based on lines. The boundary curve is split into lines. This
method marks also partitions of the lines as faulty when situated too close to each
other. The line-based algorithm produces more accurate results than the point-based
algorithm.
“Point Based”: The check for boundaries that are situated close to each other, is
executed on the base of points placed on the sections of the boundary curve. The
point density in each of the curve sections depends on the settings, made in the
“Selection of (max.) number of points to check” list box and in the “Fix number of
points per segment” spin box as well as on the geometry of the boundary curve. In
case of a low point density, the results of this examination method may be inaccurate
for certain geometries.

“Max. sag for line-based algorithm” spin box Specify the maximum allowed sag
(distance between curve section and the discretization line) for triangulation. This
setting applies only to the line-based algorithm.

Dassault Systèmes 1140 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Healing parameters
Criteria manual

Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional

Q-Doctor software.
Activate this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window.
Q-Doctor geometrical healing is available for narrow faces [G-FA-NA]. Faces which are
narrow only in some region [G-FA-RN] cannot be healed using Q-Doctor.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. No modifications are possible,
apart from approximation. Therefore one should consider carefully the relevance of this
criterion and the assessment of its results.

Dassault Systèmes 1141 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.3 Tangent-continuous Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceNarrowElementContTangent (1397)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether faces or regions of faces are narrower than the specified
value and at the same time have no neighbouring, tangent-continuous faces. If so, the
affected faces are rated as incorrect.
According to this criterion, narrow faces are allowed if a combination of neighbouring
tangent-continuous faces is not narrow (Fig. 2).

Background
When creating a mesh for FEM, the size of faces has a major impact on the resulting
mesh. If faces are smaller than a certain limit, a higher resolution is required for the
respective region. When generating meshes automatically, it may occur that small faces
are skipped and therefore ignored in the FEM analysis.

Example Bracing ribs with thin walls without neighbouring faces are too narrow to be
considered by automatic meshing. If the narrow face has tangent-continuous neigh-
bouring faces, bracing ribs are wider and will be considered by automated meshing.

Fig. 1: Narrow limited face without tangential Fig. 2: Narrow limited face with tangential connec-
connection face tion face

Suggested solution
To avoid the problem, allow some space for transitions between faces when planning
the design.

Related criteria
 Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN], page 1138

Dassault Systèmes 1142 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Face size in one direction less than” spin box Minimum allowed face size in one
direction. Faces that are narrower than the specified value are rated as incorrect.
The same value is used for the evaluation of tangent-continuous neighbouring faces.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Mark also partially narrow faces” check box If this option is selected, faces are also

Dassault Systèmes 1143 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

rated as incorrect if they have one or more narrow regions.

Criteria manual

“Select algorithm” list box Select the algorithm to be used for this check.
We generally recommend using the line-based algorithm. Use the point-based algo-
rithm only if you need to be consistent with results of earlier checks using the same
algorithm.
“Line Based” This method is based on lines. The boundary curve is split into lines. This
method marks also partitions of the lines as faulty when situated too close to each
other. The line based examination has more exact results than the point-based
examination, but may take more time.
“Point Based” The check for boundaries that are situated close to each other, is
executed on the base of points placed on the sections of the boundary curve. The
point density in each of the curve sections depends on the settings, made in the
“Selection of (max.) number of points to check” list box and in the “Fix number of
points per segment” spin box as well as on the geometry of the boundary curve. In
case of a low point density, the results of this examination method may be inaccurate
for certain geometries.

“Max. sag for line-based algorithm” spin box Specify the maximum allowed sag
(distance between curve section and the discretization line) for triangulation. This
setting applies only to the line-based algorithm.

“Maximum angle difference” spin box Maximum angle between tangents below up to
which faces are considered tangent-continuous.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Narrow elements without neighbouring tangent-continuous faces cannot be used with
certain fabrication methods.

Dassault Systèmes 1144 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.4 Narrow Face Region [G-FA-RN]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceNarrowRegion (1381)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether faces have narrow regions, which are narrower than the
specified value. If so, the affected faces are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Narrow regions in faces can lead to problems in subsequent processes and in fabrica-
tion, for example for the calculation of FEM meshes or NC tool paths.

Fig. 1: Narrow region Fig. 2: Narrow region with length L and width b

Suggested solution
Split the face into separate faces. Delete unused narrow regions. Make sure that the
boundary curves of the new faces must fulfill all requirements for continuity.

Related criteria
 Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN], page 1138.

Dassault Systèmes 1145 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Face size in one direction less than” spin box Minimum allowed width of face regions
(Fig. 2). Face regions with a width smaller than this minimum are rated as incorrect.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Select algorithm” list box Select the algorithm to be used for this check:
“Line Based” This method is based on lines. The boundary curve is split into lines. This
method marks also partitions of the lines as faulty when situated too close to each

Dassault Systèmes 1146 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

other. The line based examination has more exact results than the point-based
Criteria manual

examination, but may take more time.

“Point Based” The check for boundaries that are situated close to each other, is
executed on the base of points placed on the sections of the boundary curve. The
point density in each of the curve sections depends on the settings, made in the
“Selection of (max.) number of points to check” list box and in the “Fix number of
points per segment” spin box as well as on the geometry of the boundary curve. In
case of a low point density, the results of this examination method may be inaccurate
for certain geometries.

“Max. sag for line-based algorithm” spin box Specify the maximum allowed sag
(distance between curve section and the discretization line) for triangulation. This
setting applies only to the line-based algorithm.

“Region length more than” spin box Minimum length of relevant regions (Fig. 2).
Narrow regions that are shorter than the specified value are ignored and not rated as
incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• It is not checked if a region is too small in general.
• The criterion does not check the validity of the face definition.

Dassault Systèmes 1147 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.5 Relative Narrow Face

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceRelativeNarrowElement (1418)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the length-to-width-ratio of faces is greater than the spec-
ified value. If so, the affected faces are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Long narrow faces are often created as unintended by-products when geometry is
filleted or limited. These faces can cause geometrical operations such as scaling or
offset to fail, and further processing such as NC or FEM is only possible with additional
effort.

Fig. 1: Face with a large length-to-width ratio.

Suggested solution
In parametric systems, there is no general solution to this problem. Try to avoid incor-
rect faces by modifying the affected operations.

Related criteria
 Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN], page 1138

Dassault Systèmes 1148 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Ratio width to height greater than” spin box Maximum allowed ratio between broad
and narrow side of faces. Surfaces with a higher ratio are rated as incorrect.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In contrast to criterion Narrow Face [G-FA-NA], [G-FA-RN], page 1138, this criterion
does not use the narrowest width as the base scale but the ratio of approximated width
to approximated length. That way, it is possible to find long narrow faces and to exclude
faces which have only a narrow area.
This criterion checks also irregular faces situated on uneven surfaces. This is done by
calculating a bounding box (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2: Algorithm for finding relative narrow faces.

Dassault Systèmes 1149 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.6 Embedded Faces [G-FA-EM]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceIdenticalElement (1162)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check verifies whether a face is situated entirely within another face. If so, an error
will be reported.
The criterion can additionally check whether faces are partly identical.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Embedded faces are duplicates of faces within a solid. Duplicates unnecessarily
increase the file size of the model and cause ambiguities.
Partly identical faces are faces that are identical to a region of a larger face within a
solid. They obstruct the handling of models, for example the automatic creation of
topology.

Fig. 1: Identical elements Fig. 2: Partly identical elements

Suggested solution
Within a solid, particular faces cannot be changed directly. Try to create a new solid
based on modified parent elements. If this is not sufficient, try to create a differently
partitioned geometry.

Dassault Systèmes 1150 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance less than or equal to” spin box Maximum allowed distance between
elements up to which they are considered identical. A recommended value is the CATIA
system tolerance.

“Check also for partially identical” check box If this option is selected, the criterion
checks for both identical and partly identical elements. If this option is not selected, the
criterion checks only for identical elements.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1151 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.7 Large Face Edge to Surface Gap [G-FA-EG]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceDistanceBoundarySurface (1159)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the projection distance between the boundary of a face
and the respective surface is less than or equal to the specified value. If that does not
apply, the affected element is rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
If the distance between the boundary curve of a face and surface is too large, the face
may get lost. This may occur especially when transferring faces to a more precise
system.

Fig. 1: Distance between the boundary curve of a face (blue) and Fig. 2: Distance (“TOL”) between boundary curve and surface
surface (green)

Suggested solution
Create a new face.

Dassault Systèmes 1152 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check distance outside surface segment links” check box If this option is selected,
the criterion checks whether the boundary curve of a face is outside the parameter
domain of the surface.

“Distance greater than” spin box Maximum allowed projection distance between face
edge and surface.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

Dassault Systèmes 1153 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

long as no result has been found.

Criteria manual

“Ignore faces with planar support surface” check box If this option is activated,
elements with planar support surface are ignored.

“Ignore unlimited direction on analytical support surfaces” check box If this option is
selected, faces that are situated outside the CATIA surface but in the continuation of the
same surface are not rated as incorrect.

Example A spherically curved surface lies outside of the surface of a cylinder, but never-
theless on the cylindrical surface.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA, curve segments are not displayed graphically. Elements referred to as
Surface in CATIA are referred to as Shells in the SASIG PDQ Guideline. Make sure to
select the correct criteria.
• CATIA uses procedural features; therefore not every topology has its own surfaces. In
CATIA, surfaces have no fixed limits. Therefore an exported surface may differ
geometrically from the respective surface in the original model. Inside CATIA, this
difference does not cause any problems.
• Use this check only if you encounter actual problems in the process, which can be
attributed to this behavior.

Dassault Systèmes 1154 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.8 Closed Face [G-FA-CL]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceClosedFace (1342)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains closed faces, for example faces in which
two edges coincide with each other. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
CATIA and some other CAD systems do not support the creation and processing of
closed faces. However, such elements can be imported from other CAD systems. Prob-
lems may occur when using such faces.

Fig. 1: Closed face

Suggested solution
Split closed faces into halves.

Criterion definition

Dassault Systèmes 1155 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Check settings
Criteria manual

“Check geometrical” check box If this option is selected, the criterion checks whether
two edges coincide. This check analyzes all face edges.
If this option is not selected, the criterion checks topologically, that is whether there is a
topological boundary curve of a face that adjoins two edges of this face (Fig. 1) .

“Tolerance” spin box Maximum distance between face edges, up to which the edges
are considered to coincide. This parameter is only in effect if the “Check geometrical”
option is selected.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1156 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

2.5.2.4.9 Inconsistent Face Orientation on Surface [G-FA-IT]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidFaceInconsistentOriToSurface (1379)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether face normals and surface normals have the same orienta-
tion. If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
In some CAD systems, faces have no normal orientation of their own; instead they use
they adopt the normal orientation of the surface they are based on. In this case, the
normal orientation cannot become inconsistent.

Fig. 1: Inconsistent normal orientation of face and Fig. 2: Consistent normal orientation of face and
surface surface

Suggested solution
Surfaces are not displayed in CATIA and cannot be changed. Inverting surface normals
is not in accordance with model parametricity. The orientation of face normals does not
pose a problem inside CATIA, therefore this check is only necessary if there are related
problems in subsequent processes. If required, use an interface with healing function.
In case a consistently oriented topology is still required, use an Invert feature.

Related criteria
 Inconsistent Surface Orientation in Shell/Volume [G-FA-IT], [G-SH-IT], page 1181

Dassault Systèmes 1157 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Faces

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
CATIA uses procedural features; therefore not every topology has its own surfaces. In
CATIA, surfaces have no fixed limits. Therefore an exported surface may differ geometri-
cally from the respective surface in the original model. Inside CATIA, this difference
does not cause any problems.

Dassault Systèmes 1158 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5 Shells/Volumes
Criteria manual

2.5.2.5.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx]

GeoSkinTopCalculation (1291)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This function calculates a topology for shells for use in other Q-Checker criteria.
Use this function only if there is no topology available, for example for imported data.
Faces created in CATIA always have a topology.

 NOTE: Criteria that will check the calculated topology must use the same element
selection as this criterion.

Background
To allow check for continuity across different topologies, Q-Checker has to calculate a
common topology that includes the existing topologies. Existing topologies are added
to the common topology if their distance to neighbouring topologies is within a speci-
fied tolerance. Topologies whose distance to neighbouring topologies is greater than
the tolerance form separate topologies.
The common topology will include duplicate elements, if there are any.
A closed topology (without gaps greater than the specified tolerance) is required for
using the data in subsequent applications such as FEM or NC.

Fig. 1: Calculated topology with boundary curves and over-used edges (duplicate elements)

Suggested solution
Topologies are created when using operations such as join, fillet or trim. Make sure that
the results have no unintended gaps.

Dassault Systèmes 1159 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Related criteria
Criteria manual

 To check whether topologies are closed, you can also use criterion Embedded Solids
[G-SO-EM], page 1208.

Criterion definition

Check settings
“Element selection” list box Element selection for which Q-Checker calculates the
topology. Criteria that will check the calculated topology must use the same element
selection as this criterion.

“Merging distance less or equal to” spin box Maximum allowed distance (default toler-
ance) between neighbouring faces to be considered as a common topology.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1160 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Topology over more than one Set allowed” check box If this option is selected, topolo-
gies can be calculated across geometrical sets.

“Use second merging distance for big gaps” check box with “Distance less or equal to”
spin box If this option is selected, transitions between faces are also considered as
topologically closed if the distance between faces is greater than the default tolerance
specified in “Merging distance less or equal to”, and less than the value specified in
“Distance less than”.
In the spin box, specify an extended tolerance greater than the default tolerance in
“Merging distance less or equal to”.
This option has to be selected to analyze transitions with the following criteria:
• Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG], page 1166
• Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT], page 1170
• Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS], page 1174

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
This Q-Checker function provides an initial overview of the continuity of topologies:
• If the Q-Checker analysis window lists more than one topology, the distance between
topologies is greater than the specified tolerance.
• To highlight edge curves, gaps and over-used edges, select the Graphical Fine
Analysis display option.
In CATIA, gaps in a topology can be identified with the “Boundary” or “Surface Bound-
aries” display option.

Dassault Systèmes 1161 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.2 Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume [G-SH-FR]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopBoundary (1151)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether the outside edges of a topology are unique and closed. If
there are open edges or multiple knots, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Use this check to identify closed edges, open edges and multiple knots in a topology.
Closed edges are allowed, whereas open edges and multiple knots are rated as incor-
rect.
No surface can be generated if the topology cannot be calculated correctly. This may
lead to problems in subsequent applications such as FEM calculations or continuity
checks.

Fig. 1: Gap in a topology Fig. 2: Detail of the error location

Suggested solution
• Repairing faulty elements manually.
• Recreating faulty elements (best result but most expensive solution)
• Reducing the precision of the CATIA “Join” function is no suitable healing method. In
this case, the actual error would remain.

Dassault Systèmes 1162 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Mark all boundary loops for visualization” check box If this option is not selected,
topology boundaries will be highlighted for analysis in red color in the CATIA geometry
area if an error has been found.
If this option is selected, all topology boundaries are highlighted in the CATIA geometry
area; boundaries of error features in red, boundaries of correct features in green. With
this option selected, the analysis tree lists both correct and error features.

“Check if closed boundaries are narrow” check box If this option is selected, open
regions within the topology are checked. Open regions are rated as incorrect if they are
smaller than the value specified in “Tolerance”.

“Tolerance” spin box Minimum allowed size of open regions.

“Do not mark narrow closed boundaries if the edges are tangent continuous” check
box If this option is selected, closed narrow boundaries are not rated as incorrect if
they are tangent-continuous.

“Tolerance for tangent continuity” spin box Maximum allowed difference angle
between tangents. If the difference angle is less than the specified value, curves are
considered tangent-continuous.

Dassault Systèmes 1163 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

“Check closed boundaries also for partially narrow” check box If this option is
Criteria manual

selected, open regions within the topology are rated as incorrect if they are partly
smaller than the tolerance.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Select algorithm” list box Select the algorithm to be used for this check:
“Point Based” The check for boundaries that are situated close to each other, is
executed on the base of points placed on the sections of the boundary curve. The
point density in each of the curve sections depends on the settings, made in the
“Selection of (max.) number of points to check” list box and in the “Fix number of
points per segment” spin box as well as on the geometry of the boundary curve. In
case of a low point density, the results of this examination method may be inaccurate
for certain geometries.
“Line Based” This method is based on lines. The boundary curve is split into lines. This
method marks also partitions of the lines as faulty when situated too close to each
other. The results of the line based algorithm are more exact, but will take longer to
compute.

“Max. sag for line-based algorithm” spin box Specify the maximum allowed sag
(distance between curve section and the discretization line) for triangulation. This
setting applies only to the line-based algorithm.

“Only check Topologies with more faces than...” spin box Specify the number of
number of faces in a topology up to which a topology will be ignored.

Dassault Systèmes 1164 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

If no topologies are checked due to this restriction, the criterion is considered as

Criteria manual

fulfilled.
To check all topologies irrespective of the number of faces, set this parameter to 0.

“Report error if more than one closed boundary loop detected” check box If this option
is selected, topologies with more than one closed boundary are not allowed and rated
as incorrect. For example, elements have more than one boundary loop if the topology
contains holes.

“Check only self computed topologies” check box If this option is selected, only topolo-
gies created with criterion “Calculation of Shells/Volumes” are checked.
If this option is not selected, all topologies are checked, including those from the CATIA
model.
 Criterion Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx], page 1159

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
• In CATIA, this error may occur with imported faces, due to different model tolerances.

Fig. 3: Gap in a topology Fig. 4: Gap in a topology, which in part is intended

• This criterion does not check for errors inside a closed topology. For this purpose use
criterion Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG], page 1050.

Dassault Systèmes 1165 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.3 Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopContPoint (1106)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a topology contains gaps that are larger than a specified
value. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incorrect.

Background
Topologies describe the surface of a model. If the transitions between faces are point-
continuous, the topology is gapless. In this case, the topology fulfills an important
quality characteristic.
Discontinuities between faces of a topology are allowed within a specified tolerance.
Problems may occur when changing the tolerance range or when exchanging the model
between different CAD systems. Topologies may be lost. When transferring the model
to another system, automatically applied healing functions may result in unwanted
changes to the topology, such as the creation of new elements and tiny elements.

Fig. 1: Faces displayed without gaps in CATIA are Fig. 2: Detail of the error location
not necessarily point-continuous.

Suggested solution
• Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
• In solid models, the topology can be changed only indirectly. You can only inspect and
change the positioning of elements, the quality of parent elements and the geometric
partitioning of single elements. This criterion is violated especially when using
elements created with a different, coarser tolerance. Elements are created with regard
to certain tolerances and should not be used along with elements of a different
tolerance.

Dassault Systèmes 1166 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance greater than” spin box Maximum allowed distance between measurement
points of neighbouring segments. Within this distance, segments are considered point-
continuous. If the distance is greater than this value, the faces are considered point-
discontinuous.
A recommended value is the CAD system tolerance.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1167 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Checking mode for limit points” list box Select how to check in the limit points of
common edges:
“Check corresponding limit points” Check for continuity in corresponding limit points
(Fig. 3). This setting is useful only if the tolerance for calculating the topology is less
than or equal to the distance specified in “Distance greater than”.

Fig. 3: Measurement with selected “Check corresponding limit points” option

“Check projectable limit points” Check for continuity only in those points that can be
projected onto the target curve in normal direction (Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Measurement with selected “Check projectable limit points” option

“Ignore limit points” Do not check for continuity in limit points.

“Check only self computed topologies” check box If this option is selected, only topolo-
gies created with criterion “Calculation of Shells/Volumes” are checked.
If this option is not selected, all topologies are checked, including those from the CATIA
model.
 Criterion Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx], page 1159

Healing parameters
Geometrical healing (Q-Doctor required) This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
Activate this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:

Dassault Systèmes 1168 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
Criteria manual

the same criterion again from the criteria pool.

• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Application Tip
This criterion checks only for errors inside a closed topology. To detect errors at the
outside edge of topologies, use criterion Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume [G-SH-FR],
page 1162.

Dassault Systèmes 1169 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.4 Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopContTangent (1107)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the kink angles of tangent-discontinuous transitions in a
topology are within a specified range. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Normal-continuity or tangentiality mean the kink-free intersection of two faces, without
a change in the tangent angle. Normal discontinuities often complicate the manufac-
turing of parts, e.g. milling or maintaining a certain visual appearance. However,
tangent discontinuities can also be used deliberately as a means of construction. When
defining the check parameters and evaluation, consider which tangent discontinuities
are intended and which are not.

Fig. 1: Normal continuity in a topology

Suggested solution
• Geometrical healing is available for this criterion. This function requires the additional
Q-Doctor software.
• Manual Healing: Modify the faces of a solid with respect to the requirements for
continuity. To avoid gaps at face transitions, create new faces along a mutual
boundary. Consider any constraints for tangent continuity and curvature continuity.

Related criteria
 For checking the tangent continuity of face segments see criterion Non-Tangent
Surface Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NT], page 1053

Dassault Systèmes 1170 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle greater than” spin box Maximum angle between segments up to which
segments are considered tangent-continuous. If the angle between segments is greater
than the specified value and less than the angle specified in field “Angle (degree) less
than”, segments are considered tangent-discontinuous and therefore as incorrect.

“Angle less than” spin box Angle between segments starting from which tangent
discontinuity is considered to be intended by design and not rated as incorrect.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.

Dassault Systèmes 1171 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Check maximum normal deviation along the common edge” check box Specify which
definition of G1 discontinuity to use:
• If this option is not selected, a transition is considered tangent-discontinuous if one
of the detected angles between normals along the common edge is greater than the
value in “Angle (degree) greater than”and less than the value in field “Angle (degree)
less than”.
• If this option is selected, a transition is considered tangent-discontinuous if one of
the detected angles between normals along the common edge is greater than the
value in “Angle (degree) greater than”and less than the value in field “Angle (degree)
less than”.

“Checking mode for limit points” list box Select how to check in the limit points of
common edges:
“Check corresponding limit points” Check for continuity in corresponding limit points
(Fig. 2). This setting is useful only if the tolerance for calculating the topology is less
than or equal to the distance specified in “Distance greater than”.

Fig. 2: Measurement with selected “Check corresponding limit points” option

“Check projectable limit points” Check for continuity only in those points that can be
projected onto the target curve in normal direction (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Measurement with selected “Check projectable limit points” option

“Ignore limit points” Do not check for continuity in limit points.

“Check only self computed topologies” check box If this option is selected, only topolo-
gies created with criterion “Calculation of Shells/Volumes” are checked.
If this option is not selected, all topologies are checked, including those from the CATIA
model.
 Criterion Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx], page 1159

Dassault Systèmes 1172 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Healing parameters
Criteria manual

“Geometrical Healing” button (only with Q-Doctor) This function requires the addi-
tional Q-Doctor software.
Activate this button to enable geometrical healing in the analysis window. Geometrical
healing creates a healing feature in the model.

 Q-Doctor Manual, Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT]

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Application Tip
Checks with more precise continuity requirements than internally computed in CATIA
are generally not necessary.

Dassault Systèmes 1173 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.5 Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopContCurvature (1108)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether adjoining surface segments are curvature-continuous. If
that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Curvature continuity in a topology means uniformity of the curvature radius at the
surface boundaries and thus a harmonious curvature transition between two faces. This
results in an harmonious transition between faces. As the topology represents the
surface of a part, the curvature continuity is an important criterion, for example for the
optical impression (design surface).
If no curvature continuity but only normal continuity is given in a topology, a light
reflection line is formed at the segment borders, which affects the overall optical
impression of a surface. Curvature continuity results in uniform reflections of a surface.
Contour edges can also be designed intentionally.

Fig. 1: Normal continuity Fig. 2: Curvature continuity

Dassault Systèmes 1174 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Curvature ratio greater than” spin box Curvature ratio below which curvature disconti-
nuity is neglected and the transition is considered curvature-continuous.
If the curvature continuity is greater than this value and greater than the value of
“Curvature ratio less than”, the transition is rated as curvature-discontinuous.
Curvature continuity is calculated using the curvature ratio of two faces along a
common edge. In every measurement point, the curvature ratio is calculated as follows:
2 ⋅ R1 – R2
f = ----------------------------
-
R1 + R2

Where R1 and R2 are the curvature radiuses.

“Curvature ratio less than” spin box Curvature ratio above which curvature continuity
is considered to be intended and therefore not rated as incorrect.

“Limit value for infinite curvature radius” spin box Threshold above which a curvature
radius is considered “infinite” and a curve segment is considered straight. Threshold
above which a curvature radius is considered infinite and a curve segment is considered
straight.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the

Dassault Systèmes 1175 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
Criteria manual

element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Checking mode for limit points” list box Select how to check in the limit points of
common edges:
“Check corresponding limit points” Check for continuity in corresponding limit points
(Fig. 3). This setting is useful only if the tolerance for calculating the topology is less
than or equal to the distance specified in “Curvature ratio less than”.

Fig. 3: Measurement with selected “Check corresponding limit points” option

“Check projectable limit points” Check for continuity only in those points that can be
projected onto the target curve in normal direction (Fig. 4).

Fig. 4: Measurement with selected “Check projectable limit points” option

“Ignore limit points” Do not check for continuity in limit points.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.

Dassault Systèmes 1176 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
Criteria manual

instances.

Application Tip
Topologies with discontinuities at the surface edges must be corrected, approximated,
or re-generated using appropriate edge conditions. A different construction method
may be required to get topologies with curvature continuity (Free Style Shaper/Class-A
surfaces).

Dassault Systèmes 1177 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.6 Sharp Face Angle [G-SH-SA]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopSharpEdge (1109)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether two neighboring faces in a topology form a kink angle that
exceeds a specified maximum value. If so, the affected elements will be rated as incor-
rect.

Background
Sharp edges or incisions are formed when the angle between tangent layers of adjacent
surfaces is too small. Such regions are not realistic and cannot be produced. For
example, they can result from the subtraction of a cylinder with a cube, or when edges
have been not been chamfered or rounded.
This criterion also detects overlapping faces with common edges (limitation faults) and
partially identical elements with common edges.

Fig. 1: Topology with sharp edges

Suggested solution
Change or recreate the topology.

Dassault Systèmes 1178 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle between two adjacent faces greater than” spin box Maximum allowed angle
between adjacent faces. An error will be reported for transitions with angles greater
than the specified here.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Checking mode for limit points” list box Select how to check in the limit points of
common edges:
“Check corresponding limit points” Check for continuity in corresponding limit points
(Fig. 2). This setting is useful only if the tolerance for calculating the topology is less
than or equal to the distance specified in “Angle between two adjacent faces greater

Dassault Systèmes 1179 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

than”.
Criteria manual

Fig. 2: Measurement with selected “Check corresponding limit points” option

“Check projectable limit points” Check for continuity only in those points that can be
projected onto the target curve in normal direction (Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: Measurement with selected “Check projectable limit points” option

“Ignore limit points” Do not check for continuity in limit points.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

 NOTE: In each check environment, only one independent instance of this criterion can
be used. This means:
• If this criterion is already in use in any profile of the check environment, you can't add
the same criterion again from the criteria pool.
• To use this criterion in more than one profile and model type in the same check
environment, create a copy the criterion within the check environment.
• Copies of this criterion cannot be edited independently. Changes always apply to all
instances.

Dassault Systèmes 1180 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.7 Inconsistent Surface Orientation in Shell/Volume

Criteria manual

[G-FA-IT], [G-SH-IT]
GeoSolidTopNormalOrientation (1105)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether all surface normals of a topology are oriented uniformly. If
that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
The uniform orientation of surface normals within a topology is required for example for
the definition of the direction of processing, shaded display in external software or the
direction of approach for measurements.
In CATIA, the normal orientation is based on the mathematical position of the single
face elements in the working space. Consequently, face normals in solid bodies are
often not uniformly oriented.

Fig. 1: Normal orientation

Suggested solution
In solid bodies, there is no possibility to change the orientation of normals. To create a
topology with uniformly oriented normals in CATIA, use the “Invert” operation.
Alternatively, export interfaces with automated normal correction allow to adjust the
normal orientation of topologies.

Related criteria
 Inconsistent Face Orientation on Surface [G-FA-IT], page 1157
 Inconsistent Face Orientation in Shell/Volume [G-SH-IT], page 1189

Dassault Systèmes 1181 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
In solid bodies, there is no possibility to change the orientation of normals. As the error
cannot be fixed, do not use the assessment "error" for this criterion.

Dassault Systèmes 1182 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.8 Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS], [G-SO-IS]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSelfIntersection (1301)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the faces of a topology are self-intersecting. If so, the
affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Self-intersecting topologies cannot be fabricated and therefore must not occur in a
model. A self-intersecting topology may result from the extrusion of a self-intersecting
contour, or if the outer edge fillet radius of a thin-walled volume is too large.
Self-intersecting topologies should be already detected and eliminated by the CAD soft-
ware.

Fig. 1: Self-intersecting surface Fig. 2: Self-intersecting solid

Suggested solution
• Eliminate self-intersecting contours.
• To avoid problems with thin-walled components, start with filleting the inner edges.

Dassault Systèmes 1183 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance” spin box Minimum distance between a self-intersection point and the
boundary. If the intersection point is too close to the boundary, this is not considered
as self-intersection.

“Calculation on” list box Select which data to use for the check:
“Tessellation” Calculate the intersection point for the tessellated shell or volume
(default)
“Surface” Calculation of the intersection point for the exact geometry. With this option,
the result is more exact. Starting from the calculated intersection point for the
tessellated surface, the intersection point for the actual geometry is closely
approximated.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1184 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.9 Over-Used Edge [G-SH-NM]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopBranch (1114)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether an edge has more than two adjacent faces. If so, the
affected elements will be rated as incorrect.
This check considers only skins and volumes. Free faces are considered only if a
topology has been calculated using Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx], page 1159.

Background
It is important for the topological unambiguousness of a topology that each inner
surface boundary has one particular adjacent surface, i.e. has only one adjacent
boundary and is free of branches. However, it is permitted that a surface border adjoins
multiple neighboring surface borders (T-shaped connector).

Fig. 1: Branching (not allowed) Fig. 2: T-joint (allowed)

Suggested solution
Deleted unnecessary faces. If necessary, re-limit the faces.
In solid models there are almost no possibilities for modification. In most cases, a
element has to be recreated with a differently partitioned geometry.

Dassault Systèmes 1185 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
This criterion can also be used to identify face elements that cause ambiguities in a
topology, for example narrow elements, element with relimiting errors, and identical or
partially identical faces.
We recommend activating this criterion if further topology checks are selected in the
check profile.

Dassault Systèmes 1186 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.10 Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidOverUsedVertex (1300)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the allowed number of boundaries per vertex is exceeded.
If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
If a vertex is used by too many edges, problems may arise for certain operations such as
fillets or chamfers.

Fig. 1: Over-used vertex of 7 edges

Suggested solution
Change the model structure, where necessary.

Dassault Systèmes 1187 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Maximum number of edges per vertex” spin box Maximum allowed number of edges
that meet in a common vertex.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1188 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.11 Inconsistent Face Orientation in Shell/Volume [G-SH-IT]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSkinInconsistentFaceOri (1377)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the orientation of face normals corresponds to the orien-
tation of face normals of their respective volume/shell. If that does not apply, the
affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
If the orientation of the face normals within a topology is not consistent, problems may
occur in subsequent processes.
The uniform orientation of the face normals within a topology is required for certain
applications, such as direction of movement of milling tools, shaded display in external
software, direction of approach for measurements, or demolding.

Fig. 1: The face normal of one face (red arrow) points in the wrong direction in relation to the topology

Suggested solution
Inverting surface normals is not in accordance with model parametricity. The orienta-
tion of face normals does not pose a problem inside CATIA, therefore this check is only
necessary if there are related problems in subsequent processes. In this case, a CAD
interface with repair functionality is recommended.
In case a consistently oriented topology is still required in CATIA, use an Invert feature.

Related criteria
 Inconsistent Surface Orientation in Shell/Volume [G-FA-IT], [G-SH-IT], page 1181
 Inconsistent Face Orientation on Surface [G-FA-IT], page 1157

Dassault Systèmes 1189 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
As there are few healing possibilities, consider the relevance of the check, and apply an
adequate error assessment.

Dassault Systèmes 1190 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.12 Tangent continuous boundary of Shell

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopBoundaryContTangent (1438)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the boundaries of certain topologies have tangent-discon-
tinuities in a specified range. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background

Example For mold design, it is often necessary to add flanges to a topology (Fig. 1).
This can be done by sweeping a profile along a boundary. If the boundary has tangent-
discontinuous edges, they will appear in the surface as well.

Fig. 1: Flange with internal tangent-discontinuous edges (kinks)

Suggested solution
Clean up incorrect boundaries.

Dassault Systèmes 1191 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle greater than” spin box Specify the angle below which the boundary is consid-
ered tangent-continuous.
If the angle is greater than this value and less than the value of parameter “Angle less
than”, the boundary is considered tangent-discontinuous.

“Angle less than” spin box Angle above which curvature continuity is considered to be
intended and therefore not rated as incorrect.

“Only check Topologies with more faces than...” spin box Specify the number of
number of faces in a topology up to which a topology will be ignored.
If no topologies are checked due to this restriction, the criterion is considered as
fulfilled.
To check all topologies irrespective of the number of faces, set this parameter to 0.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To smooth the boundary, the topology itself must be modified.

Dassault Systèmes 1192 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.13 Step Edge on Boundary of Shell

Criteria manual

GeoSolidTopBoundaryStepEdge (1439)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether the boundaries of certain topologies have step edges in
the specified range (length and angle). If so, the affected elements are rated as incor-
rect.
A non-allowed step edge is detected if the transitions between the checked edge and
adjacent edges are tangent-discontinuous and the edge length is less than the specified
value.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background

Example For mold design, it is often necessary to add flanges to a topology. This can
be done by sweeping a profile along a boundary. If the boundary has tangent-discontin-
uous edges, they will appear in the surface as well.

Fig. 1: Flange with a step edge

Suggested solution
Manual healing in CATIA: Clean up incorrect boundaries.

Dassault Systèmes 1193 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Angle greater than” spin box Maximum allowed angle at the transition between the
checked edge and its adjacent edges. If the angle is greater than specified, the transition
is considered tangent-discontinuous.

“Distance greater than” spin box Minimum length above which edges will be checked.
Shorter edges will be ignored.

“Length less than” spin box Maximum length below which edges will be checked.
Longer edges will be ignored.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1194 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Only check Topologies with more faces than...” spin box Specify the number of
number of faces in a topology up to which a topology will be ignored.
If no topologies are checked due to this restriction, the criterion is considered as
fulfilled.
To check all topologies irrespective of the number of faces, set this parameter to 0.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To smooth the boundary, the topology itself must be modified.

Dassault Systèmes 1195 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

2.5.2.5.14 Intersection of Solids/Shells

Criteria manual

GeoSolidSkinIntersection (1588)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether topologies (solids or shells) form an intersection curve
with each other. If so, the affected topologies are marked as incorrect.

Background

Fig. 1: Bodies PartBody and Body.2 intersect partially.

Suggested solution

Manual healing in CATIA

Change the parameters of the input elements in such a way that the resulting topolo-
gies do no longer intersect. Isolated elements cannot be modified in this way.

Dassault Systèmes 1196 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – Shells/Volumes

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Tolerance” spin box This tolerance is used for the calculation of intersection points.
The “Surface” calculation method uses the tolerance also for optimizing the detected
tessellation intersection points.

“Tessellation sag” spin box This value controls the accuracy of the tessellation. The
value corresponds to the maximum allowed distance between the tessellated and the
exact surface. A higher value means better accuracy, but also an increased computa-
tional effort.

“Calculation on” list box Method for the calculation of intersection points:
• “Tessellation”: Calculate the intersection point for the tessellated surface (default)
• “Surface”: Calculate the intersection point for the actual geometry.
With this option, the result is more exact. Starting from the calculated intersection
point for the tessellated surface, the intersection point for the actual geometry is
closely approximated.

Application Tip
To view the hierarchical relations between components of a part, select “Edit” >
“Parents/Children”. This helps you to identify and edit the input components.

Dassault Systèmes 1197 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6 General
Criteria manual

2.5.2.6.1 Multi-Domain Surface (Shell) [G-SO-MU]

GeoShellMultiDomain (1254)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a shell consists of several disjoint pieces (domains). If so,
the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
A multi domain element (face, topology, curve) is a geometry element comprising
several separated areas.
Multi-domain elements are created if a gap or an overlapping is larger than a certain
value. This value either is the system tolerance or has been specified by the designer.
After operations such as intersections or joins, the topology may have large gaps and
therefore consist of more than one domain.
Not all functions can handle multi domain elements, therefore its topology is of limited
use. Furthermore, subsequent design changes may have unexpected results.

Fig. 1: Check connexity switched off for the join Fig. 2: Extruded surface created with multi-domain
function sketch

Suggested solution
Change the input elements so that the result is unambiguous. For joining elements use
the system tolerance.

Dassault Systèmes 1198 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
When an operation results in a multi-domain segment, the “Multi-Result Management”
dialog is displayed (Fig. 3). Choose one of the following actions to proceed:

Fig. 3: “Multi-Result Management” dialog

Dassault Systèmes 1199 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.2 Multi-volume solid [G-SO-MU]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidMultiBody (1102)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check identifies whether a solid comprises multiple separate volumes. If so, the
affected solids are rated as incorrect.

Background
A multi-body (multi-volume) solid is a solid with more than one volume (domain) but
only one address.
For example, multi-volume solids can be created by union or subtract operations of two
single solids (Fig. 1, Fig. 2).
Some systems cannot handle multi-body solids and fail to import them.

Fig. 1: Subtract operation Fig. 2: The result of the subtract operation is a multi-
body with two volumes

Suggested solution
Split multi-volume solids into separate solids.
When exchanging data using a STEP interface, multi-volumes are split automatically.

Dassault Systèmes 1200 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check only PartBody” check box If this option is selected, only the PartBody is
checked.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Multi-bodies can be avoided by a different partitioning of solids.

Dassault Systèmes 1201 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.3 Tiny Solid [G-SO-TI]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidMiniElement (1112)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the dimensions or the volume of solid elements is not
within the specified allowed value range. If so, the affected elements will be rated as
incorrect.

Background
Solids whose dimensions are below a certain value in three spatial directions are called
Tiny solids, or mini solid elements. Additionally, this criterion can check whether
elements are smaller than the specified size in one or all spatial directions.
These elements may cause problems during data exchange, depending on the interface
and the internal precision parameters of the system.
For example, such elements have been created as unwanted by-products when
subtracting solids.
In some cases, elements smaller than the system tolerance in one or two spatial dimen-
sions can also cause problems.

Fig. 1: “Solid 1” subtracted from “Solid 2” Fig. 2: Result: Mini element

Suggested solution
• Use Q-Checker healing to delete tiny solids.
• The easiest way to resolve this error is to relocate or enlarge the elements involved.
Tiny elements may be removed without replacement, or may be eliminated by
enlarging neighboring elements.

Dassault Systèmes 1202 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Check volume of solid” check box Select this option to check whether the volume of
solids is within a non-allowed value range.
If this option is not selected, the volume of solids will not be checked.

“Size greater than” and “Size less than” spin boxes Specify the non-allowed volume
range for solids.
In the “Volume greater than” field, specify the lower limit, in the “Volume less than”,
specify the upper limit. Elements whose size is in the specified range are rated as incor-
rect.
The value range specified by these parameters applies only to the “Check volume of
solid” option.

Example: Checking for mini-elements

• Set the “Volume greater than” value to 0. In the “Volume less than” field, set the
upper limit above which elements are not considered as tiny elements. Tiny elements,
whose size is below the value in the “Volume less than” field, are rated as incorrect.
• To perform an additional check on (less critical) mini-elements, specify a range that
adjoins the upper limit of the range for very critical mini-elements.

Dassault Systèmes 1203 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances of this

Criteria manual

criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every instance.

“Mark if extension is less tolerance in all/in 2/in 1 space directions” check boxes If the
respective options are selected, solids are considered mini-elements and rated as incor-
rect if the length of the solid bounding box is less than the value specified in “Bounding-
box length less than” in all, two or one spatial directions.
If none of the check boxes is activated, no extension check will be performed.
We recommend selecting only one of the three options at a time.

“Bonding-box length less than” spin box Specify the minimum edge length of a
bounding box below which a solid is considered a mini-element and rated as incorrect.

“Mark, if single domains violate the criterion” check box If this option is selected,
multi-domain solids are rated as incorrect if one or more domains are smaller than the
value specified in “Bounding-box length less than”. In this case, the size of the separate
volumes is evaluated.

“Points to be used for bounding-box computation” list box Choose how to calculate
the bounding box:
“Points on edges” The calculated bounding box may be inexact (for example in case of a
sphere)
“Points on edges and faces” The bounding box covers the volumes more exactly, but the
calculation might take longer.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes all non-allowed mini solid elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

INFO: If the “Check volume of solid” option is selected and the volume of a solid
cannot be determined, the criterion will return a general error. See the information in
the analysis window to narrow down the cause of the error.
Q-Checker uses a CATIA programming interface function to retrieve the volume. It may
happen that the CATIA programming interface function fails and returns no result,
although an interactive volume calculation in CATIA is possible.

Dassault Systèmes 1204 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.4 Embedded Surface Features (Shells) [G-SO-EM]

Criteria manual

GeoSkinIdenticalElement (1240)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a model contains identical or partly identical topological
elements. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Identical surfaces are duplicates of existing surfaces. Surfaces that overlap completely
with an area of a larger surface are called partially identical surfaces. Identical elements
require additional memory and cancel out the consistency and validity of the original.
They obstruct the handling of models, for example the automatic creation of topology.
Duplicate elements or partially identical elements can be caused by:
• Operations such as Split, Trim or Invert. The input elements are only hidden.
• Design requirements that require intermediate fabrication states (rough part, finished
part) to be retained in one model.

Fig. 1: Party identical surface features, created Fig. 2: Identische Flächen, erzeugt durch eine
using a Split operation Invert-Operation

Suggested solution
Delete redundant elements. Make sure that the required element remains in the model.

Dassault Systèmes 1205 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance less than or equal to” spin box Maximum distance within which elements
are considered identical.
A recommended value is the tolerance of the topology modeler.

“Check also for partially identical” check box If this option is selected, elements are
considered identical if one shell is located entirely or partly within another shell.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1206 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Check also inner points of faces” check box If this option is selected, both edge points
of solids faces and points on the faces are evaluated. The result is more accurate, but
computing time increases.

Example If this option is selected, a complete cube with 6 faces is distinguishable from
an incomplete cube with one face missing.

“Fix number of inner points per face in U and V” spin box Specify the number of
measurement points to be generated in U and V direction inside the bounding box. This
setting applies only if the “Check also inner points of faces” option is selected.

Example A value of “5” means five rows of measurement points with five points each.

For the evaluation of solids, measurement points within the faces are used.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes identical shells.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To check only result elements while excluding parent elements, use an element selec-
tion with the “Ignore faces with child faces” option selected.
 Administration manual, “Ignore surfaces with child surface elements” check box

Dassault Systèmes 1207 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.5 Embedded Solids [G-SO-EM]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidIdenticalElement (1192)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a solid is entirely or partly within another solid. If so, the
affected elements are rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
Identical/duplicate elements increase the amount of memory required and cancels out
the uniqueness and validity of the respective elements. They causes problems for the
further processing of the model.
Partly identical solids are solids that are entirely within another, larger solid.

Fig. 1: Identical solids Fig. 2: Partly identical solids

Suggested solution
Delete redundant elements. Make sure that the required element remains in the model.

Dassault Systèmes 1208 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance less than or equal to” spin box Maximum distance between elements to be
considered identical.
A recommended value is the system tolerance.

“Check also for partially identical” check box If this option is activated, partly identical
elements are rated as incorrect.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

Dassault Systèmes 1209 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General
Criteria manual

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

“Check also inner points of faces” check box If this option is selected, the check evalu-
ates both edge points of solids faces and points on the faces. The result is more accu-
rate but requires more computing time.

“Fix number of inner points per face in U and V” spin box Specify the number of
measurement points to be generated in U and V direction inside the bounding box. This
setting applies only if the “Check also inner points of faces” option is selected.

Example A value of “5” means five rows of measurement points with five points each.

For the evaluation of solids, measurement points within the faces are used.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes identical shells.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1210 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.6 Solid Void [G-SO-VO]

Criteria manual

GeoSolidCavity (1103)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a solid has a completely closed inner domain. If so, an
error will be reported.

Background
A completely closed inner domain in a solid is called a cavity. Cavities often result from
inaccurately positioned elements. The addition of solid bodies that do not fit can lead to
cavities.
Cavities in constructions can also be intended.

Fig. 1: Cavity in a body

Suggested solution
Analyze the construction history of unwanted cavities and adjust the operations or the
bodies used as input.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1211 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.7 Non-Allowed Surfacic Fillet Radius

Criteria manual

GeoNonAllowedSurfFilletRad (1404)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check verifies whether fillet radiuses are in the specified allowed value range. If that
does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Fillets have an impact on the manufacturability and applicability of models in subse-
quent processes (FEM, NC). Therefore the values should comply with the require-
ments. If fillets do not comply with the requirements, problems may arise in
subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: Edge Fillet

Suggested solution
Change non-allowed fillet radiuses according to the requirements.

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed Solid Fillet Radius, page 1215

Dassault Systèmes 1212 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of allowed values or ranges” value list Specify the allowed values or value ranges
for fillet radiuses. To specify discrete value, leave the “Range to” field empty.
Use a point as decimal separator.

“Tolerance” spin box Specify the radius tolerance. Radiuses may vary upwards and
downwards by the specified value.

“List of fillet types” value list Specify which types of fillet elements to check:
• “EdgeFillet_constant”: Edge fillet with constant radius
• “FaceFillet_constant”: Face fillet with constant radius
• “Fillet_constant_BiTangent”: Face fillet of the “Bitangent” type

Healing settings
“Deactivate” This healing function deactivates fillet features with non-allowed radiuses.

“Remove ” This healing function deletes fillet features with non-allowed radiuses.

Dassault Systèmes 1213 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip
• Preferably use the fillet radiuses specified in the DIN 250 standard.
• Use Fillet and Chamfer features in CATIA instead of constructing fillets and chamfers
based on sketches. Features can be modified easily, while sketch-based fillets and
chamfers can be problematic to handle and modify.
• In CATIA, use “Quick Select” to inspect the creation order of surface models.

Fig. 2: Quick Select

Fig. 3: Quick Select

Dassault Systèmes 1214 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.8 Non-Allowed Solid Fillet Radius

Criteria manual

GeoNonAllowedSolidFilletRad (1405)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This check verifies whether solid fillet radiuses are in the specified allowed value range.
If that does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Fillets have an impact on the manufacturability and applicability of models in subse-
quent processes (FEM, NC). If fillets do not comply with the requirements, problems
may arise in subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: Edge Fillet

Suggested solution
Change non-allowed fillet radiuses according to the requirements.

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed Surfacic Fillet Radius, page 1212

Dassault Systèmes 1215 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Radii in the list are (allowed/not allowed)” list box Choose whether the value list
defines the allowed or non-allowed radii.

“List of values or ranges” value list Define discrete values or ranges for radii. To specify
discrete value, leave the “Range to” field empty.

“Tolerance” spin box Specify the radius tolerance.

List of fillet types Specify which types of fillet elements to check:

• “EdgeFillet_constant”: Edge fillet with constant radius
• “FaceFillet_constant”: Face fillet with constant radius

Healing settings
“Deactivate” This healing function deactivates fillet features with non-allowed radiuses.

“Remove ” This healing function deletes fillet features with non-allowed radiuses.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1216 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Application Tip
Criteria manual

• Preferably use the fillet radiuses specified in the DIN 250 standard.
• Use Fillet and Chamfer features in CATIA instead of constructing fillets and chamfers
based on sketches. Features can be modified easily, while sketch-based fillets and
chamfers can be problematic to handle and modify.

Dassault Systèmes 1217 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.9 Non-Allowed Chamfer Lengths

Criteria manual

GeoNonAllowedChamferLengths (1407)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether chamfers have an allowed length or length ratio. If that
does not apply, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Chamfers have an impact on the manufacturability and applicability of models in subse-
quent processes (FEM, NC). If chamfers do not comply with the requirements, prob-
lems may arise in subsequent processes.

Fig. 1: Chamfer definition with 2 lengths

Suggested solution
Change non-allowed chamfer lengths according to the requirements.

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed Chamfer Angle, page 1221

Dassault Systèmes 1218 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of allowed length values” value list Specify the allowed chamfer lengths. Specify
the allowed value ranges for length 1 and length 2.
To check only for the length ratio, leave this list empty.

“Ratio Length1/Length2” value list Specify the allowed ratios between length 1 and
length 2. Give the values as decimal numbers.
To check only for the absolute lengths, leave this list empty.

Example
• A length ratio of 4 means that length 1 must be four times length 2, for example 4 to 1
or 6 to 1.5.
• A length ratio of 0.25 means that length 1 must be a quarter of length 2, for example 1

Dassault Systèmes 1219 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

to 4 or 1.5 to 6.
Criteria manual

“Tolerance” spin box Specify the allowed length tolerance.

“Mark chamfers defined by length and angle” check box If this option is selected,
chamfers defined using length and angle are rated as incorrect.

“Ignore Deactivated Features” check box If this option is selected, the chamfer length
of deactivated elements will be ignored.

 NOTE
• Either value list “List of allowed length values” or value list “Ratio Length1/Length2”
must contain at least one value. If both value lists are empty, the criterion returns a
general error.
• If parameters are specified for both absolute lengths and length ratios, chamfer
definitions must correspond to at least one of the specified values in each value list.

Healing settings
“Deactivate” This healing function deactivates incorrect chamfer features.
This healing function requires that the “Ignore deactivated features” option is selected.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Use Fillet and Chamfer features in CATIA instead of constructing fillets and chamfers
based on sketches. Features can be modified easily, while sketch-based fillets and
chamfers can be problematic to handle and modify.

Dassault Systèmes 1220 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.10 Non-Allowed Chamfer Angle

Criteria manual

GeoNonAllowedChamferAngle (1406)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether chamfers have an allowed angle. If that does not apply,
the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Related criteria
 Non-Allowed Chamfer Lengths, page 1218

Dassault Systèmes 1221 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“List of allowed angle values” value list Specify the allowed angular range for the direc-
tion of plies.

“Tolerance” spin box Specify the angular tolerance.

“Mark chamfers defined by two length values” check box If this option is selected,
chamfers defined using two length values are rated as incorrect.

“All chamfers have to have the same angle value” check box with list box If this option
is selected, the check returns a general error if different chamfer angles are found in the
model.
In the list box, select which angles are allowed:
“Ignore allowed angle values list” All chamfers must use the same angle. No particular
value is specified, value list “List of allowed angle values” is not evaluated.
“Do not ignore allowed angle values list” All chamfers must use the same angle, and
the angle must match a value specified in “List of allowed angle values”.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Dassault Systèmes 1222 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.11 Solid Wall Thickness

Criteria manual

GeoSolidWallThickness (1414)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether the solid wall thickness is smaller than a specified value.
If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
The criterion is intended to check empty solids having walls, but it does not distinguish
between solid and hollow volumes. In case of solid volumes, the total thickness will be
checked.

Background
If a component has a too small wall thickness, the stability of the component can be
insufficient:
• Components produced using manufacturing methods such as casting, pressing, or
foaming may be defective and contain cavities or cold cracks.
• Under load, the part may deform, or the component may not withstand the applied
load in the long term.

Fig. 1: In the region marked in red, wall thickness is below the Fig. 2: Smallest measured thickness in the specified region
allowed minimum

Suggested solution
Marking elements in the Q-Checker analysis window help you to identify the affected
elements. The healing method depends on the part structure.

Dassault Systèmes 1223 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Thickness less than” spin box Minimum allowed wall thickness

“Ignore thickness check if angle of corresponding faces is greater than” spin box
Specify the angle between corresponding faces above which no error is reported.

“Calculation on” list box Select the calculation method for wall thickness:
“Surface” The wall thickness is calculated in normal direction between surfaces.
“Tessellation” The thickness is calculated in normal direction between tessellation
triangles.

Specifications for the tessellation:

“Sag” spin box Specify the maximum allowed sag (distance between curve section and
the discretization line) for triangulation.
“Step” spin box Maximum allowed edge length for tessellation triangles

TIP: The maximum allowed edge length (step) should not be too small in relation to
the solid dimension. The smaller the edge length, the larger is the number of tessella-
tion triangles and therefore computing time.

“Blue/yellow/white marking if thickness less than” check boxes with spin boxes If the

Dassault Systèmes 1224 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

respective options are selected, critical wall thicknesses of different magnitudes can be
Criteria manual

marked using fine analysis. Note that these areas are not rated as incorrect.
In the spin boxes, specify the limit values. The values for minimum allowed wall thick-
ness and critical wall thicknesses have to be in ascending order:
Minimum allowed wall thickness < critical wall thickness yellow < critical wall thickness
blue < critical wall thickness white
The critical regions are marked only if the checked solid has at least one region with a
wall thickness below the allowed minimum.

“Use color map to visualize check results” check box If this options is selected, Q
marking elements for regions with critical wall thickness are displayed as filled faces.
To display the marking elements as semi-transparent faces, select at least one of the
following settings in CATIA:
• In the CATIA application settings, go to “General” > “Display” > “Performance” >
“Transparency quality”, and set the value to “High (alpha blending)”. Restart CATIA
for this setting to become active.
• Select “View” > “Render Style” > “Shading with Material”.
If neither setting is selected, Q-Checker marking elements for regions with critical wall
thickness are displayed as contours of the triangular mesh.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Note that the “Sag” and “Step” parameters in Q-Checker are maximum values that
depend on the wall thickness set and on the dimensions of the component, determined
by the bounding box. Only if the “Sag” and “Step” values are smaller than the
maximum values, they will be used for tessellating the model.
Calculation of maximum values for “Sag” and “Step”:
w
Sag max = -----
10

d
Step max = -----
10

Where w is the wall thickness and d is the maximum dimension.

Dassault Systèmes 1225 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General
Criteria manual

Sample values for “Sag” and “Step” with respect to wall thickness and dimensions

Minimum wall thickness

Maximum dimension

Calculated step
Maximum step

Calculated sag
Maximum sag

Step setting
Sag setting
10 1 300 30 2 100 1 30

5 0.5 500 50 0.2 1000 0.2 50

2 0.2 200 20 1 10 0.2 10

The maximum dimension cannot be determined directly as it is determined by the

means of the external limits (bounding box).

Fig. 3: Parameter “Step” Fig. 4: Parameter “Sag” Fig. 5: Parameter “Angle”

Dassault Systèmes 1226 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

2.5.2.6.12 Empty Domains

Criteria manual

GeoEmptyDomain (1568)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a topology contains empty domains. If so, an error will be
reported.

Background
Disassembling a body into its domains using the CATIA “Disassemble” function
(“FreeStyle workbench”) results in a number of separate elements. Among these, there
may be elements that contain no faces. On the geometrical level, these elements are
topologies (Shells or Volumes) that contain an empty domain. Accessing empty
domains may cause problems or abends.

Fig. 1: Isolated body “Solid.1” consisting of two Fig. 2: The “Disassemble” function results in two
domains volumes, one of which is an empty domain.

Fig. 3: Problem measuring an empty domain

Dassault Systèmes 1227 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Solid/Surface Features – General

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To avoid empty domains in a topology, change the order of construction and avoid
operations that are likely to cause this error.

Fig. 4: Volume consisting of two domains

Fig. 5: Topology comprising two bodies connected by a Face Fillet

Dassault Systèmes 1228 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Model – General

2.5.3 Model
Criteria manual

2.5.3.1 Hybrid Model [G-MO-HY]

GeoHybridModel (1305)

Applicable to CATPart

Description
This criterion checks whether a hybrid model contains obsolete geometric elements of
lower order. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.
Elements are considered “obsolete” if they do not contribute to the definition of super-
ordinate elements which form the determinant element type in the model.

Example An isolated line in a surface model does not contribute to any surface and
therefore is obsolete. A line that is extruded as a surface is not obsolete.

Background
Models often contain different types of geometrical elements and representations:
Solids, topologies, faces, wires, edges or curves.
If different representations of the same part do not match, the user has to identify
which is the right one. The following hierarchy defines the hierarchy of element types.

Dimension Feature is the determinant element type ...

type

3 Solid if available

2 Area if available and no solid is available

1 Wire if available and no solids or faces are available

element

0 Point if available and no solids, faces or wire elements are

available

Sketch if no other element types are available

Dassault Systèmes 1229 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Model – General
Criteria manual

Example

Fig. 1: Determining element type is a Surface Fig. 2: Determining element type is a Solid

Suggested solution
Delete obsolete elements from the model.

Criterion definition

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
To delete obsolete elements in CATIA, activate the “Part Design” or “Generative Shape
Design” workbench, and use “Tools” > “Delete useless elements”(Fig. 3).

Fig. 3: “Delete Useless Elements”

Dassault Systèmes 1230 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Views

2.5.4 Views
Criteria manual

2.5.4.1 Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI]

GeoViewComponentsMiniElement2D (1337)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This criterion checks whether the length of drawing geometry elements is below the
specified minimum. If so, the affected elements are rated as incorrect.

Background
Elements whose size is below the specified minimum may become invalid, may degen-
erate or cause gaps after operations such as scaling or offset, after data transfer into a
less precise system or after further processing (NC). Reworking such elements means a
substantial effort.
Tiny drawing elements are often generated accidentally by limiting or by automatic
repairs when trying to close small overlaps and gaps.

Fig. 1: Tiny Drawing Element

Suggested solution
Replace tiny drawing elements by extending neighbouring elements, or extend tiny
drawing elements while shortening neighbouring elements.

Dassault Systèmes 1231 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Size greater than” and “Size less than” spin boxes Specify the non-allowed value
range for the length of drawing elements.
In the “Length greater than” field, specify the lower limit, in the “Length less than” field,
specify the upper limit. Elements whose size is in the specified range are rated as incor-
rect.

Example Checking for tiny elements

• Set the “Length greater than” value to 0. In the “Length less than” field, set the upper
limit above which elements are not considered as tiny elements. Tiny elements,
whose size is below the value in the “Length less than” field, are rated as incorrect.
• To perform an additional check on (less critical) mini-elements, specify a range that
adjoins the upper limit of the range for very critical mini-elements.
To check for mini-elements in different magnitudes, create additional instances of this
criterion and specify the respective non-allowed value ranges for every instance.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

Dassault Systèmes 1232 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Views

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
Criteria manual

“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes non-allowed tiny drawing elements.

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Application Tip
Do not use this check for generative drawing views linked to a 3D model. The size of
drawing elements depends on the projection method and the original 3D geometry.

Dassault Systèmes 1233 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Views

2.5.4.2 Embedded Drawing Element [G-DW-EM]

Criteria manual

GeoViewComponentsIdenticalElement2D (1338)

Applicable to CATDrawing

Description
This check identifies whether an element of the drawing geometry is completely situ-
ated within another element of the drawing geometry. If so, the affected elements are
rated as incorrect.
A last-modifications check is available for this criterion.

Background
When creating a drawing, identical or partly identical elements may be generated unin-
tentionally. Identical or partly identical elements increase memory usage and cancel out
the validity of the affected elements For example, identical elements prevent the auto-
matic recognition of continuous curve paths and cause NC and FEM operations.

Fig. 1: Identical element Fig. 2: Partly identical element

Suggested solution
Use Q-Checker healing to delete redundant elements.

Dassault Systèmes 1234 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Views

Criterion definition
Criteria manual

Check settings
“Distance less than or equal to” spin box Maximum distance within which elements
are considered identical.

“Check only the same type of entity” check box If this option is selected, only elements
of the same type are compared to each other, e.g. lines with lines and curves with
curves.

“Check also for partially identical” check box If this option is selected, partly identical
elements are not allowed. If this option is not selected, partly identical elements are
allowed.

INFO
• Elements are considered identical if the corresponding points on both elements are
within the given tolerance from each other.

Toleranz

• Elements are partially identical if one element is situated completely within a larger
element. All points on one element must coincide with the corresponding points on
the other element within the given tolerance.

Dassault Systèmes 1235 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Views
Criteria manual

• Elements are not identical if none of the two elements is situated completely within
the other. Each element has at least one point without a corresponding point on the
other element within the tolerance.

“Selection of number of points to check” list box Choose one of the following methods
for selecting measurement points:
“Fix number of points” You can specify the number of points per segment in the “Fix
number of points” spin box. More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time,
computational effort and computing time will increase.
“Internal discretization points of edges” Q-Checker calculates the number of points per
segment based on parameters such as the curvature and number of points of the
elements. The number of measurement points increases with the complexity of the
element.

“Fix number of points per segment” spin box Number of measurement points for the
“Fix number of points” method. The number applies to each parameter direction.
More points result in higher accuracy; at the same time, computational effort and
computing time will increase. Therefore accuracy should not be set higher than
required.
For the “Internal discretisation points” method, this setting has no effect.

TIP: It may be useful to increase the number of discretisation points successively as

long as no result has been found.

Healing settings
“Remove” The healing function deletes incorrect drawing elements.

Dassault Systèmes 1236 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5

 Criteria Description
Geometry – Views

 General information about criterion definitions, page 16

Criteria manual

Application Tip
• When multiple elements of different lengths coincide, find the longest element, and
delete the shorter partially identical elements.
• Do not use this check in generative views, as they are generated and updated
automatically using a defined projection method.

Dassault Systèmes 1237 Q-Checker for V5 Release 5.5